Star Tut

CCM TUTORIALS
STAR-CD VERSION 4.06
CONFIDENTIAL — FOR AUTHORISED USERS ONLY
© 2008 CD-adapco
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
Tutorial Structure ..........................................................................................................1

Basic Definitions ..........................................................................................................1
Running a Tutorial ........................................................................................................2
Working with commands ................................................................................ 1-2
Using tutorial command files .......................................................................... 1-3
Tutorial 1 - FLOW IN A MIXING PIPE

Physical Problem Description ......................................................................... 1-1
Tutorial 1.1 PRE-PROCESSING AND CFD SOLUTION ...................................... 1-3
Pre-Processing ................................................................................................. 1-3
CFD Analysis ................................................................................................ 1-18
Tutorial 1.1 POST-PROCESSING ......................................................................... 1-19
Post-Processing ............................................................................................. 1-19
Tutorial 2 - EVALUATION OF MESH EFFECTS

Tutorial 2.1 HEXAHEDRAL MESH ANALYSIS .................................................. 2-3
Pre-Processing ................................................................................................. 2-3
CFD Analysis .................................................................................................. 2-6
Post-Processing ............................................................................................... 2-7
Tutorial 2.2 TETRAHEDRAL MESH ANALYSIS .............................................. 2-19
Pre-Processing ............................................................................................... 2-19
CFD Analysis ................................................................................................ 2-22
Post-Processing ............................................................................................. 2-23
Tutorial 2.3 POLYHEDRAL MESH ANALYSIS ................................................. 2-33
Pre-Processing ............................................................................................... 2-33
CFD Analysis ................................................................................................ 2-36
Post-Processing ............................................................................................. 2-36
Tutorial 3 - POROUS MEDIA FLOW

Tutorial 3.1 FLOW IN AN ISOTROPIC, HIGHLY POROUS MEDIUM .............. 3-2
Modelling Strategy .......................................................................................... 3-2
Pre-Processing ................................................................................................. 3-2
CFD Analysis .................................................................................................. 3-8
Post-Processing ............................................................................................... 3-8
Version 4.06 i
Tutorial 3.2 FLOW IN AN ORTHOTROPIC, HIGHLY POROUS MEDIUM .... 3-19
Physical Problem Description ....................................................................... 3-19
Modelling Strategy ........................................................................................ 3-19
Pre-Processing ............................................................................................... 3-19
CFD Analysis ................................................................................................ 3-21
Post-Processing ............................................................................................. 3-21
Tutorial 4 - FREE-SURFACE AND CAVITATION

Tutorial 4.1 GRAVITY-DRIVEN FLOW WITH A FREE SURFACE ................... 4-2
Modelling Strategy .......................................................................................... 4-2
Pre-Processing ................................................................................................. 4-2
CFD Analysis .................................................................................................. 4-7
Post-Processing ............................................................................................... 4-7
Tutorial 4.2 FORCED FREE-SURFACE FLOW WITH CAPILLARY EFFECTS 4-11
Pre-Processing ............................................................................................... 4-11
CFD Analysis ................................................................................................ 4-15
Post-Processing ............................................................................................. 4-15
Tutorial 4.3 FORCED FREE-SURFACE FLOW WITH CAVITATION ............. 4-19
Pre-Processing ............................................................................................... 4-19
CFD Analysis ................................................................................................ 4-23
Post-Processing ............................................................................................. 4-24
Tutorial 5 - TURBULENT FLUID STREAM MIXING

Tutorial 5.1 STEADY 3-D FLOW ........................................................................... 5-2
Pre-Processing ................................................................................................. 5-2
CFD Analysis .................................................................................................. 5-9
Post-Processing ............................................................................................... 5-9
Tutorial 5.2 TRANSIENT 3-D FLOW ................................................................... 5-15
Pre-Processing ............................................................................................... 5-15
CFD Analysis ................................................................................................ 5-18
Post-Processing ............................................................................................. 5-19
Tutorial 6 - SUPERSONIC AND TRANSONIC FLOWS

Tutorial 6.1 ADAPTIVE MESH REFINEMENT FOR SUPERSONIC FLOW ..... 6-2
ii Version 4.06
Pre-Processing ................................................................................................. 6-2
CFD Analysis - Coarse Mesh .......................................................................... 6-5
Mesh Refinement ............................................................................................ 6-6
CFD Analysis - Refined Mesh ...................................................................... 6-10
Post-Processing ............................................................................................. 6-12
Tutorial 7 - MULTIPLE ROTATING REFERENCE FRAMES

Introduction ..................................................................................................... 7-1
Tutorial 7.1 ROTATING-FRAME FAN ANALYSIS ............................................. 7-2
Pre-Processing ................................................................................................. 7-2
CFD Analysis ................................................................................................ 7-15
Post-Processing ............................................................................................. 7-15
Tutorial 8 - LAGRANGIAN TWO-PHASE FLOW

Tutorial 8.1 STEADY FLOW WITH FUEL SPRAY INJECTION ......................... 8-2
Pre-Processing ................................................................................................. 8-2
User Subroutine ............................................................................................... 8-7
CFD Analysis .................................................................................................. 8-9
Post-Processing ............................................................................................... 8-9
Tutorial 8.2 TRANSIENT FLOW WITH FUEL SPRAY INJECTION ................ 8-17
Pre-Processing ............................................................................................... 8-17
CFD Analysis ................................................................................................ 8-19
Post-Processing ............................................................................................. 8-20
Tutorial 9 - COMBUSTION
Tutorial 9.1 PROPANE COMBUSTION (ADIABATIC PPDF) ............................. 9-3
Pre-Processing ................................................................................................. 9-3
CFD Analysis ................................................................................................ 9-12
Post-Processing ............................................................................................. 9-13
Panel Definition ............................................................................................. 9-18
Tutorial 9.2 PROPANE COMBUSTION (THREE-STEP EDBR) ........................ 9-27
Additional Modelling Notes .......................................................................... 9-27
Numerical Considerations ............................................................................. 9-28
Pre-processing ............................................................................................... 9-28
CFD Analysis ................................................................................................ 9-37
Version 4.06 iii

Post-Processing ............................................................................................. 9-38
Tutorial 9.3 C7H8 DROPLET COMBUSTION (EDBR, RADIATION) ............... 9-43
Pre-processing ............................................................................................... 9-43
User Subroutines ........................................................................................... 9-56
CFD Analysis ................................................................................................ 9-59
Post-Processing ............................................................................................. 9-59
Tutorial 9.4 HYDROGEN COMBUSTION (LAMINAR FLAMELETS) ............ 9-65
Pre-Processing ............................................................................................... 9-65
CFD Analysis ................................................................................................ 9-72
Post-Processing ............................................................................................. 9-72
Tutorial 10 - BUOYANCY AND RADIATION EFFECTS

Introduction ................................................................................................... 10-1
Material Properties ........................................................................................ 10-2
Tutorial 10.1 BUOYANCY DRIVEN FLOW AROUND A HEATED FIN ......... 10-3
Pre-Processing ............................................................................................... 10-3
CFD Analysis ................................................................................................ 10-9
Post-Processing ............................................................................................. 10-9
Tutorial 10.2 SURFACE-TO-SURFACE RADIATION ..................................... 10-15
Pre-Processing ............................................................................................. 10-15
CFD Analysis .............................................................................................. 10-21
Post-Processing ........................................................................................... 10-21
Tutorial 10.3 RADIATION THROUGH A TRANSPARENT SOLID ............... 10-25
Pre-Processing ............................................................................................. 10-25
CFD Analysis .............................................................................................. 10-29
Post-Processing ........................................................................................... 10-29
Tutorial 11 - MOVING GRIDS

Tutorial 11.1 FLOW AROUND TWO OPPOSITELY-MOVING OBJECTS ...... 11-2
Pre-Processing ............................................................................................... 11-2
CFD Analysis .............................................................................................. 11-14
Post-Processing ........................................................................................... 11-14
Tutorial 11.2 MOVING-MESH FAN ANALYSIS .............................................. 11-19
Physical Problem Description ..................................................................... 11-19
Pre-Processing ............................................................................................. 11-20
CFD Analysis .............................................................................................. 11-38
Post-Processing ........................................................................................... 11-38
iv Version 4.06
Tutorial 12 - EULERIAN TWO-PHASE FLOW
Tutorial 12.1 TERMINAL VELOCITY OF BUBBLES ........................................ 12-2
Pre-Processing ............................................................................................... 12-3
CFD Analysis ................................................................................................ 12-6
Post-Processing ............................................................................................. 12-7
Suggestions for Further Exercises ................................................................. 12-8
Tutorial 12.2 AERATION TANK ........................................................................ 12-11
Pre-Processing ............................................................................................. 12-11
CFD Analysis .............................................................................................. 12-15
Post-Processing ........................................................................................... 12-15
Suggestions for Further Exercises ............................................................... 12-18
Tutorial 12.3 FLUIDISED BED RISER .............................................................. 12-19
Pre-Processing ............................................................................................. 12-19
User Subroutine ........................................................................................... 12-23
CFD Analysis .............................................................................................. 12-25
Post-Processing ........................................................................................... 12-25
Tutorial 12.4 BOILING SIMULATION .............................................................. 12-29
Pre-Processing ............................................................................................. 12-29
User Subroutines ......................................................................................... 12-33
CFD Analysis .............................................................................................. 12-39
Post-Processing ........................................................................................... 12-39
Discussion of Results .................................................................................. 12-43
Validation Check ......................................................................................... 12-43
Tutorial 13 - AEROACOUSTIC ANALYSIS

Introduction ................................................................................................... 13-1
Tutorial 13.1 STEADY FLOW AROUND A CYLINDER ................................... 13-2
Pre-Processing ............................................................................................... 13-2
CFD Analysis ................................................................................................ 13-5
Post-Processing ............................................................................................. 13-5
Tutorial 13.2 TRANSIENT FLOW AROUND A CYLINDER ........................... 13-11
Pre-Processing ............................................................................................. 13-12
User Subroutines ......................................................................................... 13-16
CFD Analysis .............................................................................................. 13-21
Post-Processing ........................................................................................... 13-22
Tutorial 14 - LIQUID FILM SIMULATION

Tutorial 14.1 2D FILM FLOW DOWN A VERTICAL WALL ............................ 14-2
Version 4.06 v
Pre-Processing ............................................................................................... 14-3
CFD Analysis ................................................................................................ 14-7
Post-Processing ............................................................................................. 14-8
Tutorial 14.2 SPRAY IMPINGEMENT ON A WALL ....................................... 14-13
Problem Description .................................................................................... 14-13
Pre-Processing ............................................................................................. 14-13
CFD Analysis .............................................................................................. 14-21
Post-Processing ........................................................................................... 14-22
Tutorial 14.3 LIQUID FILM STRIPPING AND RE-ENTRAINMENT ............. 14-25
Introduction ................................................................................................. 14-25
Physical Problem Description ..................................................................... 14-25
Pre-Processing ............................................................................................. 14-26
CFD Analysis .............................................................................................. 14-29
Post-Processing ........................................................................................... 14-29
Tutorial 15 - COAL COMBUSTION

Tutorial 15.1 ISOTHERMAL, NON-REACTING FLOW .................................... 15-3
Pre-Processing ............................................................................................... 15-3
CFD Analysis ................................................................................................ 15-7
Post-Processing ............................................................................................. 15-7
Tutorial 15.2 CONSTANT RATE DEVOLATILISATION ................................ 15-11
Pre-Processing ............................................................................................. 15-11
CFD Analysis .............................................................................................. 15-19
Post-Processing ........................................................................................... 15-19
Tutorial 15.3 TWO-COMPETING-STEPS DEVOLATILISATION .................. 15-25
Pre-Processing ............................................................................................. 15-25
CFD Analysis .............................................................................................. 15-27
Post-Processing ........................................................................................... 15-27
Tutorial 16 - LARGE EDDY SIMULATION OF FULLY-DEVELOPED CHANNEL FLOW

Tutorial 16.1 STEADY-STATE ANALYSIS ........................................................ 16-3
Pre-processing ............................................................................................... 16-3
CFD Analysis ................................................................................................ 16-3
vi Version 4.06
Post-Processing ............................................................................................. 16-4
Macro ............................................................................................................ 16-8
Tutorial 16.2 LARGE EDDY SIMULATION ..................................................... 16-11
Pre-Processing ............................................................................................. 16-11
User Subroutine ........................................................................................... 16-14
CFD Analysis .............................................................................................. 16-15
Post-Processing ........................................................................................... 16-15
Bibliography ................................................................................................ 16-23
Macros ......................................................................................................... 16-23
Version 4.06 vii

INTRODUCTION
Tutorial Structure
This document contains examples of applying STAR-CD to a variety of tutorial
problems, thus demonstrating some of its features and illustrating their use.
However, for a detailed description of STAR-CD’s overall capabilities, you are
advised to consult the Computational Continuum Mechanics (CCM) and
Post-Processing User Guides in addition to this document.
Each tutorial starts with a brief description of the physical problem, followed by
a description of GUI operations and typed STAR-CD commands needed to set up
the corresponding model, perform a CCM analysis and display the results. In those
instances where graphical output is generated, selected screen plot images are also
included in the description. This enables you to check that you have followed the
tutorial correctly up to that point.
The tutorials are structured in such a way that, for a given physical feature
distinguishing a particular problem, a number of different variants are analysed to
illustrate different options. The tutorial numbering system reflects this structure.
Basic Definitions
Throughout this volume, it is assumed that you will be using STAR-CD’s Graphical
User Interface facilities whenever possible. Therefore, the discussion is in terms of
GUI operations (e.g. selecting items from a screen menu, clicking option buttons in
a dialog box, etc.) unless the required action can only be performed by typing a
command in pro-STAR’s I/O window. Most GUI facilities are incorporated in the
pro-STAR Model Guide panel that opens directly from pro-STAR and enables you
to build models for most commonly-occurring CFD problems in a systematic and
user-friendly way.
The on-screen placement of pro-STAR windows and panels are arranged as
shown below. This consists of:
• The pro-STAR Model Guide on the right — this displays a tree structure for
finding your way around the system, plus various panels for detailed
specification of a particular operation. It may be collapsed or expanded using
the GUIde button.
• The main pro-STAR window on the left — this enables you to display your
current model as well as manipulate various aspects of its on-screen
appearance. The latter is achieved via several buttons and pop-up menus along
the top and down the left-hand side of the window. Some of the less obvious
buttons are labelled in the illustration shown overleaf.
• The I/O window at the bottom — this confirms the action taken by pro-STAR
in response to a GUI operation. It also enables you to type instructions in
command form for cases where no equivalent GUI operation is available. It
may be moved to the right using the Attach Output Right button, , when
the pro-STAR Model Guide is collapsed.
Version 4.06 1
Working with commands
Show pro-STAR Model Guide

Display vertices
Display boundaries
Display splines
Display blocks Turn mesh on/off
Turn edges on/off Turn lights on/off
Switch plot method
Plot with legend
Plot orientation cube
Plot four views Orientation slider controls
View Controls Reset buttons
Zoom On
Zoom Off
Zoom Back
Display coordinate systems
Display the cell editor
Display/edit a user table
Store/recall set, surface or view
Select a cell set
Select a boundary set
Select a block set
Select a vertex set
Select a spline set
Select a couple set
Select a droplet set
Throughout the document, “>” signs denote successive mouse clicks on menu
names, menu list items, dialog box buttons, etc. For example
Tools > Cell... > Set Active Type
means click Tools on the main pro-STAR window’s menu bar, then click the Cell...
item in the drop-down list, then click the Set Active Type button on the displayed
Cell Tool dialog box.
Detailed instructions on how to perform a STAR-CD analysis from start to finish
are given in the CCM User Guide (Chapter 2, “Running a STAR-CD Analysis”).
These instructions should also be followed in running the tutorials, together with
any specific guidance given for each individual tutorial.
Running a Tutorial
Working with commands

If you wish to run through any of the tutorials by working in command mode, you
can:
1. Type in just the desired command name. This will cause pro-STAR to prompt
2 Version 4.06
Using tutorial command files
you for the required parameters and will also show you the system defaults.
2. Replace any number of commands with your own abbreviation, defined via
command *ABBREVIATE. This substitute can be used repeatedly throughout
the session in place of the original commands.
A comprehensive discussion of the various facilities for customising or
abbreviating command-mode input is given in Chapter 1 of the Commands
volume (section on “pro-STAR Commands”).
3. Repeat all commands in a single action, by making use of the tutorial
command files supplied in your STAR-CD installation CD-ROM (see the
STAR-CD Installation and Systems Guide for more information). The files
are written in separate sub-directories for each tutorial and are called either
prep.inp (for pre-processing) or post.inp (for post-processing). Also
included are auxiliary files needed by particular cases, e.g. user-defined
subroutines, cgrid files containing grid-changing commands, etc. The
tutorial command files and auxiliary files may be copied from the directory
$STARDIR/STARCDTUTS/../star.
Using tutorial command files

The usual procedure for repeating the pre- or post-processing part of a tutorial via
the supplied tutorial command files is as follows:
1. Create a directory for the tutorial and copy the prep.inp, post.inp and
auxiliary files (e.g. user subroutines) to it.
2. If the tutorial involves a restart from a previous case, copy all STAR-CD
generated files (e.g. tut.mdl, tut.ccmp, tut.ccmg, etc.) from their
current location to the new directory.
3. For a pre-processing session, start up pro-STAR in the usual way, supply a
tutorial name (e.g. tut) and then type the following command in the I/O
window:
ifile prep.inp
Important Note: When running tutorials involving use of the screen cursor,
make sure that both the main pro-STAR window and the graphics area within
it remain at their normal (default) sizes. Altering these in any way will
invalidate the screen coordinate information stored in file prep.inp and the
tutorial will fail.
4. Following the automatic execution of all commands, terminate the pro-STAR
session by typing.
quit, save
5. The procedure for a post-processing session is identical to the above, except

that the file name supplied is now post.inp and the run is terminated by
typing
quit, nosave
Version 4.06 3
Physical Problem Description
Tutorial 1 FLOW IN A MIXING PIPE

This tutorial describes in detail how to set up, run and post-process a simple CFD
problem involving flow through a mixing pipe. The problem geometry is shown
below:
Figure T1.0-1 Mixing pipe geometry

The assembly has two inlet pipes, located on the left and centre of the above figure,
through which air at different temperatures flows into the interior. There is also an
outlet pipe on the right-hand side through which the fluid exits. The air stream
entering the solution domain at each inlet has a specified velocity, temperature,
density, turbulence intensity and turbulence length scale. These properties vary
throughout the pipe as the two streams mix. Adiabatic and no-slip conditions are
assumed at the pipe walls.
The mesh used to describe the problem geometry is shown below. Users wishing
to generate the mesh used in this case from scratch should first complete Tutorial
2.1 and 2.2 of the Meshing Tutorials volume. Alternatively, they may continue with
this tutorial using files provided in the STAR-CD installation directory.
Version 4.06 1-1

Figure T1.0-2 Mixing pipe mesh
1-2 Version 4.06

Tutorial 1.1 PRE-PROCESSING AND CFD SOLUTION Pre-Processing
Preliminaries
Tutorial 1.1 PRE-PROCESSING AND CFD SOLUTION

This part of the tutorial gives a detailed account of how to:
• Initiate a pro-STAR pre-processing session that builds a CFD model for a
simple problem
• Alter fluid properties
• Specify turbulence and thermal models
• Apply boundary conditions
• Perform a CFD analysis using the STAR-CD solver
Pre-Processing
Preliminaries Create a sub-directory for the tutorial called tut1-1. If you have completed
Tutorial 2.1and 2.2 of the Meshing Tutorials volume, copy the model file created at
the end of Meshing Tutorial 2.2 (mixing_pipe.mdl) into this directory.
Alternatively, copy the coded files mixing_pipe.cel, mixing_pipe.vrt,
mixing_pipe.bnd and mixing_pipe.inp supplied with the STAR-CD
installation into it.
• Start pro-STAR by typing prostar at the command line
• Specify your preferred graphics driver (mesa or gl)
• Enter the case name (mixing_pipe) in the Case Name text box
If you have chosen to restart from the model file mixing_pipe.mdl:

• Check that the Resume From Existing .mdl File option is selected
• Click Continue
If you have chosen to start from the coded files provided with STAR-CD:
• Click Continue
• Select File > Read Input Code File... in the main pro-STAR window, as
shown below:
Version 4.06 1-3

Mesh Checking
• In the Read Input Coded File dialog select the File name
mixing_pipe.inp
• Click OK
The next step is to give the model a name:
• In the main window, select File > Model Title...
• In the Title text box type:
FLOW IN A MIXING PIPE
• Click Apply and Close

Mesh A simple, but often effective, method of checking the mesh is to display it on screen
Checking and examine it visually:
• Select C > All
The I/O window states that the mesh contains 82,339 cells.
Rotating the mesh by holding the left mouse button whilst dragging the cursor
across the display window should not reveal any malformed or irregular cells on the
1-4 Version 4.06

Mesh Checking
mesh surface. Once you are satisfied there are no problems there, reset the view and
check the interior mesh structure:
• Select Plot > Up Axis > Z
• Select View > Isometric > -1,-1,1
• Click the button at the bottom of the rotate slider to reset the view angle
Version 4.06 1-5

Mesh Checking
• Click the Zoom Off button,

• Turn on light shading by clicking the Light Switch On/Off button, . Light
shading enhances the 3D effect of the mesh visualisation.
• Click Cplot to display the mesh shown in Figure T1.0-2 above
• Select a Clipped Hidden plot type to display Figure T1.1-1
The varying size of cells within the trimmed mesh is clearly shown.
Figure T1.1-1 Clipped hidden view of mixing pipe mesh interior
1-6 Version 4.06

Basic Problem Settings
Basic Most pre-processing operations are performed using various panels of the
Problem pro-STAR Model Guide. The first panel to check is Analysis Features at the top of
Settings the pro-STAR Model Guide folder tree:
• Open the Analysis Features panel
This case is a steady-state problem and includes none of the other analysis features
listed here, so no changes are required.
Material Before any boundary conditions can be applied, appropriate fluid properties must
Properties be specified. The panel to check for this is Molecular Properties, located inside the
Thermophysical Models and Properties and Liquids and Gases folders:
• Select the Thermophysical Models and Properties folder
• Select the Liquids and Gases sub-folder
• Open the Molecular Properties (Fluids) panel
Version 4.06 1-7

Material Properties
The default fluid material is air so this does not need to be changed. However, since
the air temperature (and hence density) of each inlet stream is different, the Density
option must be re-specified:
• Select Ideal-f(T,P) from the Density list
The rest of this panel’s options are suitable for the analysis so:
• Click Apply
1-8 Version 4.06
Boundary Locations
The next set of parameters requiring attention are those describing the application
of a turbulence model:
• Open the Turbulence Models panel
• Select On for the Turbulence option
• Under the Turbulence tab, select the k-Epsilon/High Reynolds Number
model. This is the default k-ε model in STAR-CD and will be used in most of
the tutorials provided.
All default parameter settings are suitable for this model so:
• Click Apply
Since the problem in hand is non-isothermal, the energy equation must be activated:
• Open the Thermal Models panel
• Select On for the Temperature Calculation option
• Click Apply
This completes the specification of physical properties and models for the fluid. The
next step is to locate the boundary regions and specify boundary conditions.
Boundary Meshes such as this one created using pro-STAR’s Automated Meshing module
Locations automatically include boundary definitions on all mesh surfaces. To display these
boundaries:
• Select B > All in the main window
• Click the Display Boundaries button, , to display Figure T1.1-2
Observe that there is one boundary for every cell face on the mesh surface.
Depending on the features of that surface, these boundaries are split into different
regions; in this case there are nine such regions numbered 14 — 22.
Version 4.06 1-9

Boundary Locations
Figure T1.1-2 Default boundaries displayed on a clipped hidden view of the mesh
Most of these regions correspond to parts of the mixing pipe wall and are redundant
for the purposes of this tutorial. They may therefore be combined into a single
region and assigned the appropriate wall boundary conditions. In doing this, one can
take advantage of a useful pro-STAR feature that
(a) assigns all cell faces on the mesh surface for which no boundaries have
been specified to a default region (known as region no. 0) and
(b) sets up a default set of boundary conditions (adiabatic, no-slip, stationary,
smooth wall) to it.
In this case, the default conditions are appropriate to the pipe wall and they may
therefore be applied indirectly simply by deleting most of the boundaries shown in
Figure T1.1-2.
To start this process, first remove the boundaries on the inlet and outlet faces
from the current boundary set:
• Select B > Unselect > Region Cursor Select
• Using the screen cursor, click on any boundary lying on the pipe’s first inlet
plane, as shown in Figure T1.1-3. The information displayed on the I/O
window will indicate that the region number corresponding to this inlet is 14.
1-10 Version 4.06

Boundary Locations
Select a boundary here
Figure T1.1-3 Selecting a boundary on the first inlet
• Select View > Isometric > 1,-1,1 to change the view

• Using the screen cursor, click on any boundary lying on the pipe’s second
inlet plane, as shown in Figure T1.1-4. The information displayed on the I/O
window will indicate that the region number corresponding to this inlet is 22.
Version 4.06 1-11

Boundary Locations
Figure T1.1-4 Selecting a boundary on the second inlet

• Using the screen cursor, click on any boundary lying on the pipe’s outlet
plane, as shown in Figure T1.1-5. The information displayed on the I/O
window will indicate that the region number corresponding to the outlet is 19.
1-12 Version 4.06

Boundary Locations
Figure T1.1-5 Selecting a boundary on the outlet
To verify that the above operations have been performed correctly:

• Enter the following command in the I/O window:
COUNT BOUNDARY
The resulting I/O window output should be as shown below, indicating that all
inlet/outlet boundaries have been excluded; hence all those remaining in the set are
the (redundant) wall boundaries created by the AutoMesh Module.
To delete these boundaries:

BDEL BSET
Version 4.06 1-13
Boundary Conditions
Display the remaining boundaries:

• Select B > All
• Change back to a Hidden Surface plot
• Select View > Isometric > -1,-1,1 to display Figure T1.1-6
Figure T1.1-6 Boundary display with a single (default) wall boundary region
Boundary Specify boundary conditions at the inlets and outlet as follows:

Conditions
• Select the Define Boundaries folder in the pro-STAR Model Guide
• Open the Define Boundary Regions panel
• In the boundary regions list, select region 0 (the default boundary region) and
note that it is defined as a stationary, no-slip, adiabatic wall, as required
• Select region 14, the first inlet, from the boundary regions list
• Choose Inlet from the Region Type drop-down menu
• Enter boundary conditions as shown below:
1-14 Version 4.06

Boundary Conditions
• Click Apply
• Select region 22, the second inlet, from the boundary regions list
• Choose Inlet from the Region Type drop-down menu
Version 4.06 1-15

Boundary Conditions
• Enter boundary conditions as shown below:
• Click Apply
1-16 Version 4.06

Set Run Time Controls
• Select region 19, the outlet, from the boundary regions list
• Choose Outlet from the Region Type drop-down menu
• The boundary condition defaults shown on the panel are appropriate for this
case, so click Apply to confirm
• Click Replot to produce the mesh plot shown in Figure T1.1-7, which now
includes a graphical representation of the boundary conditions applied above.
Check that the yellow arrows indicating the inlet velocities point in the correct
direction and are perpendicular to the inlet boundary planes.
Figure T1.1-7 Boundary conditions shown on mesh plot
This completes the boundary condition setup.

• Turn off the Display Boundaries option by clicking the button,
Set Run Time Before the analysis can be run in STAR-CD, the maximum number of iterations to
Controls be performed and the maximum residual tolerance acceptable for convergence need
to be specified:
• In the pro-STAR Model Guide, select the Analysis Preparation folder
• Open the Run Time Controls panel
• Change the Maximum Number of Iterations to 300
• The default Maximum Residual Tolerance of 0.001 is acceptable so click
Apply
The pre-processing task is now complete. The next section details how to prepare
and run the analysis in STAR-CD.
Version 4.06 1-17

Tutorial 1.1 PRE-PROCESSING AND CFD SOLUTION CFD Analysis
Running From The Command Line
CFD Analysis
There are two ways of running a STAR-CD analysis:
1. Save the geometry and problem files in pro-STAR, then quit pro-STAR and
run the STAR solver from the command line
2. Run STAR interactively from within pro-STAR using the pro-STAR Model
Guide
Both of these are described below.

Running Begin by writing the geometry and problem files, save the model file and then quit
From The pro-STAR:
Command
• In the pro-STAR window, select File > Save Geometry... to open the Save
Line
Geometry File dialog
• The geometry was created in centimetres so set the Geometry Scale Factor to
0.01
• Click Apply and then Close
• Select File > Save Problem...
• In the Save Problem File dialog, click Save
• Select File > Quit > Save & Quit
At the command line enter the following:
star
The analysis will start and the results will be displayed in your session’s window.
Once it is complete, pro-STAR may be restarted and the results post-processed as
described in the second part of this tutorial.
Running The pro-STAR Model Guide’s Run Analysis Interactively panel activates the STAR
Interactively solver through the pro-STAR interface:
• Select File > Save Model
• Open the Run Analysis Interactively panel in the Analysis Preparation folder
• Select Other for Model Units and set the Scale Factor to 0.01
• Check that Write Geometry File is set to Yes
• Click Start
The geometry and problem files will be written automatically and the analysis will
run in the window that pro-STAR was started from. Once complete, you can
continue by post-processing the results in pro-STAR as described in the next
section.
1-18 Version 4.06

Tutorial 1.1 POST-PROCESSING Post-Processing
Preliminaries
Tutorial 1.1 POST-PROCESSING

This part of the tutorial gives a detailed account of how to:
• Initiate a pro-STAR post-processing session for evaluating the solution results
produced by STAR-CD for a simple problem
• Create simple vector and contour plots
• Produce plots of particle tracks
• Combine particle tracks with vector or contour plots
Post-Processing
Preliminaries Begin by checking that the model file, mixing_pipe.mdl, and the results file,
mixing_pipe.ccmp, generated during the first part of this tutorial exist in your
current working directory.
• Check that the case name (mixing_pipe) is displayed in the Case Name text
box and that the Resume From Existing .mdl File option is selected
• Click Continue
• Click Cplot
Read in the results of the analysis:

• Select the Post-Processing folder
• Open the Load Data panel to display the File(s) tab
• Click Open Post file
Contour The first plot to be drawn is a contour plot of temperature on the surface of the
Plots mixing pipe:
• Select the Data tab in the Load Data panel
• Turn On the Smooth option
• Select item Temperature from the Scalar Data list
Version 4.06 1-19

Contour Plots
• Click Get Data

• Open the Create Plots panel
• Under the 3-D Surface tab, select options Contour (filled) and Edge
1-20 Version 4.06

Contour Plots
• Click Plot To Screen to display Figure T1.1-8
Figure T1.1-8 Temperature contours on the mesh surface
Now plot contours of velocity magnitude on an x-z plane passing through the origin:
• Return to the Load Data panel
• Select item Velocity Magnitude from the Calculated Scalar Data list
• Click Get Data
• Under the Section/Clipped tab, select options Contour (filled) and Edge
• Change the Normal coordinates to 0, 1, 0
Version 4.06 1-21

Contour Plots
• Click Apply
• Click Plot to Screen to display Figure T1.1-9
1-22 Version 4.06

Velocity Vector Plots
Figure T1.1-9 Velocity magnitude contours on an x-z plane through the origin
Velocity Velocity vectors will first be plotted on the mesh surface:

Vector Plots
• Open the Load Data panel
• Turn Off the Smooth option
• Select Velocity Components UVW from the Vector Data list
• Click Get Data
• Under the 3-D Surface tab, select options Vector and Edge
Version 4.06 1-23

Figure T1.1-10 Velocity vectors displayed on the mesh surface
It can be seen that the flow field pattern cannot be seen very clearly as Figure
T1.1-10 displays far too many vectors. Therefore, the following measures may be
taken to thin out the vectors and generally improve the clarity of the plot:
• Select the Vectors tab in the Create Plots panel
• Adjust the Thin Vectors slider so that it is at approximately 0.25
• Change the Scale Factor to 0.7 to make each vector arrow shorter
• Change the Fraction Length of Arrow Head to 0.3 to make each arrow head
larger
1-24 Version 4.06

• Click Apply
• Click Replot in the pro-STAR window to display Figure T1.1-11
Figure T1.1-11 Thinned out velocity vectors displayed on the mesh surface
Version 4.06 1-25

The revised plot now clearly shows the flow swirling through the mixing pipe.
Next, plot velocity vectors on the plane that was previously used for the velocity
magnitude contour plot:
• Select the Section/Clipped tab in the Create Plots panel
• Select options Vector and Edge
Figure T1.1-12 Velocity vectors displayed on an x-z plane
The vectors shown in Figure T1.1-12 are too thinly spaced near the centre of the
model geometry. However, this is not the case near the walls where the presence of
a finer mesh results in more vectors being displayed. A plot with evenly distributed
vectors across the plane can be achieved using the Presentation Grid facility:
• Select the Vectors tab in the Create Plots panel
• Turn On the Presentation Grid facility
• The presentation grid is defined by the number of grid points in each direction
across the entire plot window. For this case, specify the number of points in
the x- and y- directions as 75 and 66, respectively.
1-26 Version 4.06

• Click Apply
• Click Replot in the pro-STAR window to display Figure T1.1-13
Figure T1.1-13 Velocity vectors displayed on an x-z plane using a presentation grid
Version 4.06 1-27

Particle Tracks
Particle An effective way of visualising a flow pattern is to draw tracks of imaginary

Tracks massless particles introduced into to the flow at specified points. Here we will draw
tracks of particles introduced at the smaller inlet:
• In the Post-Processing folder, select sub-folder Particle Tracks
• Open the Particle Initialization panel
• Select Boundary Faces for the Particle Location Type
• Select Bset from the drop-down menu that appears underneath
Before continuing, it is necessary to collect the inlet boundary faces from which
particles will originate into a boundary set:
• In the pro-STAR window, select a Geometry plot and Hidden Surface plot
type
• Select the Display Boundaries option by clicking the button in the
toolbar at the top of the main window
• Hold the middle mouse button and drag to zoom in on the smaller inlet
• Select B > New > Cursor
• Select 6 inlet boundary faces as indicated below:
1-28 Version 4.06

Particle Tracks
Select boundaries here
Figure T1.1-14 Selecting boundary faces on the smaller inlet
• Click the Done button at the top right of the screen to end cursor selection
• Click Replot to display a plot similar to that shown in Figure T1.1-15. Note
that the exact boundaries chosen are not important in this case
Version 4.06 1-29

Particle Tracks
Figure T1.1-15 Boundaries selected as starting points for particle tracks
• Click Apply in the Particle Initialization panel

• Select the Particle Generation panel
• Click Generate Tracks

• Open the Plot Particles panel
• Change the Display option to Continuous
• Click Plot Tracks
1-30 Version 4.06

Particle Tracks
• Click the Zoom Off button, , in the pro-STAR window to display Figure
T1.1-16
Figure T1.1-16 Tracks of particles introduced at the smaller inlet
Figure T1.1-16 illustrates very clearly the swirling nature of the flow. Particle tracks
can also be plotted together with vectors or contours by producing such a plot after
displaying the particle tracks:
• Return to the Load Data pro-STAR Model Guide panel
• Select Data Type Cell & Wall/Bound (Smooth)
• Select Temperature from the Scalar Data list
• Click Get Data
• Select the Create Plots panel
• In the Section/Clipped tab of the Create Plots panel select options Contour
(filled) and Edge
Version 4.06 1-31

Particle Tracks
Figure T1.1-17 Particle tracks displayed with a temperature contour plot
Note that in order to produce further plots of vectors or contours without the particle
tracks, you will need to return to the Plot Particles panel and click the Clear Tracks
button.
This completes the post-processing part of this tutorial. Descriptions of more
complex post-processing operations may be found in some of the other tutorials in
this volume.
1-32 Version 4.06

Tutorial 2 EVALUATION OF MESH EFFECTS

The problem considered is steady airflow over an obstacle mounted at the bottom
wall of a three-dimensional channel. The geometry is shown in Figure T2.0-1. This
case is based on an investigation conducted by the Danish Maritime Institute whose
experimental data are compared with the STAR-CD predictions. In the
experimental set-up, the flow velocity and turbulence characteristics were
non-uniform across the inlet section. However, to simplify the modelling procedure,
the case presented here is based on a parabolic inlet velocity profile with fixed
turbulence characteristics.
The boundaries consist of an inlet, an outlet, a symmetry plane on one of the two
‘side’ faces (parallel to the plane of the paper in Figure T2.0-1) and default no-slip
walls for the remaining boundaries. The fluid is air and its physical properties are
assumed constant and equal to the STAR-CD default values:
Density 1.205 kg/m3

Molecular viscosity 1.81 × 10–5 Pa s
The fluid enters the solution domain at standard pressure and temperature (1 bar and
293 K) with a maximum velocity of 1.17 m/s. Based on the height of the obstacle,
the Reynolds number is 3,115. The turbulent kinetic energy and dissipation rate at
the inlet are set to 0.024 m2/s2 and 0.07 m2/s3, respectively; these values having
been derived from experimental data. All fluid mass entering the solution domain
exits through the outlet. The flow is isothermal, incompressible and turbulent and
turbulence is simulated using the standard linear k-ε model combined with the
Wolfstein two-layer model.
Wall
300 Inlet Outlet
40 Wall
320 870
10
All units in mm.
The depth of the solution domain is 300 mm throughout.
Figure T2.0-1 Problem geometry
The same problem is modelled using three different meshes: a hexahedral, a

tetrahedral and a polyhedral mesh. All three are based on the same initial shell
surface defining the problem geometry but each mesh was produced using different
Version 4.06 2-1

methods. Comparisons are then drawn between the accuracy and speed of each type
of mesh.
2-2 Version 4.06

Tutorial 2.1 HEXAHEDRAL MESH ANALYSIS Pre-Processing
Preliminaries
Tutorial 2.1 HEXAHEDRAL MESH ANALYSIS

This tutorial will show the user how to:
• Model a 3D flow using a simple hexahedral mesh
• Apply, and verify the use of, a two-layer turbulence model
• Use a pre-defined table to describe a boundary condition
• Produce contour plots of wall data
• Produce and customize graphs of cell and wall data
Pre-Processing
Preliminaries Begin by creating a directory for this tutorial (called tut2-1) and copy the cell,
vertex and boundary files supplied with STAR-CD (hex.cel, hex.vrt and
hex.bnd) into it. Also copy the table file inlet.tbl and the text file
exp230.xy. The table describes the inlet velocity profile while the text file
contains the experimental data and is used for comparing them to the analysis
results.
Start up pro-STAR in this directory:
• Type prostar at the command line
• Specify the graphics driver (mesa or gl)
• Type hex in the Case Name text box
• Click Continue
• In the main pro-STAR window, select File > Model Title...
• In the Title text box type
AIR FLOW OVER AN OBSTACLE (HEXAHEDRAL MESH)
The pro-STAR Model Guide is displayed on your screen, next to the main
pro-STAR window. This enables you to set the basic features of your model and
ensures that only those panels that are essential for your analysis are activated.
• Select folder Grids and then open the Import Grids panel
• Select pro-STAR as the file Format
• Check that the default cell and vertex files are hex.cel and hex.vrt,
respectively, and that both are of File Type Coded
• Click Apply
The I/O window should tell you that 74,985 vertices and 67,699 cells have been
imported. Ignore the warnings regarding non-existent cell table numbers as new
ones are created during import.
To display the grid:
• In the main pro-STAR window, choose C > All
• Select View > Isometric > -1,1,1
• Click Cplot to display Figure T2.1-1
Version 4.06 2-3

Material Properties
Figure T2.1-1 Hexahedral mesh
There are currently no boundaries attached to the grid as only the cell and vertex
data have been imported. To import boundary definitions from the boundary file:
• Select folder Locate Boundaries in the pro-STAR Model Guide and open the
Import Boundaries panel
• The boundary file is hex.bnd. This should be displayed in the File Name box
• Click Apply
Now the boundaries can be displayed:

• In the main pro-STAR window, choose B > All
• Click the Display Boundaries button,
Hide the boundary regions again:

• Click off the Display Boundaries option by clicking the button again
Material Check the default fluid property settings. The only property data needed for an
Properties isothermal and incompressible flow are fluid density and molecular viscosity.
• Select folder Thermophysical Models and Properties in the pro-STAR Model
Guide
• Select sub-folder Liquids and Gases
Given that the default property values are those of air at standard temperature and
pressure, no change is necessary. Turn on the standard k-ε turbulence model:
2-4 Version 4.06
Boundary Conditions

• Select On for the Turbulence modelling option
• Select option k-Epsilon/High Reynolds Number from the Model menu in
the Turbulence tab
• Click Apply
A two-layer model is to be used to account for turbulence near the walls. The
near-wall layer thickness should be large enough to fully encompass the boundary
layer (but not too large, as the computational time will increase unnecessarily). To
define the two-layer model:
• Select the Near-Wall Treatment tab
• Turn On the Standard Two-Layer model
• Select option Wolfstein from the Model menu in the Two-Layer Model
section
• Change the Near-Wall Thickness Distance to 0.04 m. The suitability of this
value will be checked in the “Post-Processing” section
• Click Apply
Choose a cell just above the obstacle as the monitoring location.

• Open the Monitoring and Reference Data (Fluids) panel
• Type 29772 in the Monitoring Cell Number box
• Type 93 in the Pressure Cell Number box. This is a cell on the wall near to the
inlet.
• Click Apply
Boundary Having imported the boundary location definitions and their associated region
Conditions numbers, boundary conditions are specified as follows:
For the wall (region 0):
• Select folder Define Boundaries
• Select region 0 in the region scroll list
• Select Active from the Two-Layer drop-down menu under Wall Parameters
• Click Apply
For region 1, the inlet velocity profile will be specified by a table:

• Select region no. 1 in the region scroll list
• Select Table from the User Option menu
• Click the file browser button to select the table file inlet.tbl,
• Click Open to exit from the file browser
• Select option k/Epsilon from the Turbulence Switch menu
• Type inlet values for the turbulence parameters; 0.024 m2/s2 in the k box and
0.07 m2/s3 in the Epsilon box.
• Click Apply
For the outlet (region 2):

• Ensure that the Flow Split is set to 1
• Click Apply
Version 4.06 2-5

Tutorial 2.1 HEXAHEDRAL MESH ANALYSIS CFD Analysis
Analysis Controls
No user input is required for the last (symmetry plane) boundary region.
Check the model by displaying some key parameters in the I/O window (number
of cells and cell types, boundary regions, etc.) and then save the model data.
• In the main pro-STAR window, select Utility > Count > All
Analysis Use of a second-order differencing scheme can significantly increase the accuracy
Controls of the solution. Select MARS as the differencing scheme for this analysis:
• Select folder Analysis Controls in the pro-STAR Model Guide and select the
Primary Variables panel
• Under the Differencing Schemes tab, select MARS as the momentum and
turbulence Differencing Scheme
• Click Apply
Set the frequency of outputting data to the solution (post-processing) file and
specify that wall data (shear force coefficients and y+ values) are to be stored in it.
Also specify the maximum number of iterations:
• Select the Analysis Output panel under the Analysis Controls folder
• In the Solution File section, type 10 in the Output Frequency box
• In the Additional Output Data section, select item Shear Force from the list
• Enable the Post option checkbox
• Repeat the above process for item Yplus
• Choose to Show Selected to display a summary of the chosen items
• Click Apply
• Go to the Analysis Preparation folder and open the Run Time Controls panel
• Click Apply
Final The pre-processing task is now complete. If you wish to terminate the session at this
Operations stage, save all model data for the hexahedral mesh, write the geometry and problem
files and exit from pro-STAR, as shown below. Alternatively, you may continue
with the CFD analysis, using the pro-STAR Model Guide facilities for running
STAR interactively. This process is described in the next section.
• In the main pro-STAR window, select File > Save Geometry...
• Type 0.001 in the Geometry Scale Factor text box to convert the geometry
units from metres to millimetres
CFD Analysis
To perform the analysis interactively, proceed as follows:
2-6 Version 4.06

Tutorial 2.1 HEXAHEDRAL MESH ANALYSIS Post-Processing
Preliminaries
• In the Analysis Preparation folder, open the Run Analysis Interactively panel
• Ensure that the units in which the model was built are correctly selected
(option button Millimeters). Leave all other settings at their default values.
• Click Start
The analysis will then start automatically. Convergence should be achieved within
the specified maximum number of iterations.
Post-Processing
Preliminaries Read in the results of the analysis from file hex.ccmp:
• Select folder Post-Processing
• Open the Load Data panel and display the File(s) tab
Basic Plots Select the cell-based velocity vectors for plotting. Also scale down the vector size
and switch on the edge display mode:
• Go to the Data tab and check that Data Type Cell is selected
• In the Vector Data list, select item Velocity Components UVW
• In the Scalar Data list, ensure that None is selected
• Click Get Data
• In the Section/Clipped tab, choose Vector from the Option menu and Edge
from the Edge/Mesh menu
• Check that the Normal parameter is set to 0, 0, 1 and the Point parameter is set
to 0, 0, 0
• Go to the Vectors tab and type 0.5 in the Scale Factor box
• Click Apply
• Go to the Options tab to the right of the Vectors tab and select User from the
Range menu
• Enter a range of 0 to 1.7
• Click Apply
• Under the Section/Clipped tab, click Plot to Screen
• Display Figure T2.1-2 by clicking the Reset View button, which is the small
button at the bottom right of the orientation cube, as shown below:
Version 4.06 2-7

Basic Plots
Figure T2.1-2 Velocity vector plot on the symmetry plane
As expected, a recirculation zone is observed downstream of the obstacle. Zoom in

using the mouse to examine it more closely.
Now examine the pressure distribution:
• In the Data tab, select Cell & Wall/Bound (Smooth) from the Data Type
menu
• In the Scalar Data list, select item Pressure and then click Get Data
• Go to the Create Plots panel
• In the Section/Clipped tab choose Contour (filled) from the Option menu and
Edge from the Edge/Mesh menu
• In the Options tab, enter a Range of -1.9 to 0.6
• Click Apply
• Under the Section/Clipped tab, click Plot to Screen and zoom out to display
Figure T2.1-3
2-8 Version 4.06

Basic Plots
Figure T2.1-3 Filled contour plot of pressure on the symmetry plane
Plot the vertex-based turbulence kinetic energy and dissipation rate:

• In the Options tab check User is selected from the Range list and enter values
0 to 0.2
• Click Apply
• Go to the Load Data panel
• Select item Turb Kinetic Energy from the Scalar Data list
• Click Get Data
• In the main window, click Replot to display Figure T2.1-4
• Select item Dissipation Rate from the Scalar Data list
• Click Get Data
• In the main window, click Replot
To apply a more suitable scale to the plot:

• Return to the Create Plots panel
• In the Options tab enter values from 0 to 2 for the User range
• Click Apply
Version 4.06 2-9

Basic Plots
Figure T2.1-4 Contour plot of turbulence kinetic energy on the symmetry plane
S
Figure T2.1-5 Contour plot of turbulence dissipation rate on the symmetry plane
2-10 Version 4.06

Validation of Results
Validation of In Tutorial 2.2 and 2.3, tetrahedral and polyhedral cells will be used to mesh the
Results same problem. In order to ensure that the three meshes are comparable, the
distribution of y+ values at the wall boundaries will be noted for each of them.
• Go to the Options tab in the Create Plots panel
• Choose Auto for Range and click Apply
• In the Load Data panel, select option Wall from the Data Type menu
• Ensure the Smooth option is turned Off
• Select item YPLUS from the Scalar Data list
• Click Get Data
Since wall data are stored in specially created shells at the wall surfaces (cell type
no. 5), it is necessary to assemble a new cell set that contains only these shells:
• Change the plot type to a Hidden Surface plot
• Select View > Axis > +Y
• Ensure edge plotting is off by clicking the Display Edges button, , in the
main pro-STAR window
• Select Plot > Wplot from the menu bar
• Select C > New > Type and click anywhere on the visible surface
• Select Post > Caverage > Cset
• Click Wplot
• Type the following in the I/O window
VIEW -0.5 0.5 -1.0
• Click Replot to display Figure T2.1-6
Figure T2.1-6 y+ values plotted on the walls
Version 4.06 2-11

This plot shows that the y+ values never exceed 6.1 and that for the vast majority of
the flow regime they are below 3.0, the maximum value considered acceptable for
a rigorous examination of wall data.
To check whether the near-wall layer thickness in the turbulence model (see page
2-5) was given a reasonable value:
• In the Load Data panel, select Data Type Cell
• Choose Two Layer from the Scalar Data list
• Click Get Data
• In the Section/Clipped tab select Contour (filled) and None
• Click Plot to Screen
• In the main pro-STAR window, select C > All
• Click Cplot and reset the view by clicking the Reset View button at the bottom
right of the orientation cube to display Figure T2.1-7.
The red region in this plot represents cells in the boundary layer, the green region
cells that are outside the boundary layer but still inside the near-wall layer and the
blue region cells outside the near-wall layer. The plot shows that the two-layer
model has been implemented correctly as there are no places at which the blue and
red regions are in contact. In other words, the near-wall layer encompasses the
whole boundary layer, as required. The green region also has minimal thickness,
hence the computational cost is minimal.
Figure T2.1-7 Plot demonstrating correct application of two-layer model
2-12 Version 4.06

Graph Plotting
Graph It is sometimes useful to display the results of the analysis as x-y graphs, bar charts
Plotting or pie charts. When combined with various data manipulation functions (e.g.
OPERATE or ROPERATE), such pro-STAR facilities constitute powerful tools for
display and analysis. Some of the code’s x-y graph plotting capabilities are
demonstrated in this part of the tutorial.
The following operations are normally necessary for producing an x-y graph:
• Extract and prepare the data to be plotted
• Store the data in graph registers
• Create graphs by plotting the contents of any register against those of another
register
• Combine several graphs into pro-STAR’s basic graph entity, called a ‘frame’
• Define essential information for each frame, such as axis scaling, legends and
graph labels
• Display the frame
One does not need to follow the entire procedure outlined above. Default settings
can often be used, as shown in the examples below.
Simple The first requirement is to assemble a set of U velocity magnitude values along a
Graphs line on the symmetry plane located at x = 230 mm. The graph will plot the U
velocity (the abscissa) against the y-coordinate (the ordinate).
To do this, and produce a default graph, proceed as follows:
• Not all the graph specification options are available when a section plot is
displayed. To avoid this, ensure that Hidden Surface plot is selected using
the drop-down menu in the main pro-STAR window.
• In the pro-STAR Model Guide, select sub-folder Graphs followed by
sub-folder Extract Data
• Open the Field Data panel
• Click Reset Graph at the bottom of the panel and choose Yes
• Check that the Select data along option at the top of the panel is set to Line
• Enter 300 as the Number of data points
• To increase the number of allowed data points, type
MEMORY MAXPRB 1000
in the I/O window

• Ensure that Line defined by End points is selected
• Specify these end points to be 230, 0, 0 and 230, 300, 0
• Scalar post data is, by default, stored in post register 4 so choose Post 4 as the
post register from which to load field data, Post data to load
• Go to the Data tab of the Load Data panel
• Select item Velocity Component U from the Scalar Data list
• Click Get Data
• Return to the Field Data panel. The Register Data box will show that the U
velocity component (SU) is now loaded in post register no. 4
• For the Graph Data Vs option, choose to plot the graph data against the
Y-axis
• Click Create Graph to see a default graph of the data, as shown in Figure
Version 4.06 2-13

Customizing Graphs
T2.1-8
Figure T2.1-8 Default graph of U velocity on the symmetry plane at x = 230 mm
Customizing It is clear that the default graph is not exactly what is required. To swap the axes and
Graphs adjust their scales:
• Open the Customize Graphs panel
• Go to the Pairs tab
• Click Clear at the bottom of the Register Pairs list and choose Yes to remove
the existing graph
• Choose SU (which should be Register # 9) from the X-Axis Register list
• Choose Y LOCATION (which should be Register # 4) from the Y-Axis
Register list
• Click Add Register Pair and then click Apply
• Click Draw All Frames
• Go to the Axis tab
• For the X-Axis Parameters option, change the Title to U - m/s
• Change the axis end-points by entering 0 and 1.4 in the Xmin and Xmax
boxes, respectively
• Change the axis annotations by entering 0.1, the required segment length for
major tick marks, in the Xmajor box
• Click Apply
• In the Y-Axis Parameters options, change the Title to Y - mm. Also, change
the axis end-points by entering 0 and 300 in the Ymin, Ymax boxes,
respectively
• Change the format for Numbers to Integer
2-14 Version 4.06

Customizing Graphs
• Click Apply
• Go to the Options sub-tab
• In the Additional Graph Labels section, select label no. 1 in the scroll list and
then enter the desired label, U velocity profile at x = 230 mm, in the text box
underneath.
• Specify the label’s location by entering coordinates (3.5, 9.0) in the Sx and Sy
boxes
• Click Apply
• In the main window, click Redraw to display the modified graph
Experimental results are provided in a coded (text) file. To plot these on the same
graph and hence check the validity of the numerical results:
• Open the External Data panel
• The required File Name is exp230.xy. Find it using pro-STAR’s built-in
file manager
• Select xyxyxy from the Establish X-Y pairs list
• Click Create Graph
The External Data panel can also be used to save graph register data to an external
file. To save the data displayed in Figure T2.1-8:
• Change the File Name to hex230.xy
• Choose to Specify the Register to store data as 4
• Change the Increment in register to 5
• Click Save Registers
The colours of the two graphs are the same. To change one of them and add a
legend:
• Return to the Customize Graphs panel
• In the Display tab select Legend from the Display Options menu
• Specify the Location as X1 = 7.35, Y1 = 8.85, X2 = 9.85, Y2 =9.85
• Click Apply
• Select the Registers tab
• Click on Register 4 in the Registers list and change its label to Numerical
• Click Apply
• Click on Register 11 in the Registers list and change its label to
Experimental
• Change the Color under Line Parameters to number 7, i.e., yellow
• Click Apply
• Click Redraw in the main pro-STAR window to display Figure T2.1-9
Version 4.06 2-15

Wall Shear Force
Figure T2.1-9 Comparison of U velocity profile with experimental results
The numerical results are within 10% of the experimental results in the region in
which the experiment was carried out (0 < Y (mm) < 180).
Wall Shear In this case, wall shear force is a useful quantity for judging the length of the
Force circulation zone; i.e., the re-attachment point of the recirculation zone can be
determined by finding the point on the ‘bottom’ wall at which the wall shear force
is zero. This may be determined approximately by using a wall plot, as in Figure
T2.1-6, but a more accurate method is to plot a graph.
The x-component of the wall shear force is by far the greatest, so it can be used
in place of the total wall shear force scalar. The former is a more suitable choice
because its sign also indicates the flow direction. On the other hand, the total wall
shear force scalar is positive everywhere and so a minimum value would need to be
used to estimate the re-attachment point instead of a zero value.
To produce such a graph:
• Click Reset Graph and then Yes to remove the existing graph data
• Go to the Field Data panel
• Change the Number of data points to 175
• Choose to Select data along a Line and Specify the End points as 330, 0, 0
and 1200, 0, 0
• Select Post 4 from the Post data to load menu
• Select Data Type Wall and Smooth option On
• Select Shear Force (X-Dir) from the Scalar Data list and click Get Data
• Return to the Field Data panel
2-16 Version 4.06

Wall Shear Force
• Choose to plot the graph data against the X-axis

To customize the graph:

• Go to the Customize Graphs panel
• In the Axis tab, choose X-Axis for the Parameters option
• Change Xmin and Xmax to 330 and 1200, respectively
• Change the Numbers type to Integer and the Title to X - mm
• Click Apply
• Under the Display tab, Specify the graph Location as having parameters X1 =
2.0, Y1 = 2.35, X2 = 9.0, Y2 = 8.65
• Click Apply
• For the Y-Axis Parameters in the Axis tab, change the Title to Shear Force - N
• Change the Title Location to 0.5, 6.8
• Click Apply
• Go to the Options tab
then enter the desired label, Wall Shear Force at y = 0, downstream of
obstruction, in the text box underneath.
boxes
• Click Apply then Draw All Frames to display Figure T2.1-10
Figure T2.1-10 Graph of wall shear force along the ‘bottom’ wall
The recirculation zone extends roughly 800 mm downstream of the obstacle.
Version 4.06 2-17

Final Operations
Final This tutorial is now complete. Exit pro-STAR by selecting:

Operations
• File > Quit > Quit, Nosave
2-18 Version 4.06

Tutorial 2.2 TETRAHEDRAL MESH ANALYSIS Pre-Processing
Tutorial 2.2 TETRAHEDRAL MESH ANALYSIS

This tutorial tackles exactly the same problem as Tutorial 2.1 except that, in this
case, a tetrahedral mesh is used instead of a hexahedral one. The dimensions of
individual cells are approximately the same as in the hexahedral mesh. Particular
care is also taken to ensure that the near-wall cells are of the same thickness.
• Model a 3D flow using a simple tetrahedral mesh
Pre-Processing
Create a directory for this tutorial (called tut2-2) and copy the coded files
provided supplied with the STAR-CD installation (tet.cel, tet.vrt and
tet.bnd) into it. Also copy the table file inlet.tbl and the text file
exp230.xy., containing the inlet velocity profile and experimental data.
• Choose the graphics driver (mesa or gl)
• Type tet in the Case Name box
• Click Continue
• Select File > Model Title...
AIR FLOW OVER AN OBSTACLE (TETRAHEDRAL MESH)
Now, import the grid into pro-STAR using the pro-STAR Model Guide:
• In the pro-STAR Model Guide, select folder Grids and then open the Import
Grids panel
• Check that the default cell and vertex files are tet.cel and tet.vrt, respectively,
and that both are of File Type Coded
• Click Apply
The I/O window should show that 52,663 vertices and 140,141 cells have been
imported. Ignore the warnings regarding non-existent cell table numbers as new
ones are created during import.
Boundary data must also be imported, as follows:
• Select folder Locate Boundaries and open the Import Boundaries panel
• The boundary file is tet.bnd. This should be displayed in the File Name text
box
• Click Apply
To display the grid:

Version 4.06 2-19

Material Properties

Figure T2.2-1 Tetrahedral mesh
To display the boundaries:

• Select B > All
• Check visually that all boundaries are appropriate to the case and then click
the button again to switch boundaries off
Whenever a grid is imported from files other than a complete model (.mdl) file, it
is always advisable to check that the mesh is connected and has no cracks in it. To
check the mesh connectivity:
• Choose Tools > Check... from the pro-STAR window menu
• Select Connectivity from the Check list
• Click Apply
• Click Close
In this case, the cells are all connected and belong to one group so the mesh is OK.
Material The default fluid property values are those of air at standard temperature and
Properties pressure. No change to these is necessary. Turn on the standard k-ε turbulence
model:
Guide
2-20 Version 4.06
Boundary Conditions

• Select option k-Epsilon/High Reynolds Number from the Model menu
• Click Apply
A two-layer model is to be used to account for turbulence near the walls. The
near-wall layer thickness should be large enough to fully encompass the boundary
layer. To define the two-layer model:
• Select the Near-Wall Treatment tab
• Turn On the Standard Two-Layer model
• Select option Wolfstein as the Two-Layer Model
• Change the Near Wall Thickness Distance to 0.035 m. The suitability of this
value will be checked in the “Post-Processing” section
• Click Apply
Choose a fluid cell just above the obstacle as the monitoring location:
• Type 158 in the Pressure Cell Number box. This cell is in the same position as
the one specified in Tutorial 2.1
• Click Apply
Boundary Having imported the boundary location definitions and their associated region
Conditions numbers, boundary conditions are imposed as follows:
For the wall (region 0):
• Select Active from the Two-Layer pull-down menu
• Click Apply
For the inlet (region 1):

• Click the file browser button and select the table file inlet.tbl
• Type inlet values for the turbulence parameters; 0.024 in the k box and 0.07 in
the Epsilon box.
• Click Apply
For the outlet (region 2):

• Click Apply
No user input is required for the last (symmetry plane) boundary region.
Version 4.06 2-21

Tutorial 2.2 TETRAHEDRAL MESH ANALYSIS CFD Analysis
Analysis Controls
Analysis Use of a second-order differencing scheme can significantly increase the accuracy
Controls of the solution. Select MARS as the differencing scheme for this analysis:
• Open folder Analysis Controls in the pro-STAR Model Guide and select the
• Under the Differencing Schemes tab, select MARS as the momentum and
turbulence Differencing Scheme
• Click Apply
Set the frequency of data output to the solution file and specify that wall data,
specifically shear force coefficients and y+ values, are to be stored in it:
• Select the Analysis Output panel
• Click Apply
Specify the maximum number of iterations:
• Click Apply
Check the model:

• In the Model Validation panel
• Select All
• Click Apply
Operations stage, save all model data for the tetrahedral mesh, write the geometry and problem
• Enter 0.001 for the Geometry Scale Factor
CFD Analysis
• In the Analysis Preparation folder, open the Run Analysis Interactively panel.
• Check that the units in which the model was built are correctly selected
2-22 Version 4.06

Tutorial 2.2 TETRAHEDRAL MESH ANALYSIS Post-Processing
Preliminaries
• Click Start
Post-Processing
Preliminaries Read in the results of the analysis from file tet.ccmp:
Basic Plots The plots shown in this section are similar to those in Tutorial 2.1, thus enabling the
user to draw comparisons between the two cases. The first of these is a velocity
vector plot:
• Click Get Data
• In the Section/Clipped tab, choose Vector from the Option menu and Edge
from the Edge/Mesh menu
to 0, 0, 0
• Go to the Vectors tab and enter a Scale Factor of 0.5
• Click Apply
• Go to the Options tab and select User from the Range list.
• Click Apply
• Display Figure T2.2-2 by selecting View > Axis > +Z
Version 4.06 2-23

Basic Plots
Figure T2.2-2 Plot of velocity vectors on the symmetry plane
The plot shows very few differences to that in Figure T2.1-2, the most obvious
being a slightly smaller recirculation zone.
menu
• In the Section/Clipped tab choose options Contour (filled) and Edge
• Click Apply
• Under the Section/Clipped tab, click Plot to Screen to display Figure T2.2-3
2-24 Version 4.06

Basic Plots
Figure T2.2-3 Plot of pressure contours on the symmetry plane
The most obvious differences between Figure T2.2-3 and Figure T2.1-3 occur far
downstream of the obstruction.
• In the Options tab enter values From 0 To 0.2 for the User Range
• Click Apply
• Click Get Data
• Click Get Data
• In the Options tab enter values from 0 to 2 for the User Range
• Click Apply
Version 4.06 2-25

Basic Plots
Figure T2.2-4 Contours of turbulence kinetic energy on the symmetry plane
Figure T2.2-5 Contours of turbulence dissipation rate on the symmetry plane
2-26 Version 4.06

Validation of Plot the y+ values at the wall boundaries to help verify the suitability of the mesh
Results for the turbulence model employed:
• Choose Auto Range and click Apply
• Ensure Smooth option is turned Off
• Click Get Data
• Change the plot type to a Hidden Surface plot
• Turn off edge plotting by clicking the button in the main pro-STAR
window
• Select Plot > Wplot
• Select C > New > Type and click anywhere on the visible surface
• Type
VIEW -0.5 0.5 -1.0
in the I/O window

Version 4.06 2-27

Note that the y+ values are roughly comparable to those shown for the hexahedral
mesh (Figure T2.1-6). This is what we would expect because the thickness of the
cell layer next to the wall is the same for both meshes.
• Click Get Data
• In the main pro-STAR window, select C > All and then click Cplot
• Display Figure T2.2-7 by clicking the Reset View button, as shown below:
The plot shows that the two-layer model has been implemented correctly. In
addition, the tetrahedral mesh has permitted the use of a smaller near-wall layer
thickness compared to that in Tutorial 2.1. This saves some computational time,
though the greater number of cells in the tetrahedral model is a much more
significant factor.
2-28 Version 4.06

Simple Graphs
Simple Graphs similar to those in Tutorial 2.1 will be created next. The first requirement is
Graphs to assemble a set of U velocity magnitude values along a line located at x = 230 mm,
z = 0 mm. The graph will plot the U velocity (the abscissa) against the y-coordinate
(the ordinate).
To do this, and produce a default graph, proceed as follows:
displayed. To avoid this, ensure that Hidden Surface plot is selected in the
drop-down menu in the main pro-STAR window.
• In the pro-STAR Model Guide, open sub-folder Graphs followed by
• Choose Post 4 from the Post data to load menu
• Ensure option Cell is selected from the Data Type menu
• Click Get Data
Y-axis
• Type
MEMORY MAXPRB 1000
in the I/O window to increase the number of sensors (data points) allowed
• Back on the Field Data panel, click Create Graph to see a default graph of
the data
Customizing The default graph presentation needs to be adjusted. To do this we swap the axes
Graphs and adjust their scales:
the existing graph
Register list
• Enter 0 and 1.4 in the Xmin, Xmax boxes, respectively
• Enter 0.1 in the Xmajor box and then click Apply
Version 4.06 2-29

Customizing Graphs
• For the Y-Axis Parameters option, change the Title to Y - mm. Also, enter 0
and 300 in the Ymin, Ymax boxes, respectively
• Select Integer as the Numbers format
• Click Apply
then enter U velocity profile at x = 230 mm in the text box underneath.
• Enter coordinates (3.5, 9.0) in the Sx and Sy boxes
• Click Apply
Experimental results are provided in a coded (text) file. To plot these on the same
graph and hence check the validity of the numerical results:
• Open the External Data panel
• The required File Name is exp230.xy. Find it using pro-STAR’s built-in
file manager
The External Data panel can also be used to save graph register data to an external
file. To save the data displayed in the graph:
• Change the File Name to tet230.xy
• Choose to Specify the Register to store data as 4
• Change the Increment in register to 5
• Click Save Registers
To add a legend:
• Return to the Customize Graphs panel
• In the Display tab select Legend from the Display Options menu
• Specify the Location as X1 = 7.35, Y1 = 8.85, X2 = 9.85, Y2 =9.85
• Click Apply
• Select the Registers tab
• Click on Register 4 in the Registers list and change its label to Numerical
• Click Apply
• Click on Register 11 in the Registers list and change its label to
Experimental
• Change the Color under Line Parameters to number 7, i.e., yellow
• Click Apply
• Click Redraw in the main pro-STAR window to display Figure T2.2-8
2-30 Version 4.06

Wall Shear Force
Figure T2.2-8 Comparison of U velocity profile with experimental results
As with the hexahedral mesh, the numerical results are within 10% of the
experimental results in the region in which the experiment was carried out (0 < Y
(mm) < 180).
Wall Shear To produce a graph of wall shear force:
Force
• Click Reset Graph and then Yes to remove the existing graph data
• Go to the Field Data panel
• Change the Number of data points to 175
• Check that Line is selected for the Select data along option and Specify the
End points as 330, 0, 0 and 1200, 0, 0
• Select Data Type Wall and Smooth option On
• Select Shear Force (X-Dir) from the Scalar Data list and click Get Data
• Return to the Field Data panel
• Choose to plot the graph data against the X-axis
To customize the graph:

• Go to the Customize Graphs panel
• Under the Display tab, Specify the graph Location as having parameters X1 =
2.0, Y1 = 2.35, X2 = 9.0, Y2 = 8.65
• Click Apply
• In the Axis tab, choose X-Axis for the Parameters option
Version 4.06 2-31

Final Operations
• Change Xmin and Xmax to 330 and 1200, respectively

• Change the Numbers type to Integer and the Title to X - mm
• Click Apply
• For the Y-Axis Parameters, change the Title to Shear Force - N
• Change the Title Location to 0.5, 6.8
• Click Apply
then enter the desired label, Wall Shear Force at y = 0, downstream of
obstruction, in the text box underneath.
boxes
• Click Apply then Draw All Frames to display Figure T2.2-9
Figure T2.2-9 Graph of wall shear force along the ‘bottom’ wall
The irregularity of the tetrahedral mesh leads to a less smooth shear stress profile
compared to that for the hexahedral mesh. Even so, the predicted recirculation zone
length can easily be measured.
Operations
2-32 Version 4.06

Tutorial 2.3 POLYHEDRAL MESH ANALYSIS Pre-Processing
Tutorial 2.3 POLYHEDRAL MESH ANALYSIS

• Model a 3D flow using a simple polyhedral mesh
• Draw comparisons between different mesh types
Pre-Processing
Create a directory for this tutorial (called tut2-3) and copy the files provided with
STAR-CD (poly.cel, poly.vrt and poly.bnd) into it. Also copy the table
file inlet.tbl and the text files exp330.xy, hex330.xy, and tet330.xy,
which will be used to draw comparisons between the results produced by the three
meshes in this tutorial group.
• Choose the graphics driver (mesa or gl)
• Type poly in the Case Name box
• Click Continue
AIR FLOW OVER AN OBSTACLE (POLYHEDRAL MESH)
Import the cell, vertex and boundary data into pro-STAR using the pro-STAR
Model Guide and display the grid and boundaries:
• In the pro-STAR Model Guide, select folder Grids and then open the Import
Grids panel
• Check that the default cell and vertex files are poly.cel and poly.vrt,
respectively, and that both are of File Type Coded
• Click Apply
• In the pro-STAR Model Guide, select folder Locate Boundaries
• Open the Import Boundaries panel
• Check that poly.bnd is displayed in the File Name box
• Click Apply
• In the main pro-STAR window, select B > All and
• Click the Display Boundaries button to display all boundaries,
• Check the boundary locations visually and then click off the Display
Boundaries button
Version 4.06 2-33

Material Properties
Figure T2.3-1 Polyhedral Mesh
Material Turn on the two-layer turbulence model:

Properties
Guide
• Turn On Turbulence and select the k-Epsilon/High Reynolds Number from
the Model list
• Click Apply
• Under the Near-Wall Treatment tab, turn On the Standard Two-Layer option
• Select Wolfstein from the Model list
• Enter a Near Wall Thickness Distance of 0.05 m. The suitability of this value
will be checked in the “Post-Processing” section.
• Click Apply
Set the monitoring and pressure reference cell locations to be equivalent to those
chosen in the previous two tutorials:
• Select the Monitoring and Reference Data (Fluids) panel
• Change the Monitoring Cell Number to 27774
• Change the Pressure Cell Number to 9
• Click Apply
Boundary Activate the two-layer turbulence model at all wall boundaries:

Conditions
2-34 Version 4.06

Analysis Controls

• Select region 0 Wall from the list
• Change the Two-Layer option to Active
• Click Apply
Specify conditions at the inlet and outlet:

• Select region 1 Inlet from the list
• Click the file browser button and select the table file inlet.tbl
• Specify k to be 0.024 m2/s2 and Epsilon to be 0.07 m2/s3
• Click Apply
• Select region 2 Outlet from the list
• Click Apply
Analysis Select MARS as the differencing scheme for this analysis:

Controls
• Under the Differencing Schemes tab, select the MARS Differencing Scheme
for momentum and turbulence
• Click Apply
Set the frequency of data output to the solution file and specify that wall data are to
be stored in it:
• Select the Analysis Output panel
• Click Apply
Operations stage, save all model data for the polyhedral mesh, write the geometry and problem
• Select File > Save Geometry...
• Enter 0.001 as the Geometry Scale Factor
Version 4.06 2-35

Tutorial 2.3 POLYHEDRAL MESH ANALYSIS CFD Analysis
Preliminaries
CFD Analysis
• In the Analysis Preparation folder, open the Run Analysis Interactively panel.
• Click Start
The analysis will then start automatically. Convergence will be achieved within the
specified maximum number of iterations.
Post-Processing
Preliminaries Read in the results of the analysis from file poly.ccmp:
Basic Plots The plots drawn in this section are similar to those in Tutorial 2.1 and Tutorial 2.2
to enable the user to draw comparisons between them. The first of these is a velocity
vector plot:
• Click Get Data
• In the Section/Clipped tab, choose options Vector and Edge
to 0, 0, 0
• Go to the Vectors tab and then enter a Scale Factor of 0.5
• Click Apply
• Go to the Options tab and select User from the Range list
• Click Apply
• Display Figure T2.3-2 by selecting View > Axis > +Z
2-36 Version 4.06

Tutorial 2.3 POLYHEDRAL MESH ANALYSIS Post-Processing
Basic Plots
Figure T2.3-2 Velocity vector plot
The vector plot is, again, quite similar to those shown in Figure T2.1-2 and Figure
T2.2-2. However, as with the tetrahedral mesh, the recirculation zone appears
slightly shortened.
menu
• In the Section/Clipped tab choose options Contour (filled) and Edge
• Click Apply
• Under the Section/Clipped tab, click Plot to Screen to display Figure T2.3-3
Version 4.06 2-37

Basic Plots
Figure T2.3-3 Pressure contour plot
There are a few differences between Figure T2.1-3, Figure T2.2-3 and Figure
T2.3-3, but all three plots are very similar.
• In the Options tab enter values from 0 to 0.2 for the User Range
• Click Apply
• Click Get Data
• Click Get Data
• In the Options tab enter values from 0 to 2 for the User Range
• Click Apply
2-38 Version 4.06

Basic Plots
Figure T2.3-4 Contours of turbulence kinetic energy
Figure T2.3-5 Contours of turbulence dissipation rate
Version 4.06 2-39

Validation of Plot the y+ values at the wall boundaries to help verify the suitability of the mesh
Results for the turbulence model employed:
• Choose Auto Range and click Apply
• Ensure Smooth option is turned Off
• Click Get Data
• Type
VIEW -0.5 0.5 -1.0
in the I/O window

• In the main window, click the button to deselect the Display Edges option
• Select a Hidden Surface plot
• Select C > New > Type and click anywhere on the upper wall boundary
• Select Plot > Wplot to display Figure T2.3-6
The y+ values are roughly comparable to those shown for the hexahedral and
tetrahedral meshes (Figure T2.1-6 and Figure T2.2-6, respectively). This is what we
2-40 Version 4.06

Comparative Graphs
would expect because the thickness of the cell layer next to the wall is the same for
all three meshes.
• Click Get Data
• Click Cplot and reset the view by clicking the Reset View button at the bottom
right of the orientation cube to display Figure T2.3-7
The plot shows that the two-layer model has been implemented correctly.
Comparative Instead of plotting graphs showing just the current results, as in Tutorial 2.1 and
Graphs Tutorial 2.2, we will now plot graphs comparing results from all three meshes with
each other and with the experimental data. Files containing experimental data and
also those obtained in Tutorial 2.1 and Tutorial 2.2 should have been copied into the
working directory at the beginning of this tutorial.
Begin by plotting a graph of U velocity at x = 330mm, z = 0 mm against the
y-coordinate:
Version 4.06 2-41

Comparative Graphs
displayed. To avoid this, ensure that Hidden Surface plot is selected in the
drop-down menu in the main pro-STAR window.
• In the pro-STAR Model Guide, open sub-folder Graphs followed by
• Choose Post 4 for the Post data to load
• Ensure option Cell is selected from the Data Type menu
• Click Get Data
Y-axis
• Type
MEMORY MAXPRB 1000
in the I/O window to increase the number of sensors (data points) allowed
• Back on the Field Data panel, click Create Graph to see a default graph of
the data
the existing graph
Register list
• Enter -0.4 and 1.5 in the Xmin, Xmax boxes, respectively
• Enter 0.1 in the Xmajor box and click Apply
• For the Y-Axis Parameters option, change the Title to Y - mm. Also, enter 0
and 300 in the Ymin, Ymax boxes, respectively
• Select Integer as the Numbers format
• Click Apply
then enter U velocity profile at x = 330 mm in the text box underneath.
• Enter coordinates (3.5, 9.0) in the Sx and Sy boxes
• Click Apply
2-42 Version 4.06

Comparative Graphs
Now import the experimental data and the data sets from the previous two tutorials
and plot them all on the same graph:
• Open the External Data panel in the Extract Data folder
• The File containing data from the hexahedral mesh is hex330.xy. Find it
using the file manager
• The File containing data from the tetrahedral mesh is tet330.xy. Find it
using the file manager
• Select File exp330.xy using the file manager
• Select Create Graph
Using the same technique as described in Tutorial 2.1, add a legend to the plot. Note
that you will need to rename the graph registers containing the y-axis data. The
result is displayed in Figure T2.3-8.
Figure T2.3-8 Graph comparing U velocity data at x = 330 mm
Files containing data at x = 30 mm, x =230 mm and x = 380 mm are also available
and graphs of these are shown below. These graphs have been generated in the same
way as Figure T2.3-8.
Version 4.06 2-43

Comparative Graphs
2-44 Version 4.06

Final Operations
The results from the three meshes show broad agreement with the experimental
data, although all of them also show discrepancies, primarily in the recirculation
zone. In this region in particular, the hexahedral mesh is marginally more accurate
than the other two. However, examination of the model size and number of
iterations and time required to reach convergence (shown in Table 1) shows that the
polyhedral mesh may be preferable.
Table 1:Comparison of run data
No. of No. of
Mesh Time (s)a
cells iterations
Hexahedral 67699 180 412
Tetrahedral 140141 170 644
Polyhedral 60838 96 277
a.Run time will vary with computer speed
The polyhedral mesh fills the problem geometry much more efficiently, allowing
fewer cells to be used and run times to be reduced without significantly degrading
the solution accuracy. Conversely, a polyhedral mesh with as many cells as the
tetrahedral mesh in Tutorial 2.2 would be expected to produce a significant increase
in accuracy with little increase in run time.
Operations
Version 4.06 2-45

Tutorial 3 POROUS MEDIA FLOW
The tutorials in this group are designed to familiarise users with STAR-CD’s
capabilities for modelling porous media flow. A polyhedral mesh, based on the
geometry used in Meshing Tutorial 7 (see the Meshing Tutorials volume) is
provided. The tutorials demonstrate how to model flow in highly porous (isotropic
and orthotropic) or moderately porous media.
Figure T3.0-1 Mesh geometry
Version 4.06 3-1

Tutorial 3.1 FLOW IN AN ISOTROPIC, HIGHLY POROUS MEDIUM Physical Problem Description
Preliminaries
Tutorial 3.1 FLOW IN AN ISOTROPIC, HIGHLY POROUS MEDIUM

This tutorial aims to demonstrate how to:
• Model flow through an isotropic, highly porous medium
• Produce vector and contour plots
• Compute sums and averages of field data
• Check the validity of the porous model

The tutorial models an isotropic porous subdomain of length 0.03 m in the centre of
the catalyst geometry. The pressure drop per unit length is given by the equation
∆p
------ = – ( αv + β )v
L
where v is the superficial velocity through the medium and α, β are coefficients
defining the porous resistance.
Values for the resistance coefficients can be measured experimentally or derived
using various empirical relationships, depending on the exact nature of the problem
(see Chapter 8 of the Methodology volume). In this case α = 25 and β = 1500. These
values are roughly what would be expected from a porous catalyst.
Modelling Strategy
The following steps are taken to set up the model:
• In the cell table list, define a porosity index for the porous medium
• Define porous properties pertaining to that porosity index
• Select a cell range for the porous medium
• Modify the cell type of the selected cell range
Pre-Processing
Preliminaries Create a sub-directory for this tutorial called tut3-1. Copy the coded files
catalyst.cel, catalyst.vrt, catalyst.bnd and catalyst.inp
supplied with the STAR-CD installation into it.
• Enter the case name (cat_iso) in the Case Name text box
• Click Continue
• Select File > Read Input Code File... in the main pro-STAR window
• In the Read Input Coded File dialog, select the File name catalyst.inp
• Click OK
This will read default problem settings from file catalyst.inp as well as
problem geometry and boundary location definitions from the remaining three files.
3-2 Version 4.06

Tutorial 3.1 FLOW IN AN ISOTROPIC, HIGHLY POROUS MEDIUM Pre-Processing
Mesh Checking
3D FLOW THROUGH AN ISOTROPIC HIGHLY POROUS CATALYST

Mesh Verify that the mesh data are correct by selecting all cells and vertices and plotting
Checking the mesh in ‘Hidden Surface’ mode:
• In the main window, select C > All. The I/O window tells you that the mesh
read in has 29,108 cells.
• Select V > All. The I/O window tells you that the mesh has 103,488 vertices.
• Check Hidden Surface is selected as the cell plot type
• Select Plot > Up Axis > Z
• Set the viewpoint by selecting View > Isometric > -1,1,1
• Click Cplot
The mesh geometry is shown in Figure T3.0-1

Material This part of the model building is conveniently handled through a series of panels
Properties under the Thermophysical Models and Properties folder.
• Open the Thermophysical Models and Properties folder to display the
available facilities
In this tutorial, the fluid is air at standard pressure and temperature and its
temperature, density and viscosity are assumed to be constant. These conditions are
also the pro-STAR defaults, so the properties shown on the panel are acceptable.
• Select On for Turbulence to set up a turbulent flow
• Select the desired turbulence model, K-Epsilon/High Reynolds Number,
from the Model menu in the Turbulence tab
• Click Apply to save your settings
• Open the Monitoring and Reference Data (Fluids) panel to check the cell
whose flow variable values will be sent to the solution monitoring file
(cat_iso.run). The cell number appears in the Monitoring Cell Number
box and can be left at its default value of 1. The displayed Reference Data
defaults for pressure and reference pressure cell location are also acceptable.
Next, define the porous subdomain. In the cell table list, define cells of type 2 as
belonging to a porous medium (called POR1 and identified by colour 3 and porosity
index 1):
• In the Utilities toolbar, click the Cell Editor button,
• Select cell row no. 2 in the Cell Editor’s scroll list
• Select Fluid from the Cell Type menu
• Change the value in the Porosity Index box to 1
• Type POR1 in the Name box
Version 4.06 3-3

Material Properties
Specify the resistance coefficients in the global Cartesian directions:

• Go to the Thermophysical Models and Properties folder in the pro-STAR
Model Guide
• Select sub-folder Porosity
• Open the Porous Resistance and Porosity panel
• Check that option By Local Coordinate System is selected from the Define
(X1,X2,X3) menu and 1 is entered in the Coordinate System box
• Type 25 for Alpha in the X1, X2, and X3 boxes
• Type 1500 for Beta in the X1, X2, and X3 boxes
• Leave the Porosity at its default value of 1
• Click Apply
Collect all cells that will take on porous properties into a set:
• Select View > Axis > -X
• Select C > Unselect > Type and click on any of the blue extrusion-layer cells
• Click Cplot
• Select C > New > Zone
• Carefully draw a box enclosing only the central block of cells, i.e., those
within the catalyst ring. 4,101 cells will be selected
• If any cells outside the ring are accidentally selected, they may be removed
from the cell set by selecting C > Unselect > Zone and drawing a box around
them
• Click Cplot
Some of the blue extrusion-layer cells are also part of the porous subdomain. To
include these three layers, you will need to ‘grow’ the cell set three times:
• Select V > New > Cell Set
• Select C > New > Vertex Set Face
• Change the viewpoint by selecting View > Isometric > -1, 1, 1
3-4 Version 4.06

Material Properties
Figure T3.1-1 Catalyst ring
Assign the selected cells to the currently active cell type (no. 2) and plot:
• In the main window, select Tools > Cell...
• In the Cell Tool scroll list, highlight cell type number 2 and then choose
Modify > Modify Type (Cell Set)
• Click Replot. You will see that the colour of the chosen cells is now green
(colour 3), confirming the change to porous cells.
• Close the Cell Tool
Finally, select the whole mesh and display it as shown in Figure T3.1-2 to confirm
visually that the correct cells have become porous.
• In the main window, select C > All
• Click Cplot
• Select View > Isometric > -1, 1, 1
Version 4.06 3-5

Boundary conditions
Figure T3.1-2 Mesh geometry displaying porous subdomain
Boundary Specify boundary conditions for the inlet and outlet boundary regions:
conditions
• Select folder Define Boundaries and then open the Define Boundary Regions
panel
• Select region no. 1 (the inlet) in the scroll list
• Select option TI/Length from the Turbulence Switch menu
• Enter inlet conditions as shown below:
3-6 Version 4.06

Final Operations
• Click Apply
• Select region no. 2 (the outlet) in the scroll list
• The default settings are acceptable, so click Apply
Check visually that the boundary conditions are applied correctly:

• Select B > All
• Click Cplot
Operations stage, save all model data, write the problem and geometry files and exit from
pro-STAR, as shown below. Alternatively, you may run STAR interactively, as
described in the next section.
• In the main pro-STAR panel, select File > Save Geometry...
• Set the Geometry Scale Factor to 0.1. This gives the catalyst a realistic
maximum diameter of 10cm
• Click Apply. Ignore the I/O window warning regarding the scale factor
• Click Close
Version 4.06 3-7

Tutorial 3.1 FLOW IN AN ISOTROPIC, HIGHLY POROUS MEDIUM CFD Analysis
Preliminaries
CFD Analysis
• In the main pro-STAR panel, select File > Save Model
• Select Other for the Model Units option and enter a Scale Factor of 0.1
• Click Start
The analysis will then start automatically. The solution should satisfy the
convergence criteria within the specified maximum number of iterations. Check file
cat_iso.info for error messages during the run. There should be none.
Post-Processing
Preliminaries Read in the results of the analysis:
You are now ready to start the post-processing session.

Post- Load the velocity vector components and then plot the vectors:
processing
• In the Vector Data list, select item Velocity Components UVW to load all
three velocity components
• Click Get Data
• In the Section/Clipped tab, check that Vector is selected from the Option
menu and select Edge from the Edge/Mesh menu
• Change the Normal vector to -1, 0, 0
• Click Apply
• Click off the Display Boundaries button,
• Select View > SNormal View to display Figure T3.1-3
3-8 Version 4.06

Tutorial 3.1 FLOW IN AN ISOTROPIC, HIGHLY POROUS MEDIUM Post-Processing
Post- processing
Figure T3.1-3 Velocity vector plot on the y-z plane
To establish the approximate mean velocity magnitude in the porous subdomain:

• Open the Cell Tool and select cell type number 2
• Click Set Active Type
• Select C > New > Type Current and then click Cplot to display Figure
T3.1-4
Version 4.06 3-9

Post- processing
Figure T3.1-4 Velocity vectors on the y-z plane in the porous region
Note that the mean velocity magnitude through the porous cells is approximately
3.2 m/s.
Now inspect the pressure variation throughout the model:
• Select C > All
• Go back to the Load Data panel
• In the Data tab, select option Cell & Wall/Bound (Smooth) from the Data
Type menu
• In the 3-D Surface tab, select plot options Contour (filled) and Edge
3-10 Version 4.06

Analysis of Results
Figure T3.1-5 Cell-averaged filled contour plot of pressure
Analysis of Figure T3.1-5 shows that the largest pressure drop occurs across the porous cells.
Results To see the value of this drop more clearly, collect all cells within the porous region
(porosity index 1) into a set and plot pressure contours on the surface of the porous
medium.
• In the main window, select C > New > Porosity
• When the cursor appears on your screen, click any cell in the porous region.
The I/O window message should indicate that 9,621 cells have been selected
Version 4.06 3-11

Analysis of Results
Figure T3.1-6 Filled contour plot of pressure on the surface of the porous medium
Figure T3.1-6 shows that the pressure across the upstream interface of the porous
medium is non-uniform, so an average needs to be calculated. To do this, it is
necessary to collect all cells on each of the porous interfaces into a set:
• Select V > New > Cell Set Surface
• Select Tools > Cell...
• In the Cell Tool, select number 11 from the list and click Set Active Type
• Select C > New > Type Current
• Select V > Subset > Cell Set Surface
• Click Cplot
• Ensure the Display Edges and Display Mesh Lines buttons are turned off to
display Figure T3.1-7
• Select C > Subset > Zone
• Draw a box around the left-hand (upstream) group of cells
3-12 Version 4.06

Analysis of Results
Figure T3.1-7 Vertex set on the upstream boundary of the porous medium
The pressure values at the fluid cells adjacent to the porous medium can be
reasonably used to approximate the pressure values on the upstream surface of the
porous medium, given that the pressure drop across this medium is much greater
than that in the unresisted flow. In addition, cell values are more suitable than
surface vertex values since the latter are averages of cell values on either side of the
surface separating the porous from the non-porous subdomain, and may lead to a
possible underestimate of the pressure drop. This point is illustrated in Figure
T3.1-8.
Version 4.06 3-13

Analysis of Results
Porous
sub-
domain
Actual surface
value
Values at
Pressure
adjacent
cells
Vertex value
y-coordinate
Figure T3.1-8 Diagram illustrating the reason for choosing cell-centred pressure values
Load the pressure values and their corresponding cell volumes into pro-STAR’s
post registers:
• Select Post > Operate...
• In the Post Register Operations dialog, select Function Category Load cell
data > Pressure
• Choose to Load cell pressure into Register 5 Using Relative Values
• Click Apply
• Select Function Category Load cell data > Volume
• Select Register 6
• Click Apply
The average pressure value should be accurately volume-weighted. If the cell

values were averaged without volume-weighting, the small near-wall cells would be
over-represented and the pressure magnitude would thus be underestimated.
To calculate the pressure-volume product for each cell:
3-14 Version 4.06

Analysis of Results
• Select Function Category Multi-register > Multiply

• Select Register 4 = Register 5 * Register 6
• Click Apply then Close
Sum the pressure-volume product on the upstream surface of the porous medium:
• In the I/O window, type *get prs1 rtot 4. A value of 1.505 should be
displayed.
Sum the cell volumes on the upstream surface of the porous medium:
• In the I/O window, type *get vol1 rtot 6. A value of 0.822e-2 should be
displayed.
The volume-weighted average pressure across the upstream surface is the first of
these parameters divided by the second, i.e., 183.09 Pa.
The pressure across the downstream surface of the porous medium is also
non-uniform, though to a much lesser degree. The average pressure across the
non-porous cells on this surface can be calculated similarly and was found to be
33.88 Pa. The average pressure drop is therefore 149.21 Pa compared to a
theoretical pressure drop of 151.68 Pa. Since the theoretical value assumes a
constant superficial velocity of 3.2 m/s throughout the porous medium, while the
calculated velocity varies, the 1.6% discrepancy between the theoretical and
calculated pressure drops is acceptable.
The turbulence parameters can be inspected by plotting the relevant contours:
• Select C > All
• Select View > SNormal View
• Check Data Type Cell & Wall/Bound (Smooth) is selected
• Click Get Data
• Click Plot To Screen and Cplot to display Figure T3.1-9
• In the Load Data panel, select item Dissipation Rate from the Scalar Data
list
• Click Get Data
Version 4.06 3-15

Analysis of Results
Figure T3.1-9 Turbulence kinetic energy contour plot
Figure T3.1-10 Dissipation rate contour plot
3-16 Version 4.06

Analysis of Results
Turbulence parameters are fixed in the porous medium by assuming a turbulence

intensity of 10% and length scale of 0.01 m. These correspond to values of 0.154
m2/s2 and 0.989 m2/s3 for the turbulence kinetic energy and dissipation rate,
respectively. Fixing the turbulence parameters within the porous subdomain causes
the flow downstream of it to exhibit very little turbulence. Note that such settings
may be changed via the Turbulence Properties panel within the Thermophysical
Models and Properties > Porosity sub-folder in the pro-STAR Model Guide.
Finally, confirm that STAR-CD’s porous model has been used correctly by
normalising the resistance coefficients as follows (again assuming a superficial
through-flow velocity of 3.2 m/s):
αL
------- = 0.622
ρ
βL
-------- = 11.67
ρV
The simplified momentum equation employed within the porous medium is only
valid if the sum of the normalised parameters is >> 1. This condition is satisfied here
and the total resistance term is one order of magnitude greater than the convection
term. Therefore, the use of the porosity model is justified.
Quit the pro-STAR session by choosing:
Version 4.06 3-17

Tutorial 3.2 FLOW IN AN ORTHOTROPIC, HIGHLY POROUS MEDIUM Physical Problem Description
Preliminaries
Tutorial 3.2 FLOW IN AN ORTHOTROPIC, HIGHLY POROUS

MEDIUM
• Model flow through an orthotropic, highly porous medium
• Produce vector and contour plots
• Compute sums and averages of field data
• Check the validity of the porous model

In this tutorial, the isotropic, highly porous medium specified in Tutorial 3.1 is
re-defined as an orthotropic porous medium. To this end, resistance coefficients are
set up so as to prevent flow along the x- and z-directions of the global Cartesian
coordinate system (see Figure T3.2-1). The values of these coefficients in the
y-direction are the same as in Tutorial 3.1, i.e.
αy = 25 and βy = 1500
Modelling Strategy
The modelling steps used in setting up this case are identical to those described in
Tutorial 3.1, except that the porous medium now has orthotropic properties.
Pre-Processing
Preliminaries A number of preliminary file-copying operations are needed for proper operation of
this tutorial, as follows:
• Create a sub-directory for the tutorial called tut3-2 and copy the model file
generated in Tutorial 3.1 (i.e., cat_iso.mdl) into it
• Rename this file cat_ortho.mdl
• Since the solution obtained in Tutorial 3.1 will act as the starting point of the
current analysis, it is also necessary to copy the solution file for that case
(cat_iso.ccmp) to the current directory
Start up the pro-STAR interface:

• Accept the default case name (cat_ortho) displayed in the Case Name text
box
• Select the Resume From Existing .mdl File option
• Deselect the Append to Previous .echo File option
• Click Continue
The above reads the data in file cat_ortho.mdl and sets up the model as it was
at the end of Tutorial 3.1.
Version 4.06 3-19

Tutorial 3.2 FLOW IN AN ORTHOTROPIC, HIGHLY POROUS MEDIUM Pre-Processing
Material Properties
• In the Title text box, change the title to:
3D FLOW THROUGH AN ORTHOTROPIC HIGHLY POROUS

CATALYST
Check the model geometry retrieved from file cat_ortho.mdl

• Select C > All
• In the main window, click Cplot
• Turn off the Display Boundaries option by clicking the button, , to
Figure T3.2-1 Mesh Geometry
Material Enter appropriate resistance coefficients for the porous medium in the Cartesian
Properties coordinate system:
• Go to the pro-STAR Model Guide and select folder Thermophysical Models
and Properties
• Select sub-folder Porosity
• Open the Porous Resistance and Porosity panel
• Check that option By Local Coordinate System is selected from the Define
(X1,X2,X3) menu and 1 is entered in the Coordinate System box
• Type 1e6 in the X1 boxes for Alpha and Beta
• Check that 25 is entered in the X2 box for Alpha and 1500 is entered in the X2
box for Beta
• Type 1e6 in the X3 boxes for Alpha and Beta
3-20 Version 4.06

Tutorial 3.2 FLOW IN AN ORTHOTROPIC, HIGHLY POROUS MEDIUM CFD Analysis
Run Time Controls
• Click Apply
Run Time Set restart options so that the analysis will restart from the solution file of Tutorial
Controls 3.1:
• Select folder Analysis Preparation and open the Restart panel
• Select Standard Restart from the Restart File Option list
• Click the browser button next to the Restart File box, select file
cat_iso.ccmp from the browser dialog and then click Open
• Click Apply
• Ensure that the default value for the Geometry Scale Factor is 0.1
CFD Analysis
• Check that the Scale Factor is set to 0.1 then click Start
The analysis will then start automatically. The solution should converge within the
specified maximum number of iterations. Check file cat_ortho.info for error
messages during the run.
Post-Processing
You are now ready to start the post-processing session
Post- Load the velocity vector components and plot the vectors:
processing
• Click Get Data
• In the Section/Clipped tab, check that Vector is selected from the Option
Version 4.06 3-21

Tutorial 3.2 FLOW IN AN ORTHOTROPIC, HIGHLY POROUS MEDIUM Post-Processing
Post- processing
menu and select Edge from the Edge/Mesh menu

• Change the Normal vector to -1, 0, 0
• Click Apply
Figure T3.2-2 Velocity vectors on the y-z plane
Initial comparison of Figure T3.2-2 with the equivalent plot for the isotropic porous
medium, Figure T3.1-3, reveals few apparent differences between them. To
examine any variations more closely, a velocity magnitude plot in the porous
subdomain is necessary:
• Open the Cell Tool and select Cell Type number 2
• Select C > New > Type Current and click Cplot to display Figure T3.2-3
3-22 Version 4.06

Post- processing
Figure T3.2-3 Velocity vectors on the y-z plane in the porous subdomain
The significant difference between Figure T3.2-3 and the equivalent plot for the
isotropic porous medium, Figure T3.1-4, is that the orthotropic property prevents
the bulk of the fluid flowing through the centre of the model from spreading
outwards and slowing down, as it does in the isotropic case. Note that the mean
velocity magnitude in the porous subdomain is approximately 3.2 m/s.
Now inspect the cell-based pressure variation:
• Select C > All
• Select Data Type Cell & Wall/Bound (Smooth)
• In the Scalar Data list, select item Pressure
• Click Get Data
Version 4.06 3-23

Post- processing
Figure T3.2-4 Cell-averaged pressure plot
Before calculating the pressure drop across the catalyst, plot the cell-centred
pressure in the porous subdomain:
• Select C > New > Porosity and click anywhere inside the porous subdomain
3-24 Version 4.06

Post- processing
Figure T3.2-5 Cell-averaged pressure plot in the porous subdomain
The pressure across the surfaces of the porous medium is clearly non-uniform, so
averages should be calculated. For the downstream surface:
• Select V > New > Cell Set Surface
• In the Cell Tool, select number 11 from the list and click Set Active Type
• Select C > New > Type Current
• Select V > Subset > Cell Set Surface
• Click Cplot
• Ensure Display Edges and Display Mesh Lines buttons are turned off
• Select C > Subset > Zone
• Draw a box around the right-hand (downstream) group of cells
• Select Post > Operate...
• Select Function Category Load cell data > Pressure
• Select Register 5 using Relative Values
• Click Apply
• Select Function Category Load cell data > Volume
• Select Register 6
• Click Apply
• Select Function Category Multi-register > Multiply
• Select Register 4 = Register 5 * Register 6
• Click Apply then Close
• In the I/O window type *get prs2 rtot 4. A value of 0.280 should be
Version 4.06 3-25

Analysis of Results
displayed.
• In the I/O window type *get vol2 rtot 6. A value of 0.841e-2 should be
displayed.
The volume-weighted average pressure across the downstream surface is the first of
these parameters divided by the second, i.e., 33.29 Pa. The pressure across the
upstream surface of the porous subdomain can be calculated similarly and found to
be 182.07 Pa.
Analysis of The above figures give an average pressure drop of 148.78 Pa. This may be
Results compared with the expected pressure drop of 151.68 Pa, based on an average cell
velocity of 3.2 m/s. The user can verify these calculations.
The turbulence parameters may be inspected by plotting the relevant contours:
• Select C > All
• Check Data Type Cell & Wall/Bound (Smooth) is selected
• Click Get Data
• Click Plot To Screen
• In the Load Data panel, select item Dissipation Rate from the Scalar Data
list
• Click Get Data
3-26 Version 4.06

Analysis of Results
Figure T3.2-6 Contour plot of turbulence kinetic energy
Figure T3.2-7 Contour plot of dissipation rate
Version 4.06 3-27

Analysis of Results
Turbulence parameters are fixed in the porous medium by assuming a turbulence

intensity of 10% and length scale of 0.01 m. Consequently, the values for turbulence
kinetic energy and its dissipation rate should be roughly 0.154 m2/s2 and 0.989
m2/s3, respectively, based on a velocity magnitude of 3.2 m/s. As in Tutorial 3.1,
fixing the turbulence parameters in this way causes the flow downstream of the
porous medium to exhibit very little turbulence.
The normalised resistance coefficients have the same values as those in Tutorial
3.1. Therefore, the same conclusions about the validity of using the STAR-CD
porous model can be drawn in this case.
Quit the pro-STAR session by choosing:
3-28 Version 4.06

Tutorial 4 FREE-SURFACE AND CAVITATION
The next three tutorials demonstrate how to set up and perform simulations of
free-surface and cavitating flows. All three tutorials use the same ready-to-use
polyhedral mesh, supplied in file gridfs.ccmg and displayed in Figure T4.0-1.
The mesh consists of a single layer of polygonal prisms, suitable for performing a
planar, two-dimensional flow analysis. Examples of mesh generation are provided
in the Meshing Tutorials volume.
Figure T4.0-1 Geometry plot showing the mesh, distribution of cell types and generic
boundary region names
Version 4.06 4-1

Tutorial 4.1 GRAVITY-DRIVEN FLOW WITH A FREE SURFACE Physical Problem Description
Preliminaries
Tutorial 4.1 GRAVITY-DRIVEN FLOW WITH A FREE SURFACE

• Perform an unsteady flow simulation using the transient SIMPLE algorithm
• Activate STAR-CD’s interface-capturing method for free-surface flows
• Post-process the simulation results
• Create animations using a neutral plot file together with pro-STAR’s
Animation utility

The tutorial simulates gravity-driven fluid flow through a channel connecting two
chambers. The one on the left is represented by the green-coloured cells shown in
Figure T4.0-1 and the one on the right by the red-coloured cells. Given that this is
a 2D simulation, the front and back planes of Figure T4.0-1 are symmetry planes.
All other boundaries are solid walls except for the horizontal top surfaces where a
constant (atmospheric) static pressure is applied.
Initially, the left chamber is filled with liquid and the right one is filled with air.
Under the action of gravity, liquid flows into the right chamber under assumed
turbulent conditions. At the same time, liquid also flows in through the top left
boundary so as to maintain the fluid level constant. After some time, the free surface
on the right chamber settles at the level of the top boundary in the left chamber.
Modelling Strategy
During mesh generation, the cells on the right vessel were assigned to cell type 1
and those on the left to cell type 2. This was done in order to facilitate definition of
the initial liquid and air distribution within the model. Note that in some cases (e.g.
when inlet boundary conditions are present), one may start with the whole solution
domain filled by a single fluid phase. However, if pressure boundary conditions and
gravity are used to drive the flow, both phases need to be present within the domain.
Cell typing then offers a convenient way of assigning “heavy” and “light” fluid
characteristics to cells and thus make for a simple initialization process.
Pre-Processing
Preliminaries Create a directory for the tutorial called tut4-1 and copy file gridfs.ccmg
supplied with the STAR-CD installation into it. In this directory:
• Enter the case name (gravfs) in the Case Name text box
• Click Continue
Define a transient simulation of a free-surface flow and give the case a title:
• Open the Analysis Features panel in the pro-STAR Model Guide
• Select Transient for the Time Domain option
• Select On for the Free Surface option
4-2 Version 4.06

Tutorial 4.1 GRAVITY-DRIVEN FLOW WITH A FREE SURFACE Pre-Processing
Mesh Import & Checking
• Click Apply
GRAVITY-DRIVEN FREE SURFACE FLOW

Mesh Import To import and display the mesh:
& Checking
• Select the Grids folder in the pro-STAR Model Guide
• Open the Import Grids panel
• Select the CCM option from the Format list
• Enter gridfs.ccmg as the Geometry File name
• Check that the State Name entry is set to default
• Click Apply
• In the main window, select C > All to put all cells into the current cell set
• Check that the Geometry plot option and Hidden Surface plot type are
selected
• Click Cplot to display the grid shown in Figure T4.0-1
The generic names of all boundary regions are indicated in Figure T4.0-1. Their
locations can be displayed on the grid plot via the following steps:
• Select the Locate Boundaries folder in the pro-STAR Model Guide
• Open the Create Boundaries panel
• Select each region shown on the list in turn (except no. 0) and then click Plot
Region to display its location
Material To examine the free-surface flow modelling options:
Properties
• Select the Free Surface folder in the pro-STAR Model Guide
• Open the Controls panel to inspect the default settings and confirm that they
are suitable for the current problem
• Open the Molecular Properties (Free Surface) panel
• Note that, by default, the Light Fluid is AIR and the Heavy Fluid is H2O.
Alternative fluids may be selected from the database, if required, but the
defaults are suitable for this case.
To specify the magnitude and direction of the gravity force:

• Select the Thermophysical Models and Properties folder in the pro-STAR
Model Guide
• Open the Gravity panel
• Change the Acceleration due to gravity to 9.81 m/s2
• Change the Direction of Gravity Force to (0, -1, 0) in coordinate system 1
• Click Apply
The remaining material properties are specified using panels in the Liquids and
Gases folder. These panels feature a Material # option, enabling you to specify
different properties for each fluid material used. For the heavy and light fluids
defined in free-surface problems, this functionality is not relevant since those
Version 4.06 4-3

Initialization
properties specified for the light fluid (Material # 1) are also applied automatically
to the heavy fluid (Material # 2).
Turn on turbulence modelling and select an appropriate model:
• Select the Liquids and Gases folder and open the Turbulence Models panel
• Check that the material selected at the top of the panel is set to Material # 1
• Select the k-Epsilon/High Reynolds Number from the Model list
• Click Apply
To select monitoring and pressure reference locations:

• Click the mouse icon in the Monitoring Information section to select the
monitoring location
• In the main pro-STAR window, select a cell just to the right of the narrow
section. This location is chosen because large variations in field variable
values are expected here.
• In the Reference Data section, click the mouse icon to select the reference
pressure cell number
• In the main pro-STAR window, click on a cell at the top right-hand corner.
This location is chosen because this corner will always contain air and so the
pressure variations are likely to be minimal.
• Click Apply
To turn on buoyancy:
• Open the Buoyancy panel
• Tick the checkbox to enable Buoyancy
• The default values for Location and Density are suitable so click Apply
Initialization Initially, the left-hand vessel contains only water and the right-hand vessel only air.
This initial distribution is specified by associating the two fluids with different cell
types:
• Click the button in the main pro-STAR window to open the Cell Editor
• Select row no 1 in the list, i.e., the cell type of the red-coloured cells
• Check that the Initial Free Surface Material setting is Light
• Select row no 2 in the list, i.e., the cell type of the green-coloured cells
• Select option Heavy from the Initial Free Surface Material menu
Boundary First, define the wall boundary conditions:
Conditions
• Select the Define Boundaries folder and open the Define Boundary Regions
panel
• In the region list, select region 1 named Wall
• Change the Region Type to Wall and click Apply
• Repeat this operation for the regions named Left, Right, and Bottom
Next, define the pressure boundary conditions:
• Select region 5 named TopRight
4-4 Version 4.06

Scalar Boundaries
• Change the Region Type to Pressure

• Change the Pressure Option to Static and ensure that the Pressure value is set
to 0 Pa
• Check that the Environment Pressure and Mean options are turned Off. These
options are not applicable to free-surface flows.
• Ensure that None is selected for Turbulence Switch and UVW is Off
• Click Apply
• Repeat this process for region 7 named TopLeft
• No action is needed for the regions named Back and Front as these are
already defined as symmetry planes in the supplied mesh geometry file
Scalar All free-surface analyses involve a scalar called VOF, representing the volume
Boundaries fraction of the heavy fluid. The values of this scalar at pressure boundaries must be
specified as follows:
• Open the Scalar Boundaries panel and ensure that the currently selected
Scalar is VOF
• Select region 5 from the Boundary Region list
• Check that the Boundary Condition is set to Constant and that the boundary
Value is 0. This in effect enforces the condition that only air may enter the
domain through this boundary. Note, however, that either fluid may leave
through the boundary.
• Click Apply
• Select region 7 from the Boundary Region list
• Check that the Boundary Condition is set to Constant and then set the
boundary Value to 1. This in effect enforces the condition that only water may
enter the domain through this boundary.
• Click Apply
Analysis The transient SIMPLE solution algorithm must be used for free-surface problems.
Controls This tutorial will also use the AMG solver. To specify these settings:
• Select the Analysis Controls folder
• Select the Solution Method panel
• Change the Maximum Number of Outer Iterations to 10
• Change the Scalar Method menu setting to AMG and check that the Temporal
Discretization option is set as Euler Implicit. This is the only supported
temporal discretization scheme for free-surface flow problems
• Click Apply
This tutorial involves a two-dimensional analysis so it is not necessary to solve for

the momentum component in the z-direction. To turn this off and specify
appropriate settings for the solver parameters and differencing schemes:
• Select the Primary Variables panel
• Under the Equation Status tab, deselect the W-Momentum flow variable
• Click Apply
• Under the Solver Parameters tab, set the Relaxation Factor for the momentum
and turbulence equations to 0.8
• Set the Relaxation Factor for the pressure equation to 0.4 (higher than the
default)
Version 4.06 4-5

Run Time Controls
• Set the Residual Tolerance for all variables to 0.01

• Set the Number of Sweeps to 100 for all variables
• Click Apply
• Under the Differencing Schemes tab, check that the UD scheme is selected for
all variables
• Click Apply
• Open the Additional Scalars (Controls) panel
• Select scalar no. 1 (VOF) and check that the Under-Relaxation Factor is set
to 0.8
• Leave all other settings at their default values and click Apply
Specify what data should be written to the results (.ccmp) file and the transient
post data (.ccmt) file:
• Open the Analysis Output panel
• Under the Post tab, check that the Write Solution File option is selected with
an Output Frequency of 100 time steps
• Click Apply
• Under the Transient tab, set the Output interval to 0.25 seconds
• Select the Turb Kinetic Energy output variable from the list and enable the
Post option
• Repeat for the VOF variable
• Click Apply
Run Time To specify the run time and time step size:
Controls
• Select the Analysis Preparation folder
• Set the Run time control for the analysis to Run for a Time of 5 seconds
• Click Apply
• In the Time Step Option section, specify the Time step for period as 0.005
seconds. This means that the run will continue for 1,000 time steps.
• Click Set
Although you can run the simulation interactively from the pro-STAR Model
Guide, it is more common to run lengthy transient simulations from the command
line. To write out the problem and geometry files and save the model file:
• In the Save Geometry File dialog, check that 1 is entered as the Geometry
Scale Factor
You can stay within the current pro-STAR session by either moving pro-STAR into
the background or by opening another terminal window to start up the STAR-CD
solver.
4-6 Version 4.06

Tutorial 4.1 GRAVITY-DRIVEN FLOW WITH A FREE SURFACE CFD Analysis
Preliminaries
CFD Analysis
Check that you are in the current working directory and then start the simulation by
typing:
star
at the command line. The run should only take a few minutes. The screen output will
show that, for some time steps, the residuals fail to converge to the specified
tolerance within the specified maximum number of outer iterations. However, the
monitored values do converge, so the maximum number of outer iterations need not
be increased for this case.
Post-Processing
Preliminaries Start the post-processing session by opening the transient post data file:
• In the pro-STAR Model Guide, select the Post-Processing folder and then
open the Load Data panel
• Under the File(s) tab, select Transient as the Analysis option
• Click Add File
• Select file gravfs.ccmt from the Transient list
• Click Open Transient file
The following steps describe how to create static plots of flow variables at specified
times and also how to create an animation from a sequence of static plots that show
how the flow varies over time.
Basic Plots The first plot will show how the water front moves through the connecting channel
into the right vessel, and how the free surface deforms during this process. The plot
superimposes velocity vectors on a contour plot of the VOF variable, the latter
showing the distribution of air and water in the solution domain:
• Under the File(s) tab of the Load Data panel, select the first time step from
the Time Step list and click Store Time to load the data.
• Under the Data tab, select Data Type Cell & Wall/Bound (Smooth)
• Select Velocity Components UV (2D vectors) from the Vector Data list
• Select VOF from the Scalar Data list
• Click Get Data
• Under the 3-D Surface tab, select plot Option Vector & Contour and Edge
for the Edge/Mesh option
• Click Plot to Screen to display VOF contours and velocity vectors
simultaneously, as computed after 50 time steps. This plot is shown in Figure
T4.1-1
Version 4.06 4-7

Tutorial 4.1 GRAVITY-DRIVEN FLOW WITH A FREE SURFACE Post-Processing
Basic Plots
Figure T4.1-1 Volume fraction and velocity vectors after 50 time steps (0.25 s)
In some situations, usually when the mesh density varies significantly within the
domain, it may be useful to use a presentation grid. This prevents overcrowding of
velocity vectors in regions where the mesh is very fine. A description of how to do
this is given in Tutorial 1.1.
Figure T4.1-1 shows water flowing into the domain through the left pressure
boundary (TopLeft) and moving towards the right chamber, displacing air through
the right pressure boundary (TopRight) as it progresses. This is expected and, since
the results look plausible, you may continue plotting contours of VOF alone, or in
combination with vectors, or vectors alone for subsequent time steps. You may also
plot other quantities such as pressure or turbulent kinetic energy, since these were
also stored in the transient post data file. To do this, repeat the steps listed above
changing the time step selected in the File(s) tab and the variables selected in the
Data tab as desired. Pressure contours after 100, 600, and 1000 time steps are shown
in Figure T4.1-2. This type of plot was created by selecting options Contour (filled)
and Edge on the 3-D Surface tab.
4-8 Version 4.06

Animations
Figure T4.1-2 Pressure contours after 100 (top), 600 (middle) and 1000 (bottom) time
steps
Note how, over time, the pressure profile becomes increasingly stratified. If the run
duration is sufficiently extended, an equilibrium point will be reached at which the
fluids become stationary and the pressure contours appear horizontal and evenly
spaced.
Animations pro-STAR loops can be used to produce on-screen animations, as described in
Tutorial 8.2 and Tutorial 12.3. However, animations can also be produced by
writing data to a neutral plot file and using a command to replay them. The
advantage of this method is primarily in improved presentation, as an animation
replayed from a neutral plot file will usually run faster and more smoothly than one
Version 4.06 4-9

Animations
created directly on screen. The animation created here uses contours of the VOF
variable, which must first be displayed as static contour plots:
• Under the File(s) tab of the Load Data panel, select the first time step in the
Time Step list
• Click Store Time
• Under the Data tab, select VOF from the Scalar Data list
• Click Get Data
• Click Replot in the main pro-STAR window to display a plot similar to
Figure T4.1-1 but without the vectors. If such a plot does not appear, check
that Contour plot option and Hidden Surface plot type are selected.
A command sequence is now used to set up, write and play back an animation
sequence showing how the VOF distribution changes during the analysis. Enter the
following commands in the I/O window for the animation:
nfil,gravfs.plot
term,,file,rast
SURFSEL,ON
REPL
*define
STORE NEXT
GETV CONC 1
REPL
*end
*loop,0,20
distance,auto
center,auto
term,,x
play,gravfs.plot,1,20,1,1
The animation shows the free-surface movement for the first 5 seconds. It will
clearly take significantly longer for equilibrium to be reached. You may, if you
wish, run the analysis for a longer period of time by:
• Increasing the Time the analysis is Run for specified in the Run Time Controls
panel
• Writing a new problem file
• Running STAR again
The tutorial is now complete. To quit pro-STAR:

• Select File > Quit > Quit, Nosave
4-10 Version 4.06

Tutorial 4.2 FORCED FREE-SURFACE FLOW WITH CAPILLARY EFFECTS Physical Problem Description
Mesh Import & Checking
Tutorial 4.2 FORCED FREE-SURFACE FLOW WITH CAPILLARY

EFFECTS
This tutorial aims to demonstrate:
• How to simulate free-surface flow in which capillary effects are important
• The appearance of parasitic currents under certain conditions in such analyses

This tutorial simulates forced flow of liquid glycerine through a nozzle into an
air-filled chamber at atmospheric pressure. The mesh used is the same as that of
Tutorial 4.1 except that, in this instance, the problem’s physical dimensions are
scaled down by a factor of 1,000. This gives a nozzle width of about 1 mm. The
boundary region labelled “Left” in Figure T4.0-1 is now an inlet with fluid velocity
of 1 mm/s and the boundary region labelled “Right” is at atmospheric pressure. The
boundary regions labelled “Bottom”, “Front” and “Back” are symmetry planes, and
all other regions are solid walls.
Initially, the chamber behind the nozzle (cell type 2, coloured green in Figure
T4.0-1) is filled with liquid and the remainder of the solution domain is filled with
air. For the given geometry and inlet velocity, the flow can be assumed to be
laminar. Gravity acts in the positive x-direction and so helps to drive the fluid flow
through the nozzle. The shape of the free surface that develops in the chamber
downstream of the nozzle depends upon the contact angle between liquid and wall.
Pre-Processing
Create a directory for the tutorial called tut4-2 and copy file gridfs.ccmg
• Enter the case name (forcfs) in the Case Name text box
• Click Continue
Define a transient simulation of a free-surface flow and give the case a title:
• Select Transient in the Time Domain section
• Select On in the Free Surface section
• Click Apply
FORCED FREE-SURFACE FLOW WITH CAPILLARY EFFECTS

& Checking
Version 4.06 4-11

Tutorial 4.2 FORCED FREE-SURFACE FLOW WITH CAPILLARY EFFECTS Pre-Processing
Material Properties
• Select the CCM button from the Format list

• Click Apply
selected
Material Examine the free-surface flow modelling options and material property settings:
Properties
• Open the Controls panel
• Turn On Surface Tension
• Click Apply
• Choose Define Heavy Fluid material from the Action menu at the top of the
panel
• Next choose Select material from database from the Action menu
• Select C3 H803_l GLYCERINE(L) from the list that appears
• Select Define Heavy Fluid material to return to that panel
• Enter 45 degrees for the Contact Angle at Wall
• Click Apply
• Select Define Light Fluid material from the menu
• The default fluid, AIR, is suitable for this case so click Apply
To select other physical models and initialize the flow variables:

• Select the Thermophysical Models and Properties folder and open the Gravity
panel
• Change the Acceleration value to 9.81 m/s2
• Change the Direction of Gravity Force to (1, 0, 0) in coordinate system 1
• Click Apply
• Select the Liquids and Gases folder and open the Turbulence Models panel
• Check that Turbulence is switched Off so that the flow is treated as laminar

monitoring location
• Click Apply
4-12 Version 4.06

Initialization
To turn on buoyancy:
• Tick the checkbox to enable Buoyancy
• The default values for Location and Density are suitable so click Apply
Initialization Initially, the left-hand vessel contains only glycerine and the right-hand vessel only
air. This initial distribution is specified by associating the two fluids with different
cell types:
Boundary To define boundary conditions for this simulation:
Conditions
panel
• In the region list, select region number 1 named Wall
• Repeat this operation for the regions named TopRight and TopLeft
• Select region 3, named Right, from the list
• Change the Pressure Option to Static
• Click Apply
• Select region 2, named Left
• Change the Region Type to Inlet
• Change the U velocity to 0.001 m/s
• Ensure that 1 is selected for Coordinate System and Density is set to 1.205
• Select Velocity for the Flow Switch option
• Click Apply
No action is needed for the regions named “Back”, “Front” and “Bottom” as these
are already defined as symmetry planes in the supplied mesh geometry file.
Scalar boundary conditions must also be defined such that only glycerine enters
through the inlet boundary and, in the case of backflow, only air enters through the
pressure boundary:
• Open the Scalar Boundaries panel and ensure that the currently selected
Scalar is VOF
• Select region 2, Inlet from the Boundary Region list
• Check that the Boundary Condition is set to Constant
• Change the boundary Value to 1
• Click Apply
• The boundary Value for Boundary Region 3, Pressure is set to 0 by default so
no change is required
Version 4.06 4-13

Analysis Controls
• Open the Solution Method panel
Discretization option is set as Euler Implicit, the only supported temporal
discretization scheme for free-surface flow problems
• Click Apply

• Click Apply
equations to 0.8
• Set the Relaxation Factor for the pressure equation to 0.4 (higher than the
default)
• Click Apply
• Under the Differencing Schemes tab, check that the UD scheme is selected for
the momentum flow variables
• Click Apply
• Select scalar no. 1 (VOF) and check that the Under-Relaxation Factor is set
to 0.8
• Click Apply
• Select the VOF output variable from the list and enable the Post option
• Click Apply
Controls
• Set the Run time control for the analysis to Run for a Time of 2 seconds
• Click Apply
• In the Time Step Option section, check that the Time step for period is 0.001
seconds. This means that the run will continue for 2,000 time steps
4-14 Version 4.06
Tutorial 4.2 FORCED FREE-SURFACE FLOW WITH CAPILLARY EFFECTS CFD Analysis
Preliminaries
• Click Set
• In the Save Geometry File dialog, change the Geometry Scale Factor to 0.001
to convert the model units to millimetres
solver.
CFD Analysis
typing:
star
at the command line. The analysis should only take a few minutes. The output on
the screen will show that the outer iterations are converging to the specified
tolerance for each time step.
Post-Processing
• Click Add File
• Select file forcfs.ccmt from the Transient list
The remainder of this tutorial demonstrates how to create static plots of flow
variables at specified times. Animated plots are not produced here as the methods
for creating them are described in detail in other tutorials, namely Tutorial 4.1,
Tutorial 8.2 and Tutorial 12.3.
Basic Plots First, plot the VOF distribution and velocity vectors after 1,700 time steps:
• Under the File(s) tab of the Load Data panel, select the file for step number
1700 from the Time Step list
• Click Store Time to load the data
• Select VOF from the Scalar Data list
Version 4.06 4-15

Tutorial 4.2 FORCED FREE-SURFACE FLOW WITH CAPILLARY EFFECTS Post-Processing
Basic Plots
• Click Get Data

• Click Plot To Screen. Note that the angle the free surface makes with the wall
is ~45o
To plot these contours in the same window as a velocity vector plot:
• Type the following command in the I/O window:
CENTER 0.5 -0.1 0.0
• Click Replot
• Select Plot > Display > Overlay
• Type the following command in the I/O window:
CENTER 0.5 4.1 0.0
• Under the Data tab of the Load Data panel, select Velocity Components UV
(2D vectors) from the Vector Data list
• Click Get Data
• Under the Options tab, ensure that Auto Range is selected and click Apply
Figure T4.2-1 Distribution of volume fraction (upper) and velocity vectors (lower) for a
contact angle of 45 degrees, after 1,700 time steps
4-16 Version 4.06

Basic Plots
• Turn off the overlay mode by selecting Plot > Display > Overlay
To examine how changing the contact angle affects the resulting free surface:
• Select the Free Surface folder in the pro-STAR Model Guide and open the
Molecular Properties (Free Surface) panel
• Select Define Heavy Fluid material from the Action menu and change
Contact Angle at Wall to 150
• Click Apply
• Write the problem file and re-run the analysis
• Follow the procedure described above to plot contours of volume fraction and
velocity vectors after 1,700 time steps. The resulting plot is shown in Figure
T4.2-2
Figure T4.2-2 Distribution of volume fraction (upper) and velocity vectors (lower) for a
contact angle of 150 degrees, after 1,700 time steps (with
interface-sharpening)
The increase in contact angle means that the wall is now non-wetting, i.e., the liquid
does not spread along the wall after passing through the nozzle, but instead
continues to flow in the direction of the gravity force. If the solution domain was
extended further to the right and the analysis was run for longer, the droplet forming
behind the nozzle would eventually detach from it. This would occur because
gravity would cause the droplet to accelerate to a speed greater than that in the
nozzle. The velocity vector field shows abnormally high velocity vectors at a cell
close to the wall boundary. This is caused by numerical inaccuracies arising from
poor cell quality close to this boundary. Using a few layers of hexahedral cells next
Version 4.06 4-17

Basic Plots
to the wall could remove this abnormality.

In some applications, it may be necessary to specify different contact angles on
different walls. This is not possible using the current pro-STAR Model Guide
facilities since the contact angle is specified as a heavy fluid property. However, this
value can be overridden, where necessary, via user coding. The latter is activated by
selecting User rather than Constant for the Surface Tension in the Heavy Fluid
section of the Molecular Properties (Free Surface) panel. The relevant user
subroutine, FSTEN, can then be modified, as required.
• In the main window, select File > Quit > Quit, Nosave
4-18 Version 4.06

Tutorial 4.3 FORCED FREE-SURFACE FLOW WITH CAVITATION Physical Problem Description
Preliminaries
Tutorial 4.3 FORCED FREE-SURFACE FLOW WITH CAVITATION

• Perform a simulation of a free-surface flow in which cavitation takes place
• Display free-surface and cavitation data in the same plot
• Change the Post Colormap settings to improve the appearance of contour
plots

This tutorial models the forced flow of water through a nozzle into an air-filled
chamber at atmospheric pressure. The geometry, mesh and scale factor (0.001) are
the same as those used in Tutorial 4.2. The boundary labelled “Left” in Figure
T4.0-1 is at a static pressure of 500 bar and the boundary labelled “Right” is at
atmospheric pressure. The boundaries labelled “Bottom”, “Front” and “Back” are
symmetry planes, and all other boundaries are solid walls. Initially, the nozzle is
filled with liquid (cell type 2) and the downstream chamber is filled with air (cell
type 1). The sharp corner at the entrance into the narrow nozzle combined with the
flow acceleration will produce a low pressure region in which cavitation will take
place.
Pre-Processing
Preliminaries Create a directory for the tutorial called tut4-3 and copy file gridfs.ccmg
• Enter the case name (cavit) in the Case Name text box
• Click Continue
Define a transient simulation and activate the free-surface and cavitation modelling
options:
• Select Transient for the Time Domain option
• Select On for the Free Surface option
• Select On for the Cavitation option
• Click Apply
Give the case a title:

FORCED FREE-SURFACE FLOW WITH CAVITATION

& Checking
Version 4.06 4-19

Tutorial 4.3 FORCED FREE-SURFACE FLOW WITH CAVITATION Pre-Processing
Material Properties

• Select the CCM button from the Format list
• Click Apply
selected
Material Examine the free-surface flow modelling options and material property settings:
Properties
• Open the Controls panel
• Turn On Surface Tension
• Click Apply
• Both the default Material for Light Fluid, AIR, and the default Material for
Heavy Fluid, H2O, are suitable for this case so no changes are needed
Examine the cavitation modelling options:

• Select the Cavitation folder
• Open the Cavitation Models panel
• The default options are all acceptable so click Apply. For a detailed
description of the options in this panel, consult the corresponding pro-STAR
on-line Help topic
The remaining material property settings are specified using panels in the Liquids
and Gases folder. These panels feature a Material option, enabling you to specify
different properties for each fluid material in the model. For the ‘heavy’ and ‘light’
fluids defined in free-surface problems, this functionality is not relevant since those
properties specified for the ‘light’ fluid (Material 1) are also applied automatically
to the ‘heavy’ fluid (Material 2).
Turn on turbulence modelling and select an appropriate model:
• Select the Thermophysical Models and Properties, then Liquids and Gases
folders and open the Turbulence Models panel
• Check that the material selected at the top of the panel is set to Material # 1
• Select k-Epsilon/High Reynolds Number from the Model list
• Click Apply

monitoring location
4-20 Version 4.06

Initialization
• Click Apply
Initialization Initially, the left-hand vessel contains only water and the right-hand vessel only air.
This initial distribution is specified by associating the two fluids with different cell
types:
The initial turbulence parameters must also be set as follows:

• Open the Fluid Initialization panel in the pro-STAR Model Guide
• Under the Turbulence tab, check that option k-Epsilon is selected
• Change the Turbulent Energy to 1
• Change Epsilon to 10000. Note that what is important here is not the actual
values specified but rather their ratio, as this determines the initial turbulent
viscosity. In this case, k and ε are chosen to give a turbulent viscosity of the
order of 0.01
• Click Apply
Scalars Two scalars are defined for problems involving both free surfaces and cavitation. A
passive scalar called VOF is defined as the volume fraction of the ‘heavy’ fluid. An
active scalar named CAV stores the volume fraction of vapour generated during the
cavitation process.
• Select the Additional Scalars folder and open the Molecular Properties
(Scalars) panel
• Check that the Scalar # is set to 1 and is named VOF. The properties of this
scalar are defined by the choice of ‘heavy’ fluid so no changes are necessary
in this panel.
• In the Scalar # spin box select 2, named CAV, which represents the ‘heavy’
fluid vapour
• The default properties are suitable so click Apply
• Open the Scalar Initialization panel
• Check that the Initial Mass Fraction of both VOF and CAV scalars is 0
Boundary To define boundary conditions for this problem:
Conditions
panel
• In the region list, select region number 1 named Wall
• Repeat this operation for the regions named TopRight and TopLeft
Version 4.06 4-21

Analysis Controls
• Select region 3, named Right

• Click Apply
• Select region 2, named Left

• Change the Pressure value to 5e7 Pa
• Click Apply
No action is needed for the regions named “Front”, “Bottom” and “Back” as these
were already defined as symmetry planes in the supplied mesh geometry file.
The values of VOF and CAV at the pressure boundaries must also be specified:
• Open the Scalar Boundaries panel and ensure that VOF is currently selected
in the Scalars list
• Select region 2 Pressure from the Boundary Region list
• Check that the Boundary Condition is set to Constant
• Click Apply
• The VOF boundary Value for Boundary Region 3 Pressure is set to 0 by
default so no change is required
No changes are required for the CAV scalar since its default setting of 0 volume
fraction at all boundaries is appropriate for this problem.
Discretization option is set as Euler Implicit, the only supported temporal
discretization scheme for free-surface flow problems
• Click Apply

• Click Apply
and turbulence equations to 0.8
• Set the Relaxation Factor for the pressure equation to 0.4
4-22 Version 4.06

Tutorial 4.3 FORCED FREE-SURFACE FLOW WITH CAVITATION CFD Analysis
Run Time Controls
• Click Apply
• Under the Differencing Schemes tab, change the differencing scheme for the
momentum equations to MARS
• Click Apply
• Select scalar no. 1 (VOF) and check that the Under-Relaxation Factor is 0.8
• Select scalar no. 2 (CAV) and check that the Under-Relaxation Factor is 0.8
• Click Apply
• Under the Transient tab, set the Output interval to 1e-4 seconds
• Select the VOF output variable from the list and enable the Post option
• Enable the Post option for the CAV output variable also
• Click Apply
Controls
• Set the Run time control for the analysis to Run for a Time of 5e-4 seconds
• Click Apply
• In the Time Step Option section, specify the Time step for period as 1e-6
seconds. This means that the run will continue for 500 time steps
• Click Set
• In the Save Geometry File dialog, change the Geometry Scale Factor to 0.001
to convert the model units to millimetres
solver.
CFD Analysis
Version 4.06 4-23

Tutorial 4.3 FORCED FREE-SURFACE FLOW WITH CAVITATION Post-Processing
Preliminaries
typing:
star
at the command line. The analysis should only take a few minutes. The output on
the screen will show that the outer iterations are converging to the specified
tolerance for each time step.
Post-Processing
• Click Add File
• Select file cavit.ccmt from the Transient list
The remainder of this tutorial demonstrates how to create static plots of flow
variables at specified times. Animated plots are not produced here as the methods
for creating them are described in detail in other tutorials, namely Tutorial 4.1,
Tutorial 8.2 and Tutorial 12.3.
Basic Plots First, plot velocity vectors after 500 time steps:
• Under the File(s) tab of the Load Data panel, select the file for step number
500 from the Time Step list and click Store Time to load the data
• Under the Data tab of the Load Data panel, select Velocity Components UV
(2D vectors) from the Vector Data list
• Click Get Data
4-24 Version 4.06

Basic Plots
Figure T4.3-1 Velocity vectors after 500 time steps
As in Tutorial 4.2, we see an abnormally high velocity vector at a cell close to one
of the wall boundary corners. This is caused by numerical inaccuracies due to poor
mesh quality.
Next plot the VOF distribution (volume fraction of liquid water) after 500 time
steps:
• Return to the Data tab of the Load Data panel and select Data Type
Cell & Wall/Bound (Smooth)
• Select VOF (the volume fraction of liquid water) from the Scalar Data list
• Click Get Data
Now plot the distribution of water vapour, CAV, after 500 time steps:
• On the Data tab of the Load Data panel, select CAV (the volume fraction of
water vapour) from the Scalar Data list
• Click Get Data and Replot to display Figure T4.3-3
Version 4.06 4-25

Basic Plots
Figure T4.3-2 Contour plot showing liquid water distribution after 500 time steps
Figure T4.3-3 Contour plot showing water vapour distribution after 500 time steps
4-26 Version 4.06

Basic Plots
As expected, cavitation occurs at the nozzle entrance as a result of the low pressure
region produced by the sharp corner and the accelerating flow.
It is possible to create a contour plot that approximately shows both the CAV and
VOF distributions (i.e., both water vapour and liquid water) by using the OPERATE
utility to manipulate the post data. First, put the VOF and CAV data in post registers
5 and 6, respectively:
• Enter the following commands in the I/O window:
OPERATE GETC CONC 5 1

OPERATE GETC CONC 6 2
• In the main pro-STAR window, select Post > Operate... to open the Post
Register Operations dialog
• Select Function Category Scalar/Vector > Multiply
• Choose Register 6 = 2 * Register 6
• Click Apply
• Select Function Category Multi-register > Add
• Choose Register 4 = Register 5 + Register 6
• Under the Options tab of the Create Plots panel, select RGB from the
Color Map menu. Note that the colours displayed under the menu change
when you do this
• Click Apply
• Change the Number of Color Indices to 12
• Change the Range to User and enter minimum and maximum values 0 and 2
• Click Apply
• Under the 3-D Surface tab, check that options Contour (filled) and Edge are
selected
Version 4.06 4-27

Basic Plots
Figure T4.3-4 Contour plot showing VOF and CAV distributions after 500 time steps
To a reasonable approximation, the blue and turquoise regions are predominantly

occupied by air, the green regions predominantly by liquid water and the yellow,
orange and red regions predominantly by water vapour.
Manipulating the results in this way provides a qualitative visual estimate of the
extent of the different regions. However, the resulting plot is prone to inaccuracies
in those places where air and water vapour occur together and also where the value
of VOF is only slightly greater than that of CAV. In such a case, the latter leads to
an overprediction of the size of the region of high water vapour concentration.
4-28 Version 4.06

Tutorial 5 TURBULENT FLUID STREAM MIXING

This tutorial deals with the mixing of air and methane gas in a dilution pipe, using
the mesh shown in Figure T5.0-1, created in Tutorial 1.1 of the Meshing Tutorials
volume. The problem geometry consists of two concentric pipes, with the inner pipe
covering only one quarter of the total distance between inlet and outlet. An orifice
plate protrudes from the outer wall half way along the pipe. Air at standard pressure
and temperature (1 bar, 293 K), flows in through the outer annulus with a uniform
velocity of 5 m/s. Methane gas (molecular weight 16 kg/kmole) at a temperature of
323 K flows in through the inner pipe at a uniform velocity of 10 m/s. The pipe
walls (inner and outer) are assumed to be adiabatic and the orifice plate has
negligible thermal resistance. The background fluid for this problem is air (constant
pressure of 1 bar, temperature of 293 K); its physical properties are as follows:
Molecular weight 28.96 kg/kmole

Density 1.205 kg/m3
Specific heat 1006.0 J/kg K
Thermal conductivity 2.637 × 10–2 W/m K
The flow is three-dimensional and essentially symmetric, so only half of the

problem geometry was considered in building the mesh. The tutorial is divided into
two parts, one dealing with a steady-state and the other with a transient analysis.
Figure T5.0-1 Mesh structure for the dilution pipe model (back elevation)
Version 4.06 5-1

Tutorial 5.1 STEADY 3-D FLOW Pre-Processing
Preliminaries
Tutorial 5.1 STEADY 3-D FLOW

The primary task of this tutorial is to:
• Set up and analyse a turbulent, multi-species flow
• Define boundary conditions for both main flow variables and additional scalar
variables representing species mass fractions
• Create multiple cross-sectional plots showing the analysis results as part of a
single operation
Pre-Processing
Preliminaries Create a sub-directory for the tutorial called tut5-1. The mesh for this problem
has already been created in the Meshing Tutorials volume (Tutorial 1.1) and the
relevant cell, vertex, boundary and problem setup files are already available (files
dil_pipe.cel, dil_pipe.vrt, dil_pipe.bnd and dil_pipe.inp,
respectively). Therefore, before starting the tutorial, make sure that the supplied
files are copied into your current directory.
• Start up pro-STAR by typing prostar at the command line
• Enter the case name (dil_pipe_ss) in the Case Name text box
• Click Continue
Read in the available problem data:

• In the Read Input Coded File dialog select the File name dil_pipe.inp
• Click OK
This will read default problem settings from file dil_pipe.inp plus the
problem’s cell, vertex and boundary location definitions from the remaining three
files.
TURBULENT MIXING IN A DILUTION PIPE (STEADY)

Mesh Verify that the mesh data are correct by selecting all cells and vertices and plotting
Checking the mesh in ‘Hidden Surface’ mode:
• In the main window, select C > All. The I/O window output shows that 2,080
cells were read in
• Select V > All. The I/O window output shows that 2,331 vertices were read in
• Check that Hidden Surface is the default cell plot type
• Click Cplot
• Change the viewpoint to approximately (-1, 0.5, -1) using the orientation
cube’s slider controls to display Figure T5.1-1
It will be seen that the mesh is in fact the same as the one created in Meshing
5-2 Version 4.06

Material Properties
Tutorial 1.1.
Material Check the default fluid properties and then choose the ideal gas law for density
Properties variations, making it a function of temperature only (incompressible flow):
• In the pro-STAR Model Guide, select folder Thermophysical Models and
Properties
• Choose option Ideal-f(T) from the Density menu
• Click Apply
Turn on the standard k-ε turbulence model:

• Select K-Epsilon/High Reynolds Number from the Model menu
• Click Apply
Turn on the solution of the temperature equation:

• Select On for the Temperature Calculation option
• Click Apply
Set the monitoring point location:

Version 4.06 5-3

Scalar Properties
• Type 11 in the Monitoring Cell Number text box

• Click Apply
Scalar Physical properties for scalar variables are specified next:

Properties
• Select the Additional Scalars folder and then open the Molecular Properties
(Scalars) panel
It will be seen that no scalar entities have been defined yet. The required scalar is
methane and its properties can be retrieved from the built-in property database.
However, in this tutorial, methane is treated as a user-defined scalar and its
properties are supplied manually for the purposes of illustration.
• Type the following property data in the corresponding dialog boxes:
Scalar # 1 — CH4
Density — 0.669
Molecular Weight — 16
Molecular Viscosity — 1.175e-5
Specific Heat — 2230.0
Conductivity — 0.038
Heat of Formation — -4.68e6
Temp. of Formation — 298.15
• Click Apply
The details of the scalar’s properties will be shown in the I/O window as follows:
PROPERTIES FOR SCALAR NO. 1 NAMED CH4

INFLUENCE = ACTIVE
SOLVER TURNED ON
MOLECULAR WEIGHT = 16.000000
DENSITY = 0.66900002
BETAM = 0.00000000
THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY = 0.38000000E-01
MOLECULAR VISCOSITY = 0.11750000E-04
SPECIFIC HEAT = 2230.0000
HEAT OF FORMATION = -4680000.0
TEMPERATURE OF FORMATION = 298.15000
FLUID GROUP = LIGHT
Note that the scalar’s ACTIVE designation signifies that its concentration at any
point in the flow will influence the overall fluid density at that point.
Save the model data entered so far:
• In the main window, select File > Save Model
Boundary Specify boundary conditions for each region, including turbulence parameters at the
Conditions two inlets in terms of turbulence intensity and length scale:
• Select folder Define Boundaries and then open the Define Boundary Regions
panel
• Select region no. 1 (the inner inlet) in the scroll list
5-4 Version 4.06

Boundary Conditions

• Enter inlet conditions in the appropriate boxes, as shown below:
• Click Apply
• Select region no. 2 in the scroll list
• Select option TI/Length in the Turbulence Switch menu
Version 4.06 5-5

Boundary Conditions
• Click Apply
• Select region no. 3 in the boundary regions scroll list
• Select option TI/Length in the Turbulence Switch menu
• Enter pressure boundary conditions in the appropriate boxes, as shown below:
5-6 Version 4.06

Boundary Conditions
• Click Apply
Specify boundary conditions for the scalar (CH4) mass fraction, ensuring that its
value is 1.0 at the inner pipe inlet and 0.0 at all other boundaries.
• Open the Scalar Boundaries panel
• Select region no. 1 (the inner pipe inlet) in the Boundary Region scroll list.
Ensure CH4 is selected in the Scalars list.
• Enter the required boundary value, 1, in the Value box and then click Apply
• Select region no. 2 (the outer pipe inlet) and then region no. 3 (the outflow
boundary) in the list to confirm that the scalar mass fraction at both
boundaries is 0
Check the boundary conditions graphically:

• In the main window, select B > All
• Select B > Unselect > Symplane
• Turn on the Display Boundaries option by clicking the button,
• Select cell plot type Quick Hidden Line from the drop-down menu to display
Figure T5.1-2
Version 4.06 5-7

Control Parameters
Figure T5.1-2 Inlet and outflow boundary condition display
Control Check the status of the control parameters:

Parameters
• Select folder Analysis Controls
Check the scalar control parameters and then modify some of them:
• Check that CH4 is selected in the Scalar scroll list and then type 0.95 in the
Under-Relaxation Factor box
• Type 0.0001 in the Residual Tolerance box
• Click Apply
Make the residual error tolerances for the temperature and scalar equations the
same. This ensures that both equations are solved to the same level of accuracy:
• Open the Primary Variables panel

• Select the Solver Parameters tab and type 0.0001 in the Residual
Tolerance box corresponding to the Temperature equation
• Click Apply
Run Time Check the status of the run time control parameters:
Controls
• Select folder Analysis Preparation and open the Run Time Controls panel
• Enter 200 for the Maximum Number of Iterations
• Click Apply
5-8 Version 4.06

Tutorial 5.1 STEADY 3-D FLOW CFD Analysis
Final Operations
Operations stage, save all model data, write the geometry and problem files and exit from
pro-STAR, as shown below. Remember that, for convenience, the model geometry
units were specified in inches. This must be changed into meters by applying the
appropriate conversion factor before writing data to the geometry file.
Alternatively, you may continue with the CFD analysis, using the pro-STAR
Model Guide facilities for running STAR interactively. This process is described in
the next section.
• In the Save Geometry File dialog, enter 0.0254 in the Geometry Scale Factor
box
CFD Analysis
• Ensure that the units in which the model was built are correctly selected
(option button Inches). Leave all other settings at their default values
• Click Start
Post-Processing
Preliminaries Read in the results of the analysis from file dil_pipe_ss.ccmp:
Post- Load velocity vector components for plotting and then display them on your screen
processing using the ‘Quick Hidden Line’ mode:
• Click Get Data
• In the 3-D Surface tab, check that Vector is selected from the Option menu
and select Grid from the Edge/Mesh menu
• In the main window, select cell plot type Quick Hidden Line to display
Figure T5.1-3
Version 4.06 5-9

Tutorial 5.1 STEADY 3-D FLOW Post-Processing
Post- processing
Figure T5.1-3 Velocity magnitude plot
Load vertex-based pressure values, select the contour plotting option and plot in
‘Hidden Surface’ mode:
Type menu
• In the Vector Data list, check that the default setting is None
5-10 Version 4.06

Post- processing
Figure T5.1-4 Pressure plot
Load vertex-based temperatures and plot:

• In the Scalar Data list, select item Temperature and then click Get Data
• In the main pro-STAR window, click Replot to display Figure T5.1-5
Figure T5.1-5 Temperature plot

Version 4.06 5-11
Post- processing
A multi-section plot of a variable can be made using the following procedure:

• Select tab Section/Clipped
• For the Section Plot Type, choose Contour (filled) from the Option menu and
• Select Multiple Plane for the Plot option
• The default number (10) of section planes to be plotted in succession is shown
in the Increments box and is suitable.
• Define the normal direction to these planes to be the direction of a coordinate
axis, as follows:
(a) Click the coordinate system selection button to display the
Coordinate Systems dialog
(b) Select the toroidal coordinate system (no. 4) and then click Apply and
Close
(c) Note that the entry in the Coordinate System box changes to show that
system no. 4 has been selected. The Direction menu is activated to allow
specification of the desired direction.
(d) Select direction no. 2 (the θ- direction) from this menu and then click
Apply
• Click Sweep to see 10 section plots of temperature plotted in quick
succession, starting at one end of the model and finishing at the other
Once the sections are defined, they can be re-used to produce plots of any other
variable. For example, velocity magnitude plots can be generated as follows:
• Check that option Cell & Wall/Bound (Smooth) is selected from the Data
Type menu
• In the Calculated Scalar Data list, select item Velocity Magnitude and then
click Get Data
• In the Section/Clipped tab, check that Contour (filled) is selected from the
Option menu and Edge is selected from the Edge/Mesh menu
• Click Sweep to see the velocity magnitude distribution plotted on a series of
cross-sections through the model
To produce the best display of the calculated methane mass fraction distribution,
load cell-based values and then average them at the vertex positions:
• In the Data tab, select Cell from the Data Type menu
• Select On from the Smooth option menu
• In the Scalar Data list, select item CH4 and then click Get Data
• Select the 3-D Surface tab and then choose Contour (filled) from the Option
menu and Edge from the Edge/Mesh menu
5-12 Version 4.06

Final Operations
Figure T5.1-6 Methane mass fraction plot
Final The tutorial is now complete. To quit pro-STAR:

Operations
Version 4.06 5-13

Tutorial 5.2 TRANSIENT 3-D FLOW Pre-Processing
Preliminaries
Tutorial 5.2 TRANSIENT 3-D FLOW

The problem geometry and mesh for this tutorial is the same as for Tutorial 5.1. The
model also has the same boundaries and boundary region definitions. The only
difference is that transient boundary conditions are now imposed at the inlet planes.
As shown in Figure T5.2-1, the air inlet velocity increases linearly from 5 m/s to 9
m/s over a period of 2 seconds. At the same time, the methane inlet velocity
decreases from 10 m/s to 2 m/s, simulating the gradual shut down of an upstream
valve. At the end of this tutorial it is expected that users will be able to:
• Set up a transient calculation
• Set up a table that defines the changing boundary conditions
• Perform some basic post-processing appropriate to transient calculations
Pre-Processing
Preliminaries A number of initial file copying operations are needed for proper operation of this
tutorial, as follows:
• Create a sub-directory for the tutorial called tut5-2 and copy the model file
generated in Tutorial 5.1 (dil_pipe_ss.mdl) into it
• Rename this file as dil_pipe_tr.mdl
present analysis, it is also necessary to copy the solution file for the
steady-state case (dil_pipe_ss.ccmp) to the current directory
Start up the pro-STAR interface:

• Accept the default case name (dil_pipe_tr) displayed in the Case Name text
box
• Select the Resume From Existing .mdl File option
• Click Continue
This will read all data in file dil_pipe_tr.mdl and will set up the model as it
was at the end of Tutorial 5.1.
TURBULENT MIXING IN A DILUTION PIPE (TRANSIENT)

Check the geometry and boundary conditions visually to confirm that the model has
been read in correctly. If they were not displayed automatically then display them
as follows:
• Select C > All
• Click Cplot
Version 4.06 5-15

Transient Solution Setting
Transient The modifications needed to change to a transient analysis are as follows:

Solution
1. Select the transient solution mode
Setting
2. Define transient boundary conditions
To set up the pro-STAR Model Guide environment for a transient simulation,

proceed as follows:
• Go to the pro-STAR Model Guide and open the Analysis Features panel
• Select Transient from the Time Domain menu and then click Apply
Table As indicated in the tutorial’s introduction, the basic requirement of this case is to
Definition simulate a time variation in the inlet stream velocities, as shown in Figure T5.2-1
below:
Velocity (m/s)
10
9 Outer Inlet
2 Inner Inlet
Time (sec)
1 2
Figure T5.2-1 Velocity changes over a 2 sec. period at the two inlet planes
The above variation may be defined using pro-STAR tables and then applied to the
two inlet boundaries. To set up a table for the inner inlet:
• Click the Table Editor button, , in the main pro-STAR window
• In the Table Editor dialog, enter INNER_INLET in the Table Title box
• Click the Coordinate System button and then select system no. 1 (the global
Cartesian coordinate system) in the scroll list, as velocities will be specified in
this system
• Click Close. The coordinate system choice will appear in the Table Editor
dialog.
5-16 Version 4.06

Boundary Re-definition
• Select Extrapolate from the Out of bound value option menu

• Select TIME in the list of Independent Variables
• Select the V component of velocity from the Dependent Variables scroll list
• Enter two values in the TIME column in the Independent Variables Table, 0
for the 1st time point and 2 for the 2nd time point
• Click the green Fill Independent Variable Columns button.
• In the Independent-Dependent Variables Table. enter two end-point values for
the V-velocity, 10 and 2, corresponding to the two time points specified above
• Enter a new name, in1.tbl, in the File Name box at the top of the panel
• Click Write to save the table data just entered in the above file
• Click Graph to display a graph of the inner inlet V-velocity variation, which
should be as shown in Figure T5.2-1
Now set up a table for the outer inlet by editing the one currently on display:
• Enter a new name, OUTER_INLET, in the Table Title box
• Enter two new end-point values for the V-velocity, 5 and 9, corresponding to
the previously defined time points of 0 and 2
• Enter a new name, in2.tbl, in the File Name box at the top of the panel
• Click Write to save the table data just entered in the above file
• Click Graph to display a graph of the outer inlet V-velocity variation, which
should be as shown in Figure T5.2-1
• Close the Table Editor dialog
Boundary Apply the time variation in velocity defined above to the inner inlet:
Re-definition
• Go to the pro-STAR Model Guide and select folder Define Boundaries
• Select region no. 1 (Inner_inlet) in the boundary regions scroll list
• Open the pro-STAR file browser by clicking the button next to the Table
Name box, choose file in1.tbl from the file list and click Open. The
selected file name will now be displayed in the box
• Click Apply to instruct STAR to read V-velocity boundary values from this
table
Repeat for the outer inlet:

• Select region no. 2 (Outer_inlet) in the boundary regions scroll list
• Open the pro-STAR file browser by clicking the button next to the Table
Name box, choose file in2.tbl from the file list and click Open. The
selected file name will now be displayed in the box
• Click Apply to instruct STAR to read V-velocity boundary values from this
table
Analysis Check the analysis controls status:

Controls
• Open the Solution Method panel. It will be seen that the PISO algorithm has
been selected automatically.
Version 4.06 5-17

Tutorial 5.2 TRANSIENT 3-D FLOW CFD Analysis
Run Time Controls

• Go to the Transient tab
• Define an output period Starting at time t = 0 seconds and with an Output
interval of 0.5 seconds for the transient post file
• Note that, by default, the Velocity and Pressure variables are already
selected for output in the upper scroll list. Choose a number of additional
items for output, Turb Kinetic Energy, Dissipation, Turbulent Viscosity,
Temperature, Density and scalar variable CH4, by selecting each one in
turn and then enabling the Post option checkbox.
• Check the list display to verify your choices and then click Apply
Run Time Check the status of the run time controls and then specify the simulated elapsed time
Controls and the time step to be used:
• Select folder Analysis Preparation
• Open panel Run Time Controls
• Check that Run for is selected for the Run time control option and type 2 in
the Time box
• Click Apply
• In the Time Step Option section, check that 0 is entered in the Period start
time box and enter 0.025 in the Time step for period box
• Click Set
Specify that the analysis is to start from the previously calculated steady-state
solution:
• Open the Restart panel
• Select option Standard Restart from the Restart File Option menu
dil_pipe_ss.ccmp from the browser dialog and then click Open
• Click Apply
pro-STAR, as shown below. Alternatively, you may continue with the CFD
analysis, using the pro-STAR Model Guide facilities for running STAR
interactively. This process is described in the next section.
• In the Save Geometry File dialog, check that 0.0254 is entered in the
Geometry Scale Factor box
CFD Analysis
5-18 Version 4.06

Tutorial 5.2 TRANSIENT 3-D FLOW Post-Processing
Preliminaries

(option button Inches)
• Select Yes for the Write Geometry File option
• Click Start
The analysis will then start automatically and will stop after 80 time steps. Bear in
mind that transient solutions can involve lengthy computer runs. Therefore, the
analysis for this tutorial will take longer than for Tutorial 5.1.
Post-Processing
Preliminaries Open the file containing the transient post data (dil_pipe_tr.ccmt):
• In the pro-STAR Model Guide, select folder Post-Processing
• Select option Transient from the Analysis menu
• In the Transient section, check that file dil_pipe_tr.ccmt is displayed
in the Post File box and then click Add File
• Select file dil_pipe_tr.ccmt from the Transient list and then click
Open Transient file; the time steps at which flow data were stored during the
run should appear in the Time Step scroll list
Post- The next step in transient post-processing is to identify the point in time at which
processing results are to be manipulated and displayed. This is done as follows:
• In the Time Step list, select the required time (0.5 sec in this case) and then
click Store Time. This loads results calculated after 20 time steps.
Load velocity vector components, select the cross-sectional plotting option and
reduce the size of all vectors:
• Go to the Data tab and select item Velocity Components UVW in the Vector
Data list
• Click Get Data
• Go to the Create Plots panel and select the Section/Clipped tab
• Accept the default section definition and click Plot to Screen
• Go to the Vectors tab and then type 0.7 in the Scale Factor box
• Click Apply
Change the viewpoint and replot:

• In the main window, change the viewpoint to (0, 0, -1) by selecting View >
Axis > -Z to display Figure T5.2-2
Version 4.06 5-19

Post- processing
Figure T5.2-2 Velocity magnitude plot at t = 0.5 s
The methane mass fraction can be plotted as follows:

• Select item CH4 in the Scalar Data list
• Click Get Data
• In the Section/Clipped tab, select Contour (filled) from the Option menu
5-20 Version 4.06

Post- processing
Figure T5.2-3 Methane mass fraction plot at t = 0.5 s
The results after 2.0 seconds (80 time steps) may be plotted in the same manner:
• Go to the Load Data panel and then select the File(s) tab
• In the Time Step list, highlight the desired time (2 secs) and then click Store
Time. This loads results calculated after 80 time steps.
• Go to the Data tab and select Smooth option Off
• Click Get Data
• In the Section/Clipped tab, select Option Vector
Version 4.06 5-21

Post- processing
Figure T5.2-4 Velocity magnitude plot at t = 2.0 s

• Select item CH4 in the Scalar Data list
• Click Get Data
• Select Contour (filled) from the Option menu in the Section/Clipped tab
5-22 Version 4.06

Final Operations
Figure T5.2-5 Methane mass fraction plot at t = 2.0 s
Final The tutorial is now complete. To quit pro-STAR:

Operations
Version 4.06 5-23

Tutorial 6 SUPERSONIC AND TRANSONIC FLOWS
Tutorials in this section are designed to demonstrate the application of STAR-CD
to compressible flow problems. Tutorial 6.1 involves flow over an idealised
two-dimensional wing geometry, shown in Figure T6.0-1.
5o
inflow 9 cm
Figure T6.0-1 Symmetrical diamond-shaped wedge used in supersonic flow tutorial
Version 4.06 6-1

Tutorial 6.1 ADAPTIVE MESH REFINEMENT FOR SUPERSONIC FLOW Physical Problem Description
Preliminaries
Tutorial 6.1 ADAPTIVE MESH REFINEMENT FOR SUPERSONIC

FLOW
• A method of adaptive mesh refinement
• How to set up a model of inviscid supersonic compressible flow
• How to calculate gradients of scalar post data

In this tutorial, the ‘wing’ geometry is a diamond wedge with major length 9 cm and
half-angle 5° (see Figure T6.0-1). The inlet flow direction is parallel to the major
length (zero angle of attack) so the flow is symmetrical. Therefore, a symmetry
plane may be placed along the major length to reduce the computational cost of the
simulation.
The flow is assumed to be inviscid and the inlet velocity is set at Mach 1.893,
which is sufficiently large to ensure that the flow is supersonic across the entire
solution domain. For air at a temperature of 293 K, this is equivalent to a velocity
of 650 m/s, as calculated from the equation below:
u u
M = --- = ---------------
c κRT
where κ is the adiabatic index and R is the gas constant for air, taken as 1.402 and
287.05 Jkg-1K-1, respectively.
Initially, the case is run with a simple, coarse mesh. This is then refined in the
areas where the pressure gradient is greatest. This process is repeated until the mesh
is sufficiently fine to give a reasonable resolution of the shock and expansion waves.
Pre-Processing
Preliminaries The two analyses described in this tutorial will be performed in separate directories.
Create a sub-directory for the first analysis, called tut6-1a. The initial mesh for
this problem has already been created and the relevant cell, vertex, boundary and
problem setup files are provided with the STAR-CD installation (files
super.cel, super.vrt, super.bnd and super.inp respectively).
Therefore, before starting the tutorial, make sure these files are copied into your
current directory.
• Enter the case name, super1, in the Case Name text box
• Click Continue

• In the Read Input Coded File dialog select the File name super.inp
• Click OK
6-2 Version 4.06

Tutorial 6.1 ADAPTIVE MESH REFINEMENT FOR SUPERSONIC FLOW Pre-Processing
Material Properties
This will read default problem settings from file super.inp as well as the
problem geometry and boundary location definitions from the remaining three files.
• Type ADAPTIVE MESH REFINEMENT FOR SUPERSONIC FLOW in the
Title text box
• Select C > All then Cplot to display the mesh shown in Figure T6.1-1
Figure T6.1-1 Coarse mesh geometry
The coarseness of the mesh leads to highly smeared shock waves in the first run but
the refinement procedure will correct this. First though, a complete model for the
problem must be set up.
Material Since the flow is compressible, the fluid density will be modelled using the ideal gas
Properties law. The inviscid assumption also needs to be specified and the temperature
calculation needs to be turned on:
• In the pro-STAR Model Guide panel select the Thermophysical Models and
Properties folder, followed by the Liquids and Gases sub-folder
• Change the Density setting to Ideal-f(T,P)
• Change the Molecular Viscosity setting to Inviscid
• Click Apply
• Go to the Thermal Models panel and select On for the Temperature
Calculation option
• Click Apply
Version 4.06 6-3

Tutorial 6.1 ADAPTIVE MESH REFINEMENT FOR SUPERSONIC FLOW Pre-Processing
Boundary Locations and Types
In order to obtain a solution as quickly as possible, it is advisable to specify a

suitable initial flow field. This can be particularly important in compressible flow
simulations. A simple, but often effective, initialisation strategy is to assign the inlet
conditions to the entire solution domain:
• Open the Fluid Initialization panel
• Set the U velocity to 650 m/s
• Click Apply
Boundary The boundary locations and types have already been specified in the coded file
Locations super.bnd. To display them on the screen:
and Types
• Select B > All
• Click the Display Boundaries button, , to display Figure T6.1-2
Figure T6.1-2 Boundaries displayed on mesh geometry
Four boundary regions can be distinguished in Figure T6.1-2, each of a different

type:
1. The red-coloured region on the left is an inlet
2. The green-coloured region on the right is an outlet
3. The turquoise-coloured region on the wing is a wall
4. The fourth region, opposite the wing and coloured pale blue, is a free-stream
boundary. This type of boundary allows shock waves produced by supersonic
flows to be transmitted out of the domain without reflection. Free-stream
boundaries can only be used in models involving supersonic free streams. The
6-4 Version 4.06

Tutorial 6.1 ADAPTIVE MESH REFINEMENT FOR SUPERSONIC FLOW CFD Analysis - Coarse Mesh
Boundary Conditions
velocity at such boundaries is usually assumed to be the same as that at the

inlet.
All remaining external faces of the mesh are assigned to the default boundary region
0 which, in this case, is defined as a symmetry plane.
The boundary types listed above constitute an appropriate boundary region
combination for this problem. For further information about the suitability of
various boundary region combinations for compressible flow applications see
“Compressible Flow” on page 3-10 of the CCM User Guide.
Boundary To set the desired conditions for the inlet and free-stream regions:
Conditions
• In the Define Boundaries folder open the Define Boundary Regions panel
• Select Inlet from the scroll list
• Change the U velocity to 650 m/s
• Change the Density to 1.189 kg/m3
• Click Apply
• Select Free Stream from the scroll list
• Change the U velocity to 650 m/s
• Click Apply
The default settings are suitable for all other boundary regions.
Analysis Solving the momentum equation in the z-direction is not necessary in this case as
Controls the model is two-dimensional. Therefore:
• Under the Equation Status tab, turn off the solution of the z-momentum
equation by unchecking the W-Momentum option
• Click Apply
• The geometry was created in centimetres, so set the Geometry Scale Factor to
0.01
CFD Analysis - Coarse Mesh

• File > Save Model
• Click Start
Version 4.06 6-5
Tutorial 6.1 ADAPTIVE MESH REFINEMENT FOR SUPERSONIC FLOW Mesh Refinement
Preliminaries
Mesh Refinement
Preliminaries In order to perform mesh refinement, the current analysis results need to be read into
pro-STAR:
Adaptive mesh refinement can be performed automatically using the Adaptive

Refinement pro-STAR Model Guide panel or manually using the Refine Cells option
in the Cell Tool. Both methods will be demonstrated in this section.
Cell set Load the pressure data into pro-STAR using the pro-STAR Model Guide:
collection
• In the Data tab select Data Type Cell and Smooth option On
• Select Pressure from the Scalar Data list
• Click Get Data
• In the 3-D Surface tab, select options Contour (filled) and None
Figure T6.1-3 Pressure contours obtained using coarse mesh
As expected, the coarse mesh results show a lot of smearing in the shock waves at
6-6 Version 4.06
Cell set collection
the two wing tips and also in the fan-shaped expansion wave at the wing’s widest
point. To improve the resolution of these flow features, the mesh will be refined in
the regions exhibiting the greatest pressure gradients:
• Select the Analysis Preparation folder and open the Adaptive Refinement
panel
• For the Gradient Criteria option in the Refinement Criteria tab, ensure
Percentage of cells is selected for refinement and enter 40 for the Top
Percentage
• Select Pressure as the Variable to apply criteria
• Click New Set
• Turn on mesh plotting by clicking the Display Mesh Lines button, , in the
main pro-STAR window
Figure T6.1-4 Cells to be refined and corresponding pressure gradient values
Not all cells shown in Figure T6.1-4 need to be refined in the same manner: the main
body of cells should be refined in two directions (x and y) but the near-wall cells
only need refinement in the direction perpendicular to the wall (x). For this reason,
refinement has to be performed in two stages, starting with the main body of cells.
Prior to this, the selected cell set should be stored so that it can be recalled for the
second refinement:
• In the main pro-STAR window, click Store/Recall > Store to open the Store
Information dialog
• Under the Sets Information Type option, type to_refine in the Set Name box
Version 4.06 6-7

Cell set collection
• Click Write and then Close the dialog
To refine the main body of cells:

• Select C > Subset > Type and click on one of the cells near the top of the
window
• Go to the pro-STAR Model Guide and select the Refine tab in the Adaptive
Refinement panel
• Change the Case Name entry to super2
• Click Update Model to refine the cells
Now, to select the near-wall cell set due for refinement, read in the previously stored
cell set and define a new subset:
• In the main pro-STAR window, click Store/Recall > Recall to open the
Recall Information dialog
• Under the Sets option, change the File Name entry to super1.set
• Click Refresh
• Select to_refine from the Select Entry list
• Click Recall
• Close the dialog
• Select the Geometry plot option from the drop-down menu in the main
window
• Click Cplot
Note that as a result of the refinement just completed, the original main-body cells
in the set no longer exist so only the near-wall cells are now displayed. These are
refined manually using the Cell Tool:
• In the Cell Tool window, click Refine Cells...
• In the Cell Refine dialog, enter 2, 1 and 1 for the Number of divisions in the I,
J and K directions, respectively
• Check Cset is selected for the Cells to refine option
• Check Yes is selected for the Vertex merge option
• Choose Yes for the Couple option
• Click Cplot to display the refined mesh, shown in Figure T6.1-5
6-8 Version 4.06

Final Operations
Figure T6.1-5 Geometry plot showing mesh after a single refinement
Final Write the geometry and problem files and save the model file:
Operations
• In the Save Geometry File dialog click Apply then Close
Run the case in STAR, either at the command line or interactively, as described
previously.
Examination of the analysis results in the post data file (super2.ccmp) will
show that the mesh is still too coarse to fully resolve the shock and expansion
waves. A suitable mesh may be obtained by repeating the mesh refinement process
described above until the position of the shock and expansion waves is clear.
The rest of this tutorial will proceed with a mesh that has resulted from a total of
four refinement cycles using this method. Some cells adjacent to the free-stream
boundary have also been further refined manually. This is sometimes necessary
because, as a result of the constant pressure defined on that boundary, the calculated
pressure gradient in such cells is not sufficiently high to trigger their inclusion in the
code-selected refinement set.
You may perform all the refinement operations if desired and, once you are
satisfied that you understand the process, save your refined mesh data and terminate
the session as follows:
• Select File > Save As Coded Format...
• Ensure that the Cell File, Vertex File and Boundary File options are all
Version 4.06 6-9

Tutorial 6.1 ADAPTIVE MESH REFINEMENT FOR SUPERSONIC FLOW CFD Analysis - Refined Mesh
Preliminaries
enabled
• Quit pro-STAR by selecting File > Quit > Quit, Nosave
Alternatively, you may terminate the session without saving any data and continue
instead from the cell, vertex, boundary and problem setup files provided with the
STAR-CD installation, as described in the next section.
CFD Analysis - Refined Mesh

Preliminaries For the second part of this tutorial, create a new subdirectory called tut6-1b. The
cell, vertex, boundary and problem setup files for the final refined mesh are called
super_ref.cel, super_ref.vrt, super_ref.bnd and
super_ref.inp, respectively. Therefore, before starting this part of the tutorial,
make sure these files are copied into the tut6-1b directory.
Start up pro-STAR and enter the new case name and title:
• Enter case name super_ref
• Click Continue

• Select File > Read Input Code File...
• In the Read Input Coded File dialog, select the File name super_ref.inp
and then click OK
This will read all the current model settings from file super_ref.inp as well as
the problem geometry and boundary location definitions from the remaining three
files.
• Type 2D SUPERSONIC FLOW OVER A DIAMOND WEDGE in the Title
text box
• Select C > All then Cplot to display the mesh shown in Figure T6.1-6. The
latter also includes a magnification of the near-wall region so that the details
of the mesh structure can be seen more clearly.
6-10 Version 4.06

Tutorial 6.1 ADAPTIVE MESH REFINEMENT FOR SUPERSONIC FLOW CFD Analysis - Refined Mesh
Final Operations
Figure T6.1-6 Mesh geometry, including magnification of the near-wall region
It can be seen that the mesh is very fine in places where shock waves are expected
to occur. Refinement is used to a lesser extent near the wing surface and in the
expansion wave region. The regions upstream and far downstream of the wing do
not need to be finely meshed as the flow there will be relatively undisturbed.
Final The model setup for this problem was described earlier in this tutorial and will not
Operations be repeated. All the information necessary to run the case is contained within the
files provided, so it is only necessary to save the model data and write the problem
and geometry files, as shown below. A description of how to run STAR
interactively is also given below. Alternatively, you may exit from pro-STAR and
run STAR from the command line.
• The geometry was created in centimetres, so set the Geometry Scale Factor to
0.01
Running the To perform the analysis interactively, proceed as follows:

Analysis
• Click Start
Version 4.06 6-11

Tutorial 6.1 ADAPTIVE MESH REFINEMENT FOR SUPERSONIC FLOW Post-Processing
Preliminaries
Post-Processing
You are now ready to post-process the results.

Post- Display a contour plot of pressure:
processing
• In the Data tab select Data Type Cell and Smooth option On
• Click Get Data
• In the 3-D Surface tab, select Contour (filled) and Edge
Figure T6.1-7 Pressure contour plot
The rapid changes in pressure that form shock waves at both wing tips and the
fan-shaped expansion wave at the wing’s widest point are clearly visible in Figure
T6.1-7. The resolution of these flow features is vastly superior to that produced with
the unrefined mesh of Figure T6.1-3. The improved results may also be displayed
as a Mach number plot:
6-12 Version 4.06
Post- processing

• In the Data tab select Mach Number from the Calculated Scalar Data list
• Click Get Data
• Click Replot in the main pro-STAR window to display Figure T6.1-8
Figure T6.1-8 Mach number contour plot
The extent of the solution accuracy improvement can be demonstrated by creating

a graph of pressure on the wing and comparing it with similar data produced using
the coarse mesh:
• In the Load Data panel, choose Data Type Boundary and Smooth option On
• Choose Absolute from the Reference pressure list
• Click Get Data
• Select the Graphs > Extract Data sub-folder and open the Field Data panel
• Click the Reset Graph button and choose Yes in the dialog box that appears
• Choose Select data along Entire Cell Set
• Select Graph data Vs X-axis
• To isolate the wall shells, type the following in the I/O window:
CSET NEWS TYPE 13
• Also add some of the shells on the symmetry boundary to the set:
CSET ADD GRAN -1.5 12.0 -0.01 0.01
• In the Field Data panel, click the Create Graph button

Version 4.06 6-13
Post- processing
The graph that now appears is not particularly useful. This is because data are sorted
by cell number rather than by position. To sort the data by position on the x-axis and
improve the plot appearance change the graph formatting as follows:
• Under the Registers tab, click the Sort button to open the Graph Sort dialog
• Enter 3, 1, 9 and 1, in that order, in the four boxes of the Graph Sort dialog
• Under the Axis tab, ensure the X-Axis Parameters option is selected
• Enter appropriate values in the various text boxes, as shown below:
• Click Apply
• Select the Y-Axis Parameters option and enter the details shown below:
6-14 Version 4.06

Post- processing
• Click Apply and then click Redraw on the main pro-STAR window
The wall pressure data from the coarse mesh are stored in file coarse.xy. This is
also provided with the STAR-CD installation and should be copied to your current
directory. To plot both sets of data onto a single graph:
• Go to the External Data panel
• Use the file browser at the top of the panel to locate the coarse.xy file and
click Open
• Choose xyxyxy for Establish X-Y pairs
• Click Create Graph to display Figure T6.1-5
Version 4.06 6-15

Post- processing
Figure T6.1-9 Graph of wall pressure along the wing
Even through the results from the fine mesh show some oscillations near the shocks,
the improvement in their sharpness is dramatic when compared to those from the
coarse mesh.
• Quit pro-STAR by selecting File > Quit > Quit, Nosave
6-16 Version 4.06

Introduction
Tutorial 7 MULTIPLE ROTATING REFERENCE FRAMES
Introduction
This tutorial outlines the steps needed to set up and run a rotating radial fan analysis.
It uses the multiple rotating frame methodology (implicit formulation), a
steady-state approach involving two or more frames of reference that can be
stationary or spinning. In this case, two frames are used to perform the analysis —
a spinning one representing the fan and blades and a stationary one representing the
fan body and inlet.

The radial fan geometry to be used is shown below:
Figure T7.0-1 Radial fan geometry
The fan consists of three parts: the inlet pipe leading into the main solution domain,
the rotating fan body and blades, plus the stationary body section leading to the
outlet. The model’s mesh is saved in three separate Nastran files corresponding to
each of the above parts. The spinning effect of the fan axis will be ignored in the
inlet section but will be accounted for in the rotating housing.
Baffle cells are used to represent the 12 equally-spaced blades. The rotation
speed is 2,000 RPM and the fluid within the fan is air at atmospheric conditions.
Version 4.06 7-1

Tutorial 7.1 ROTATING-FRAME FAN ANALYSIS Pre-Processing
Preliminaries
Tutorial 7.1 ROTATING-FRAME FAN ANALYSIS

The tutorial aims to show the user how to:
• Import grids from CAD files
• Create and transform cell couples between mismatched grid regions
• Define multiple rotating reference frames
• Define rotating and non-rotating walls
• Change the coordinate reference frame for vector plots
Pre-Processing
Preliminaries Create a sub-directory for the tutorial. The mesh for this case is supplied as three
separate Nastran files, inlet.nas, fan.nas and body.nas, corresponding to
the three fan regions mentioned earlier. Therefore, before starting the tutorial, make
sure that the supplied files are copied into your current directory.
• Enter the case name (say, fan_mrf) in the Case Name text box
• Click Continue
RADIAL FAN SIMULATION USING MULTIPLE ROTATING FRAMES

This completes the preliminary steps for this tutorial.

Setting the The first operation is to set the analysis type for rotating machinery, as follows:
Analysis
• In the pro-STAR Model Guide, open the Analysis Features panel
Type
• Select option On from the Rotating Reference Frame Status menu
• Click Apply
Note that the folder called Reference Frames is now active in the pro-STAR Model
Guide tree. The implicit solution option will be chosen later on using a panel within
this folder.
Mesh Import You can now continue with importing the grid to be used in the analysis. It is
assumed that its three parts have been created separately and that there is no
continuity between them. In other words, the mesh blocks are not joined together
with common vertex numbering at the block interfaces.
To import the Nastran files:
• In the pro-STAR Model Guide, select the Grids folder and then open the
Import Grids panel
• Select the Nastran option for Format
• Select Type in the Option menu (for cell table types)
• Use the browser button to locate file inlet.nas for the Bulk Data File and click
Open
• Click Apply in the Import Grids panel
7-2 Version 4.06

Mesh Import
Following this last operation, the I/O window will indicate that the numbers of
nodes (vertices) and elements (cells) that were read in were 7128 and 5760,
respectively. The current maximum values of vertices and cells in pro-STAR after
reading in the mesh are also shown — in this case they are the same as for the
original mesh. These values must be used as offsets for the next Nastran file import,
so that the second part of the mesh does not re-use the vertex and cell numbers
assigned to the first part.
Read in the next part of the mesh:
• Enable the Append option. Note that the Vertex Offset and Cell Offset values
are automatically set to mxv and mxc, respectively. These parameters are
internal functions that provide the current highest value + 1 for the entity of
interest. In this case, mxv will be interpreted as being equal to 7129 and mxc
equal to 5761. The user can supply alternative values if desired.
• Use the browser button to select file fan.nas for the Bulk Data File
• Click Apply
Again, the I/O window provides the maximum vertex and cell numbers after import
is complete.
The final part of the mesh is then imported as follows:
• Use the browser button to select file body.nas for the Bulk Data File
• Click Apply
This completes the import process. You should check the cell table indices set up
during the mesh import.
• Click the button on the main pro-STAR window to open the Cell Editor
dialog and inspect its contents. Alternatively, issue the CTLIS,ALL
command in the I/O window which results in the output shown below:
Figure T7.1-1 Cell table listing
As can be seen, there are four cell types defined: three for fluid cells and one for
baffle cells. These cell types were defined within the Nastran files and represent the
following mesh regions:
1. Fluid cells within the rotating fan body
2. Fluid cells within the stationary fan body
3. Baffle cells representing the fan blades
Version 4.06 7-3

Cell Type Properties
4. Fluid cells within the stationary fan inlet duct
You may now inspect the mesh visually as follows:

• Change the mesh orientation by selecting Plot > Up Axis > Z
• Change to an isometric viewing direction by selecting View > Isometric >
1,1,1
• Click Cplot
• Select cell plot type Quick Hidden Line; this will allow you to see the fan
blades inside the mesh, as shown in Figure T7.1-2
Figure T7.1-2 Imported grid
Cell Type The cells in each part of the mesh must now be correctly defined and named so that
Properties each fan component can be clearly distinguished from the others. To determine
what kind of cells have been created by the import process:
• Select option Utility > Count > Cells
As mentioned in the “Mesh Import” section, cells in the rotating fan body have a
cell table index of 1. Cells in the stationary body domain have cell table index 2 and
those in the inlet pipe index 4. Cells with index 3 are interpreted as baffles
representing the fan blades among the rotating cells.
The desired modifications to the cell type parameters may be done via the cell
table editor, as follows:
• In the main pro-STAR window, click to open the Cell Editor dialog
• Check that table entry #1 is selected in the scroll list
7-4 Version 4.06

• Change the Spin Index value to 2

• Enter ROTATING_FAN in the Name box
• Click Apply
The above actions assign a spin index of 2 to the rotating fan body cells. All other
cells will have the default spin index of 1. These will be defined later as the spinning
and stationary frames of reference, respectively.
Next, change the settings for cell type no. 2, corresponding to the stationary body
cells:
• Select table entry #2 in the scroll list
• Change the Color Index to 3 (green)
• Enter BODY in the Name box
• Click Apply
Note that the spin index is left at a value of 1, so that the ‘BODY’ cells will remain
stationary.
Define the properties of cell type 3:
• Select the Baffle Cell Type setting
• Change the Color Index setting to 4 (blue)
• Enter FAN_BLADES in the Name box
• Click Apply
Note that the baffle spin index may be left at 1; this is because they are already part
of the spinning fan body and thus do not require a spin index setting. In fact,
pro-STAR will not allow you to change the spin index for a baffle-type cell.
Finally, the inlet pipe (type 4 cells) can be modified:
• Change the Color Index to 5 (cyan)
• Enter INLET in the Name box
• In the main pro-STAR window, click Replot and notice the change in cell
colours in the model, shown in Figure T7.1-3
Version 4.06 7-5

Mesh Structure
Figure T7.1-3 Fan model grid showing cell colour changes
Mesh In their present form, the three mesh parts are not joined together. As mentioned
Structure earlier, the imported mesh is not continuous in the areas where the rotating fan body
meets the stationary inlet and body mesh. This can be clearly seen in the zoomed-in
view shown in Figure T7.1-4 below.
7-6 Version 4.06

Mesh Structure
Mismatched Grid Areas
Figure T7.1-4 Mismatched grid areas in the model
The three meshes should therefore be joined together using pro-STAR’s cell-face
matching and couple creation facilities, as described below:
• In the pro-STAR Model Guide, locate the Grids folder and open the Assemble
Grids panel
• Go to the Create Couples tab
Begin by joining the rotating region (cell type 1) to the stationary body region (cell
type 2).
• Check that the Couple By option is set to Cell Set
• Select Cell Type from the Master/Slave Matching menu
• Change the Master Cell Type to Specify and enter 1 in the box below
• Change the Slave Cell Type to Specify and enter 2 in the box below
• Click Apply. The I/O window feedback should indicate that 720 couples were
created along the interface between the two regions.
Next, repeat the steps above in order to couple the rotating region to the stationary
inlet region (cell type 4):
• Change the Slave Cell Type value to 4
• Click Apply. The I/O window feedback should indicate that a further 648
couples were created along the second interface.
Version 4.06 7-7

Boundary Location
• In the main pro-STAR window click Cplot to display the joined-up mesh, as
shown in Figure T7.1-5 below.
Figure T7.1-5 Fan model grid display with coupled cells
Complete the mesh re-structuring process by using pro-STAR’s couple

transformation facility. This creates additional cell faces at the junction between
rotating and stationary regions, resulting in a mesh with one-to-one cell face
connectivity and the elimination of all cell couples.
• In the main window, select Tools > Couple...
• Click Transform Couples
• Verify the result of this operation by selecting Cp > All from the main
window. The I/O window feedback should verify that no couples were found
in the model.
• Close the Couple Tool.
Boundary As well as the normal inlet and pressure outflow boundaries, a spinning wall
Location condition needs to be applied to those areas of the stationary fan casing that form
part of the rotating mesh. Such wall boundaries must be defined as spinning in the
opposite direction to the fan rotation in order to produce a stationary wall relative
to the flow. An effective way of locating the counter-spinning boundary regions is
given below, where use is made of various cell and vertex set options that help
identify their edges.
First, create a new cell set containing just the rotating and inlet cells:
• Select C > New > Type and click on any of the rotating (red) cells
• Without plotting the new set, select C > Add > Type and click on any of the
7-8 Version 4.06

Boundary Location
inlet (cyan) cells

• Click Cplot
Now isolate the edge vertices of the above cell set and display them on screen:
• Select V > New > Cell Set Edge
• Turn on the vertex display by clicking the Display Vertices button, , to
Figure T7.1-6 Inlet and rotating cell types showing edge vertices
Next, remove the inlet cells from the cell set; also remove vertices that are no longer
part of this new cell set from the vertex set:
• Select C > Unselect > Type and click on any one of the cyan inlet cells
• Select V > Subset > Cell Set
• Click Cplot to display the red rotating cells and the set of vertices that
describe the edges of the counter-spinning wall boundaries
We are now in a position to define a separate region for these boundaries.

• In the main window, change the viewpoint to be along the negative Z direction
by choosing View > Axis > -Z
• In the pro-STAR Model Guide, go to the Locate Boundaries folder and open
the Create Boundaries panel
Follow the instructions below to specify the wall boundaries in four stages. The first
stage defines boundaries on the bottom surface of the fan using the ZONE method.
The last three stages use the FIND method to generate boundaries from a starting
Version 4.06 7-9

Boundary Location
seed vertex on the surface.

In the Create Boundaries panel:
• Select region 3 in the Boundary Regions scroll list
• Select Wall as the boundary Type from the pull-down menu below
• Click Define
• Ensure region 3 is selected in the Boundary Regions scroll list
• Select Create by Picking a Zone from the Action List and click Apply
• Draw a polygon around the entire visible mesh. This will define the fan base
as part of boundary region 3.
1,152 new boundaries should be created by this method. Next:

• In the main window, change the view back to isometric using View >
Isometric > 1,1,1
• In the Create Boundaries panel, select Create by Picking Surface based on
Vset from the Action List and click the Apply button
• Use the cursor to pick a vertex anywhere between the two concentric rings of
vertices at the top of the visible mesh
An additional 576 boundaries should be created by the above operation. Note that
in this particular example, the core axle will be considered as spinning with the fan,
so no additional boundaries need to be defined in that location.
The inlet and pressure boundaries will be defined next. Start by restoring a view
of the entire model:
• Change the plot type to Hidden Surface
• Turn off the Display Vertices option button
• Click Cplot
To define the inlet boundary:

• Go to the Create Boundaries panel and select region 1 in the Boundary
Regions scroll list
• Select Inlet as the boundary Type from the pull-down menu
• Click Define
• Select Create by Picking Surface based on Edges from the Action List and
click Apply
• Pick a vertex on the top surface of the inlet pipe
Define the pressure boundary in a similar way:

• Select Pressure as the boundary Type from the pull-down menu
• Click Define
• Select Create by Picking Surface based on Vset from the Action List and
click Apply
• Pick a vertex on the surface of the outlet plane, as shown in Figure T7.1-7
7-10 Version 4.06

Boundary Location
Select a Vertex
Here
Figure T7.1-7 Pressure boundary definition
To view all the boundaries created:

• Turn on the Display Boundaries option by clicking the button. The
result is shown in Figure T7.1-8
Version 4.06 7-11

Spin Parameters
Figure T7.1-8 Boundary regions displayed on top of the mesh
• Turn off the boundary display by clicking the Display Boundaries button
again
This completes the boundary set-up stage.

Spin The rotating frame of reference in this case should be defined with respect to the Z-
Parameters axis of the global cylindrical coordinate system. Check where the origin of this
system is positioned within the model:
• Click the button in the main pro-STAR window to display the
• Select coordinate system number 2 in the scroll list
• Select Show Triad from the menu at the bottom of the dialog and click Apply
• Click Close
• Position the viewpoint above the mesh by selecting View > Axis > +Z
The triad for the global cylindrical coordinate system shows that the origin is
positioned on the fan axis and that its Z-axis runs parallel to it. Therefore, this
system is correctly aligned and positioned for the model’s purposes. Had this not
been the case, a new local cylindrical coordinate system would have had to be
defined (via the Coordinate Systems dialog) whose Z-axis would be the axis of
rotation.
We can now specify the implicit solution option and spin parameters for the
analysis as shown below. For this case, cells with a spin index of 1 are to be
stationary (ω = 0) while those with a spin index of 2 are to have an angular velocity
of 2000 r.p.m.
7-12 Version 4.06

Material Properties
• In the pro-STAR Model Guide, go to the Reference Frames folder and open
the Rotating Reference Frames panel
• Select option Multiple Frames - Implicit from the Ref. Frame Treatment
menu
• Select spin index 1 in the Spin Parameters scroll list
• In the boxes at the bottom of the panel, enter values of 0 for Omega and 2 for
Coordinate System
• Click Apply
• Select spin index 2
• Enter values of 2000 for Omega and 2 for Coordinate System
• Click Apply
The implicit solution method for this multiple rotating reference frame problem has
now been set up. All cells with a spin index of 2 will be treated as rotating at 2000
r.p.m., while those with the default setting of 1 will remain stationary.
Material Check the properties of the fluid present in the model. The default fluid for material
Properties no. 1 in pro-STAR is air at standard pressure and temperature. Therefore its
molecular properties do not need to be altered and you can go directly to setting up
the turbulence model.
• Open the Turbulence Models panel in the pro-STAR Model Guide by
selecting the Thermophysical Models and Properties and Liquids and Gases
folders
• Choose the K-Epsilon/High Reynolds Number Model option
• Click Apply
Set up some essential monitoring and reference parameters:

• Enter 20938 for the Monitoring Cell Number
• Enter 5669 for the Pressure Cell Number
• Click Apply
Boundary An inlet velocity of 5 m/s will be specified, with all flow leaving the fan through the
Conditions pressure outlet.
• Locate the Define Boundary Regions panel in the Define Boundaries folder
• Select region 1 Inlet in the boundary regions scroll list
• Enter a value of -5 for the W-velocity component
• Enter a Turb. Intensity of 0.05 and a Length of 0.001
• Click Apply
The pressure boundary is defined next:

• Select region 2 Pressure in the boundary regions scroll list
• Choose the Static Pressure Option
• Retain the default relative pressure (0) at the boundary. This means that the
absolute pressure at the boundary is equal to the reference pressure.
Version 4.06 7-13

Analysis Controls
• Enter a Turb. Intensity of 0.05 and a Length of 0.001. These values would be
used if there is any inflow through the boundary faces.
• Click Apply
Finally, define conditions at the counter-rotating wall regions:

• Select region 3 Wall in the boundary regions scroll list
• Enter 2 for the Coordinate System defining the axis of rotation
• Enter -2000 for Omega
• Click Apply
Turning on the boundary display by clicking in the main window enables you
to verify the boundary conditions entered above. Check that an inflow velocity
component is displayed across the inlet plane, plus a rotational component on each
of the boundaries on the counter-rotating part of the wall. This can be most easily
done by selecting each region in turn and displaying it.
Analysis To ensure rapid convergence, the under-relaxation factor for pressure will be
Controls increased to 0.5:
• In the pro-STAR Model Guide, select the Analysis Controls folder
• In the Solver Parameters tab, change the Relaxation Factor for Pressure to 0.5
• Click Apply
Options concerned with solution output also need to be modified:

• In the pro-STAR Model Guide, select the Analysis Output panel
• Set the solution Output Frequency to 10
• Select Additional Output Data item Shear Force and then enable the Post
option
• Click Apply
The actions above will tell STAR to update the solution data file every 10 iterations
and write wall shear forces as well as the normal flow field variables into it.
Running the Set the run time controls, i.e., the maximum number of iterations to be performed,
Model for this case:
• Set the Maximum Number of Iterations to 200
• Click Apply
The solution should satisfy the convergence criteria within 200 iterations.
pro-STAR as shown below. Alternatively, you may run STAR interactively as
• In the main window, select File > Save Geometry...
• Ensure that the Geometry Scale Factor is set to 0.001, as the geometry was
originally specified in millimetres
7-14 Version 4.06

Tutorial 7.1 ROTATING-FRAME FAN ANALYSIS CFD Analysis
Final Operations

CFD Analysis
• Ensure that the Model Units option is set to Millimeters
• Click Start
The analysis will then start automatically and will converge within the 200 iteration
limit. Results may be viewed part-way through the analysis by using the
Post-Processing facilities in the pro-STAR Model Guide.
Post-Processing
First, display a plot of the velocity vectors on the mesh surface:
• In the Data tab, select Velocity Components UVW from the Vector Data list
• Click Get Data
• In the 3-D Surface tab, select options Vector and Edge
• Select View > Isometric > 1,1,1 to display Figure T7.1-9
Version 4.06 7-15

Tutorial 7.1 ROTATING-FRAME FAN ANALYSIS Post-Processing
Final Operations
Figure T7.1-9 Velocity vectors displayed on the mesh surface
This plot is not an accurate depiction of the flow field because the reference frame
in which the results are presented is, by default, the computational frame. This
means that, within the rotating mesh region, the results are viewed from the
perspective of someone spinning with the fan blades, i.e., a component equal to rω
is automatically subtracted from the velocity magnitude. This is apparent upon
close examination of this region.
To obtain a velocity vector plot with all velocities measured relative to the same
frame, a stationary reference frame needs to be selected prior to any results being
loaded into pro-STAR. To do this:
• Select the Coordinate System tab in the Load Data panel. This controls the
reference frame in which the solution is viewed.
• Select the Static option
• Click Apply
• Go to the Data tab and select Velocity Components UVW from the Vector
Data list
• Click Get Data
• Click Replot in the main pro-STAR window to display Figure T7.1-10
7-16 Version 4.06

Final Operations
Figure T7.1-10 Velocity vectors relative to a static reference frame
The difference between the plots is apparent in the displayed maximum velocity.
Now display contour plots of some scalar flow parameters in a plane bisecting
the main flow region (inlet region excluded).
• In the Data tab, select Smooth option On
• Click Get Data
• In the Section/Clipped tab, select Option Contour(filled) and Edge/Mesh
None
• To define the plane, enter 0, 0, 34 as the Point and 0, 0, 1 as the Normal
parameters
• Click Apply
Version 4.06 7-17

Final Operations
Figure T7.1-11 Pressure contours displayed in a plane parallel to the inlet plane
Note that the relative pressure at the pressure boundary is roughly zero.
Now display the turbulence kinetic energy distribution:
• Select Turb Kinetic Energy from the Scalar Data list
• Click Get Data
7-18 Version 4.06

Final Operations
Figure T7.1-12 Contours of turbulence kinetic energy
Final End the pro-STAR session:

Operations
Version 4.06 7-19

Tutorial 8 LAGRANGIAN TWO-PHASE FLOW
The next two tutorials model steady and transient Lagrangian two-phase flow with
fuel spray injection. The model geometry consists of an intake port and part of a
cylinder for an idealised internal combustion engine, with an intake valve
separating the two regions. The air inlet and pressure boundary are shown in Figure
T8.0-1. Also shown is the fuel spray injector, located between the inlet and the
valve.
Injector
Inlet
Pressure
boundary
Figure T8.0-1 Engine intake port geometry
Version 4.06 8-1

Tutorial 8.1 STEADY FLOW WITH FUEL SPRAY INJECTION Physical Problem Description
Preliminaries
Tutorial 8.1 STEADY FLOW WITH FUEL SPRAY INJECTION

This tutorial is intended to show the user how to:
• Set up a steady-state Lagrangian two-phase problem
• Choose droplet thermophysical models
• Model droplet evaporation
• Define a spray injector
• Display droplet plots
• Use the Overlay plotting option
• Display animated and still plots of particle tracks

In this tutorial, a constant stream of air flows into the chamber at 3 m/s. A nozzle,
positioned 5 mm away from the inlet and near the centre of the channel, injects
heptane droplets into the air stream at a mass flow rate of 1e-5 kg/s. The nozzle has
a diameter of 1 mm and emits the droplets in a spray cone with an angle of 20o. The
droplets are grouped into 50 parcels; this number is chosen as a reasonable
compromise between computational cost and solution accuracy.
Outflow occurs through a notional pressure boundary shown in Figure T8.0-1,
and gravity is assumed to be acting in a direction normal to it. All walls in the model
are at a fixed temperature of 420K, while the incoming air and heptane fuel are at
400K. A user subroutine is supplied to determine whether droplets evaporate or
bounce upon contact with the walls.
Pre-Processing
Preliminaries Create a sub-directory for this tutorial called tut8-1. The mesh filling the model
geometry has already been created and the relevant data may be found in the cell,
vertex, boundary and problem files supplied for the tutorial (files intake.cel,
intake.vrt, intake.bnd and intake.inp). Copy these files into your
working directory.
Start pro-STAR and enter the case name:
• Enter the case name (say intake_ss) in the Case Name text box
• Click Continue

• In the Read Input Coded File dialog select the File name intake.inp
• Click OK
This will read in the mesh geometry and boundary locations, plus some basic
problem settings. Now name the model:
• Type STEADY FLOW WITH LIQUID SPRAY INJECTION in the Title
8-2 Version 4.06

Tutorial 8.1 STEADY FLOW WITH FUEL SPRAY INJECTION Pre-Processing
Mesh Checking
box
Mesh Check the imported polyhedral mesh visually:

Checking
• Select C > All
• Change the viewpoint by selecting View > Isometric > -1,-1,1
Analysis Specify that the problem involves Lagrangian two-phase flow:

Features
• Under Multi-Phase Treatment, select Lagrangian
• Click Apply. You should notice that the Lagrangian Multi-Phase folder is
now active in the pro-STAR Model Guide tree.
Material Turn on gravity and specify its magnitude and direction:

Properties
• Select the Thermophysical Models and Properties folder and then open the
Gravity panel
• Enter a value of 9.8 m/s2 in the Acceleration box
• Check that the Coordinate System is set to 1 and that the Direction of Gravity
Force is 0, 0, -1
• Click Apply
The default fluid for the continuous phase is air, so its molecular properties do not
Version 4.06 8-3

Scalar Definition
require alteration. However, turbulence and thermal models still need to be

specified:
• Select the Liquids and Gases folder and open the Molecular Properties
(Fluids) panel
• Select Ideal-f(T,P) for the Density option
• Click Apply
• Open the Turbulence Models panel and select On for Turbulence
• Select k-Epsilon/High Reynolds Number from the Model pull-down menu
• Click Apply
• Open the Thermal Models panel and select Temperature Calculation On
• Click Apply
Specify initial values for the turbulence parameters:

• Under the Turbulence tab, ensure the k-Epsilon option is selected
• Enter 2 for the Turbulent Energy and 3000 for Epsilon
• Click Apply
Specify the monitoring and pressure reference cells:

• Enter 10054 for the Monitoring Cell Number. This cell is near the valve.
• Enter 4337 for the Pressure Cell Number. This cell is adjacent to the pressure
boundary.
• Click Apply
Scalar Assign scalar no. 1 to the product of droplet evaporation, i.e., heptane vapour, and
Definition import its physical properties from pro-STAR’s built-in database:
• Select the Additional Scalars folder
• Open panel Molecular Properties (Scalars)
• Check that the Scalar # option is set to 1 and then choose option Select scalar
from database from the menu at the top of the panel
• Select the appropriate physical substance, C7H16 HEPTANE(V) in this case,
from the scalar database scroll list and then choose option Define user scalar
from the menu at the top of the panel
• The physical properties of heptane vapour are read in from pro-STAR’s
property database and entered into the appropriate boxes of the Molecular
Properties (Scalars) panel. Check that the displayed values are reasonable
and then click Apply.
Dispersed Now specify the properties of the dispersed phase using the Lagrangian
Phase Multi-Phase folder:
Models
• Open the Droplet Controls panel
• Change the Under-Relaxation of Lagrangian Sources value to 0.15
• Click Apply
• Open the Droplet Physical Models panel

• Under the Global Physical Models tab, turn On Turbulent Dispersion
8-4 Version 4.06
Injector Properties
• Turn On Gravity Effects

• Click Apply
• Under the Droplet Physical Models tab, select the Standard Correlation for
Momentum Transfer
• Ensure the Slip Factor is 0
• For Mass Transfer Calculation, select option Standard
• For Heat Transfer Calculation, select option Standard
• Select the Reitz Droplet Break-Up model
• In the Droplet-Wall Interaction section, choose the User option
Make a local copy of user subroutine DROPRO and put it in a sub-directory called
ufile under your current working directory, as described in Chapter 15 of the
CCM User Guide.
• In the main window, select File > System Command...
• Type ufiles in the text box, click Apply and then Close
• Go back to the Droplet Physical Models tab and click User Define to write
the default droplet-wall interaction subroutine DROWBC to the ufile
sub-directory
• Click Apply
• Open the Droplet Properties panel

• Choose option Select material from database from the menu at the top of
the panel
• Choose C7H16_l # HEPTANE(L) as the droplet material from the list
• Enable the Use Internal Property Calculation option
• Select Define user material from the menu at the top of the panel to return to
the properties panel
• Specify the previously-defined scalar (HEPTANE(V)) as the product of
evaporation by selecting scalar 1 C7H16 for the Evaporates to Scalar option
• Click Apply
Injector The droplet thermophysical models and properties are now fully defined, so move
Properties on to specifying the properties of the spray injector. First, though, a new coordinate
system needs to be defined, centred at the injection point:
• In the main pro-STAR window, click the button to open the Coordinate
Systems dialog
• Select number 4 from the list of coordinate systems
• Select Cylindrical from the pull-down menu at the bottom left of the
• Enter the following values in the seven boxes to the right of this menu: 100,
19, 35, 0, 0, -100, 0. These position the coordinate system’s origin at the
injector location.
• Select New (Global) from the menu at the bottom of the dialog and click
Apply
• Ensure that coordinate system number 4 is selected in the list then choose
Show Triad from the menu and click Apply
• Close the Coordinate Systems dialog
Version 4.06 8-5

Boundary Conditions
• Click Cplot
The triad for the newly-defined coordinate system should now be visible at the start
of the refined mesh region. The spray cone will be centred around its Z-axis.
Now enter the spray injector properties:
• Open the Spray Injection with Atomization panel
• The default Spray Options are satisfactory, so click Apply Spray Options
• Change the Injection Temperature to 350 K
• Change the Hole Diameter to 5e-4 m
• Enter 4 for the injector Coordinate System
• Change the Cone Angle to 20o
• Enter a mass Flow Rate of 1e-5 kg/s
• Change the Number of Parcels/Injector to 50
• Check that the Droplet Type is number 1, HEPTANE (L)
• Click Update Injector
Boundary Specify the fixed wall temperature:

Conditions
• Go to the Define Boundaries folder and open the Define Boundary Regions
panel
• Select region 0 from the boundary regions list
• Change the Wall Heat option to Fixed
• Enter 420 K in the Temperature box
• Click Apply
The inlet velocity and temperature also need to be specified:

• Enter a U velocity of -3 m/s
• Change the Turbulence Switch option to k/Epsilon
• Enter 2 m2/s2 for k
• Enter 0.01 m2/s3 for Epsilon
• Change the Temperature to 400 K
• Click Apply
The mean temperature and heptane mass fraction at the pressure boundary are
estimated on the basis of temperatures and mass flow rates at the inlet and in the
injector. To specify these values:
• Change the Turbulence Switch to Zero Grad
• Change the Temperature Switch to Zero Grad
• Change the Scalar Switch to Zero Grad
• Click Apply
Analysis Set the frequency of data output to the solution file:
Controls
Analysis Output panel
an Output Frequency of 100 iterations and File Name intake_ss.ccmp
8-6 Version 4.06

Tutorial 8.1 STEADY FLOW WITH FUEL SPRAY INJECTION User Subroutine
Run Time Controls
• Click Apply
Run Time Increase the maximum number of iterations to allow the analysis to converge:
Controls
• Click Apply
Final The pre-processing task for this tutorial is now complete. If you wish to terminate
Operations the session at this stage, save all model data, write the problem and geometry files
and exit from pro-STAR, as shown below. Alternatively, you may run STAR
interactively, as described in the next section.
• Ensure that the Geometry Scale Factor is set to 0.001, as the geometry was
created in millimetres
User Subroutine
To introduce the coding needed for the extra source terms, use pro-STAR’s built-in
editor to edit subroutine DROWBC (in file drowbc.f within sub-directory ufile)
as follows:
• In the main pro-STAR panel, select File > Edit File...
• In the Edit File dialog, click File > Open...
• In the Open dialog displayed, enter sub-directory ufile and select file
drowbc.f
• Click OK
• Edit the contents of the subroutine by adding extra lines of code, as shown
below
• Click File > Save
• Click File > Quit to exit from the editor
C***********************************************************************
SUBROUTINE DROWBC(BOUNCE,UD,VD,WD,FX,FY,FZ,DRQ,TD,EMCO,
* DEMUCO,REMOVE)
C Droplet wall boundary conditions
C***********************************************************************
C--------------------------------------------------------------------------*
C STAR VERSION 4.04.000
C--------------------------------------------------------------------------*
INCLUDE ’comdb.inc’
INTEGER NDRCOM_max
COMMON /drcomp/ NDRCOM_max
COMMON/USR001/INTFLG(100)
LOGICAL BOUNCE,REMOVE
INCLUDE ’usrdat.inc’
DIMENSION EMCO(*),DEMUCO(NDRCOM_max,*)
Version 4.06 8-7

Tutorial 8.1 STEADY FLOW WITH FUEL SPRAY INJECTION User Subroutine
Final Operations
DIMENSION WPCO(50),PPCO(50),CPCO(50),HVCO(50),PSCO(50)
DIMENSION HPVPSC(50),CPVPSC(50)
DIMENSION SCALC(50),SCWALL(50)
DIMENSION DRMAFR(50)
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT12(001), ICTID )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT01(001), SBX )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT01(002), SBY )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT01(003), SBZ )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT03(005), WG )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(001), CP )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(002), DEN )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(003), ED )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(006), P )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(008), TE )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(059), U )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(060), V )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(061), W )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(062), VISM )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(063), VIST )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(007), T )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT05(001), IDR )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT05(002), IDRT )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT06(001), CPDR )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT06(002), DENDR )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT06(003), DRD )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT06(009), XD )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT06(010), YD )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT06(011), ZD )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT07(001), DRM )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT07(002), RNDP )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT02(007), TW )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT02(059), UB )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT02(060), VB )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT02(061), WB )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT02(064), UBL )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT02(065), VBL )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT02(066), WBL )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT05(005), NDRCO )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT13(001), WPCO(1) )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT13(051), PPCO(1) )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT13(101), CPCO(1) )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT13(151), HVCO(1) )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT13(201), PSCO(1) )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT13(251), HPVPSC(1) )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT13(301), CPVPSC(1) )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT02(009), SCWALL(01) )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(009), SCALC(01) )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT08(001), DRMAFR(01) )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT03(001), CON )
C-----------------------------------------------------------------------
C
C This subroutine enables the user to specify momentum, mass
C and heat exchange at wall boundaries for droplets striking walls.
C
C ** Parameters to be returned to STAR: BOUNCE, UD,VD,WD, FX,FY,FZ,
C DRQ, TD, EMCO, DEMUCO,REMOVE
C
8-8 Version 4.06

Tutorial 8.1 STEADY FLOW WITH FUEL SPRAY INJECTION CFD Analysis
Preliminaries
C-----------------------------------------------------------------------
PARAMETER(FRACN=1. - 0.5 )
PARAMETER(FRACT=1. - 0.1 )
C-----CALCULATE DROPLET VELOCITY MAGNITUDE
VDMAG=SQRT(UD**2 + VD**2 + WD**2)
IF (VDMAG .LE. 2.5) THEN
BOUNCE=.FALSE.
ELSE
C-----Droplet bounces from the wall losing 50% of its velocity normal
C-----to the wall and 10% in the direction parallel to the wall.
C-----CALCULATE NORMAL COMPONENT OF VELOCITY
AREA=SQRT(SBX**2 + SBY**2 + SBZ**2)
S1=SBX/AREA
S2=SBY/AREA
S3=SBZ/AREA
VNMAG = UD*S1 + VD*S2 + WD*S3
UNORML=VNMAG*S1
VNORML=VNMAG*S2
WNORML=VNMAG*S3
C-----CALCULATE TRANSVERSE COMPONENT OF VELOCITY
UTRANS=UD - UNORML
VTRANS=VD - VNORML
WTRANS=WD - WNORML
C-----CALCULATE VELOCITY AFTER BOUNCING
UD=FRACT*UTRANS - FRACN*UNORML
VD=FRACT*VTRANS - FRACN*VNORML
WD=FRACT*WTRANS - FRACN*WNORML
BOUNCE=.TRUE.
ENDIF
C-------------------------------------------------------------------------C
RETURN
END
CFD Analysis
• Choose Double Precision and ensure that the Scale Factor is 0.001
• Click Start
The analysis will then start automatically. The solution should satisfy the default
convergence criteria within the specified maximum number of iterations.
Post-Processing
Preliminaries Read in the analysis results:
• In the Post-Processing folder, open the Load Data panel
• Check that intake_ss.ccmp is displayed in the Post File box for Steady
State Analysis
Version 4.06 8-9

Tutorial 8.1 STEADY FLOW WITH FUEL SPRAY INJECTION Post-Processing
Continuous Phase
Continuous Plot velocity vectors on a plane bisecting the valve:

Phase
• Go to the Data tab and select Velocity Components UVW from the Vector
Data list
• Click Get Data
• Under the Section/Clipped tab, select Vector and Edge
• Define the cross-section plane by entering 0, 19, 0 for the Point and 0, 1, 0 for
the Normal values
• Click Apply and then Plot to Screen
• Under the Vectors tab, change the Scale Factor to 0.5
• Click Apply
• In the main pro-STAR window, select View > SNormal View to display
Figure T8.1-2
Figure T8.1-2 Velocity vectors on a plane bisecting the valve
Now create a temperature contour plot on the same plane:

• Select Data Type Cell
• Click Get Data
• Under the Section/Clipped tab, choose Contour (filled) and Edge
8-10 Version 4.06

Continuous Phase
Figure T8.1-3 Temperature contours on a plane bisecting the valve
In addition, plot contours of the heptane vapour mass fraction:

• Select C7H16 from the Scalar Data list
• Click Get Data
Version 4.06 8-11

Dispersed Phase
Figure T8.1-4 Contours of heptane vapour concentration on a plane bisecting the valve
Dispersed The dispersed phase can be visualised by creating droplet plots. In this instance, the
Phase droplet tracks will be plotted on top of the previous contour plot of heptane vapour
concentration using the Overlay option:
• In the Post-Processing folder, open the Particle Tracks sub-folder
• Open the Plot Droplets panel
• Choose Load From Track File and accept the default intake_ss.trk file
• Click Load Data
• In the Droplet Plot Options section, select Off under Edge Plot Options
• Select a Diameter dependent Droplet Size and enter 0.1 as the Maximum
Droplet Diameter
• Select None from the Vectors pull-down menu
• Click Apply
• In the interests of display clarity, select a subset of the computed droplet
tracks by typing the following command in the I/O window:
DSET NEWS DRAN 2 50 3
• Select Plot > Display > Overlay from the main pro-STAR window’s menu
bar to turn on the Overlay option
• Enter command
PLFIX ON
in the I/O window to prevent the display from automatically adjusting to the
scale of the plot that follows
8-12 Version 4.06

Dispersed Phase
• Click Droplet Plot in the Plot Droplets panel to display Figure T8.1-5
Figure T8.1-5 Heptane droplets overlaid onto a heptane vapour concentration plot
The droplets can also be displayed as particle tracks:

• Turn off the Overlay and Plot Fix options by entering the following
commands in the I/O window:
OVERLAY OFF
PLFIX OFF
• Return to the Load Data panel and, under the File(s) tab, click Open Post file
• Select Geometry and Quick Hidden Line as the plot attributes in the main
pro-STAR window
• Click Cplot
• Go to the Plot Particles panel
• Check Display option Segments is selected
• Click Plot Tracks to produce an animated display of the droplet trajectories
• Select Display option Continuous
• Click Plot Tracks to display Figure T8.1-6
Version 4.06 8-13

Dispersed Phase
Figure T8.1-6 Particle tracks showing paths of heptane droplets
Figure T8.1-5 and Figure T8.1-6 show that most of the droplets evaporate before
they reach the cylinder. This leads to the cool region of high heptane vapour
concentration near the valve and low concentration in parts of the cylinder. The
region of high concentration can be shown effectively in three dimensions by
plotting an isosurface:
• Click Clear Tracks in the Plot Particles panel
• Under the IsoSurf tab, select Plot Edge On
• Enter a Scalar Value of 0.0001
• Click Apply
• In the main pro-STAR window, ensure Quick Hidden Line plot is selected
• Rotate the view to examine the details of the isosurface shape
8-14 Version 4.06

Final Operations
Figure T8.1-7 Isosurface of heptane vapour concentration with mass fraction = 0.0001

Operations
Version 4.06 8-15

Tutorial 8.2 TRANSIENT FLOW WITH FUEL SPRAY INJECTION Physical Problem Description
Preliminaries
Tutorial 8.2 TRANSIENT FLOW WITH FUEL SPRAY INJECTION

This tutorial is intended to show the user how to:
• Set up a transient Lagrangian two-phase flow problem
• Produce on-screen animations using command loops
• Save screen shots for creating animations externally

The problem geometry and flow conditions in this tutorial are the same as in
Tutorial 8.1. However, the injection is more complex, with the heptane fuel no
longer injected in a constant stream but in two short bursts. For the first burst, the
mass flow rate through the injector starts at 0.001 kg/s (the mass flow rate in the
steady-state solution) and then falls linearly to 0.0001 kg/s. The same pattern is then
repeated for the second burst. The total injection period is 0.05 s.
Pre-Processing
Preliminaries Create a sub-directory for this tutorial called tut8-2. Most of the case set-up has
already been performed in Tutorial 8.1 so the model file, intake_ss.mdl,
should be copied across to the new working directory and renamed
intake_tr.mdl before continuing.
Start up pro-STAR and open the model file:
• Check that the case name is intake_tr and that the Resume From Existing
.mdl File option is selected
• Deselect the append to .echo file option
• Click Continue
Now change the model title:

• In the Title box, enter
TRANSIENT FLOW WITH LIQUID SPRAY INJECTION
and click Apply and Close
Analysis Change to a transient analysis setting:

Features
• Select Transient as the Time Domain
• Click Apply
Injector The injector position and droplet properties have already been defined in the
Properties previous tutorial. However, the flow rate profile during the injection period must be
created from scratch:
• Select the Lagrangian Multi-Phase folder
Version 4.06 8-17

Tutorial 8.2 TRANSIENT FLOW WITH FUEL SPRAY INJECTION Pre-Processing
Analysis Output
• In the Define Injectors section, select Table from the Mass Flow Rate menu
• Click the New Table button at the bottom of the panel
• The Table Editor dialog should now appear.
• Enter the data shown below:
• Click Write, then Graph to display Figure T8.2-1

• Close the Table Editor
• In the Spray Injection with Atomization panel, check that intake_tr.tbl
is the selected Table in the file name box
• Change the Number of Parcels/Injector to 1000 /s
Figure T8.2-1 Graph showing the mass flow rate profile over the injection period
Analysis Instruct STAR to write the analysis results in the transient post data file
Output (intake_tr.ccmt) at every single time step. In addition, specify what cell data
(including scalar variable data) are to be written during the run.
8-18 Version 4.06

Tutorial 8.2 TRANSIENT FLOW WITH FUEL SPRAY INJECTION CFD Analysis
Set Run Time Controls
• Go to the Analysis Controls folder and open the Analysis Output panel and
then select the Transient tab
• Specify the frequency of writing data to the transient post file by typing 0.001
in the Output interval box. As discussed below, this is equivalent to outputting
data at every time step.
• As can be seen in the scroll list, velocity and pressure are already selected by
default. Change this selection by
(a) removing Pressure
(b) adding Temperature
(c) adding the mass fraction of scalar C7H16
In each case, click on the Post option to include or exclude the desired item
• Click Apply
Set Run Time The time interval of interest in this case is 0 ≤ t ≤ 0.05 seconds. Specify that it is to
Controls be covered in steps of 0.001 seconds, i.e., 50 time steps in total.
• Ensure the Run time control option is set to Run for and type 0.05 in the Time
box
• Click Apply
• Check that 0.001 sec is entered for the Time step for period
• Click Set
• Accept the default value, 0.001, shown in the Geometry Scale Factor text box
CFD Analysis
• Ensure Millimeters is selected for the Model Units option
• Select the Double Precision option for the STAR executable
• Click Start
Inspect the information written in files intake_tr.run and

intake_tr.info once the run has finished.
Version 4.06 8-19

Tutorial 8.2 TRANSIENT FLOW WITH FUEL SPRAY INJECTION Post-Processing
Preliminaries
Post-Processing
Preliminaries Start the post-processing task by re-plotting the mesh:
• Click Cplot
Read in the results of the analysis:

• Select the Transient Analysis option
• Click Add File
• Select the file intake_tr.ccmt from the Transient list and click
Open Transient file
Droplet Plots As in Tutorial 8.1, the droplet plots will be overlaid on contour plots of heptane
vapour concentration. A combined plot of this type will be produced for each time
step using a command loop. The resulting sequence of plots will then form an
on-screen animation. First, set the droplet plot options:
• In the pro-STAR Model Guide, select the Particle Tracks folder
• In the Droplet Plot Options section, turn Off Edge Plot Options
• Specify the displayed Droplet Size to be proportional to the actual droplet
Diameter and enter a Maximum Droplet Diameter of 0.12
• Specify the Fill Color to be dependent upon the Mass
• Change the Vectors option to None
• Click Apply
Set the cell plot characteristics:
• In the main pro-STAR window, turn on the Display Edges plot option,
• Select Contour plot option and Section (Surface) plot type. Ignore the
warning stating that no scalar data are stored
• Enter the commands:
SNORMAL 0 1 0
SPOINT 0 19 0
The command loop used to produce the plots will now be entered into the I/O
window. It utilises the OVERLAY and PLFIX commands demonstrated in Tutorial
8.1. Also, the CSCALE command is used to enable droplet and contour plots to have
different colour scales.
• Enter the following commands:
*SET IT 1 1
*DEFINE
STORE ITER IT
CSCALE 14 USER 0 0.03
GETV CONC
8-20 Version 4.06
Tutorial 8.2 TRANSIENT FLOW WITH FUEL SPRAY INJECTION Post-Processing
Final Operations
CPLOT
OVERLAY ON
PLFIX ON
SCDUMP GIF IT
CSCALE 14 USER 0.4e-7 0.2e-5
GETD POST
DSET ALL
DPLOT
OVERLAY OFF
SCDUMP OFF
*END
*LOOP 1 49
PLFIX OFF
The SCDUMP command in the above loop saves a screen shot of each combined plot
in a file with extension .gif. It is turned on and off again at each time step because
otherwise it would save screen shots of the contour plots as well as the combined
plots. The .gif files produced may subsequently be combined into an animation
sequence using an external package. For more details on pro-STAR’s animation
capabilities, see “Animation Sequence Definition and Display” on page 12-2 of the
Post-Processing User Guide.
Operations
Version 4.06 8-21

Tutorial 9 COMBUSTION

A model of an idealised CAN type gas turbine combustion chamber is chosen to
familiarise users with STAR-CD’s combustion modelling capabilities and
introduce various recommended practices for computing combusting flows.
The mesh used in this case is shown in Figure T9.0-1 and was created in Tutorial
1.2 of the Meshing Tutorials volume. The problem geometry consists of three sets
of air inlets placed circumferentially at the combustor head to promote maximum
mixing and flame stabilisation. Swirling air enters the primary combustion zone
through the two sets of inlets nearest to the axis of symmetry. Non-swirling air
enters the upper inlet and thence the primary, secondary and dilution zones via five
injection holes on the liner. This liner, separating the cooling passage from the main
combustion area, is represented in the model by baffle cells.
Air is assumed to be composed of 23.2% oxygen and 76.8% nitrogen, by mass,
and to be at a pressure of 1 bar and temperature of 293 K throughout this tutorial.
Unless stated otherwise, its physical properties are assumed to be as follows:
Density Ideal gas with pressure dependence

Specific heat 1006 J/kg K
Thermal conductivity 2.637 × 10 –2
W/m K
Only a sixty-degree sector of the combustor is simulated (see Figure T9.0-1). This
is achieved by using STAR-CD’s cyclic boundary option which allows the
transmission of information across boundaries of this type.
To demonstrate the full combustion capabilities of STAR-CD, both gaseous and
liquid fuels are employed in the simulation. Gaseous fuels are supplied through an
inlet at the combustor head whilst liquid fuels are injected as droplets from a single
injector located on the axis. The physical properties of air and fuel and details of the
individual simulations are presented in the corresponding sub-tutorials.
Version 4.06 9-1

Figure T9.0-1 Mesh structure for the combustion chamber model
9-2 Version 4.06

Tutorial 9.1 PROPANE COMBUSTION (ADIABATIC PPDF) Pre-Processing
Preliminaries
Tutorial 9.1 PROPANE COMBUSTION (ADIABATIC PPDF)

In this tutorial, a propane combustion case is set up using the Presumed Probability
Density Function (PPDF) reaction model for unpremixed flames. The model
assumes adiabatic conditions (no heat loss) and a local instantaneous chemical
equilibrium. The main aim is to:
• Familiarise users with the adiabatic PPDF model setup
• Demonstrate the use of the CEA package for calculating polynomial
coefficients required by the model
• Evaluate the accuracy of the analysis results and suggest a way of improving
them
• Illustrate the use of user-defined panels as a way of facilitating
post-processing operations
For adiabatic PPDF, the physical properties of the fuel (pure propane in this case)
are not utilised as no additional transport equations requiring these properties are
solved. Temperature, density and species mass fractions are evaluated using the β
function formulation outlined in the Methodology volume (see “Presumed-PDF
(PPDF) Model for Unpremixed Turbulent Reaction” in Chapter 10).
Pre-Processing
combustor.cel, combustor.vrt, combustor.bnd and
combustor.inp, respectively). Therefore, before starting the tutorial, make sure
that the supplied files are copied into your current directory.
• Enter the case name (say, PPDF_ad) in the Case Name text box
• Click Continue

• In the Read Input Coded File dialog select the File name combustor.inp
• Click OK
This will read default problem settings from file combustor.inp plus the
files.

PROPANE COMBUSTION (ADIABATIC PPDF)

Plot the mesh to confirm the data read in:

Version 4.06 9-3
Material Properties
• In the main pro-STAR window, select Plot > Up Axis followed by X

• Select C > All
• Select View > Isometric > 1, 1, -1
• Click Cplot
Specify the key feature of this case, i.e., chemically reacting flow:
• In the pro-STAR Model Guide, go to panel Analysis Features
• Select option Chemical Reaction from the Reacting Flow menu
• Click Apply
• Select folder Thermophysical Models and Properties and note that the
sub-folder called Reacting Flow is now active in the pro-STAR Model Guide
tree. This will be used in this and all subsequent sub-tutorials to supply
chemical reaction definitions
Material Set up material properties and thermofluid models using the appropriate pro-STAR
Properties Model Guide panels. The required actions are as follows:
1. Select the Ideal Gas Law density variation (with pressure dependence)
2. Select the standard k-ε turbulence model
3. Turn on the temperature solver
4. Set the initial temperature distribution
5. Choose the monitoring cell location
6. Choose the reference pressure and its location
• Select option Ideal-f(T,P) from the Density menu
• Click Apply

• Select On to switch on Turbulence modelling
• Select option K-Epsilon/High Reynolds Number from the Model menu
• Click Apply

• Turn on the solution of the energy equation by selecting On for the
Temperature Calculation option
• Click Apply

• In the Flow Conditions tab, confirm that a value of 293 is displayed in the
Temperature box
• Go to the Turbulence tab and select option TI/Mixing Length from the
Model options
• Enter 0.05 and 0.2 in the Intensity and Mixing Length boxes, respectively
• Click Apply
• Choose a monitoring cell location (say, half way between the axis and the
outer casing and towards the outlet). This may be done by entering a cell
9-4 Version 4.06

Combustion Model
number in the Monitoring Cell Number text box. Alternatively, click the
mouse icon and then use the screen cursor to select the required cell on the
mesh plot. In this case, we assume that the chosen cell no. is 1760
• Make the reference pressure cell location the same as the monitoring cell
location by entering 1760 in the Pressure Cell Number box. Confirm that
100000 appears in the Pressure box
• Click Apply
Combustion Use the pro-STAR Model Guide’s Reacting Flow folder to set up the combustion
Model model as follows:
• Select sub-folder Reacting Flow followed by Chemical Reactions
• Open the Scheme Definition panel. Note that scheme no. 1 is selected by
default for the Chemical Scheme option at the top of the panel
• Select option Unpremixed/Diffusion from the Reaction Type menu
• Select option PPDF Single Fuel from the Reaction Model menu
• Accept the Chemical Equilibrium setting in the Option menu and click
Apply
• A pop-up window will now appear warning you that the default chemical
reaction settings will be changed. Click Continue.
Continue by using the CEA package to specify the fuel (C3H8) and its combustion
products. In an adiabatic PPDF model, only chemical species polynomial
coefficients are required. These are derived separately using an equilibrium
calculation for a mixture of pure propane and air at a temperature of 293 K and
pressure of 1 bar. To read these values into pro-STAR, proceed as follows:
• Open the Reaction System panel
• Check that option CEA is selected from the Input/Control menu
• In the Parameter Definition tab, supply the names of all chemical substances
involved plus relevant reaction parameters, as shown below:
Pressure — 1e5
• Select Stream to Define -> Stream1 (Fuel) and then enter the following data
in the table and text box underneath:
Species Name 1 — C3H8
Mass Fraction 1 — 1
Temperature — 293
• Click Define Stream
• Select Stream to Define -> Stream2 (Oxidizer) and then enter the following
data in the table and text box underneath:
Species Name 1 — O2
Mass Fraction 1 — 0.232
Species Name 2 — N2
Mass Fraction 2 — 0.768
Temperature — 293
• Click Define Stream
• Go to the All Species scroll list and enter the following data by selecting each
species line in turn:
1 — C3H8
2 — O2
Version 4.06 9-5
Combustion Model
3 — N2
4 — CO
5 — CO2
6 — H2O
• Click Apply
Note that all chemical names, such as C3H8, should be entered exactly as they
appear in the material names file (material.list) supplied under the
STAR-CD installation directory.
Define the basic character of the reaction:

• Go to the Heat Option tab
• Check that option Adiabatic is selected in the Heat Option menu
Start up the CEA application:
• Go to the Integration Control tab
• Check that option Polynomial is selected in the Integration Method menu.
Note that all items in the PPDF Dependent Variables list are initially flagged
as ‘Undefined’
• Click Apply
Updated items will now appear on the PPDF Dependent Variables scroll list.
Selecting each item in turn will display the corresponding coefficients in the PPDF
Polynomial Coefficients scroll list. Confirm that there are 20 coefficients each for
density, temperature and all chemical species involved (CO, CO2, C3H8, H2O, N2,
O2). To check these coefficients graphically:
• Click Graph to generate plots of the available data automatically, as shown in
Figure T9.1-1
9-6 Version 4.06

Scalar Properties
Figure T9.1-1 PPDF polynomial coefficient plots
Reset the graph registers before proceeding further

• In the main pro-STAR window menu bar, select Graph > Reset
• Click Yes to confirm your action
The CEA output is passed to pro-STAR which in turn generates suitable scalar
variables and maps them automatically to the constituents of the reaction scheme.
The reaction scheme is also assigned automatically to the current fluid domain
(material no. 1). To check the results of this operation:
• Open the Scheme Association panel. Note that chemical scheme no. 1 (the
adiabatic PPDF defined above) is assigned to material no. 1 (the background
fluid in the current domain)
• Select sub-folder Liquids and Gases in the Thermophysical Models and
Properties folder
• Open the Molecular Properties (Fluids) panel. Note that as a result of the
chemical scheme definition, the setting of the Density menu has changed
automatically to PPDF.
Scalar Check the properties of the scalar variables that were automatically set up by the
Properties combustion model’s mapping process, described above:
• Select sub-folder Additional Scalars and then open the three panels under it in
turn
• In the Molecular Properties (Scalars) panel, use the Scalar number option to
inspect the available scalars.
Version 4.06 9-7

Boundary Conditions
It will be seen that a total of 8 scalars are present and that, in addition to the species
from the PPDF database (C3H8, O2, CO, CO2, H2O and N2), scalar nos. 1 and 2 (for
mixture fraction and variance) have also been created automatically. This is because
transport equations for these variables need to be solved, as can be seen from the
formulation of the PPDF model in Chapter 10 of the Methodology volume.
Boundary Check the current boundary definitions and specify boundary conditions where
Conditions appropriate.
Specify boundary conditions for the inlet boundaries, choosing the ‘Mixing Length’
option for turbulence parameter input. Note that all fluid streams except the one
flowing through the cooling passage have swirl velocity components on entry into
the combustor. Starting with the fuel inlet:
• Select region 3 In the boundary regions scroll list
• Enter inlet boundary values for the fuel stream in the appropriate boxes as
shown below:
9-8 Version 4.06

Boundary Conditions
• Click Apply
Specify conditions at the remaining boundaries:

• Select region 4 in the scroll list
• Click Apply
• Highlight region 5 in the scroll list
Version 4.06 9-9

Boundary Conditions
• Click Apply
• Enter inlet conditions in the appropriate text boxes, as shown below:
9-10 Version 4.06

Boundary Conditions
• Click Apply
Check the wall boundary conditions for the first inlet-side wall (region 7)
• Select region 7 in the scroll list. The default settings are acceptable, so no
further action is required
This is also true of the wall boundary conditions assigned to regions 8 to 13.
Check region 14 (the outlet) and region 15 (the baffle boundaries):

• Highlight region 14 in the scroll list. The default settings are acceptable, so no
• Highlight region 15 in the scroll list. The default settings for side no. 1 are
acceptable, so no further action is required. The settings for side no. 2 are
automatically the same as side no. 1
Specify a boundary condition for the mixture fraction variable at the fuel inlet:
• Select region no. 3 in the Boundary Region scroll list
• Select MIXTURE_FRACTION in the Scalars scroll list, type 1 in the
boundary Value box and then click Apply
Version 4.06 9-11

Tutorial 9.1 PROPANE COMBUSTION (ADIABATIC PPDF) CFD Analysis
Control Parameters
Modify the air inlet boundary values (regions 4, 5 and 6) for the O2 and N2 scalars
as follows:
• Select N2 in the Scalars scroll list, type 0.768 in the boundary Value box and
click Apply
• Select O2 in the Scalars scroll list, type 0.232 in the boundary Value box and
click Apply
Repeat the above sequence of steps for regions 5 and 6.

Control Check the solution control parameters and then change the under-relaxation factor
Parameters and residual tolerance for the mixture fraction and variance:
• Select MIXTURE FRACTION in the Scalar scroll list
• Type 0.7 in the Under-Relaxation Factor box
• Type 0.001 in the Residual Tolerance box
• Click Apply
• Select VARIANCE in the Scalar scroll list
• Type 0.7 in the Under-Relaxation Factor text box
• Type 0.001 in the Residual Tolerance text box
• Click Apply
Controls
• Enter 500 for the maximum number of iterations and then click Apply.
• Open the Restart panel. The setting of the Restart File Option menu should be
None, confirming that this is a run from initial conditions.
• In the Save Geometry File dialog, click Apply and then Close
CFD Analysis
For flows involving chemical reactions, it is recommended that STAR is run in
double precision mode, as follows:
9-12 Version 4.06
Tutorial 9.1 PROPANE COMBUSTION (ADIABATIC PPDF) Post-Processing
Preliminaries
• Select the Double Precision option button. Leave all other settings at their
default values
• Click Start
Post-Processing
• Click Cplot
This tutorial employs two user-defined panels, Pgetc and Pgetv, that are specially
designed to facilitate post-processing operations. These may already be available to
you, ready-to-use, in a local or global panel sub-directory (see Chapter 17, “Panels”
in the CCM User Guide). If the panels are not available, or if you want to practice
creating panels, see “Panel Definition” on page 9-18 for a general discussion of the
subject and for specific instructions on how to create these particular panels.
Use the panels to generate a 3-D display of the velocity magnitude distribution:
• Click Panels in pro-STAR’s menu bar to display the available panels and then
select Pgetc. Note that the name of the menu item may be L Pgetc or G
Pgetc, depending on whether a local or global panel sub-directory is being
used. If no items appear in the menu, either the required panel does not exist
or it is necessary to specify the name and location of the above
sub-directories. In either case, you will need to refer to the section on “Panel
Definition” in this tutorial for further instructions.
• Select option Case from the Pgetc panel’s Load menu to get the current case
name
• Select option Load St. to read in the analysis results
• In the main window, select plot option Contour and plot type Hidden
Surface
• In the Pgetc panel, click VM
• In the main window, click the Display Edges plotting button, , to display
Figure T9.1-2
Version 4.06 9-13

Preliminaries
Figure T9.1-2 Velocity magnitude plot
Define a section whose plane bisects the mesh and passes through the axis of
symmetry:
• In the main window, select View > Axis > +X
• Click the Display Edges button again to turn off edge plotting
• Click Sect. Slice and then use the screen cursor to draw a vertical line that
bisects the visible mesh (mark the end points of the line using the screen
cursor). This represents the trace of a longitudinal section plane through the
middle of the mesh and passing through the axis.
• Select a viewpoint at right angles to the section by choosing View > SNormal
View
• Select cell plot type Section (Surface)
Use the Pgetc panel to create a cell-averaged temperature profile in the section:
• On the Pgetc panel, click button TA to display the absolute temperature
distribution
• Average the cell values by selecting Post > Caverage > Cset from the main
pro-STAR window
• Click Replot to display the temperature profile shown in Figure T9.1-3
9-14 Version 4.06

Preliminaries
Figure T9.1-3 Temperature distribution
Note that the cell-averaged temperature contours continue unbroken across the
baffle. This implies a heat flow situation that is unrealistic (given that the baffle is
adiabatic) and is solely due to the interpolation technique employed by pro-STAR
to create a smooth-looking plot. You should be aware of this when creating
smoothed contour plots in geometries containing baffles and solid-fluid interfaces.
Close the Pgetc panel:
• Select File > Close
Open panel Pgetv and plot the vertex-based mass fraction profiles for the fuel and
one of the combustion products (CO2) in the section:
• Select Panels > Pgetv
• Click button Conc5 to display the propane distribution, shown in Figure
T9.1-4
• Click button Conc4 to display the carbon dioxide distribution, shown in
Figure T9.1-5
Version 4.06 9-15

Preliminaries
Figure T9.1-4 Propane distribution
Figure T9.1-5 Carbon dioxide distribution
9-16 Version 4.06

Analysis of Results
As for the cell-averaged temperature plot, the vertex-averaged CO2 plot shows
unrealistic values in the vicinity of the baffle. This effect could be minimised by
using a finer mesh.
Analysis of The predicted maximum temperature in the model is lower than would normally be
Results expected from this type of combustor. It is therefore instructive to consider the
likely accuracy of the temperature distribution obtained here. A good quality
measure to use for this purpose is the ratio
gf
f ′-2 = ---------
----------- -
f f
where f is the mean mixture fraction (calculated as scalar no. 1) and gf its variance
(scalar no. 2). To display the distribution of the above variable over the combustion
region (encompassing approximately the first six cell layers in the radial direction)
proceed as follows:
• Change the plot option setting to Geometry
• Change the cell plot type to Section (All)
• Select C > New > Zone and then draw a closed rectangle encompassing the
entire mesh in the z-direction and the first six cell layers in the x-direction,
starting from the axis. 1080 cells are selected
Load the variance in post register no. 1 and take its square root:
• In the main window, select Post > Operate...
• In the Post Register Operations dialog, go to the Function Category menu and
select option Load cell data > Scalar Concentration
• Accept the default Register 1 as the destination register for the data and type
2 in the Scalar # text box
• Click Apply
• In the Function Category menu, select option Single register > Sqrt
• Click Apply
Load the mixture fraction in post register no. 2:

• In the Post Register Operations dialog, go to the Function Category menu and
select option Load cell data > Scalar Concentration
• Select Register 2 as the destination register and type 1 in the Scalar # text box
• Click Apply
Calculate the required ratio by dividing the contents of register 1 by those of register
2 and putting the results in register 4 (reserved for scalar data).
• Go to the Function Category menu and select option Multi-register > Divide
• Choose appropriate register numbers in the Operation section so that the end
result is Register 4 = Register 1/Register 2
Now plot the distribution:

• Change the plot option setting to Contour
Version 4.06 9-17

Tutorial 9.1 PROPANE COMBUSTION (ADIABATIC PPDF) Panel Definition
Analysis of Results
• Turn off mesh plotting

Figure T9.1-6 Distribution of quality measure ratio
It will be seen that the value of the ratio is generally rather high, implying that the
predicted maximum temperature is considerably lower than the adiabatic flame
temperature. In a realistic modelling exercise, a considerably finer mesh would be
needed to increase confidence in the calculated temperatures.
Terminate the session:
• In the main window, select File > Quit, Nosave
Panel Definition
Panel Pgetc is designed as an aid to post-processing cell-centre based data. To set
up the panel, shown below, proceed as follows:
9-18 Version 4.06

Analysis of Results
• Select Panels > Define Panel... from the main menu bar
• Type Pgetc in the Panel Name box
• Click New. This adds a new panel with that name in the scroll list. Note
that the panel definition is placed by default in the present working
directory, in a file called Pgetc.PNL
• Select the panel name in the list and click Open to display the new
(blank) panel
Specify the basic panel appearance via the panel menu options, as follows:
• In the Pgetc panel, select File > Layout...

• In the Define Panel Layout dialog box, type 7 in the Number of horizontal
buttons text box
• Type 4 in the Number of vertical buttons text box
• Click Apply and then move the panel to the screen location where you
want it to appear every time you enter pro-STAR
• Click Close
Proceed with the definition of panel buttons. To create the first column:
• Click on the first button, B0

• Type SU in the text box for the Button Name
• Click in the Definition field and type:
getc u v w su$repl
• Click on button B1
• Type SV in the text box for the Button Name
getc u v w sv$repl
• Type SW in the text box for the Button Name
getc u v w sw$repl
• Type VM in the text box for the Button Name
Version 4.06 9-19

Analysis of Results

getc u v w vmag$repl
The remaining columns are created in a similar manner, according to the definitions
given below:
ID= B4
Label= P
Command=
getc u v w p$repl
ID= B5
Label= PA
Command=
getc u v w p abso$repl
ID= B6
Label= Pstat
Command=
getc u v w pstat$repl
ID= B7
Label= PstatA
Command=
getc u v w pstat abso$repl
ID= B8
Label= Ptot
Command=
getc u v w ptot$repl
ID= B9
Label= PtotA
Command=
getc u v w ptot abso$repl
ID= B10
Label= T
Command=
getc u v w t rela$repl
ID= B11
Label= TA
Command=
getc u v w t abso$repl
ID= B12
Label= Ttot
Command=
getc u v w ttot rela$repl
9-20 Version 4.06

Analysis of Results
ID= B13
Label= TtotA
Command=
getc u v w ttot abso$repl
ID= B14
Label= K
Command=
getc u v w te$repl
ID= B15
Label= E
Command=
getc u v w ed$repl
ID= B16
Label= Visc
Command=
getc u v w vis$repl
ID= B17
Label= Dens
Command=
getc u v w dens$repl
ID= B18
Label= Conc1
Command=
getc u v w conc 1$repl
ID= B19
Label= Conc2
Command=
ID= B20
Label= Conc3
Command=
ID= B21
Label= Conc4
Command=
ID= B22
Label= Conc5
Command=
ID= B23
Version 4.06 9-21

Analysis of Results
Label= Conc6
Command=
ID= B24
Label= Conc7
Command=
ID= B25
Label= Conc8
Command=
ID= B26
Label= Conc9
Command=
ID= B27
Label= Conc10
Command=
The panel also provides additional facilities for executing common data loading
operations, in the form of a local, user-defined menu (see Chapter 17, “Panels” in
the CCM User Guide). The definition of this special menu is as follows:
• In the Pgetc panel, select File > Menus...

• In the Define Panel Menus dialog box, type Load for the Menu Title of
Menu 1
• Fill in the Menu Item Label and Menu Item Command fields according to
the definitions given below:
Menu Item Label Menu Item Command
Case *get name,case

Event evfi conn
Load St. load {name}.ccmp
Load Tr. trload {name}.ccmt
• Click Apply
• Close the Define Panel Menus dialog
The panel definition is now complete.
• Close the Define Panel dialog
9-22 Version 4.06

Analysis of Results
Note that, in going through this process, you have the choice of leaving the panel in
your present working directory, where it will be available only to the case you are
working on at the moment, or copying/moving it to a local or global panel directory.
You might do the latter if you want the panel to be available for use by other
members of your team (global) or by yourself in all your case directories (local).
If the panel is moved or copied to a local or global directory, you need to make
sure that pro-STAR knows the latter’s name and location. This information may be
available already in the form of environment variable definitions in your operating
system set-up. In such a case, next time you enter pro-STAR you will see the panel
name displayed (preceded by ‘L’ or ‘G’, as appropriate) when you click Panels in
the main menu bar.
If environment variables are not set, it is still possible to supply the required
information as part of the current session, as follows:
• Select Panels > Set Environment... from the main menu bar
• Type the full filename path in the PANEL_GLOBAL or PANEL_LOCAL
text box, depending on the location of the panel definition file
SETENV PANEL LOCAL
• Select Panels > Define Panel... from the main menu bar
• Click Re-scan
• The above operation causes the panel name to be displayed in the scroll
list, preceded by ‘L’ or ‘G’, as appropriate
• Close the Define Panel dialog
• Select Panels from the main menu bar to confirm that Pgetc is included
as a menu option
Note that, if you are working with a local or global directory, any new panels you
create can be placed directly in that directory simply by prefixing the new panel
name with an ‘L’ or ‘G’, as appropriate.
Panel Pgetv is essentially identical to Pgetc apart from the fact that it performs
vertex based post-processing operations. The button definitions for this panel are
given below:
Version 4.06 9-23

Analysis of Results
ID= B0
Label= SU
Command=
getv u v w su$repl
ID= B1
Label= SV
Command=
getv u v w sv$repl
ID= B2
Label= SW
Command=
getv u v w sw$repl
ID= B3
Label= VM
Command=
getv u v w vmag$repl
ID= B4
Label= P
Command=
getv u v w p$repl
ID= B5
Label= PA
Command=
getv u v w p abso$repl
ID= B6
Label= Pstat
Command=
getv u v w pstat$repl
ID= B7
Label= PstatA
9-24 Version 4.06

Analysis of Results
Command=
getv u v w pstat abso$repl
ID= B8
Label= Ptot
Command=
getv u v w ptot$repl
ID= B9
Label= PtotA
Command=
getv u v w ptot abso$repl
ID= B10
Label= T
Command=
getv u v w t rela$repl
ID= B11
Label= TA
Command=
getv u v w t abso$repl
ID= B12
Label= Ttot
Command=
getv u v w ttot rela$repl
ID= B13
Label= TtotA
Command=
getv u v w ttot abso$repl
ID= B14
Label= K
Command=
getv u v w te$repl
ID= B15
Label= E
Command=
getv u v w ed$repl
ID= B16
Label= Visc
Command=
getv u v w vis$repl
ID= B17
Label= Dens
Command=
Version 4.06 9-25

Analysis of Results
getv u v w dens$repl
ID= B18
Label= Conc1
Command=
getv u v w conc 1$repl
ID= B19
Label= Conc2
Command=
ID= B20
Label= Conc3
Command=
ID= B21
Label= Conc4
Command=
ID= B22
Label= Conc5
Command=
ID= B23
Label= Conc6
Command=
ID= B24
Label= Conc7
Command=
ID= B25
Label= Conc8
Command=
ID= B26
Label= Conc9
Command=
ID= B27
Label= Conc10
Command=
9-26 Version 4.06

Tutorial 9.2 PROPANE COMBUSTION (THREE-STEP EDBR) Additional Modelling Notes
Tutorial 9.2 PROPANE COMBUSTION (THREE-STEP EDBR)

The main aim of the tutorial is to:
• Familiarise users with the eddy break-up model setup
• Demonstrate a simulation in which the overall combustion reaction is
represented by several steps, describing fuel pyrolysis and the subsequent
oxidation into combustion products
• Illustrate the use of the ‘numerical’ scheme for modelling the ignition process
Thus, the simulation performed in Tutorial 9.1 is repeated using a three-step

reaction of the following form:
C 3 H 8 + 1.5O 2 → 3CO + 4H 2
CO + 0.5O 2 → CO 2
H 2 + 0.5O 2 → H 2 O
The mesh set up in Tutorial 1.2 of the Meshing Tutorials volume is utilised and
boundary conditions that are appropriate for this type of model are applied.
The physical properties of air (23.2% oxygen and 76.8% nitrogen, by mass),
leading reactants (C3H8, CO, H2) and products (CO2, H2O) are assumed to be as
follows:
Air C3H8 CO H2 CO2 H2O

Molecular weights
28.96 44.0 28.0 2.0 44.0 18.0
Density Ideal gas
Molecular viscosity 1.81 × 8.27 × 1.79 × 8.88 × 1.49 × 1.27 ×
10–5 10–6 10–5 10–6 10–5 10–5
Specific heat Polynomial function of temperature
Thermal conductivity 2.637 × 1.769 × 2.497 × 18.62 × 1.696 × 2.533 ×
10–2 10–2 10–2 10–2 10–2 10–2
It is assumed that both air and fuel enter the combustion chamber at a pressure of
1 bar and temperature of 293 K.
Additional Modelling Notes

• Transport equations are solved for the leading reactants and their mixture
fractions (Mixture fraction = Unburnt fuel mass fraction + Burnt fuel mass
fraction).
• The oxygen mass fraction may be obtained from its fixed fraction in the inlet
air stream and the amount of fuel burnt. Thus, an internal linear equation is
employed to compute this quantity. The nitrogen mass fraction is obtained
from its fixed fraction in the inlet air stream.
Version 4.06 9-27

Tutorial 9.2 PROPANE COMBUSTION (THREE-STEP EDBR) Numerical Considerations
Preliminaries
• The mass fraction of products (carbon dioxide and water vapour) is obtained
from the amount of burnt fuel and is therefore also computed from a linear
equation.
• Using linear equations for oxygen and product mass fractions implies that the
molecular diffusivities of all species are assumed to be identical.
• It is assumed that the combustion rate is controlled by turbulent mixing of fuel
and air and is calculated via the eddy break-up model.
• The mixture’s specific heat is assumed to be dependent on component specific
heats, i.e.
Cp = ∑ C pi Y i
i
where Yi is the species mass fraction and

i i
C p ≡ C p( T ) for all i
• In this model, it is necessary to initiate combustion by an ignition mechanism.

A flow domain region lying downstream of the inlets is chosen for this
purpose. Ignition comprises an artificial reduction of the fuel mass fraction
used to determine the combustion rate and is performed over a pre-defined
number of iterations. It is expected that the final solution will be independent
of the choice of ignition cells, the fuel mass fraction reduction mentioned
above and the duration of the ignition process.
Numerical Considerations
• The combustion source term in the leading reactant transport equations is
large; therefore, the fuel mass fraction requires under-relaxation.
• Using the chemico-thermal option for enthalpy, the enthalpy and mixture
fraction variables must develop numerically at the same rate as the fuel
fraction. Therefore, the under-relaxation factors for enthalpy and transported
species must be identical.
• Small errors in calculating the fuel mass fraction can strongly influence the
computed temperature. Therefore, it is necessary to solve the transport
equations for species and enthalpy to a tight solver tolerance.
Pre-processing
that the above files are copied into your current directory. Also copy the
user-defined panels Pgetc and Pgetv defined in Tutorial 9.1. These are stored in files
Pgetc.PNL and Pgetv.PNL.
9-28 Version 4.06

Tutorial 9.2 PROPANE COMBUSTION (THREE-STEP EDBR) Pre-processing
Ignition Region

• Enter the case name (say, EDBR_va) in the Case Name text box
• Click Continue

• Click OK
files.

PROPANE COMBUSTION (3-STEP EDBR)


• In the main pro-STAR window, select Plot > Up Axis > X
• Select C > All
• Click Cplot
• Click Apply
sub-folder called Reacting Flow is now active in the pro-STAR Model Guide
tree. This will be used in this tutorial to supply chemical reaction definitions.
Ignition As explained in the “Additional Modelling Notes” section, an ignition region needs
Region to be defined for this type of model. To do this, collect the cells to be designated as
ignition cells as follows:
• In the I/O window, type command
CSET NEWS GRAN 0.049 0.0751,,,-0.1 0.51 2

• Click Cplot
A total of 90 cells will be selected. Now assign a separate cell type with a different
colour to them so that they can be distinguished easily from the rest of this model’s
cells:
• Select row 4 in the Cell Tool scroll list
• Click Cell Editor from the menu on the left to open the Cell Editor dialog
• Enter 5 in the Color Index box
Version 4.06 9-29

Material Properties
• Enter Ignition_cells in the Name box

• In the Cell Tool, select Modify > Modify Type (Cell Set)
• Click Replot and note the change of cell colour in the ignition region
• In the main window, select C > All and then Cplot to see all cells in the model
2. Since this is a high-temperature combustion case, assign a polynomial
variation to the specific heat of the background fluid (air) as a function of
temperature. In this tutorial, we assume that the specific heat polynomial for
air is virtually identical to that for N2
4. Turn on the chemico-thermal enthalpy equation solver
5. Set the initial temperature and turbulence distribution
• In the pro-STAR Model Guide, select sub-folder Liquids and Gases
• Select option Polynomial in the Specific Heat menu. Note the Molecular
Weight box whose default value, 28.96, is appropriate for air.
• Click Apply. A pop-up panel will appear, warning you that pro-STAR was not
able to find the background material name (AIR) in its built-in database and
suggesting an alternative action.
• Click OK to close the panel and then click Define Polynomial to open the
Polynomial Function Definition dialog
• Find a substance called N2 in the scroll list on the left-hand side of this
dialog, select it, and then click Apply Database Substance. pro-STAR will
retrieve the corresponding polynomial coefficients and assign them to
material no. 1, i.e., the background material.
• Click Graph Data to display a graph of specific heat versus temperature,
together with corresponding graphs for normalised enthalpy and entropy
• Click Close to exit from the dialog

• Click Apply

• Select option Chemico-Thermal from the Enthalpy menu
• Click Apply
9-30 Version 4.06

Combustion Model
Temperature box
• Go to the Turbulence tab and select option TI/Mixing Length for the Model
• Click Apply
It is good practice to define one of the ignition cells as the monitoring point. This
makes checking for the onset of ignition easier, as temperature and product mass
fractions build-up rapidly at that point once ignition begins.
• Choose the same reference pressure location as Tutorial 9.1, i.e., half way
between the axis and the outer casing and towards the outlet, by entering 1760
in the Pressure Cell Number box. Confirm that 100000 appears in the
Pressure box.
• Click Apply
• Accept the default EBU Standard option from the Reaction Model menu
• Click Apply
reaction settings will be changed. Click Continue.
Specify the chemical reaction equations and other basic model parameters:
• Open the Reaction System panel. Note that reaction no. 1 is selected by
default for the Reaction option.
• Type the first reaction definition, C3H8 + 1.5O2 -> 3CO + 4H2, in the box
underneath
• Accept the default settings on the Status, Tscale and Rate Equation menus
and then click Apply. pro-STAR will use default values for parameters Amix,
Bmix, confirm the chemical names entered above and enter them in the
appropriate lists (Leading Reactants, Products and Reactant Parameters)
• Increment the Reaction setting to 2 and type the second reaction definition,
CO + 0.5O2 -> CO2, in the box
• Click Apply. pro-STAR will update the various lists as necessary
• Increment the Reaction setting to 3 and type the third reaction definition, H2
+ 0.5O2 -> H2O in the box
• Click Apply. pro-STAR will update the various lists as necessary
Check the treatment to be applied to the ordinary reactant (oxygen):

• In the Reactant Parameters list, select reactant no. 1
• Check that option Fixed-Fraction is shown
• Check that the (fixed) oxygen mass fraction in the incoming air stream is
Version 4.06 9-31

Scalar Properties
0.233
This completes the specification of leading reactants and combustion products.

pro-STAR will automatically map scalar variables to the constituents of the reaction
scheme, define their initial conditions and assign physical properties using its
built-in database (props.dbs).
If a chemical species cannot be mapped to a scalar variable, a warning will be
displayed in the I/O window and a new scalar of that name (but with default, i.e.,
air, properties) will be created and added to the scalars list. A stoichiometric check
under this condition will fail, indicating that the assigned properties (molecular
weights, in particular) are not appropriate. It is therefore advisable to check the I/O
window to confirm that the model and chemical species have been correctly set up.
Finally, specify the ignition parameters as follows:
• Open the Ignition panel
• Accept the default setting (Numerical) in the Model/Treatment panel
• Type 4 in the Cell Type box
• Type 0.05 in the Fraction Burnt box
• Accept the default option, Time Step/Iteration, from the Interval menu
• Type 50 and 150 in the Start and End boxes, respectively
• Click Apply
Assign the chemical reaction scheme just defined to the model’s fluid domain:
• Open the Scheme Association panel
• Select On for the Associate Chemical Scheme option and check that the
default value is 1 for the Chemical Scheme # option
• Click Apply
Scalar Check the properties of the scalar variables set up as a result of the scalar mapping
Properties described earlier:
• Select the Additional Scalars folder and then open the Molecular Properties
(Scalars) panel
Use the Scalar spin box to scroll through the available scalars. It will be seen that a
total of 10 scalars have been created, including three ‘passive’ scalars representing
the mixture fractions of the leading reactants. Note that a solution for this group of
scalars is required by the EDBR formulation (see Chapter 10 of the Methodology
volume). Inspect each of the remaining scalars in turn to verify that they have been
set up as ‘active’, i.e., their influence on the flow field will be taken into account
through the density calculation.
As a result of the ‘Polynomial’ setting for the background fluid, you need to
assign a polynomial specific heat function to the scalar variables representing the
chemical reaction species and display this graphically for verification purposes.
• Set the Scalar # option to scalar no. 1 (C3H8)
• Clicking Apply causes pro-STAR to search for the coefficients of this
substance in its internal database. In this case, they are found and a message
to that effect appears in the I/O window.
• Click the Define Polynomials button for specific heat to open the Polynomial
Function Definition dialog. This will display the coefficients just retrieved.
9-32 Version 4.06

Boundary Conditions
• Click Graph Data to display a graph of specific heat .vs. temperature,

• In the Molecular Properties (Scalars) panel, retrieve polynomial coefficients
for the remaining species (i.e., scalar nos. 3, 4, 5, 6, 8 and 10) by selecting
them in turn in the Scalar spin box and then following the same procedure as
for scalar no. 1
Specify boundary conditions for the inlet boundaries, choosing the ‘Mixing Length’
option for turbulence parameter input. Note that all fluid streams except the one
flowing through the cooling passage have swirl velocity components on entry into
the combustor. Starting with the fuel inlet:
• Select region 3 In the boundary regions scroll list
• Enter inlet boundary values for the fuel stream in the appropriate boxes as
shown below:
Version 4.06 9-33

Boundary Conditions
• Click Apply
Specify conditions at the remaining boundaries:

• Click Apply
9-34 Version 4.06

Boundary Conditions
• Click Apply
Version 4.06 9-35

Boundary Conditions
• Click Apply
Check the wall boundary conditions for the first inlet-side wall (region 7)
• Select region 7 in the scroll list. The default settings are acceptable, so no
This is also true of the wall boundary conditions assigned to regions 8 to 13.
Check region 14 (the outlet) and region 15 (the baffle boundaries):

• Highlight region 14 in the scroll list. The default settings are acceptable, so no
• Highlight region 15 in the scroll list. The default settings for side no. 1 are
acceptable, so no further action is required. The settings for side no. 2 are
automatically made the same as side no. 1
Specify scalar boundary conditions at the fuel inlet:

• Select MIX_FRAC-FUEL_1 in the Scalars scroll list, type 1 in the boundary
Value box and then click Apply
9-36 Version 4.06

Tutorial 9.2 PROPANE COMBUSTION (THREE-STEP EDBR) CFD Analysis
Control Parameters
• Select C3H8 in the Scalar scroll list, type 1 in the boundary Value box and
then click Apply
Control Check the solution control parameter settings and specify new values for
Parameters under-relaxation factors and tolerances where appropriate:
• Open the Primary Variables panel and then select the Solver Parameters tab
• Type 0.7 in the Relaxation Factor box for Temperature
• Type 0.001 in the Residual Tolerance box for Temperature
• Type 0.8 in the Relaxation Factor box for Density
• Click Apply
• Select all scalars in the scroll list one-by-one and check the under-relaxation
factor and the residual tolerance settings. It will be seen that they are the same
as those for temperature. This is because, when option Chemico-Thermal is
selected for enthalpy, pro-STAR changes these values automatically to match
those for temperature. This ensures that enthalpy and all transported scalars
are developed numerically at the same rate.
Controls
• Enter 500 for the maximum number of iterations and 0.0001 for the maximum
residual tolerance
• Click Apply
CFD Analysis
As in Tutorial 9.1, a double precision STAR executable needs to be employed, as
follows:
default values
• Click Start
Version 4.06 9-37

Tutorial 9.2 PROPANE COMBUSTION (THREE-STEP EDBR) Post-Processing
Preliminaries
Post-Processing
Preliminaries Read in the results of the analysis from file EDBR_va.ccmp:
Basic Plots Start by re-plotting the mesh:.

• Click Cplot
The user-defined panels, Pgetc and Pgetv, described in Tutorial 9.1 are to be used
to generate a 3-D display of the velocity magnitude distribution:
• Select Panels > Pgetc
• Select Contour as the cell plot type from the drop-down menu
• In the main window, click the Display Edges button to display Figure T9.2-1
Figure T9.2-1 Contours of velocity magnitude
Close the Pgetc panel

• File > Close
9-38 Version 4.06

Basic Plots
• In the main window, click the Display Edges plotting button again to
deactivate it
Define a section whose plane bisects the mesh and passes through the axis of
symmetry:
bisects the visible mesh (click the end points of the line). This represents the
trace of a longitudinal section plane through the middle of the mesh and
passing through the axis.
View
Open panel Pgetv and plot the vertex-based temperature profile in the section:
• On the Pgetv panel, click button TA to display the absolute temperature
distribution shown in Figure T9.2-2
Figure T9.2-2 Temperature distribution
Note that the temperature contours continue unbroken across the baffle. This
implies a heat flow situation that is unrealistic (given that the baffle is adiabatic) and
is solely due to the interpolation technique employed by pro-STAR to create a
smooth-looking plot. You should be aware of this when creating smoothed contour
plots in geometries containing baffles and solid-fluid interfaces.
Repeat for the mass fraction profiles of the fuel and one of the combustion
Version 4.06 9-39
Basic Plots
products (CO2). This time use panel Pgetc to read in the cell-based values and then
obtain the vertex-based values by averaging:
• Click Conc1
• In the main window, click Replot to display the propane distribution shown in
Figure T9.2-3
• Click Conc8
• In the main window, click Replot to display the carbon dioxide distribution
shown in Figure T9.2-4
Figure T9.2-3 Contour plot of C3H8 concentration
9-40 Version 4.06

Basic Plots
Figure T9.2-4 Contour plot of CO2 concentration
As with the temperature plot, the CO2 contour plot incorrectly suggests that the
scalar concentration is continuous across the baffle.
To terminate the session:
Version 4.06 9-41

Tutorial 9.3 C7H8 DROPLET COMBUSTION (EDBR, RADIATION) Pre-processing
Preliminaries
Tutorial 9.3 C7H8 DROPLET COMBUSTION (EDBR, RADIATION)

In Tutorial 9.2, a three-step eddy break-up model was used to simulate propane
combustion. This sub-tutorial employs the same reaction model but under a
significantly different set of conditions, as follows:
1. The fuel is toluene (C7H8) and is injected into the combustor in the form of
droplets that subsequently evaporate into the combustible vapour.
2. An externally supplied subroutine is used to model the physical process
involved in fuel droplet evaporation
3. A single-step chemical reaction of the following form is used:
C 7 H 8 + 9O 2 → 7CO 2 + 4H 2 O
4. Radiation effects are introduced. Some preparatory work for this feature, in
the form of extra boundary region definitions, was done in Tutorial 1.2 of the
Meshing Tutorials volume where the basic mesh setup is described. This
sub-tutorial makes use of those definitions. It also introduces participating
media radiation (due to the gases within the combustor) in addition to
radiative heat transfer between the various boundary surfaces.
5. Some boundary condition modifications are made to represent the combustion
conditions, droplet injection and surface radiation properties.
The aim of this tutorial is therefore to demonstrate:

• The combination of several advanced STAR-CD features (chemical reaction,
Lagrangian two-phase and radiation simulation) in building a physically
realistic model of a typical combustion problem
• The importance of user subroutines in enhancing the accuracy of droplet
material property models
Pre-processing
that the above files are copied into your current directory.
• Enter the case name (say, EDBR_dr) in the Case Name text box
• Click Continue

• Click OK
Version 4.06 9-43

Ignition Region
files.

TOLUENE COMBUSTION (1-STEP EDBR,DROPLETS,RADIATION)


• Select C > All
• Click Cplot
Specify the key features of this case, i.e., chemically reacting flow in the presence
of droplets:
• Select option Lagrangian from the Multi-Phase Treatment menu
• Click Apply. The folder called Lagrangian Multi-Phase will now appear
active in the pro-STAR Model Guide tree
sub-folder called Reacting Flow now appears active in the pro-STAR Model
Guide tree. This will be used in this tutorial to supply chemical reaction
definitions
Ignition Given that an eddy break-up model is to be used here, an ignition region needs to
Region be specified for this model, similar to the one described in Tutorial 9.2. To do this,
collect together the cells to be designated as ignition cells as follows:
• In the I/O window, type command
CSET NEWS GRAN 0.074 0.101,,,-0.1 0.51 2
• Click Cplot
A total of 90 cells will be selected. Now assign a separate cell type with a different
colour to them so that they can be distinguished easily from the rest of this model’s
cells:
• Select row # 4 in the Cell Tool scroll list
• Click Cell Editor from the menu on the left to open the Cell Editor dialog
• Enter 5 in the Color Index box
• Select On from the Radiation menu. This is a necessary setting for
performing radiation calculations, as explained below
• Type Ignition_cells in the Name box
• Click Apply
• In the Cell Tool, select Modify > Modify Type (Cell Set)
• Click Replot and notice the change of cell colour in the ignition region
9-44 Version 4.06
Thermal Options

• In the main window, select C > All and then Cplot to see all cells in the model
Thermal The radiation model in this tutorial includes the effects of the intervening gas, using
Options default gaseous radiation properties, as well as surface-to-surface radiation. This
requires the use of beams that can be tracked only through cell types that are
explicitly defined as participating in radiative heat transfer. Since ignition cells have
already been prepared for this type of analysis, all cells in the rest of the fluid
domain need to be re-set for this purpose:
• Go to the Cell Editor and select row # 1 in its scroll list
• Select On from the Radiation menu
• Click Apply
• Close the Cell Editor
Turn radiation on, choosing the Discrete Transfer analysis method in conjunction
with the participating media calculation option:
• Select the Thermophysical Models and Properties folder and open the
Thermal Options panel
• From the Radiation menu on the panel, select option Discrete Transfer -
Internal VF Calc
• Enter 100 in the Beams per patch box
• Select option Participating to include gaseous radiation effects in the
calculations
• Accept the remaining default settings and then click Apply
Radiation To use the discrete beam radiation model, it is necessary to subdivide all boundary
Patches regions present in the problem (except for cyclic boundaries) into so-called
‘patches’. These are used both during view factor calculations and for evaluating the
radiative heat transfer.
Assign a unique patch to every boundary in every relevant region. This can be
done most conveniently by means of a pro-STAR command loop, shown below:
typed into the I/O window:
• In the I/O window, type the following commands:
BSET NONE
*SET NREG 3 1
*DEFINE
BPATCH NREG,,BYFA
BSET ADD REGI NREG
*END
*LOOP 1 12
The above loop will create 535 patches. Display the patches to confirm that the
operation has been carried out correctly:
• In the main window, select Plot > Cell Display > Boundary Patches
• Verify that patches appear in the right places and then deselect the Boundary
Patches plot display option
Version 4.06 9-45

Material Properties
2. Since this is a high-temperature combustion case, assign a polynomial
variation to the specific heat of the background fluid (air) as a function of
temperature. In this tutorial, we assume that the specific heat polynomial for
air is virtually identical to that for N2
4. Turn on the chemico-thermal enthalpy equation solver
5. Set the initial temperature and turbulence distribution
• Go to the pro-STAR Model Guide and open the Molecular Properties (Fluids)
panel in sub-folder Liquids and Gases
• Select option Polynomial in the Specific Heat menu. Note the Molecular
Weight box whose default value, 28.96, is appropriate for air
• Click Apply. A pop-up dialog will appear, warning you that pro-STAR was
not able to find the background material name (AIR) in its built-in database
and suggesting an alternative action
• Click OK to close the panel and then click Define Polynomial to open the
Polynomial Function Definition dialog
• Find a substance called N2 in the scroll list on the left-hand side of this
dialog, select it, and then click Apply Database Substance. pro-STAR will
retrieve the corresponding polynomial coefficients and assign them to
material no. 1, i.e., the background material
• Click Graph Data to display a graph of specific heat vs. temperature,

• Select option K-Epsilon/High Reynolds Number from the model menu
• Click Apply

• Select option Chemico-Thermal from the Enthalpy menu
• Note that the section of the panel labelled Participating Media is active.
Check the radiative properties assigned to the gas. In this case the Radiative
Properties setting should be Constant, the Absorption Coeff. 0.1, and the
Scattering Coeff. 0
• Click Apply

• In the Flow Conditions tab, type a value of 500 in the Temperature box
• Click Apply
9-46 Version 4.06

Combustion Model
• Click Apply
It is good practice to define one of the ignition cells as the monitoring point. This
makes checking for the onset of ignition easier, as temperature and product mass
fractions build-up rapidly at that point once ignition begins. Begin by inspecting the
cell numbers in the region of interest:
• In the main window, select Plot > Number > Cell
• Zoom in on the mesh shown on-screen to have a closer look at the displayed
numbers and confirm cell number 482 as suitable for the monitoring cell
• Select Plot > Number > Cell again to deselect the cell number plot option
• Go back to the pro-STAR Model Guide and open the Monitoring and
Reference Data (Fluids) panel
• Choose the same reference pressure location as Tutorial 9.1, i.e., half way
between the axis and the outer casing and towards the outlet, by entering 1760
in the Pressure Cell Number box. Confirm that 100000 appears in the
Pressure box
• Click Apply
• Accept the default EBU Standard option from the Reaction Model menu.
Click Apply
reaction settings will be changed. Click Continue
Specify the reaction equation for this scheme and other basic model parameters:
• Open the Reaction System panel. Note that reaction no. 1 is selected by
default for the Reaction option
• Type the required reaction definition, C7H8 + 9O2 -> 7CO2 + 4H2O, in the
box for Reaction 1
• Accept the default settings on the Status, Tscale and Rate Equation menus
and then click Apply. pro-STAR will use default values for parameters Amix
and Bmix, confirm the chemical names entered above and enter them in the
appropriate list (Leading Reactants, Products and Reactant parameters) at the
bottom of the panel
Check the treatment to be applied to the ordinary reactant (oxygen):

• In the Reactant Parameters list, select reactant no. 1
• Check that option Fixed-Fraction is selected
• Check that the (fixed) oxygen mass fraction in the incoming air stream is
Version 4.06 9-47

Droplet Properties
0.233
This completes the specification of leading reactants and combustion products.

pro-STAR will automatically map any required scalar variables to the constituents
of the reaction scheme. Note that appropriate scalar variables already exist for all
the chemical species constituents, so no additional scalar definitions for them are
necessary.
Specify the ignition parameters as follows:
• Open the Ignition panel

• Accept the default setting (Numerical) in the Model/Treatment panel
• Type 4 in the Cell Type box
• Type 0.05 in the Fraction Burnt box
• Select option Time Step/Iteration from the Interval menu
• Type 20 and 120 in the Start and End boxes, respectively
• Click Apply
Assign the chemical reaction scheme defined earlier (no. 1) to the model’s fluid
domain:.
• Open the Scheme Association panel
• Click Apply
Check the properties of the scalar variables set up as a result of the scalar mapping
described earlier:
• Select sub-folder Additional Scalars
• Open the Molecular Properties (Scalars) panel and scroll through the
available scalars using the Scalar # spin box at the top of the panel
It will be seen that a total of 6 scalars have been defined, including an additional
‘passive’ scalar (no. 2) representing the mixture fraction of the fuel. Note that a
solution for this scalar is required by the EDBR formulation (see Chapter 10 of the
Methodology volume).
Droplet Check the basic control settings for droplets and then re-define the maximum size
Properties of the droplet track file (in Mb), taking into account droplet trajectories and the
maximum tracking times:
• Select folder Lagrangian Multi-Phase and open the Droplet Controls panel
• Check that option Coupled is set in the Two-Phase Lagrangian Calculations
menu
• Type 100 in the Droplet Trajectory Maximum File Size box
• Accept the default value (100) for Maximum Tracking Time
• Select option Explicitly defined parcel injection for the Droplet Mode
option
• Accept all other default settings on the panel and click Apply
Activate the turbulent dispersion model and define transport mechanisms and
physical properties for the droplets on the basis of:
9-48 Version 4.06

Droplet Properties
1. STAR’s standard methodology for momentum, heat and mass transfer

between the dispersed and continuous phases
2. STAR’s default model for droplet break-up
3. Droplets bouncing off solid obstacles in the event of a collision
The above parameters are set as follows:

• On the Global Physical Models tab, turn On the Turbulent Dispersion option
and then click Apply
• Select the Droplet Physical Models tab and check that the Droplet Type #
option is set to 1
• For Momentum Transfer, select Correlation option Standard and accept the
default Mass Coefficient and Slip Factor values
• For Mass Transfer Calculation select option Standard
• For Heat Transfer Calculation select option Standard
• For Droplet Break-Up select option Reitz and accept the default values for
We(Bag), We(Strip), Te(Bag), Te(Strip)
• For Droplet-Wall Interaction select option Rebound
• Click Apply
Specify droplet physical properties corresponding to liquid toluene. The heat of

vaporisation and saturation pressure is to be defined by user coding in subroutine
DROPRO, as discussed in section “User Subroutines” of this tutorial:
• Choose Select material from database from the menu at the top of the panel
to open the Droplet Properties database
• Locate item C7H8_l TOLUENE(L) in the database material list and
highlight it
• Choose Define user material from the menu at the top of the panel
• Check the contents of the Droplet Properties panel. All property values
retrieved from the database are now displayed in the appropriate boxes. Since
these are valid for a lower (room) temperature, adjust the values for the actual
droplet injection temperature (350 K) as follows:
• Density — 725
• Surface Tension Coefficient — 0.0262
• Viscosity — 0.00035
• Specific Heat — 2107.86
• Select option User for both the Heat of Vaporization and Saturation Pressure
properties
• Define scalar no. 1 (i.e., the toluene fuel vapour) as representing the product
of evaporation by selecting 1 C7H8 for the Evaporates to Scalar option
• Click Apply
Note that the effect of toluene vapour on the mixture density will be taken into
account by virtue of the fact that the scalar variable representing toluene (no. 1) is
designated as an active scalar.
Make a local copy of user subroutine DROPRO and put it in a sub-directory
called ufile under your current working directory, as described in Chapter 15 of
Version 4.06 9-49

Droplet Creation
the CCM User Guide.

• In the main window, select File > System Command...
• Go back to the Droplet Properties tab and click User Define
Once you have exited from pro-STAR at the end of this session, this subroutine
should be edited as shown in section “User Subroutines” of this tutorial. Note that
DROPRO in turn calls two auxiliary subroutines, CALHVP and CALSVP, that
supply values for the heat of evaporation and saturation pressure, respectively.
These should also be included in the ufile directory. All subroutines will be
included automatically as part of the STAR executable before the model is run.
Droplet Create the required number of parcels (each parcel is represented by a typical
Creation droplet) and specify their initial conditions. The parcels are to be injected into the
combustor via an annular slit of radius 5 mm, centred around the axis of symmetry
and projecting 2 cm into the combustion chamber. It is therefore convenient to use
a cylindrical coordinate system (no. 2) when specifying initial parcel positions and
velocities.
All parcels in this model are to be included in a single injection group. Define the
group’s injection characteristics, including the initial diameter, velocity magnitude
and temperature of a typical droplet:
• Open the Injection Definition panel
• Specify injection data as indicated below:
Diameter — 250e-6 m
Velocity Magnitude — 4.4721 m/s (based on initial velocity components
Uinit, Vinit, Winit of 2, 0, 4 in coordinate system no. 2)
Temperature — 350 K
Mass Flowrate applies to — Each Injection Point
Rate — 4.152e-4 kg/s (based on an injection rate of 7e+4 droplets per
parcel per second)
Number of Parcels/Injection Point — 1
• Click Apply
Specify the injection location for 21 parcels, uniformly distributed over an arc of 50˚
around the injector ring so that the interval between them is 2.5˚. All parcels are to
have identical injection directions given by (0.4472, 0, 0.8944) in coordinate system
no. 2:
• Open the Injection Points panel
• Select option Line from the Set Type menu
• Enter 2 in both of the Coordinate System boxes
• Enter 21 in the Number of Points box
• Select option Specify for Point 1 (the first end-point of the circular arc) and
enter its coordinates (0.005, -25, 0.02) in the X, Y, Z boxes
• Enter coordinates (0.005, 25, 0.02) for Point 2 (the second end-point of the
arc) in the other set of X, Y, Z boxes
• Specify the entrance velocity direction in terms of unit vector components by
entering (0.4472, 0, 0.8944) in the DX, DY, DZ boxes
• Ensure Add New Set is selected from the Action menu and click Apply. The
9-50 Version 4.06

Boundary Conditions
injection points list at the top of the panel will confirm that a group of 21
injection points has been created.
For a visual check of particle initial conditions:

• Select the parcel group (set no. 1) in the injection points list
• Select Plot Points in Set from the Action menu and click Apply
Make the droplet size and colour dependent on particle diameter.

• Select folder Post-Processing followed by sub-folder Particle Tracks
• Open panel Plot Droplets
• Select option Diameter in the Droplet Size menu and type in 0.2 in the
Maximum Droplet Diameter box
• Select option Diameter in the Fill Color menu
• Click Apply
• Click Droplet Plot
In view of the fact that fuel is injected a short distance into the combustion chamber,
it is necessary to close off the fuel stream inlet previously defined in Tutorial 1.2.
This is done by re-defining region 3 from type ‘Inlet’ to type ‘Wall’. Surface
temperature and radiation property data should also be supplied:
• In the boundary regions scroll list, select region 3
• Select option Wall from the Region Type menu
• Choose option Fixed in the Wall Heat menu
• Enter surface temperature and radiation property data in the appropriate boxes
as shown below:
Temperature — 600
Resistance — 0.8
Emissivity — 0.8
Reflectivity — 0.2
Transmissivity — 0
• Click Apply
Specify conditions at the air inlet boundaries, including surface radiative data such
as emissivity and reflectivity:
Version 4.06 9-51

Boundary Conditions
• Click Apply
9-52 Version 4.06

Boundary Conditions
• Click Apply
Version 4.06 9-53

Boundary Conditions
• Click Apply
Supply surface radiative data for the outlet (region 14):

• Type 900 in the T Radiation box, 1 in the Emissivity box and click Apply
Specify radiation conditions for the walls (regions 7 to 13) via a pro-STAR
command loop. Walls are defined as thermally conducting with emissivity and
reflectivity of 0.8 and 0.2, respectively.
• In the I/O window, type the following commands:
*SET NREG 7 1
*DEFINE
RMOD NREG
U
U U
U U U U U
FIXE 600.0 0.8
0.8 0.2
9-54 Version 4.06

Control Parameters
0.0
*END
*LOOP 1 6
Finally, define the baffles as thermally conducting boundaries having the same
radiation properties as the walls.
• Choose option Conduction in the Wall Heat menus for both SIDE 1 and
SIDE 2
• Type 0.8 in the Resistance box for SIDE 1
• Enter radiation property data for SIDE 1 of the baffle in the appropriate boxes
as shown below:
Emissivity box — 0.8
Reflectivity box — 0.2
Transmissivity box — 0
• Enter radiation property data for the reverse side of the baffle, SIDE 2, in the
appropriate text boxes, as shown below:
• Click Apply
Control Check the solution control parameters and then change the under-relaxation factor
Parameters for temperature and density and the residual tolerance for temperature:
• Open the Primary Variables panel and then select the Solver Parameters tab
• Type 0.7 in the Relaxation Factor box for Temperature
• Type 0.001 in the Residual Tolerance box for Temperature
• Type 0.8 in the Relaxation Factor box for Density
• Click Apply
• Select each scalar in turn and check that the Under-Relaxation Factor and
Residual Tolerance values are set to 0.7 and 0.001, respectively
Controls
• Enter 800 for the maximum number of iterations and 0.0001 for the maximum
residual tolerance
• Click Apply
Version 4.06 9-55

Tutorial 9.3 C7H8 DROPLET COMBUSTION (EDBR, RADIATION) User Subroutines
Final Operations

User Subroutines
As explained previously, sub-directory ufile should contain a file called
dropro.f, corresponding to subroutine DROPRO. Use pro-STAR’s built-in
editor to edit this subroutine and introduce the required code, as follows:
• When the Open dialog appears, choose sub-directory ufile and then file
dropro.f
• Click OK
• Edit the contents of the subroutine so that it looks exactly as shown below
• Click File > Save to save the new version of the subroutine
C***********************************************************************
SUBROUTINE DROPRO(DENDR,CPDR,HV,PS,SFTC,DRVIS,DRCOND)
C Droplet properties
C***********************************************************************
C--------------------------------------------------------------------------*
C STAR-CD VERSION 4.04
C--------------------------------------------------------------------------*
INTEGER IFTYPE,RON
COMMON /FULTYP/ IFTYPE,RON
DIMENSION DRMAFR(50)
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT08(001), DRMAFR(01) )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT07(001), DRM )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(005), PR )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT05(001), IDR )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT05(002), IDRT )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT06(004), TD )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT06(009), XD )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT06(010), YD )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT06(011), ZD )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT05(004), ICO )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT05(005), NDRCO )
C-----------------------------------------------------------------------
C
C This subroutine enables the user to calculate the droplet
C physical properties.
C
C ** Parameters to be returned to STAR: DENDR, CPDR, HV, PS, SFTC,
C DRVIS and DRCOND
C
C-----------------------------------------------------------------------
C
C..... Droplet heat of evaporation
CALL CALHVP(NDRCO,ICO,TD,HV)
C..... Droplet saturation pressure
CALL CALSVP(NDRCO,ICO,TD,PS)
9-56 Version 4.06

Final Operations
C
c WRITE(76,’(A19,2I6,1P3E16.5)’) ’ IP,ICO,TD,HV,PS : ’,
c + IP,ICO,TD,HV,PS
C
C-----------------------------------------------------------------------
RETURN
END
C***********************************************************************
Note that this subroutine calls two auxiliary routines, CALHVP and CALSVP.
These routines are fuel-specific and should therefore not be used for other chemical
species. Two additional files called calhvp.f and calsvp.f containing the
necessary code should now be created, as shown below:
• When the Open dialog appears, and under sub-directory ufile, enter a new
file name called calhvp.f
• Click OK
• Input the contents of the new subroutine exactly as shown below
• Click File > Save to save the subroutine contents
• Repeat the above steps for the second subroutine, calsvp.f
C***********************************************************************
SUBROUTINE CALHVP(NDRCO,ICO,TDRP,HV)
C Droplet heat of evaporation
C See Reid pg 228 eqt 7-12.1
C***********************************************************************
C
PARAMETER (NDRCL=1)
DIMENSION WTMOL(NDRCL),TBOIL(NDRCL),TCRIT(NDRCL),PCRIT(NDRCL),
+ OMEGA(NDRCL)
C.... Properties of C7H8 droplet vapour components
DATA WTMOL/ 92.1410 /
DATA TBOIL/ 383.8000 /
DATA TCRIT/ 591.8000 /
DATA PCRIT/ 41.0000 /
DATA OMEGA/ 0.2630 /
C
C.... Other required data
PARAMETER (RCONS=8.3143)
DIMENSION TREFL(NDRCL)
DATA TREFL/ 450.0 /
C
C-------------------------------------------------------------------------
C
IF(NDRCO.GT.NDRCL) THEN
WRITE(6,*)’ SUBROUTINE CALHVP: NDRCO.GT.NDRCL ’
WRITE(6,*)’ NDRCO=’, NDRCO
WRITE(6,*)’ NDRCL=’, NDRCL
STOP
ENDIF
C
IF(TDRP.LT.TCRIT(ICO)) THEN
Version 4.06 9-57

Final Operations
TRED1=TREFL(ICO)/TCRIT(ICO)
THAW1=1.0-TRED1
TERM1=7.08*(THAW1)**0.354
TERM2=10.95*OMEGA(ICO)*(THAW1)**0.456
HV1=(RCONS*TCRIT(ICO)*(TERM1+TERM2))*(1.0E+3/WTMOL(ICO))
C
TRATIO=TBOIL(ICO)/TCRIT(ICO)
TTE=(LOG(PCRIT(ICO))-1.013)/(0.93-TRATIO)
DELHVB=1.093*RCONS*TCRIT(ICO)*TRATIO*TTE
C
TERM=0.00264*(DELHVB/(RCONS*TBOIL(ICO)))
PN=(TERM+0.8794)**10
TRED2=TDRP/TCRIT(ICO)
THAW2=1.0-TRED2
HV=HV1*(THAW2/THAW1)**PN
ELSE
HV=0.0
ENDIF
C
C-------------------------------------------------------------------------
RETURN
END
C***********************************************************************
SUBROUTINE CALSVP(NDRCO,ICO,TDRP,PS)
C Droplet saturation pressure
C See Reid pg 212 eqt 7-5.2
C***********************************************************************
C
C-------------------------------------------------------------------------
C
C.... Constants for the reference fluids
C 1=PROPANE ; 2=OCTANE ; 3=Benzene ; 4=Pentafluorotolnene
PARAMETER (NRFL=4)
DIMENSION ARFL(NRFL),BRFL(NRFL),CRFL(NRFL),DRFL(NRFL),ORFL(NRFL)
DATA ARFL/ -6.72219,-7.91211,-6.98273,-8.05688 /
DATA BRFL/ 1.33236, 1.38007, 1.33213, 1.46673 /
DATA CRFL/ -2.13868,-3.80435,-2.62863,-3.82439 /
DATA DRFL/ -1.38551,-4.50132,-3.33399,-2.78727 /
DATA ORFL/ 0.15300, 0.39800, 0.21200, 0.41500 /
C
PARAMETER (NDRCL=1)
DIMENSION TBOIL(NDRCL),TCRIT(NDRCL),PCRIT(NDRCL), OMEGA(NDRCL)
C.... Properties of C7H8 droplet vapour components
DATA TBOIL/ 383.8000 /
DATA TCRIT/ 591.8000 /
DATA PCRIT/ 41.0000 /
DATA OMEGA/ 0.2630 /
C
C.... Calculated data
DIMENSION PVPR(NRFL)
C
C-------------------------------------------------------------------------
C
IF(NDRCO.GT.NDRCL) THEN
9-58 Version 4.06

Tutorial 9.3 C7H8 DROPLET COMBUSTION (EDBR, RADIATION) CFD Analysis
Preliminaries
WRITE(6,*)’ SUBROUTINE CALSVP: NDRCO.GT.NDRCL ’

WRITE(6,*)’ NDRCO=’, NDRCO
WRITE(6,*)’ NDRCL=’, NDRCL
STOP
ENDIF
C
IF(TDRP.LT.TCRIT(ICO)) THEN
TRED=TDRP/TCRIT(ICO)
THAW=1.0-TRED
DO 200 JR=3,NRFL
T1NU=ARFL(JR)*THAW
T2NU=BRFL(JR)*THAW**1.5
T3NU=CRFL(JR)*THAW**3.0
T4NU=DRFL(JR)*THAW**6.0
PVPR(JR)=(T1NU+T2NU+T3NU+T4NU)/TRED
200 CONTINUE
OTERM=(OMEGA(ICO)-ORFL(3))/(ORFL(4)-ORFL(3))
PVPRC=PVPR(3)+(PVPR(4)-PVPR(3))*OTERM
PS=EXP(PVPRC)*PCRIT(ICO)*1.0E+05
ELSE
PS=PCRIT(ICO)*1.0E+05
ENDIF
C
C-------------------------------------------------------------------------
RETURN
END
CFD Analysis
As in Tutorial 9.1, a double precision STAR executable needs to be employed, as
follows:
default values
• Click Start
Post-Processing
Preliminaries Start the post-processing task by loading the post file (EDBR_dr.ccmp) and
re-plotting the mesh:.
• In the pro-STAR Model Guide, open the Post-Processing folder and click on
the Load Data panel
• Click Cplot
Activate the user-defined panels Pgetc and Pgetv as described in Tutorial 9.2 and
use them to generate a 3-D display of the velocity magnitude distribution:
Version 4.06 9-59
Tutorial 9.3 C7H8 DROPLET COMBUSTION (EDBR, RADIATION) Post-Processing
Preliminaries

• In the main window, select plot option Contour
• In the main window, turn on the Display Edges plotting option to display
Figure T9.3-1
Figure T9.3-1 Cell-centred plot of velocity magnitude
Close the Pgetc panel:

• File > Close
• In the main window, click the Display Edges plotting button again to
deactivate it
Plot the steady-state droplet distribution by choosing plot options such that droplet
colour and radius depend on temperature and calculated diameter, respectively. The
droplet velocity is not displayed.
• In the pro-STAR Model Guide, select folder Post-Processing followed by
sub-folder Particle Tracks
• In the Load From menu, select option Track File
• Check that file EDBR_dr.trk is displayed in the File Name box
• Accept the default option (Particles) in the Plot Option menu and then click
Load Data
• In the Droplet Plot Options section, select After, Unhidden and Cplot from
the Edge Plot Options menus
• Check that Diameter is selected from the Droplet Size menu and that 0.2 is
9-60 Version 4.06
Preliminaries
entered in the Maximum Droplet Diameter box

• Select Temperature in the Fill Color menu
• Select None in the Vectors menu
• Click Apply
• In the main window, select D > All in the Display Sets toolbar
• In the Plot Droplets panel, click Droplet Plot to display Figure T9.3-2
Figure T9.3-2 Plot of toluene droplets with the droplets coloured by their temperature
Now make the droplet colour dependent on droplet mass and replot:
• In the Droplet Plot Options section, select Mass in the Fill Color menu
• Click Apply and then Droplet Plot to display Figure T9.3-3
Version 4.06 9-61

Preliminaries
Figure T9.3-3 Plot of toluene droplets with the droplets coloured by their mass
The above plot shows that the vast majority of the droplets have evaporated before
they reach the combustor outlet.
To view the fuel and combustion product distribution, first define a section
whose plane bisects the mesh and passes through the axis of symmetry:
• In the main window, select D > None
• Select plot option Geometry and then click Cplot
• View > Axis > +X
bisects the visible mesh (click the end points of the line). This represents the
trace of a longitudinal section plane through the middle of the mesh and
passing through the axis.
View
Open panel Pgetv and use it to plot the vertex-based temperature profile in the
section:
• On the Pgetv panel, click button TA to display the absolute temperature
distribution shown in Figure T9.3-4
9-62 Version 4.06

Preliminaries
Figure T9.3-4 Absolute temperature distribution
For the reason described in Tutorial 9.2, the temperature plot is somewhat
misleading as it implies that heat is flowing through the adiabatic baffle. The same
is also true for the CO2 distribution shown in Figure T9.3-6 below.
Produce contour plots for the concentration profiles of fuel and carbon dioxide.
This time use panel Pgetc to read in the cell-based values and then obtain the
vertex-based values by averaging:
• Click Conc1
• Post > Caverage > Cset
• In the main window, click Replot to display the toluene distribution shown in
Figure T9.3-5
• Click Conc4
• Post > Caverage > Cset
• In the main window, click Replot to display the carbon dioxide distribution
To terminate the run:

Version 4.06 9-63

Preliminaries
Figure T9.3-5 Toluene distribution
Figure T9.3-6 CO2 distribution
9-64 Version 4.06

Tutorial 9.4 HYDROGEN COMBUSTION (LAMINAR FLAMELETS) Pre-Processing
Preliminaries
Tutorial 9.4 HYDROGEN COMBUSTION (LAMINAR FLAMELETS)

In this tutorial, a hydrogen combustion case is modelled using a Laminar Flamelets
model for unpremixed flames. Unlike PPDF models that assume chemical
equilibrium, this model allows for non-equilibrium effects such as flame stretch and
detailed chemical kinetics. The model also assumes adiabatic conditions (no heat
loss). The main aims of the tutorial are to:
• Familiarise users with the Laminar Flamelets model setup
• Demonstrate the process of specifying chemical species that are not included
in pro-STAR’s species database (props.dbs)
• Demonstrate how to set up boundary conditions and analysis controls for
scalars used in the simulation
Pre-Processing
Preliminaries Create a new directory for the tutorial called tut9-4. The mesh for this problem
that these files are copied into your current directory.
• Enter the case name (say, flamelet) in the Case Name text box
• Click Continue

• In the Read Input Coded File dialog, check that the File Name is
combustor.inp
• Click OK
This will read default problem settings from file combustor.inp, plus the
files.

HYDROGEN COMBUSTION (LAMINAR FLAMELETS)

Plot the mesh to confirm that the data have been read in correctly:
• Select C > All
• Click Cplot
Version 4.06 9-65

Material Properties
• Click Apply
sub-folder called Reacting Flow now appears active in the pro-STAR Model
Guide tree.
Properties Model Guide panels. The necessary actions are as follows:
2. Turn on the temperature solver
3. Set the initial temperature distribution
• Click Apply

• Click Apply

Temperature box
• Click Apply

• Specify the Monitoring Cell Number as 1760. This is roughly in the centre of
the outlet boundary region.
• Make the reference pressure location the same as the monitoring cell location
by entering 1760 in the Pressure Cell Number box
• Check that 100000 appears in the Pressure box
• Click Apply
Model model, as follows:
9-66 Version 4.06

Combustion Model
• Select option PPDF Single Fuel from the Reaction Model menu
• Select the Laminar Flamelet Model Option and click Apply
reaction settings will be changed. Click Continue. A message will appear at
the bottom of the pro-STAR Model Guide panel confirming your combustion
model selection
The next step is to specify an appropriate reaction mechanism for the Laminar
Flamelet model. This must be written in CHEMKIN format, which requires a listing
of all participating elements, species and reactions. For a detailed description of
how to specify reaction mechanisms in this format, see , “Laminar flamelet model”
in the CCM User Guide.
Supply the basic data required as follows:
• Open the Reaction System panel
• In the Reaction Mechanism tab, copy the description given below into the
displayed box:
ELEMENTS H O N END
SPECIES H HO2 H2 H2O H2O2 N2 O OH O2 END
REACTIONS
H+O2+M=HO2+M 3.61E+17 -0.720 0.000
H2O/18.6/ H2/2.86/
H+H+M=H2+M 1.00E+18 -1.000 0.000
H+H+H2=H2+H2 9.20E+16 -0.600 0.000
H+H+H2O=H2+H2O 6.00E+19 -1.250 0.000
H+OH+M=H2O+M 1.60E+22 -2.000 0.000
H2O/5/
H+O+M=OH+M 6.20E+16 -0.600 0.000
H2O/5/
O+O+M=O2+M 1.89E+13 0.000 -1788.000
H2O2+M=OH+OH+M 1.30E+17 0.000 45500.000
H2+O2=2OH 1.70E+13 0.000 47780.000
OH+H2=H2O+H 1.17E+9 1.300 3626.000
O+OH=O2+H 3.61E+14 -0.500 0.000
O+H2=OH+H 5.06E+04 2.670 6290.000
OH+HO2=H2O+O2 7.50E+12 0.000 0.000
H+HO2=2OH 1.40E+14 0.000 1073.000
O+HO2=O2+OH 1.40E+13 0.000 1073.000
2OH=O+H2O 6.00E+08 1.300 0.000
H+HO2=H2+O2 1.25E+13 0.000 0.000
HO2+HO2=H2O2+O2 2.00E+12 0.000 0.000
H2O2+H=HO2+H2 1.60E+12 0.000 3800.000
H2O2+OH=H2O+HO2 1.00E+13 0.000 1800.000
END
• Click Save. Confirm that you wish to proceed with this operation in the
displayed pop-up warning panel. pro-STAR will then store the supplied data
in file chemf.inp01 in a sub-directory called PPDF.
Version 4.06 9-67

Combustion Model
• Click Apply to validate the file contents and create the chemistry libraries
needed subsequently by the flamelet calculations.
Now that the reaction mechanism has been specified, the flamelets description
needs to be created:
• In the Flamelet Setup tab, check that the Set option is Composition
• Click Generate File to generate and store the first flamelet description in file
flame01.inp01 within the PPDF sub-directory
• Examine the Mole Fractions and Valences for the Fuel, Oxidizer and
Product streams by selecting each of them in turn from the Stream to Define
menu. The default values displayed are suitable for this case.
Four flamelets are to be generated for this problem, as follows:
• Select Flamelet Number 2 in the spin box and click Generate File again. This
will generate a new flamelet description and store it in file
flame02.inp01within the PPDF sub-directory
• Repeat this procedure for Flamelet Numbers 3 and 4, thus generating files
flame03.inp01 and flame04.inp01
• Choose the Flow Conditions option from the Set menu
• For Flamelet Number 2, change the Strain Rate of Oxidizer to 200
• Click Apply to store the updated flamelet description in file
flame02.inp01
• For Flamelet Number 3, change the Strain Rate of Oxidizer to 300
flame03.inp01
• For Flamelet Number 4, change the Strain Rate of Oxidizer to 0, which
corresponds to the equilibrium condition
flame04.inp01
Flamelet libraries must now be calculated from the above flamelet descriptions and
stored in a set of files called flame$$.lib01. Output information for this
calculation is written to a set of corresponding files called flame$$.out01.
• Select the Flamelet Generation tab
• Select flamelet number 1 from the list. Note that Action New is selected by
default.
• Click Apply to calculate the corresponding flamelet library. This process may
take a few seconds.
• Select flamelet number 2 from the list
• Choose Action Restart From Flamelet Number 1. This should reduce the
computation time because the two flamelets have similar properties.
• Click Apply
• Choose Action Restart From Flamelet Number 2
• Click Apply
• Click Apply
9-68 Version 4.06

Scalar Properties
The STAR-CD solver requires that flamelet library data should be provided in
tabular form. The relevant table is created as follows:
• Select the Look-up Table tab
• Check that the Plot Data for Flamelet Number option is set to 1
• Click Plot to display graphs of flamelet data for flamelet number 1, as shown
in Figure T9.4-1.
Figure T9.4-1 Graphs of flamelet data for flamelet number 1
• Plot similar graphs for flamelets 2, 3 and 4. There should be a few slight
differences between the four graphs.
• Change the Mixture Fraction Dimension to 40. This is the number of points
used to define the mixture fraction profile in the table.
• Change the Mixture Fraction Variance Dimension to 30
• Select flamelets 1, 2, 3 and 4 from the Flamelet No list and use the arrow
button, , to add them to the Selected Flamelet No list
• Click Apply to create the required look-up table and store it in file
flamelet.tbl01 in your working directory. An error message will appear
stating that some of the species included in the mechanism have not been
found in pro-STAR’s built-in property database file props.dbs. Data for
these species must be specified next.
Scalar The I/O window lists the problem species as OH, O, H, HO2 and H2O2. As
Properties props.dbs does not contain property data for such species, and since their
molecular weights are needed to calculate polynomial distributions of their mole
fractions, the required properties must be specified explicitly:
Version 4.06 9-69

Boundary Conditions
• Select the Additional Scalars sub-folder from within the Thermophysical

Models and Properties folder
• Open the Molecular Properties (Scalars) panel
• Select Scalar # 7 in the spin box at the top of the panel
• Change the Molecular Weight of Scalar # 7 to 17
• Click Apply
• Click Apply
• Click Apply
• Click Apply
• Click Apply
All the properties and parameters of the chosen chemical reaction scheme have now
been specified, so it can now be assigned to the fluid material in the model:
• Open the Scheme Association panel in the Reacting Flow folder
• Click Apply
Boundary The next step is to specify boundary conditions, starting with the fluid inlet
Conditions conditions:
• Select the Define Boundaries folder
• Select region 3, Fuel_inlet from the boundary regions list
• Specify the U, V and W velocity components as -28, -60 and 100 m/s,
respectively
• Change the Coordinate System to 2
• Select TI/Length from the Turbulence Switch menu
• Change the Turb. Intensity to 0.1 and the Length to 0.01 m
• Click Apply
• Select region 4, Air_inlet1 from the boundary regions list

respectively
• Click Apply

respectively
9-70 Version 4.06

Analysis Controls

• Click Apply

• Specify the W velocity component as 15 m/s
• Click Apply
The scalar concentrations at the inlet boundaries must also be specified:

• Select region number 3 from the Boundary Region list
• Select MIXTURE_FRACTION from the Scalars list
• Click Apply
• Select region number 4 from the Boundary Region list
• Select N2 from the Scalars list
• Change the boundary Value to 0.79
• Click Apply
• Select O2 from the Scalars list
• Change the boundary Value to 0.21
• Click Apply
• For regions 5 and 6, set the N2 and O2 boundary Value to 0.79 and 0.21,
respectively, as for region number 4
Analysis Some of the analysis controls need to be changed to ensure a reasonably rapid
Controls convergence rate:
• Select MIXTURE_FRACTION from the Scalar list
• Change the Under-Relaxation Factor to 0.7
• Change the Residual Tolerance to 0.001
• Click Apply
• Select VARIANCE from the Scalar list
• Change the Under-Relaxation Factor value to 0.7
• Change the Residual Tolerance to 0.001
• Click Apply
Run Time The run time controls must also be adjusted:

Controls
• Change the Maximum Residual Tolerance to 0.0001
• Click Apply
Version 4.06 9-71

Tutorial 9.4 HYDROGEN COMBUSTION (LAMINAR FLAMELETS) CFD Analysis
Final Operations
pro-STAR, as shown below. Alternatively, you may continue with the CFD analysis
using the pro-STAR Model Guide facilities for running STAR interactively. This
process is described in the next section.
CFD Analysis
For problems involving chemical reactions, it is recommended that STAR is run in
double precision mode as follows:
default values
• Click Start
Post-Processing
• Click Cplot
Now load the solution results and plot velocity vectors on an x-z plane bisecting the
model geometry:
• Go to the pro-STAR Model Guide and select the Post-Processing folder
• Under the File(s) tab, click Open Post file
• Under the Data tab, select Velocity Components UVW from the Vector Data
list
• Click Get Data
• Under the Section/Clipped tab, change the Normal values to 0, 1, 0
• Click Apply
• In the main pro-STAR window, select View > SNormal View to display
Figure T9.4-2
9-72 Version 4.06

Tutorial 9.4 HYDROGEN COMBUSTION (LAMINAR FLAMELETS) Post-Processing
Preliminaries
Figure T9.4-2 Section Clipped plot of velocity vectors
Contour plots of temperature and mixture fraction can now be plotted as follows:
• Under the Data tab of the Load Data panel, select Smooth options On and All
• Click Get Data
• Under the Section/Clipped tab, select the Option Contour(filled)
• Under the Data tab of the Load Data panel, select MIXTURE_FRACTION
from the Scalar Data list
• Click Get Data
As explained in Tutorial 9.1, the contour plot smoothing effect leads to a physically
unrealistic temperature profile in the vicinity of the baffle.
Version 4.06 9-73

Preliminaries
Figure T9.4-3 Section Clipped plot of temperature contours
Figure T9.4-4 Section Clipped plot of contours of mixture fraction
9-74 Version 4.06

Preliminaries
Terminate the session:

• In the main pro-STAR window, select File > Quit > Quit, Nosave
Version 4.06 9-75

Introduction
Tutorial 10 BUOYANCY AND RADIATION EFFECTS
Introduction
This tutorial illustrates various STAR-CD facilities for simulating a heat transfer
problem involving natural convection, conduction, solid-fluid heat transfer and
radiation. The example used in the tutorial consists of a heated aluminium alloy fin
placed within a rectangular box filled with air (see Figure T10.0-1).
T = 293 K T = 293 K
10
1 2
2 4
T = 343 K
Figure T10.0-1 Heated fin geometry (all dimensions in cm)
The problem is simulated in two dimensions for ease of mesh generation and speed
of numerical calculation. The mesh employed is shown in Figure T10.0-2.
Version 4.06 10-1

Material Properties
Figure T10.0-2 Mesh structure for the heated fin model
Material Properties
Three variants of this problem are considered, with different modes of heat transfer
applying in each. Material properties for the solid fin and the surrounding air are as
follows:
Aluminium alloy fin:
Density (ρ) = 2800 kg/m3

Specific heat (Cp) = 880 J/kg K
Thermal conductivity (λ) = 180 W/m K
Surrounding air (incompressible, turbulent):
Density (ρ) = variable, based on Ideal Gas Law for molecular weight 28.96
Specific heat (Cp) = 1006 J/kg K
Thermal conductivity (λ) = 0.0264 W/m K
Molecular viscosity (µ) = 1.81E–5 Pa s
10-2 Version 4.06

Tutorial 10.1 BUOYANCY DRIVEN FLOW AROUND A HEATED FIN Pre-Processing
Preliminaries
Tutorial 10.1 BUOYANCY DRIVEN FLOW AROUND A HEATED FIN

This sub-tutorial employs a simple, uniform two-dimensional mesh to model the
shape and size of the solid fin, followed by cell indexing and specification of
material properties for the fin and surrounding fluid.
Heating of the fin is achieved by fixing the temperature at the base to 343 K. The
sides of the surrounding box are set to a fixed temperature of 293 K and the
remaining wall boundaries are assumed to be either conducting (at solid/fluid
interfaces) or adiabatic (at the top and bottom walls of the box), as shown in Figure
T10.0-1.
This tutorial aims to show the user how to:
• Model solid-fluid heat transfer
• Model buoyancy-driven flows
• Create streamline plots
Pre-Processing
is supplied in advance, i.e., cell, vertex, boundary and problem setup files
(fin.cel, fin.vrt, fin.bnd and fin.inp, respectively) are available in the
STAR-CD installation directories. Therefore, before starting the tutorial, make sure
that these files are copied into your current directory.
• Enter the case name (say, fin_bu) in the Case Name text box
• Click Continue

• In the Read Input Coded File dialog select the File name fin.inp
• Click OK
This will read default problem settings from file fin.inp plus the problem’s cell,
vertex and boundary location definitions from the remaining three files.
BUOYANCY DRIVEN FLOW AROUND A HEATED FIN

Mesh Verify that the correct mesh has been imported by selecting all cells and plotting the
Checking mesh in ‘Hidden Surface’ mode:
• In the main window, select C > All. The I/O window output shows that 2,500
cells were read in
• Check that Hidden Surface is selected as the cell plot type
• Click Cplot
• Change the viewpoint to approximately (0.4, 0.5, 1) by dragging with the left
Version 4.06 10-3

mouse button to display Figure T10.1-1
It will be seen that the mesh matches that shown in Figure T10.0-2 and that it
contains two cell types, corresponding to fluid and solid cells. Note that because of
the difference in cell type, fluid and solid cells are displayed in different colours.
Cell Type Check and, if necessary, specify appropriate material property indices, colours and
Properties names for cell types 2 and 1, representing the solid fin and its surrounding fluid,
respectively:
• In the main window, click the button to open the Cell Editor
• In the Cell Editor, select row # 1 in the scroll list
• Type AIR in the Name box
• Accept the current settings for all other parameters and click Apply
• Select row # 2 and change the following parameters:
Material # — 2 (the solid properties index)
Color Index — 4
Name — AL
• Click Replot to confirm the change (the solid cell colour will change)
Thermal and Turn on the solid-fluid heat transfer option. This also has the effect of switching on
Gravity the temperature solver inside the solid fin:
Options
• In the pro-STAR Model Guide, select the Thermophysical Models and
Properties folder and then open the Thermal Options panel
• Enable the Solid-Fluid Heat Transfer option
10-4 Version 4.06

Fluid Properties
• Click Apply
In order to take buoyancy effects into account, you need to specify the gravitational
force in the global Cartesian y-direction. Check the current setting:
• Type 9.81 in the Acceleration box to specify the gravitational acceleration
value to be used for this problem
• Specify the correct direction of gravity in the model by typing -1 in the Y box
and 0 in the Z box
• Click Apply
Fluid Check the material properties of the model’s fluid substance:
Properties
• In the Thermophysical Models and Properties folder, select the Liquids and
Gases folder
• Open the Molecular Properties (Fluids) panel and check that the material
number selected for the Material # option is 1.
• It can be seen that material no. 1 is, by default, a fluid whose properties are
those of air. This is what is required in this case.
The density variation is assumed to follow the Ideal Gas Law. However, the fluid
itself is incompressible since the pressure effect on density variations is deemed to
be negligible.
• Select option Ideal-f(T) from the Density menu and click Apply.
Default values are accepted for the remaining properties. Assuming the flow is
turbulent, select the k-ε model:
• Select On for the Turbulence option and then choose
K-Epsilon/High Reynolds Number from the Turbulence menu
• Click Apply
Check the temperature equation setting:

• Open the Thermal Models panel. Note that the temperature calculation has
been turned on as a result of selecting the solid-fluid heat transfer option.
Choose cell number 927 as the monitoring location for the fluid cells:
• Click Apply
Specify a datum location and density for the purpose of calculating buoyancy
effects:
• Enable the Buoyancy option
• Select option Enter Coordinates from the Location menu
• Ensure that coordinates 0, 0, 0 are entered in the X, Y, and Z boxes
• Check that option Specify is selected from the Density menu
Version 4.06 10-5

Solid Properties
• Type 1.27588 in the Density box for the required datum density. As noted in
the pro-STAR Model Guide on-line Help (“Useful Points”), it is important to
calculate body forces as accurately as possible; hence the high degree of
precision for the density value.
• Click Apply
Solid Define properties for the solid cells making up the fin (i.e., for material property
Properties reference no. 2):
• Select the Solids sub-folder within the Thermophysical Models and
Properties folder
• Open the Material Properties (Solids) panel and select Material # 2. This will
display properties for the default solid material.
• Change the property values to those for aluminium as follows:
Material — AL
Density — 2800
Conductivity — 180
Specific Heat — 880
• Click Apply
• Select the Monitoring and Reference Data (Solids) panel and choose a
monitoring location within the solid by typing 924 in the Monitoring Cell
Number box
• Click Apply
Checks Check the boundaries by listing their properties and then displaying them
graphically:
• In the main window, choose Utility > Count > Boundaries and then check
the information displayed in the I/O window, i.e., number and type of regions
and number of boundaries in each region
• Select the Display Boundaries option by clicking the button
• Select B > All and then B > Unselect > Symplane to exclude the symmetry
planes from the boundary plot that is about to be produced
• Click Replot to display Figure T10.1-2. Only regions 1 and 2 are shown; all
other boundary surfaces are allocated to region 0 by default.
10-6 Version 4.06

Boundary Conditions
Figure T10.1-2 Boundary region display
Boundary You can now impose the required thermal boundary conditions. Define fixed
Conditions temperature boundaries at 293 K for the container’s side walls, as follows:
panel
• Select option Fixed in the Wall Heat menu
• Type the required fixed wall temperature, 293, in the Temperature box
• Accept the default values for the remaining parameters and click Apply
Define a fixed temperature boundary at 343 K for the base of the fin:
• Select option Fixed in the Wall Heat menu
• Type the required fixed wall temperature, 343, in the Temperature box
• Accept the default values for the remaining parameters and click Apply
The remaining boundary surfaces, i.e., those allocated to region 0, default to

adiabatic walls (at external surfaces) or conducting walls (at solid/fluid interfaces).
Control In buoyancy-driven flow calculations there is very strong coupling between the
Parameters temperature and flow fields. It is therefore advisable to use the PISO algorithm (see
the pro-STAR Model Guide on-line Help, “Useful Points”) which is more suitable
for this type of problem:
• Open the Solution Method panel and choose option PISO from the Solution
Version 4.06 10-7

Run Time Controls
Algorithm menu
• Click Apply
As the model is two-dimensional, we need not solve the W-momentum equation:

• On the Equation Status tab, deselect the W-Momentum option
• Click Apply
Given the strong effect of temperature and density variations on flow development,
it is important to apply some under-relaxation to these variables. This helps in
avoiding potential numerical stability problems.
• Go to the Solver Parameters tab
• Enter a new under-relaxation factor, 0.95, in the Density box under the Fluid
Properties section (note that this value must equal that for temperature to
ensure that the calculated magnitudes for the two variables are in step)
• Click Apply
Choose the MARS differencing scheme for some of the variables to be solved. This
gives an optimum combination of stability and accuracy.
• Go to the Differencing Schemes tab
• Select MARS for the Differencing Scheme options for momentum and
temperature Flow Variables. The turbulence Differencing Scheme option
should be left at the default setting (UD). Accept the default value of 0.5 for
the Blending Factor.
• Click Apply
Choose the type of data output and dumping frequency. For post-processing
purposes, it is generally useful to save additional flow and thermal wall data (in this
case, heat transfer coefficients at the walls):
• Accept the default option (enabled) for the Write Solution File option and
type 20 in the Output Frequency box
• In the Additional Output Data section, select item Heat Transfer Coef. from
the scroll list
• Enable the Post option
• Repeat the above for item Heat Flux
• Click Apply
Run Time Set the maximum number of iterations to 300:
Controls
• Select the Analysis Preparation folder and then open the Run Time Controls
panel
• Type 300 in the Maximum Number of Iterations box
• Click Apply
Operations stage, write the geometry file, making sure that the scaling factor for the problem
units (centimetres) is specified. Then write the problem file and exit from
pro-STAR, saving all model data as shown below.
10-8 Version 4.06

Tutorial 10.1 BUOYANCY DRIVEN FLOW AROUND A HEATED FIN CFD Analysis
Preliminaries
Alternatively, you may continue with the CFD analysis, using the pro-STAR
Model Guide facilities for running STAR interactively. This process is described in
the next section.
box
CFD Analysis
• Check that option other has been selected for the model units; 0.01 should
appear inside the Scale Factor box
For simulations involving buoyancy, it is usually advisable to run STAR in Double

Precision mode. This prevents relatively small buoyancy source terms which
dominate the flow from being discarded as round-off error.
• Select option Double Precision
• Leave all other settings at their default values and then click Start
The analysis will then start automatically. This run should produce a converged
solution within the specified maximum number of iterations.
Post-Processing
Preliminaries Launch pro-STAR (if the analysis was run outside pro-STAR). Read in the results
of the analysis from file fin_bu.ccmp:
• In the pro-STAR Model Guide select the Post-Processing folder
Post- First look at the velocity field in the fluid surrounding the fin:
processing
• In the main window, select C > New > Fluid
• Click Cplot
• Deselect the Display Boundaries option button,
• Change the viewpoint to (0, 0, 1) by selecting View > Axis > +Z
• In the Load Data panel, go to the Data tab
• Select item Velocity Components UV from the Vector Data list and then
click Get Data to load the velocity field
• Go to the Create Plots panel, where the plot style will be defined
• In the 3-D Surface tab, check that Option Vector is selected and then choose
Version 4.06 10-9

Tutorial 10.1 BUOYANCY DRIVEN FLOW AROUND A HEATED FIN Post-Processing
Post- processing

Figure T10.1-3 Velocity vector plot
Now view the streamlines:

• Select Cell & Wall/Bound (Smooth) from the Data Type menu
• Select option Stream Function from the Calculated Scalar Data list
• Click Get Data
• In the 3-D Surface tab, select Option Contour (line)
10-10 Version 4.06

Post- processing
Figure T10.1-4 Streamline plot
Examine the temperature profiles, first in the surrounding fluid and then in the solid
fin:
• Click Get Data
• In the Create Plots panel, choose Option Contour (filled)
• In the main window, select C > New > Solid
• In the Data tab, select Data Type Cell
• Select item Temperature in the Scalar Data list and then click Get Data
• To plot a smooth distribution ignoring boundary values, the cell data are
averaged by selecting Post > Caverage > Cset in the main window
Version 4.06 10-11

Post- processing
Figure T10.1-5 Temperature plot in the fluid region
Figure T10.1-6 Temperature plot in the solid region
10-12 Version 4.06

Final Operations
Heat flux data at the walls can be plotted as follows:

• In the Data tab, select Data Type Wall
• Select item Heat Flux from the Scalar Data list
• Click Get Data
Collect the shells created by pro-STAR at the walls (i.e., cells of type 5) and plot:
• Tools > Cell...
• Select cell type 5 in the Cell Tool scroll list
• In the main window, select C > New > Type Current
• Set the viewpoint to (1, 1, 1) by selecting View > Isometric > 1, 1, 1
• Switch off the edge and mesh plotting facilities by clicking the Display Edges
and Display Mesh Lines buttons
• Select Plot > Wplot to display Figure T10.1-7
Figure T10.1-7 Wall plot of heat flux
Final Terminate the session

Operations
Version 4.06 10-13

Tutorial 10.2 SURFACE-TO-SURFACE RADIATION Pre-Processing
Preliminaries
Tutorial 10.2 SURFACE-TO-SURFACE RADIATION

This sub-tutorial examines the effect of surface-to-surface radiation on heat transfer
and temperature distribution. The boundary conditions remain the same as in
Tutorial 10.1, except that radiative surface properties such as emissivity and
reflectivity are now added. A surface-to-surface mode of radiative heat transfer is
assumed.
The aim of this tutorial is to show the user how to:
• Model radiative heat transfer between walls through non-participating media
• Use the Initial Field Restart option when resuming from a previous analysis
• Compare results of different runs
• Use pro-STAR’s OPERATE utility
Pre-Processing
• Create a sub-directory for the tutorial called tut10-2 and copy the model
file generated in Tutorial 10.1 (fin_bu.mdl) into it
• Rename this file as fin_ra.mdl You will use this as a starting point for a
revised model that introduces radiation to the heat transfer calculations.
present analysis, it is also necessary to copy the solution files for the
non-radiating case (fin_bu.ccmp and fin_bu.ccmg) to the current
directory
Start up the pro-STAR GUI interface:

• Accept the default case name (fin_ra) displayed in the Case Name text box
• Select the Resume From Existing .mdl File? option
• Deselect the Append to Previous .echo File? option
• Click Continue
This will read all data contained in file fin_ra.mdl and will set up the model as
it was at the end of Tutorial 10.1.
BUOYANCY DRIVEN FLOW AROUND A HEATED FIN WITH

RADIATION
New In problems where surface-to-surface radiation is being modelled, it is necessary to
Boundary provide radiative boundary information such as emissivity and reflectivity, for all
Definitions wall surfaces including solid-fluid interfaces.
Solid-fluid interface
Version 4.06 10-15

New Boundary Definitions
This region is currently assigned to the default wall region (no. 0). You therefore
need to define a new boundary region for it, extending round the entire fin
perimeter.
• In the main window, ensure the Display Boundaries option is turned off
• Select C > New > Solid
• Click Cplot to display just the solid cells
• In the pro-STAR Model Guide, select folder Locate Boundaries and then
open the Create Boundaries panel
• In the Regions tab, select region no. 4 in the scroll list
• Select option Wall from the Type menu
• Enter a region name (S-F_interface) in the Name box
• Click Define
• In the main window, change the viewpoint to (1, 0, 0) by selecting View >
Axis > +X
• In the Regions tab, ensure region no. 4 is highlighted in the scroll list, select
Create by Picking a Zone from the Action List and click Apply
• Draw a closed polygon around the visible mesh
• In the main window, change the viewpoint to (-1, 0, 0) by selecting View >
Axis > -X
• In the Regions tab, ensure region no. 4 is highlighted in the scroll list, click
Apply and draw a closed polygon around the visible mesh
Axis > +Y
• Again, ensure region no. 4 is highlighted in the scroll list, click Apply in the
Regions tab and draw a closed polygon around the visible mesh
The top and bottom adiabatic walls also need to be assigned explicitly to a separate
region, no. 5. This is because radiation patches (to be defined later) cannot be
applied to boundaries assigned to the default wall region 0.
Top wall
• Click Cplot
• In the Create Boundaries panel, select region no. 5 in the scroll list
• Check that option Wall is selected for the Type
• Enter a region name (T-B_wall) in the Name box
• Click Define
• Ensure that region no. 5 is selected in the scroll list and Create by Picking a
Zone is selected in the Action List and then click Apply
Bottom wall
• Change the viewpoint to (0, -1, 0) by selecting View > Axis > -Y
• Select C > Unselect > Zone and then draw a closed polygon around the (blue)
cells belonging to the fin
• Click Cplot to display only cell faces belonging to the bottom wall
• In the Regions tab, ensure that region no. 5 is selected in the scroll list, click
Apply and then draw a closed polygon around the visible mesh
10-16 Version 4.06

Thermal Options
Thermal Switch radiation on, choosing the Discrete Transfer analysis method (DTRM). For
Options this case, use the default number of beams per patch (100) and neglect radiative
effects from the intervening gas:
• Select folder Thermophysical Models and Properties and then open the
• In the Radiation section of the panel, select option Discrete Transfer -
Internal VF Calc
• Enter 100 in the Beams per patch box
• Accept the displayed default settings in the rest of the panel and click Apply
For the chosen calculation method, surface-to-surface radiation can be tracked only
through cell types that are explicitly defined as participating in radiative heat
transfer. In this case, we assume that the fin is opaque and hence we only track
radiation through the fluid:
• Open the Cell Editor using the button on the main window
• Select row # 1 in the scroll list
• Click Apply
Boundary We must revisit the boundary conditions for all wall regions participating in
Conditions radiative heat transfer in order to define their emissivity and reflectivity. In this
case, we have not chosen to track radiation through the solid so we can ignore region
2 (the fin base). However, boundary conditions for the side walls need to be
updated.
• Select folder Define Boundaries and open the Define Boundary Regions panel
• Specify the required radiation properties by entering the following data:
• Emissivity box — 0.5
• Reflectivity box — 0.5
• Accept the current values for the remaining parameters and click Apply
The boundary conditions for the solid-fluid interface should correspond to a
conducting wall with emissivity and reflectivity of 0.2 and 0.8, respectively.
• Select option Conduction in the Wall Heat menu. This is essential for
solid-fluid interfaces that are not part of region 0.
• Specify the required radiation properties:
Similarly, the top and bottom walls will be adiabatic radiative walls with emissivity
and reflectivity of 0.5:
Version 4.06 10-17

Patch Specification

Patch All non-symmetry boundary regions need to be divided into radiation patches; these
Specification are used both during view factor calculations and for simulating radiative heat
transfer. The number of patches per region can be anything between a minimum of
one patch covering the entire region to a maximum of one patch per boundary face.
The accuracy of radiation calculations is directly proportional to the number of
patches per region. Given the two-dimensional character of the problem, it is
computationally reasonable to use the maximum number of patches. Patches will be
defined for all wall boundaries, with the exception of the fin base; no patches are
needed there as this surface does not participate in radiative heat transfer.
• In the main window, select the Display Boundaries option. The fin base
boundaries should now be visible, lying in between the two sections of the
bottom wall boundaries.
• Select B > New > Wall
• Select B > Unselect > Region Cursor Select and then click on any boundary
belonging to the fin base. This removes all base boundaries from the current
set.
• Open the Create Boundaries panel in the Locate Boundaries folder
• Go to the Patches tab to create patches.
• Select Automatic for the Define Patches option
• Check that option Current Boundary Set is selected in the Boundaries to
patch menu
• Select Individual Boundary from the Patch option menu
• Click Apply
Checks Check the boundaries by listing their properties and then displaying them
graphically:
• In the main window, choose Utility > Count > Boundaries and then check
the information displayed in the I/O window, i.e., number and type of regions
and number of boundaries in each region. You will need to type c in the I/O
window to scroll to the end of the list of boundary patches.
• Select B > New > Wall
• Select C > All
• Change the viewpoint to (1, 1, 1) by selecting View > Isometric > 1, 1, 1
• Switch on the edge plotting facility by clicking the button and then click
Cplot to display Figure T10.2-1
10-18 Version 4.06

Checks
Figure T10.2-1 Wall boundary plot
Check the patch distribution:

• In the main window, select Plot > Cell Display > Boundary Patches to
Version 4.06 10-19

Final Operations
Figure T10.2-2 Radiation patch plot
Final It is possible to restart the analysis from the previous non-radiating solution, but
Operations since new boundaries have been added we need to use the ‘initial field’ restart
option.
• In the pro-STAR Model Guide, select the Analysis Preparation folder and
open the Restart panel
• Choose Restart File Option Initial Field
fin_bu.ccmp from the browser dialog and then click Open
• Check that the Initial Field Restart option is set to New Boundary Types
• Click Apply
The pre-processing task is now complete. If you wish to terminate the session at this
stage, save all model data, write the geometry and problem files and exit from
• In the Save Geometry File dialog, check that 0.01 is entered in the
Geometry Scale Factor box
10-20 Version 4.06

Tutorial 10.2 SURFACE-TO-SURFACE RADIATION CFD Analysis
Preliminaries
CFD Analysis
• Accept the default Scale Factor of 0.01
• Select the Double Precision option
• Click the Start button
Note that the starting iteration number is shown as no. 1 despite the fact that this is
a restart run. This is because we have chosen the initial field restart option.
The analysis will start with the calculation of view factors which are then stored
in file fin_ra.vfs. These can be used again in future runs as long as the
boundaries and patch definitions have not changed. If, however, such changes have
been made, you can instruct STAR to re-calculate the view factors through the
-noskip option.
Post-Processing
Preliminaries Check that both the solution file from this tutorial (fin_ra.ccmp) and the one
from the previous tutorial (fin_bu.ccmp) are present in your working directory.
Comparisons will be drawn between the two.
Post- First look at the temperature distribution in the fluid:
processing
• In the pro-STAR Model Guide, select the Post-Processing folder and open the
Load Data panel
• In the File(s) tab, click Open Post file
• In the main window, select Plot > Cell Display > Boundary Patches to
deselect the patch cell plot display option
• Select C > New > Fluid
• Click Cplot
• Choose Cell & Wall/Bound (Smooth) as the Data Type
• Click Get Data and then go to the Create Plots panel
• In the 3-D Surface tab, choose plot options Contour (filled) and Edge
Version 4.06 10-21

Tutorial 10.2 SURFACE-TO-SURFACE RADIATION Post-Processing
Post- processing
Figure T10.2-3 Temperature contours in the fluid region
To compare the temperatures of the radiation and no-radiation cases, first load the
no-radiation solution file:
• In the Load Data panel, select the File(s) tab
• Use the built-in browser to select file fin_bu.ccmp, whose name should
then appear inside the Post File box
To examine the temperature differences, you will need to use pro-STAR’s

OPERATE utility as follows:
• In the main window, select Post > Operate...
• In the Post Register Operations dialog, select Function Category Load cell
data > Temperature
• Select Load cell temperature into Register 2 Using Absolute Values
• Click Apply
Re-load the results of the radiation case by reading the calculated cell temperatures
stored in file fin_ra.ccmp and then store them in post register 1:
• In the File(s) tab, use the built-in browser to select file fin_ra.ccmp,
whose name should appear inside the Post File box
• In the Post Register Operations dialog, select Register 1 from the registers
menu
• Click Apply
10-22 Version 4.06
Tutorial 10.2 SURFACE-TO-SURFACE RADIATION Post-Processing
Final Operations
Calculate the required differences by subtracting the no-radiation from the radiation
temperatures and putting the results in register 4 (the one normally used for scalar
data contour plots).
• In the Post Register Operations dialog, select Multi-register > Subtract
• For the Operation select Register 4 = Register 1 - Register 2
• Click Apply
• Close the Post Register Operations dialog
Now plot the differences:

Figure T10.2-4 Contour plot of temperature difference caused by use of radiation model
It can be seen that the introduction of the radiation model has a significant effect on
the fluid temperature distribution across the domain.
The temperature differences in the solid region can be examined in a similar way.
However, they are much less significant, with the variation less than 0.1% of the
no-radiation temperature value.
Final Terminate the session.
Operations
Version 4.06 10-23

Tutorial 10.3 RADIATION THROUGH A TRANSPARENT SOLID Pre-Processing
Preliminaries
Tutorial 10.3 RADIATION THROUGH A TRANSPARENT SOLID

This sub-tutorial examines the effect of replacing the aluminium fin present in the
previous two tutorials of this set by an identically-shaped fin made of transparent
material (Pyrex glass). As in Tutorial 10.2, the analysis includes the effects of
surface-to-surface radiation on heat transfer and temperature distribution. This time,
however, the effect of the intervening media (air and transparent solid) on the
thermal radiation passing through and being absorbed by them is also investigated.
• Model radiative heat transfer in the presence of participating media
• Specify material properties (including radiative properties) for transparent
solid domains
• Use the Discrete Ordinates method (DORM) to solve the problem. Unlike the
Discrete Transfer method (DTRM) employed in Tutorial 10.2, DORM does
not require radiation patches on the boundaries.
Pre-Processing
• Create a sub-directory for this tutorial called tut10-3 and copy the model
file generated in Tutorial 10.1 (fin_bu.mdl) into it
• Rename this file as fin_dorm.mdl You will use this as a starting point for
a revised model that includes the transparent solid.
present analysis, it is also necessary to copy the solution files for the
non-radiating case (fin_bu.ccmp and fin_bu.ccmg) to the current
directory
Start up the pro-STAR GUI interface:
• Accept the default case name (fin_dorm) displayed in the Case Name text
box
• Click Continue
This will read all data contained in file fin_dorm.mdl and will set up the model
as it was at the end of Tutorial 10.1.
BUOYANCY DRIVEN FLOW AROUND A HEATED TRANSPARENT FIN

Version 4.06 10-25

Radiative and Thermal Properties
Radiative and As mentioned in Tutorial 10.2, radiation can be tracked only through cell types that
Thermal are explicitly defined as participating in radiative heat transfer. Since in this case the
Properties solid cells are transparent, both fluid and solid cells need to be given this property:
• Open the Cell Editor using the button on the main window
• Select row # 1 (the Fluid cell type) in the scroll list
• Click Apply
• Select row # 2 (the Solid cell type) in the scroll list
• Type Pyrex in the Name box
• Click Apply
Specify that both fluid and solid regions will participate in the radiative heat
exchange:
• Go to the pro-STAR Model Guide and select the Thermophysical Models and
Properties folder
• Open the Thermal Options panel
• Select Discrete Ordinates for the Radiation option
• In the Radiation section, change the Discrete Ordinate Set option to S2. This
is the lowest accuracy setting but will ensure that a solution can be reached
relatively quickly (see “Capabilities and Limitations of the DORM Method”
on page 7-6 of the CCM User Guide).
• In this panel, note that option Solid-Fluid Heat Transfer is already selected
• Click Apply
Define relevant material properties:

• Select the Liquids and Gases folder
• Open the Thermal Models panel and ensure that Material # 1 is selected
• Check the default values for the absorption and scattering coefficients (0.1
and 0, respectively). These are reasonable for air.
• Select the Solids folder
• Open the Material Properties (Solids) panel and select Material # 2 in the box
• Type the transparent solid name (Pyrex) in the adjacent box
• Specify appropriate thermal properties for the solid material as follows:
Density — 2230
Conductivity — 1.35
Specific Heat — 837.4
• Click Apply
• Open the Radiative Properties panel
• Enter 0 for both the absorption and scattering coefficients of the solid material
• Click Apply
New The top and bottom adiabatic walls as well as the solid-fluid interface are currently
Boundary assigned to the default wall region (no. 0). You therefore need to define a separate
Definitions boundary region for the interface, extending round the entire fin perimeter, in order
to assign the appropriate radiative surface properties to it.
• In the main window, ensure the Display Boundaries option is turned off
10-26 Version 4.06
Boundary Conditions
• Select C > New > Solid

• Click Cplot to display just the solid cells
• In the pro-STAR Model Guide, select folder Locate Boundaries and then
• In the Regions tab, select region no. 4 in the scroll list
• Select option Wall from the Type menu
• Enter a region name (S-F_interface) in the Name box
• Click Define
Axis > +X
• In the Regions tab, select Create by Picking a Zone from the Action List and
click Apply
• In the main window, change the viewpoint to (-1, 0, 0) by selecting View >
Axis > -X
• In the Regions tab, click Apply and draw a closed polygon around the visible
mesh
Axis > +Y
• Again, click Apply in the Regions tab and draw a closed polygon around the
visible mesh
Boundary You must now revisit the boundary conditions of all wall regions in order to define
Conditions their emissivity, reflectivity and transmissivity.
Region 1 (side walls)

Specify surface properties for the side walls:
• Select folder Define Boundaries and open the Define Boundary Regions panel
• Specify the required radiation properties by entering the following data:
Region 2 (the fin base)

Define surface properties for the fin base. In addition, change its temperature to 593
K to compensate for the lower thermal conductivity of the glass:
• Specify the required temperature and radiation properties:
Temperature box — 593
Region 4 (the fluid-solid interface)

The solid-fluid interface’s properties have to be set so as to reflect the fact that the
solid is transparent:
Version 4.06 10-27

Final Operations
• Change the Wall Heat option to Conduction. This is essential for solid-fluid
interfaces that are not part of region 0.
• Specify appropriate radiation properties:
Emissivity box — 0
Reflectivity box — 0
Transmissivity box — 1, i.e., the interface is totally transparent
Note that the above values imply that the absorptivity of the interface (1 -
transmissivity - reflectivity = 0) is consistent with the absorptivity defined earlier
for the new solid material.
Region 0 (top amd bottom walls)

As for the side walls, the top and bottom walls will be assigned an emissivity and
reflectivity of 0.5:
Final It is possible to restart the analysis from the previous non-radiating solution, but
Operations since new boundaries have been added we need to use the ‘initial field’ restart
option.
• In the pro-STAR Model Guide, select the Analysis Preparation folder and
open the Restart panel
• Choose Restart File Option Initial Field.
fin_bu.ccmp from the browser dialog and then click Open
• Check that the Initial Field Restart menu is set to New Boundary Types
• Check that the Iteration Counter option is set to Reset
• Click Apply
The pre-processing task is now complete. If you wish to terminate the session at this
stage, save all model data, write the geometry and problem files and exit from
• In the Save Geometry File dialog, ensure that the Geometry Scale Factor is
set to 0.01
10-28 Version 4.06

Tutorial 10.3 RADIATION THROUGH A TRANSPARENT SOLID CFD Analysis
Preliminaries
CFD Analysis
• Accept the default Scale Factor of 0.01
• Select the Double Precision option
• Click the Start button
Note that the starting iteration number is shown as no. 1 despite the fact that this is
a restart run. This is due to the initial field restart options specified.
Post-Processing
Preliminaries Read in the results of the analysis from file fin_dorm.ccmp:
• In the pro-STAR Model Guide select the Post-Processing folder
Post- First look at the velocity field in the fluid surrounding the fin:
processing
• Click Cplot
• Select item Velocity Components UV option from the Vector Data list and
then click Get Data to load the velocity field
• Go to the Create Plots panel where the plot style will be defined
• In the 3-D Surface tab, check that Option Vector is selected and then choose
Version 4.06 10-29

Tutorial 10.3 RADIATION THROUGH A TRANSPARENT SOLID Post-Processing
Post- processing
Figure T10.3-1 Velocity vectors
Examine the temperature profiles, both in the surrounding fluid and in the solid fin:
• Click Get Data and then go to the Create Plots panel
• In the 3-D Surface panel, choose Option Contour (filled)
• In the main window, select C > New > Solid
• In the Data tab, select Data Type Cell
• Select On and Cset for the Smooth option
• Click Get Data
10-30 Version 4.06

Post- processing
Figure T10.3-2 Temperature contours in the fluid region
Figure T10.3-3 Temperature contours in the solid region
Version 4.06 10-31

Final Operations
Final Terminate the session.

Operations
10-32 Version 4.06

Tutorial 11 MOVING GRIDS
The following tutorials are intended to familiarise users with the process of setting
up moving-mesh problems. Two cases are considered:
1. The flow around two oppositely-moving blunt objects passing each other in a
tunnel.
2. A radial fan flow simulation
Version 4.06 11-1

Tutorial 11.1 FLOW AROUND TWO OPPOSITELY-MOVING OBJECTS Physical Problem Description
Preliminaries
Tutorial 11.1 FLOW AROUND TWO OPPOSITELY-MOVING

OBJECTS

This tutorial simulates flow caused by two identical blunt objects passing each other
in a tunnel and are shown schematically in Figure T11.1-1.
5
30 m/s
30
27
7
30
201
All units in cm (not to scale)
Figure T11.1-1 Geometry outline of passing objects problem
The two objects travel at 30 m/s in opposite directions. The fluid within the solution
domain is air (at atmospheric pressure of 1 bar and temperature of 293 K) and has
the following physical properties:
Density 1.205 kg/m3

Specific heat 1006.0 J/kg K
Thermal conductivity 2.637 × 10–2 W/m K
The following modelling strategy is adopted:

• Moving mesh geometry, as set up in Tutorial 1.3 of the Meshing Tutorials
volume
• STAR-CD’s arbitrary sliding interface (ASI) facilities, employing two such
interfaces. The general methodology of ASI is explained in the CCM User
Guide, Chapter 13.
• Dynamic cell removal and addition
• Transient flow options
• Standard k-ε turbulence model for the turbulence characteristics
Pre-Processing
11-2 Version 4.06

Tutorial 11.1 FLOW AROUND TWO OPPOSITELY-MOVING OBJECTS Pre-Processing
Material Properties
obj.cel, obj.vrt, obj.bnd and obj.inp, respectively). Therefore, before

starting the tutorial, make sure that the supplied files are copied into your current
directory.
• Enter the case name (say, obj_sl) in the Case Name text box
• Click Continue

• In the Read Input Coded File dialog select the File name obj.inp
• Click OK
This will read default problem settings from file obj.inp plus the problem’s cell,
vertex and boundary location definitions from the remaining three files.
FLOW AROUND TWO OPPOSITELY-MOVING OBJECTS

Verify that the correct data have been read in by selecting all cells and plotting the
mesh in ‘Hidden Surface’ mode:
• Click Cplot
Set the basic feature of your model:

• Go to the pro-STAR Model Guide and open the Analysis Features panel
• Select option Transient from the Time Domain menu
• Click Apply
Material Check the current definition of material properties using the pro-STAR Model
Properties Guide:
• Select folder Thermophysical Models and Properties
The default material properties are those for air and therefore do not need to be
changed. Check the current turbulence settings:
The setting in this panel will be Off, as expected. Therefore, you need to select an
option that switches on one of the turbulence models supplied by STAR. For this
tutorial, the standard k-ε model will be used.
• Select On to turn on the Turbulence option
• Select option k-Epsilon/High Reynolds Number from the Model menu
Version 4.06 11-3

Boundary Conditions
• Click Apply
Set the reference pressure and monitoring cell locations:

• Type 680 in the Pressure Cell Number box
• Click Apply
Boundary Boundary conditions can now be imposed on the regions defined in Meshing
Conditions Tutorial 1.3. Those located at the sliding interfaces must be defined as ‘attachment’
boundaries. For such boundaries, one has to supply two parameters:
1. The local coordinate system
2. An alternate boundary region number
The purpose of the latter is to provide a boundary condition if cells on either side of
the interface become disconnected; the alternate boundary region must be of ‘wall’
or ‘inlet’ type. In this tutorial, the alternate boundary region number is not important
so the system default may be used.
• Select the Define Boundaries folder and then open the Define Boundary
Regions panel
• Select region no. 1 in the boundary regions scroll list and select option Attach
in the Region Type menu
• Check that the Coordinate System is set to 1 and the Alternate Region is 0
• Click Apply
• Click Apply
• Click Apply
• Click Apply
The other boundary conditions are defined below. Note that, for the pressure
boundary, the turbulence intensity is taken as 1% of the object speed, and the mixing
length as one-tenth of the tunnel width.
• Select region no. 5 in the boundary regions scroll list and select option
Pressure in the Region Type menu
• Select Static from the Pressure Option menu
• Type 0.3 in the Turb. Intensity box
• Type 0.03 in the Length box
• Click Apply
• Select region no. 6 in the boundary regions scroll list and select option Wall
11-4 Version 4.06

Analysis Controls

• Set the wall’s U-velocity component to 30 m/s by typing 30 in the Wall U box
• Click Apply
• Select region no. 7 in the boundary regions scroll list and select option Wall
• Set the wall’s U-velocity component to - 30 m/s by typing -30 in the Wall U
box
• Click Apply
• Select region no. 8 in the boundary regions scroll list and select option
Symplane in the Region Type menu
• Click Apply
• In the main window, select File > Save Model
Analysis Check the solution variables. Since the flow is two dimensional, it is sensible to
Controls switch off the calculation of the W-velocity component as the run time will be
reduced.
• Go to the Analysis Controls folder
• Open the Primary Variables panel and check the settings of the Equation
Status tab
• Deselect item W-Momentum to exclude it from the calculations
• Click Apply
Choose the U and V velocity components, pressure and turbulence kinetic energy
as the flow variables to write to the transient post-processing file:
• Select the Transient tab
• Specify the frequency of writing data to the transient post file by typing 0.001
in the Output interval box. As discussed below, this is equivalent to output at
every fourth time step
• As can be seen in the scroll list, velocity and pressure are already selected by
default. Select Turb Kinetic Energy and enable the Post option to include
this item in the list of data to be output
• Click Apply
Run Time In this tutorial, the mesh is made to slide in an arbitrary manner. Therefore, the time
Controls step chosen can be any reasonable value, independent of the mesh geometry. Here,
we shall use a value of ∆t = 0.00025, so that four time steps are needed to move the
mesh by a (relative) distance of 3 cm, i.e., equal to the cell length in the x-direction.
This movement is illustrated in Figure T11.1-2. By the end of the analysis, the
objects will have moved for a total of 0.04 seconds which is equivalent to a distance
of 120 cm.
Version 4.06 11-5

Event Settings
3 cm
Stationary mesh
Interface
Mesh attached to
object A
(a) (b)
(c) (d)
(e)
Figure T11.1-2 Illustration of relative mesh movement
• Set the analysis to Run for a Time of 0.04 seconds
• Click Apply
• Type 0.00025 in the Time step for period box
• Click Set
Event Since this tutorial uses a sliding mesh, the moving mesh and ‘event’ options need to
Settings be employed.
• Before specifying events, it is necessary to resize pro-STAR by issuing the
following commands in the I/O window:
MEMORY MAXEVE 200

MEMORY WRITE
Moving mesh operations are grouped under the Events Module and are presently
available only in command form.
• Turn on the events option and check the Events Module status by typing:
MVGR,ON,EVENT,PROSTAR
EVEN
11-6 Version 4.06

Mesh Manipulation Events
STAT
Moving mesh operations are defined in terms of event steps that are stored in a
special file.
• Initialise this file as follows:
EVFILE INIT
The above initialises a new event history file (.evn file). The actual mesh-moving
operations, and the time at which they are executed, will now be specified through
the event steps.
Mesh Let us first set up events that remove all the extra cells created initially, i.e., those
Manipulation cells that will be restored progressively during the solution. As discussed in Chapter
Events 13 of the CCM User Guide, the main features of cell removal and addition
operations are:
1. A cell is removed by collapsing intervening faces between two opposite cell
sides in a given direction. The user needs to ensure that the rest of the mesh
geometry is re-arranged so as to take up the space vacated by the removed
cells.
2. Entire layers of cells are removed or added. This is necessary in this tutorial
but does not represent a fundamental restriction of STAR-CD.
3. Two neighbouring cell layers cannot be removed or added at the same time.
However, it is permissible to remove or add any number of cell layers
provided none of them are neighbours.
4. Cell addition is achieved by restoring removed cells. This means that cells to
be added must have been previously removed.
5. Cell layers must be restored in the reverse order in which they were removed
(i.e., the first cell layer added must be the last cell layer removed).
6. Cell layers can be removed at time t < 0 so that they can be progressively
restored during the course of the solution.
An event is set up through command EVSTEP which defines ‘event time’. There
are several ways of specifying event time — here it will be defined as the elapsed
time. The extra cell layers are removed using negative event times whose exact time
values are of no importance.
• Therefore, for the first cell removal event step, type:
EVSTEP 1 TIME -50.0 Define event step 1 occurring at time

t = –50 seconds
The information echoed on your screen will confirm this.

• The direction for the cell removal is now specified using command EDDIR.
Here, a local coordinate system is used:
EDDIR LOCAL 1 1 Local coordinate system no. 1, in the

x-direction
In this first event step two cell layers are removed, one from the upper and the other
Version 4.06 11-7

from the lower mesh block, as illustrated in Figure T11.1-3. Note that it is
permissible for the layers to be located in different places. Also note that the first
cell layer removed in each block will also be the last layer to be added back to the
solution domain.
43 (last) 2 1 (first)
(first) 1 2 43 (last)
Figure T11.1-3 Order of cell layer removal
Cell layer removal is performed using command EDCELL. The target cell layer set
can be specified by cell range, cell type or cell group. In this tutorial, it is convenient
to use the cell range option since the initial mesh creation operation has generated
regular cell numbering. The range can be examined by turning on cell numbering
(command NUMBER) and zooming in on the relevant cell layers (command ZOOM).
• Following that, remove the cells by:
EDCE ADD CRAN 1 14 1 Include all cells within the range in the
deletion list
EDCE ADD CRAN 3061 3074 1
• The removed cells can be listed using command ECLIST:
ECLIST DEACT ALL

Y
Note that it is possible to modify the list of cells to be removed by using options
CLEAR (clear all cells marked for removal) or DELETE (delete the selected cells
from the removals list) in command EDCELL.
• The first event step is now complete and can be saved via command EVSAVE:
EVSAVE 1
• Set up the remaining 42 initial cell removal events by making use of
pro-STAR’s ‘loop’ facility, as follows:
*SET EVNU 2 1 Start with event no. 2

*SET ETIM -49.0 1.0 Set starting event time to –49
*SET IC1 15 14 Set starting cell no. for block 1
*SET IC2 28 14
*SET IC3 3047 -14 Set starting cell no. for block 2
*SET IC4 3060 -14
*DEFI Define the event loop
11-8 Version 4.06

EVSTEP EVNU TIME ETIM

EDDI LOCAL 1 1
EDCELL ADD CRAN IC1 IC2 1
EDCELL ADD CRAN IC3 IC4 1
EVSA EVNU
*END
*LOOP 1 41 1 Execute the loop 41 times
With the ASI method, it is necessary to specify only changes in the mesh geometry;
changes in cell connectivity are accounted for automatically. The mesh geometry
changes can be performed either by pro-STAR commands (i.e., using ‘Change
Grid’ operations) or by user coding in subroutine NEWXYZ. This tutorial employs
the pro-STAR commands option.
Suppose we want the mesh to move in the way illustrated by Figure T11.1-2. The
pro-STAR commands needed to change the mesh geometry in this way are shown
below. These commands must be entered and stored in a file called cgrid.cgrd
before continuing with the tutorial. pro-STAR’s own built-in editor can be used for
this purpose if desired.
Note that any pro-STAR command used in a ‘Change Grid’ operation can make
use of program-defined as well as user-defined parameters. The program-defined
parameters are:
ITER — current time step number

TIME — current solution time
LSTP — current load step number
EVEX — last event number executed
EVNO — next event number to be executed
ETIM — time at which the next event is scheduled
YPST — piston position (special case)
An example of using such a parameter (TIME) appears in the cgrid.cgrd file

listing shown below.
Version 4.06 11-9

Sliding Events
cgrid.cgrd
!
! pro-STAR commands to change mesh geometry
!
! Comments allowed in lines starting with a “!”
!
! Spaces must inserted either side of arithmetic operators
!
! I000 = total number of cell layers added to mesh block 1
! I001 = total number of cell layers added to mesh block 2
!
*SET DXD TIME * 30. * 100.
EVFILE CONN obj_sli.evn
EVFLAG PREP OFF ALL
EVLOAD UPTO EVENT EVEX
CSET NEWS CRAN 14,602,14
CSET SUBS ACTIVE
*GET I000 NCSET
CSET NEWS CRAN 2473,3061,14
CSET SUBS ACTIVE
*GET I001 NCSET
VREAD obj.vrt,,,,CODE
*SET IADL I000 - 1 * 15
*SET IADU I001 - 1 * 15
CSET NEWS TYPE 1
VSET NEWS CSET
VSET SUBS GRAN 0.01 200.99
VSET ADD VRAN,660 - IADL, 660, 15
RP15,,,-1 -1
VSET ADD VRAN,2325 - IADL, 2325, 15
RP15,,,-1 -1
VGEN 2 0 VSET,,,DXD
CSET NEWS TYPE 3
VSET NEWS CSET
VSET SUBS GRAN 0.01 200.99
VSET ADD VRAN,4744,4744 + IADU,15
RP15,,,1 1
VSET ADD VRAN,6409,6409 + IADU,15
RP15,,,1 1
VGEN 2 0 VSET,,,-1 * DXD
VSET,NEWS,GRAN,-130.,-1.
VMOD,VSET,0.,F,F
VSET,NEWS,GRAN,202.,332.
VMOD,VSET,201.,F,F
Sliding To set up an ASI case for this problem, you need to define two separate sliding
Events events, one for object A and another for object B, together with the normal events
required for moving mesh operations. The sliding events will be considered first.
11-10 Version 4.06
Grid-change Events
• In the pro-STAR I/O window type:
EVSLIDE 198
This defines event no. 198 as the first sliding event; it will be referenced later by
those events that employ time explicitly. pro-STAR then reminds you to specify the
master and slave sliding boundary face lists, plus offsets used to match the two sets.
In this model, the master cells in the lower sliding interface (i.e., interface I in
Figure T1.3-2 of Meshing Tutorial 1.3) are chosen to be those in block 1 (region 1).
The slave cells are then those in block 3 (region 2).
• Provide the necessary definitions as follows:
EMSLIDE ADD REGI 1 Adds a total of 110 boundaries to the

master list
ESSLIDE ADD REGI 2 This adds 67 boundaries to the slave list
• The next command, EOSLIDE, specifies that the boundaries on either side of
the sliding interface are to be matched in the global Cartesian coordinate
system (no. 1). The command also specifies that the offset required to match
the two sliding regions at the start of the analysis is zero for both the x- and
y-directions:
EOSLIDE 1 0 0
• The final command needed to set up event 198, EPSLIDE, turns on the
arbitrary sliding interface’s partial boundary option. This is necessary
because, at some time steps, cell faces at the ends of the arbitrary sliding
interface will only be partly matched to faces on the other side of the
interface. This is illustrated by parts (b), (c) and (d) of Figure T11.1-2.
EPSLIDE ON
• The event can now be saved:
EVSAVE 198
The sliding event for interface II can be set up in a similar way.

• In the pro-STAR I/O window type:
EVSLIDE 199
EMSLIDE ADD REGI 3
ESSLIDE ADD REGI 4
EOSLIDE 1 0 0
EPSLIDE ON
EVSAVE 199
Again, this event will be referenced at a later stage by those events that employ time
explicitly. This completes the ASI events required for the case.
Grid-change The grid changing events can now be set up. The first 43 events defined earlier were
Events concerned with mesh layer removal prior to the actual start of the simulation, i.e.,
they occurred at t < 0. The next event, number 44, is now set up for t = 0 as follows:
Version 4.06 11-11
Layer Removal /Addition Events
• In the pro-STAR I/O window type
EVST 44 TIME 0.0
• The grid-changing commands for the analysis, previously entered in file

cgrid.cgrd, are now read into this event using command EGRID:
EGRID READ cgrid.cgrd

C
pro-STAR will respond by displaying all commands that change the mesh geometry
on the screen. These commands will remain active for the entire run, i.e. for t ≥ 0.
If it is necessary to stop or change them, another set of commands needs to be
supplied at the appropriate event step.
• Before event no. 44 is saved, a reference to the arbitrary sliding events (nos.
198 and 199) defined earlier needs to be created, since these contain all
information on the sliding boundary sets:
EASI 198 ENABLE

EASI 199 ENABLE
• Event no. 44 is now complete and can be saved:
EVSAVE 44
The initial set up is now complete.

Layer During the analysis, two mesh transformation operations will be required at regular
Removal intervals and for each sliding block, namely:
/Addition
1. Addition of a cell layer
Events
2. Removal of a cell layer
Referring to Figure T11.1-2 on page 11-6, it can be seen that both these operations
should have occurred by the time the mesh slides from position (a) to position (e).
However, given that this motion takes place over four time steps, it is clear that a
judgement needs to be made on the precise instant when the layer addition/removal
takes place. The strategy adopted here is to:
1. Add a layer at position (b)
2. Remove a layer from the opposite end of the block at position (e)
Starting from the beginning of the simulation, this means that the first layer addition
should occur at t = 0.00025 and the first layer removal at time t = 0.001. Thus,
• The next event in the series (no. 45) is defined as follows:
EVST 45 TIME 0.00025
In this event, two cell layers need to be added as shown in Figure T11.1-4. This is
done by command EACELL, which also specifies the cell range involved.
• Type
11-12 Version 4.06

Layer Removal /Addition Events
EACE ADD CRAN 589 602 1

EACE ADD CRAN 2473 2486 1
• Event no. 45 can now be saved
EVSA 45
remove add
add remove
Figure T11.1-4 Cell layers to be added and removed in events 45 and 46 respectively
In the next event (no. 46), two cell layers need to be removed. This can only be done
when the mesh reaches position (e), i.e., at time t = 0.001.
• Therefore, type
EVST 46 TIME 0.001

• The direction for cell removal is specified through command EDDIR using
the local coordinate system:
EDDI LOCAL 1 1
• Cell layer removal is done in the same way as for events 1 to 43:

• The event can now be saved:
EVSAVE 46
Definition of further events must continue in a similar fashion, alternating between

a cell addition event and a cell removal event. The most convenient way of doing
this is by using pro-STAR’s ‘loop’ facility. Thus,
• For cell addition events starting at no. 47, type the following:
*SET EVNU 47 2
*SET ETIM 0.00125 0.001
*SET IA1 575 -14
*SET IA2 588 -14
*SET IA3 2487 14
*SET IA4 2500 14
*DEFI
EACELL ADD CRAN IA1 IA2 1
Version 4.06 11-13

Tutorial 11.1 FLOW AROUND TWO OPPOSITELY-MOVING OBJECTS CFD Analysis
Final Operations
EACELL ADD CRAN IA3 IA4 1

EVSAVE EVNU
*END
*LOOP 1 41 1
• Similarly, for cell removal events starting at no. 48:
*SET EVNU 48 2
*SET ETIM 0.0020 0.001
*SET ID1 1443 -14
*SET ID2 1456 -14
*SET ID3 1619 14
*SET ID4 1632 14
*DEFI
EDDI LOCAL 1 1
EDCE ADD CRAN ID1 ID2 1
EDCE ADD CRAN ID3 ID4 1
EVSA EVNU
*END
*LOOP 1 41 1
Note that these command loops specify 43 cell layer removal/addition events. Only
the first 40 of these will be used because the run time is 0.04 s. This completes the
events specification for the model.
Final Write the geometry and problem files (the events file will be automatically saved
Operations when writing the geometry file) and exit:
box
CFD Analysis
Start the CFD analysis by typing
star
in your STAR-CD session window. The analysis will terminate after 160 time steps.
Post-Processing
Preliminaries Start up pro-STAR and accept the Case Name, obj_sl, in the text box of the
introductory panel. Accept the rest of the default settings and click Continue. The
model details will be displayed in the I/O window. Ensure the pro-STAR Model
Guide is open next to the main pro-STAR window.
11-14 Version 4.06

Tutorial 11.1 FLOW AROUND TWO OPPOSITELY-MOVING OBJECTS Post-Processing
Post- processing
Start the post-processing task by re-plotting the mesh:

• Click Cplot
Before examining the results, it is necessary to connect the events file to load and
execute events.
EVFI CONN
Specify the file containing the transient post data:

• Select Yes from the Moving Mesh menu
• Check that file obj_sl.ccmt is displayed in the Post File box of the
Transient section
• Click Add File
• Select obj_sl.ccmt in the Transient scroll list and then click Open Transient
file; the time steps at which flow data were stored during the run should
appear in the Time Step scroll list
Post- Identify the point in time (or time step number) at which results are to be displayed,
processing in this case step number 120:
• In the Time Step list, select step number 120. It may be necessary to resize the
Load Data panel to view the scroll bar on the right hand side
Since the mesh changes with time, the vertex coordinates and the velocity vector
components have to be read in before plotting:
• Go to the Data tab, select item Velocity Components UV from the Vector
Data list and then click Get Data
• Go to the Vectors tab and type 0.5 in the Scale Factor box
• Click Apply
• Select option User from the Range menu and then enter 0 and 30 in the From
and To boxes respectively
• Click Apply
• Go to the Section/Clipped tab and check that Option Vector and Edge/Mesh
None are selected
• In the Single Plane Plot section, type 0.5 in the Point Z coordinate box
• Click Apply
• Click Plot to Screen and Cplot to display Figure T11.1-5
Version 4.06 11-15

Post- processing
Figure T11.1-5 Velocity vectors at time step 120
• Enter the following command loop to display velocity vectors for all time
steps saved on the transient post data file:
*SET ITT 4 4
*DEFI
STORE ITER ITT
GETC U V NONE
CSET ALL
CPLOT
*END
*LOOP 1 39
The vertex-based pressure values may be plotted as follows:

• In the pro-STAR Model Guide, go to the Load Data panel
• Go to the File(s) tab
• Select step number 120 in the Time Step list and then click Store Time
• Go to the Data tab
• Select item Pressure from the Scalar Data list
• Click Get Data
• Select option Local from the Range menu
• Click Apply
11-16 Version 4.06

Final Operations
• Go to the Section/Clipped tab and choose Option Contour (filled)

• Click Plot to Screen and Cplot to display Figure T11.1-6
Figure T11.1-6 Pressure contours at time step 120
As with the velocity vectors, the pressure contours for all time steps can be
displayed using a command loop:
• Select option User from the Range menu and then enter -1200 and 1000 in the
From and To boxes respectively and click Apply
• Enter the following commands in the I/O window:
*SET ITT 4 4
*DEFI
STORE ITER ITT
GETV NONE P
CSET ALL
CPLOT
*END
*LOOP 1 39
Final It is essential not to save the file obj_sl.mdl when quitting pro-STAR as the
Operations current geometry corresponds to the status of the mesh at time step 160:
Version 4.06 11-17

Tutorial 11.2 MOVING-MESH FAN ANALYSIS Physical Problem Description
Tutorial 11.2 MOVING-MESH FAN ANALYSIS

• Set up and run a moving-mesh radial fan analysis using the arbitrary sliding
interface (ASI) method
• Employ pro-STAR’s ‘events’ facility to control the motion of the spinning fan
and blades
• Choose the time step for an ASI analysis.
The mesh geometry and boundary conditions are in fact identical to those used in
Tutorial 7.1; the difference in this case being that a transient moving mesh approach
is employed instead of the steady-state multiple rotating reference frames method.
This will enable you to examine the full periodic solution to the problem rather than
just a time-averaged result.

The radial fan geometry to be used is shown below:
Figure T11.2-1 Radial fan geometry
The fan consists of three parts: the inlet pipe leading into the main solution domain,
the rotating fan body and blades, plus the stationary body section leading to the
outlet. The model’s mesh is saved in three separate Nastran files corresponding to
each of the above parts. The spinning effect of the fan axis will be ignored in the
inlet section but will be accounted for in the rotating housing.
Baffle cells are used to represent the 12 equally-spaced blades. The rotation
speed is 2,000 RPM and the fluid within the fan is air at atmospheric conditions.
Version 4.06 11-19

Tutorial 11.2 MOVING-MESH FAN ANALYSIS Pre-Processing
Preliminaries
Pre-Processing
Preliminaries Create a sub-directory for the tutorial called tut11-2. The mesh for this case is
supplied as three separate Nastran files, inlet.nas, fan.nas and body.nas,
corresponding to the three fan regions mentioned earlier. Therefore, before starting
the tutorial, make sure that the supplied files are copied into your current directory.
• Enter the case name (say, fan_sli) in the Case Name text box
• Click Continue
RADIAL FAN SIMULATION USING A SLIDING-INTERFACE

MOVING MESH
This completes the preliminary steps for this tutorial.

Setting the The first operation is to set up pro-STAR for a transient analysis:
Analysis
Type
• Click Apply
Mesh Import You can now continue by importing the grid to be used in the analysis. It is assumed
that its three parts have been created separately and that there is no continuity
between them. In other words, the mesh blocks are not joined together with
common vertex numbering at the block interfaces.
Prior to importing any kind of grid from an external package, you should check
the default cell table indices set up in pro-STAR.
• Click the button on the main pro-STAR window to open the Cell Editor
dialog and inspect its contents. Alternatively, issue the CTLIS,ALL
command in the I/O window which results in the output shown below:
Figure T11.2-2 Cell table listing
It can be seen that there is only one entry in the default cell table (no. 1),
corresponding to a fluid cell type. If the cell table entries do not correspond to the
cell types defined within the Nastran files, a conflict of cell types may arise. In this
case, however, the files were saved with the following pre-assigned cell types:
1. Fluid cells within the rotating fan body
11-20 Version 4.06

Mesh Import
2. Fluid cells within the stationary fan body

3. Baffle cells representing the fan blades
4. Fluid cells within the stationary fan inlet duct
As there is no potential cell type conflict (cell type no. 1 is a fluid cell type in both
the pro-STAR and Nastran files), the cell table entries do not need to be changed or
deleted and the Nastran files can be imported as is:
• In the pro-STAR Model Guide, select the Grids folder and then open the
Import Grids panel
• Select the Nastran option for Format
• Select Type in the Option menu (for cell table types)
• Use the browser button to select file inlet.nas for the Bulk Data File
• Click Apply
Following this last operation, the I/O window will indicate that the numbers of
nodes (vertices) and elements (cells) that were read in were 7128 and 5760,
respectively. The current maximum values of vertices and cells in pro-STAR after
reading in the mesh are also shown — in this case they are the same as for the
original mesh. These values must be used as offsets for the next Nastran file import,
so that the second part of the mesh does not re-use the vertex and cell numbers
assigned to the first part.
Read in the next part of the mesh:
• Enable the Append option. Note that the Vertex Offset and Cell Offset values
are automatically set to mxv and mxc, respectively. These parameters are
internal functions that provide the current highest value + 1 for the entity of
interest. In this case, mxv will be interpreted as being equal to 7129 and mxc
equal to 5761. The user can supply alternative values if desired.
• Use the browser button to select file fan.nas for Bulk Data File
• Click Apply
Again, the I/O window provides the maximum vertex and cell numbers after import
is complete.
The final part of the mesh is then imported as follows:
• Use the browser button to select file body.nas for Bulk Data File
• Click Apply
This completes the import process. You may now inspect the mesh as follows:
• Change the mesh orientation by selecting Plot > Up Axis > Z
• Change to an isometric viewing direction by selecting View > Isometric >
1,1,1
• Click Cplot
• Select cell plot type Quick Hidden Line; this will allow you to see the fan
blades inside the mesh, as shown in Figure T11.2-3
Version 4.06 11-21

Figure T11.2-3 Imported grid
Cell Type The cells in each part of the mesh must now be correctly defined and named so that
Properties each fan component can be clearly distinguished from the others. To determine
what kind of cells have been created by the import process:
• Select option Utility > Count > Cells
As mentioned in the “Mesh Import” section, cells in the rotating fan body have a
cell table index of 1. Cells in the stationary body domain have cell table index 2 and
those in the inlet pipe index 4. Cells with index 3 are interpreted as baffles
representing the fan blades among the rotating cells.
The desired modifications to the cell type parameters may be done via the cell
table editor, as follows:
• In the main pro-STAR window, click to open the Cell Editor dialog
• Check that table entry #1 is selected in the scroll list
• Enter ROTATING_FAN in the Name box
• Click Apply
Next, change the settings for cell type no. 2, corresponding to the stationary body
cells:
• Check that the Cell Type is set to Fluid
• Change the Color Index to 3 (green)
• Enter BODY in the Name box
• Click Apply
11-22 Version 4.06

Boundary Location
Set the required properties for the baffle cell type 3:

• Select the Baffle Cell Type setting
• Change the Color Index setting to 4 (blue)
• Enter FAN_BLADES in the Name box
• Click Apply
Finally, the inlet pipe (type 4 cells) can be modified:

• Change the Color Index to 5 (cyan)
• Enter INLET in the Name box
• In the main pro-STAR window, click Replot and notice the change in cell
colours in the model, shown in Figure T11.2-4
Figure T11.2-4 Fan model grid showing cell colour changes
Boundary In STAR-CD, attachment boundaries are used to provide a continuous interface

Location between moving and stationary parts of an ASI-type model. In this instance, such
boundaries need to be applied to two separate regions in the model, namely the
interface between fan and stationary body and the interface between inlet and fan.
Attachment boundaries are always applied in pairs and are coupled together using
the ASI event commands.
Rotating fan body

First, apply the master attachment boundaries onto the rotating fan body. Begin by
isolating the fan body cells:
Version 4.06 11-23
Boundary Location
• Select a Hidden Surface plot type from the main pro-STAR window
• Select C > New > Type
• Click on the face of any rotating (red) cell using the screen cursor
• Change the view by choosing View > Isometric > 1,1,-1
• Click Cplot
Next, define the curved surface of the displayed fan-body cell block as an
attachment boundary:
• In the pro-STAR Model Guide, select the Locate Boundaries folder and then
• Select the Attach option for region Type
• Click Define
• Ensure region 3 is selected in the Boundary Regions scroll list, select Create
by Picking Surface based on Edges from the Action List and then click
Apply
• Choose a vertex on the side of the fan body, as shown in Figure T11.2-5:
Select a vertex here
Figure T11.2-5 Selecting a starting vertex for master attachment boundary definition
This will create 720 ‘master’ attachment boundaries on the outside curved surface
of the fan-body cell block.
In this particular example, the section of the core shaft lying within the rotating
region is considered as spinning with the fan, whereas the section lying within the
inlet region is stationary. Therefore, a separate wall boundary region needs to be
created for the rotating section in order to assign an angular velocity to it:
11-24 Version 4.06

Boundary Location
• In the pro-STAR Model Guide, select region 7 from the Boundary Regions
scroll list
• Select Wall for region Type
• Click Define
• Ensure region 7 is selected in the Boundary Regions scroll list and plot type is
Hidden Surface
• Select Create by Picking Surface based on Vset from the Action List and
click Apply
• Choose a vertex inside the shaft as shown in Figure T11.2-6
Figure T11.2-6 Selecting the wall boundaries on the rotating shaft
A total of 720 wall boundaries should be created. Before adding the attachment
boundaries to the upper surface of the block, you need to redefine the vertex set used
above. The new set should contain additional vertices whose effect will be to limit
new boundary creation to that part of the upper surface occupied by the attachment
boundaries. The easiest way to do this is to use the VSET command with the
GRANGE (geometric range) option.
• Type the following commands in the I/O window:
VSET,ADD,GRAN,45,49,,,83,85,2
VSET,SUBS,CSET
Working in coordinate system 2, the first command will add all vertices found in the
range 45 — 49 mesh units in the radial direction plus all those found in the range 83
— 85 mesh units in the axial direction. The second command will remove any
vertices that do not belong to the current cell set.
Version 4.06 11-25

Boundary Location
Display the upper surface of the block and define the second set of ‘master’
attachment boundaries along the inner ring. These will correspond to the underside
faces on the inlet pipe:
• Click the Display Vertices button to turn on their display
• Change back to a Quick Hidden Line plot
• Choose View > Isometric > 1,1,1 in the main pro-STAR window
• In the Create Boundaries panel, select region 5 from the Boundary Regions
scroll list
• Click Define
• Check that region 5 is selected in the Boundary Regions scroll list and
Create by Picking Surface based on Vset is selected in the Action List and
click Apply
• Choose a vertex within the inner annulus of vertices on the upper surface as
Figure T11.2-7 Selecting a starting vertex for master attachment boundary definition
A total of 576 master attachment boundaries should be created. This completes the
boundary definitions for the rotating fan body.
Stationary body
We can now move on to the stationary body and create ‘slave’ attachment
boundaries that correspond to the fan’s ‘master’ attachment boundaries in region 3.
The pressure outflow boundary should also be defined at the appropriate location.
Select the body cell block as follows:
11-26 Version 4.06

Boundary Location
• Click the Display Vertices button to turn their display off

• Choose C > All from the main pro-STAR window
• Display all cells in the model by clicking Cplot
• Select C > New > Type and then click on a body (green) cell
• Click Cplot to display just the body cells
Define the ‘slave’ attachment region:

• Click Define
by Picking Surface based on Edges from the Action List and click Apply
• Choose a vertex on the inside curved surface of the body cell block, as shown
in Figure T11.2-8
Figure T11.2-8 Selecting the fan-body ‘slave’ attachment boundaries
A total of 720 slave attachment boundaries should be created.

Next, define the pressure boundary region:
• Select the Pressure option for region Type
• Click Define
by Picking Surface based on Vset from the Action List and click Apply
• Choose a vertex on the end face of the outlet pipe as shown in Figure T11.2-9
Version 4.06 11-27

Boundary Location
Figure T11.2-9 Selecting a vertex for pressure boundary definition
A total of 70 boundaries should be created. This completes the boundary definitions

for the stationary body.
Inlet Section
We can now move on to the inlet section and apply ‘slave’ attachment boundaries
that correspond to the fan’s ‘master’ attachment boundaries in region 5. The inlet
boundary should also be defined at the appropriate location.
• Choose C > All from the main pro-STAR window
• Display all cells in the model by clicking Cplot
• Select C > New > Type and then click on an inlet (light blue) cell
• Click Cplot to display just the inlet cells
Define the inlet boundaries:

• In the pro-STAR Model Guide, select region 1 in the Boundary Regions scroll
list
• Select the Inlet option for region Type
• Click Define
• Choose a vertex on the top surface of the displayed cell block as shown in
Figure T11.2-10
11-28 Version 4.06

Boundary Location
Figure T11.2-10 Selecting a vertex for inlet boundary definition
576 inlet boundaries should be created on that surface. Next, define the ‘slave’
attachment boundaries:
• Select View > Isometric > 1,1,-1 from the main pro-STAR window
scroll list
• Click Define
by Picking Surface based on Vset from the Action List and click Apply
• Choose a vertex on the underside of the displayed block as shown in Figure
T11.2-11
Version 4.06 11-29

Boundary Location
Figure T11.2-11 Selecting a vertex for slave attachment boundary definition
576 boundaries should be created.
Baffles
The final set of boundaries are added specifically for post-processing purposes.
These are baffle-type boundaries on the spinning baffles and will be used to monitor
force and torque values over time, as explained in a later section of this tutorial.
Isolate the baffles and define the baffle boundary region as follows:
• In the main pro-STAR window, select C > New > Baffle
• Click Cplot
• Clear the boundary set by choosing B > None
• Turn on the Display Boundaries option by clicking the button
• Change the view by selecting View > Isometric > 1,1,1
scroll list
• Select the Baffle option for region Type
• Click Define
• Choose a vertex on one of the baffles and check that 60 boundaries have been
created correctly
• Repeat this procedure for each of the remaining 11 baffles by visiting them in
turn in a clockwise or anticlockwise direction
• In the main pro-STAR window, click Replot to verify visually that baffle
boundaries have been allocated to all 12 baffles
11-30 Version 4.06

Material Properties
This completes the boundary region specification. A summary of all boundaries in

the model can be seen as follows:
• Turn off the Display Boundaries option by clicking the button again
• Select the Utility > Count > Boundaries option from the main menu
The output in the I/O window should be as shown below:
Figure T11.2-12 Boundary count output
You can now proceed to the physical model description.

Material The default physical properties for air will be accepted for this case, so you can go
Properties directly to the definition of the turbulence model.
• Select folder Thermophysical Models and Properties followed by Liquids and
Gases and then open the Turbulence Models panel
• Choose the K-Epsilon/High Reynolds Number model
• Click Apply
Set up some essential monitoring and reference parameters:

• Enter 20938 for the Monitoring Cell Number
• Enter 5669 for the Pressure Cell Number
• Click Apply
Boundary An inlet velocity of 5 m/s will be specified, with all flow leaving the fan through the
Conditions pressure outlet.
• Locate the Define Boundary Regions panel in the Define Boundaries folder
• Select region 1 Inlet in the boundary regions scroll list
• Enter a value of -5 for the W-velocity component
• Enter a Turb. Intensity of 0.05 and a Length of 0.001
Version 4.06 11-31

Analysis Controls
• Click Apply
The pressure boundary is defined next:

• Select region 2 Pressure in the boundary regions scroll list
• Choose the Static Pressure Option
• Retain the default relative pressure (0) at the boundary. This means that the
absolute pressure at the boundary is equal to the reference pressure.
• Enter a Turb. Intensity of 0.05 and a Length of 0.001. These values would be
used if there is any inflow through the boundary faces.
• Click Apply
The attachment boundaries are defined next:

• Select region 3 Attach in the boundary regions scroll list
• Specify the coordinate system in which ‘master’ and ‘slave’ attachment
boundaries are to be matched by entering 2 (i.e., the global cylindrical
coordinate system number) in the Coordinate System box
• The purpose of the Alternate Region number is to provide a boundary
condition if cells on either side of the sliding interface become disconnected.
In this tutorial, this number is immaterial since no such disconnection can
take place so the system default (0) may be retained.
• Click Apply
• Repeat the above operations for regions 4 through 6 (they all use coordinate
system no. 2)
Boundary conditions for the wall region assigned to the spinning shaft is defined
next:
• Select region 7 Wall in the boundary regions scroll list
• Set the Coordinate System value to 2 and enter a value of 2000 in the Omega
box
• Click Apply
Check the boundary condition for the baffles:

• Select region 8 Baffle in the boundary regions scroll list
• There is no need to alter the settings, since the baffles are embedded in the
rotating mesh block (which will be defined later as spinning) and the default
conditions are sufficient for the purposes of this analysis.
Using the Display Boundaries option (by clicking the button in the main
window) enables you to verify the boundary conditions entered above. The
boundary set to be displayed is defined using the B button. Check that an inflow
velocity component is displayed across the inlet plane, plus a rotational component
on each of the boundaries on the counter-rotating part of the wall. This can be most
easily done by selecting each boundary region in turn and displaying it.
Analysis Most of the default control parameters are sufficient for the current analysis.
Controls However, changes will be made to produce engineering data output for the baffle
region, and also to define what variables will be written to the transient post data
file.
11-32 Version 4.06
Transient Settings
• In the pro-STAR Model Guide, select folder Analysis Controls

• Open the Monitor Boundary Behavior panel
• Select On for the Monitoring option
• Highlight Boundary Region 8 in the scroll list
• In the Monitoring Information group, enable the Forces and Torques options
• Click Apply
This will tell STAR to save a history of force and torque values on the baffles at
every time step of the analysis. This information can then be displayed graphically,
as described in the “Post-Processing” section of this tutorial.
The transient data output is specified next. It is important to be aware that
choosing to write all variable values at every time step will generate a large post
data file very quickly. In this tutorial, saving velocity and pressure data every 0.005
s should be sufficient for a useful analysis:
• Open the Analysis Output panel and go to the Transient tab
• Enter an Output interval of 0.005 s
• Note that the velocity and pressure variables are selected by default and then
click Apply
This completes the analysis output set-up. All that remains of the pre-processing
task is to define the time step parameters and the events needed to move the grid.
Transient The choice of time step length is flexible — the only practical constraint being that,
Settings for any given time step, the mesh movement should not be more than one cell length
in the direction of rotation. A suitable time step can be calculated as follows:
Number of revolutions per second = 2000 / 60 = 33.3333

Time for one complete revolution = 1 / 33.3333 = 0.03 s
Time for a rotation of one cell length = 0.030 / 72 = 4.166666 × 10-4 s
If we specify that the mesh should not move more than one quarter of this length per
time step, then:
∆ t = 4.166666 × 10-4 / 4 = 1.04167 × 10-4 s

We will also restrict this analysis to one complete revolution of the fan. Therefore,
the total run time will be 0.03 s. These values may be specified as follows:
• Go to the Analysis Preparation folder and open panel Run Time Controls
• Set the simulation to Run for a Time of 0.03 seconds
• Click Apply
• Set the Time step for period to 1.04167e-4 seconds
• Click Set
This completes the specification of analysis controls.

Event The fan mesh motion is set up by using pro-STAR’s ‘events’ feature. Events can be
Settings used in time-varying solutions to control when certain actions should happen. In this
case, the fan is spinning at a constant r.p.m., so only one event is required to set up
the motion. However, as the fan is spinning next to two other bodies (the inlet and
the stationary body), additional sliding events have to be included for each of them
to describe how the stationary and spinning bodies move past each other. These
Version 4.06 11-33
Event Settings
events automatically maintain mesh continuity between the neighbouring cell

blocks at each time step.
There are no GUI panels for event specification at present so commands must be
used instead. First, activate pro-STAR’s moving grid mode and specify the number
of events for this problem:
• In the I/O window. type
MVGRID,ON,EVENT,PROSTAR
MEMORY,MAXEVE,3
The moving mesh events are stored in a special event history file.
• Initialise this file by typing:
EVFILE,INITIALISE
This will create an event storage file called fan_sli.evn.

The mesh geometry changes can be specified either through pro-STAR
commands or via user subroutine NEWXYZ. In this tutorial, we will use the
commands method, as already specified by the MVGRID command above. Such
commands must be stored in a special file (the so-called "change grid" file) and are
executed according to the event definition. In this case, they are to be executed at
every time step in order to move the grid.
The change grid commands will be defined next. Using pro-STAR’s built-in
editor (select File > Edit File......from the main menu) or an editor of your choice,
create a file called fan_sli.cgrd that contains the following commands:
11-34 Version 4.06

Event Settings
!-File ‘fan_sli.cgrd’
!-Lines beginning with a "!" are comment lines and can be ignored
!-Choose a monitor vertex (to calculate current position)
*SET,VNUM,19385
!-Calculate fan motion in degrees per second
*SET,DPS,2000 * 360 / 60
!-Only activate commands for TIME greater than zero
*IF,TIME,GT,0,THEN
!-Calculate the new angular position for next time step
*SET,TANG,TIME * DPS
!-Find current angular position from monitor vertex
*GET,CPOS,Y,VNUM
!-Calculate the offset angle to move
*SET,TOFF,TANG - CPOS
!-Collect the cells and vertices to move
CSET,NEWS,TYPE,1
CSET,ADD,TYPE,3
VSET,NEWS,CSET
!-Activate coordinate system 2 (cylindrical)
CSYS,2
!-Move the vertex set by TOFF degrees in theta direction
VGEN,2,0,VSET,,,0,TOFF,0
*ENDIF
This method computes the new grid position based on time rather than the previous
grid position. This method avoids cumulative spatial errors being introduced into
the calculations, as would occur if the mesh was simply moved by a fixed angle at
every time step. This is possible because we can make use of a program-defined
parameter called TIME which is the current solution time as specified by STAR.
The diagram below may also be consulted for a better understanding of the fan
grid movement commands:
Version 4.06 11-35

Event Settings
Vertex 19385
TOFF
M
E
ltat
TI de
E+
TIM
TANG
CPOS
Figure T11.2-13 Parameters used to calculate fan movement
The events themselves can now be defined, starting with a sliding event
• Issue command EVSLIDE to set up a sliding motion between the fan’s
‘master’ attachment boundaries and the stationary body’s ‘slave’ attachment
boundaries:
EVSLIDE,2
The above command defines sliding event number 2.

• Define the master and slave boundary regions associated with this event using
commands EMSLIDE and ESSLIDE, respectively:
EMSLIDE,ADD,REGION,3
ESSLIDE,ADD,REGION,4
A total of 720 boundaries should be included for each region. Next, specify any
coordinate offsets needed to match the two sets of boundaries at the start of the
analysis.
• In this case, it is a value of zero in all directions of coordinate system 2 (i.e.,
no offset is needed):
EOSLIDE,2
Finally, save the sliding event data:
EVSAVE,2
Repeat the above operations for the sliding event (no. 3) between the rotating fan
and the stationary inlet domain.
11-36 Version 4.06

Final Operations
• Specify sliding event number 3 and save your definition as follows:
EVSLIDE,3
EMSLIDE,ADD,REGION,5
ESSLIDE,ADD,REGION,6
EOSLIDE,2
EVSAVE,3
This time, a total of 576 boundaries should be included for each participating
region. Note that the numbers chosen (i.e., 2 & 3) for the sliding events are arbitrary
and have no time value associated with them.
This completes the sliding event definitions. You can now set up the actual time
event that reads the ‘change grid’ command file and activates the sliding events.
• Issue command EVSTEP as follows:
EVSTEP,1,TIME,0
This means that, for any time equal to or greater than zero, event number 1 will keep
being executed until such time as it is deactivated by another event.
• The ‘change grid’ commands are added in next:
EGRID,READ,fan_sli.cgrd
C {only if comment lines were added in the .cgrd file}
These commands are stored internally as part of the event definition and are echoed
in the pro-STAR I/O window every time they are executed.
• The sliding events can now be enabled as part of the time event using
command EASI:
EASI,2,ENABLE
EASI,3,ENABLE
Finally, save the time event data:
EVSAVE,1
To check the event specification and prepare them for input into STAR, the
following command should also be issued:
EVPREP
This completes the event set-up process.

Final Write the geometry and problem files (the events file will be automatically saved
Operations when writing the geometry file) and exit:
• In the main window, select File > Save Geometry...
box
Version 4.06 11-37
Tutorial 11.2 MOVING-MESH FAN ANALYSIS CFD Analysis
Preliminaries
CFD Analysis
Start the CFD analysis by typing
star
in your STAR-CD session window.

The analysis will finish after 288 time steps, the equivalent of 0.03 s. The
solution results can be viewed while the analysis is still running by using the
Post-Processing folder’s panels in the pro-STAR Model Guide. Note that a periodic
solution will not be obtained at the end of the run as this would require additional
revolutions before it can be established.
Post-Processing
Preliminaries Begin the post-processing session by re-entering pro-STAR:
• Specify your preferred graphics driver (mesa or gl). The case name (fan_sli)
will appear automatically in the Case Name text box.
• Click Continue
The model details will be displayed in the I/O window. Ensure the pro-STAR Model
Guide is open next to the main pro-STAR window.
Before examining the results, it is necessary to activate events processing.

MEMORY,MAXEVE,3
Specify the file containing the transient post data and specify the time step at which
results are to be displayed (step no. 192):
• Select Yes from the Moving Mesh menu
• In the Transient section, check that file fan_sli.ccmt is displayed in the
Post File box
• Click Add File
• Select the file in the Transient scroll list and then click Open Transient file;
the time steps at which post data were stored during the run should appear in
the Time Step scroll list
• Select time step no. 192 in the scroll list
• In the main pro-STAR window, select View > Isometric > 1,1,1 to set the
view
11-38 Version 4.06

Tutorial 11.2 MOVING-MESH FAN ANALYSIS Post-Processing
Vector Display
• Ensure the Display Boundaries option is turned off

• Select C > All and click Cplot
Vector Next, go to the Data tab of the Load Data panel and follow the steps below to load
Display the velocity vectors:
• Select item Velocity Components UVW in the Vector Data list
• Ensure that None is selected in the Scalar Data list
• Click Get Data
• In the 3-D Surface tab, choose Vector and Edge then click Plot to Screen to
display the plot shown in Figure T11.2-14
Figure T11.2-14 Velocity vectors for time step no. 192
If you have already run the rotating reference frames case of Tutorial 7.1, you could
compare Figure T7.1-10 with the plot above in order to observe the differences
between the two analysis methods.
You may now import other flow variables and check the solution at different
time steps to ensure its validity. A simple animation sequence may also be specified
to display all the results.
Engineering During the analysis a file called fan_sli.erd was created by STAR, containing
Data Graph the force and torque values at each time step. To display the data in graph form:
• Select folder Graphs followed by Extract Data
• Open panel Engineering Data. The file fan_sli.erd will be displayed by
default in the File Name box
Version 4.06 11-39

Engineering Data Graph
• Accept the default Boundary File Type and select Region # 8 (the baffles
region) in the scroll list. The information shown below will appear in the I/O
window:
Figure T11.2-15 Output from engineering data scan
The list shows that force and torque data were saved as shear, normal and total for
each of the three directions. To graph the stored torque values:
• Select TYTORQ from the Data to graph list

• Click Add to list
• Click Draw All Frames to display Figure T11.2-16
This will graph the torque values in the theta direction, as shown below:
Figure T11.2-16 Engineering data graph showing total Y-component torque
As the fan has 12 identical, equally-spaced blades, the solution should be periodic
11-40 Version 4.06

Final Operations
with a period equal to 1/12 of a revolution. Figure T11.2-16 shows that the torque
is still changing between cycles and therefore running the analysis for just one
revolution is not sufficient to produce a periodic solution. To get such a solution,
the run will need to be continued for at least another 0.03 s.
Other data for region 8 can be graphed in a similar way. Note that the force data
produced for region 8 do not represent 12 times the force on each fan blade since,
at any particular time, each blade will feel a different force depending on its spatial
location. Had the force on each individual blade been required, a different boundary
region would have had to be applied to each baffle in turn during the pre-processing
stage.
Final • In the main window, select File > Quit > Quit,Nosave
Operations
Version 4.06 11-41

Tutorial 12 EULERIAN TWO-PHASE FLOW
up Eulerian two-phase simulations. The four cases presented are:
1. Bubble terminal velocity simulation
2. Bubbly flow in which bubbles are allowed to escape through the free surface
of the liquid
3. Fluidised bed simulation
4. Boiling simulation
Version 4.06 12-1

Tutorial 12.1 TERMINAL VELOCITY OF BUBBLES
Tutorial 12.1 TERMINAL VELOCITY OF BUBBLES

In this case, air bubbles and water are injected at the bottom of a vertical channel at
1 m/s. The main forces acting on the bubbles are buoyancy and drag. Starting at the
inlet, the bubbles are accelerated due to buoyancy but pulled back due to drag from
the surrounding water and reach their terminal rise velocity when the drag force is
balanced by the buoyancy force. Mathematically, we can express this force balance
as:
3 2
πd CD 2πd
---------- ∆ρ g = ------- ρ c u r ----------
6 2 4
where d is the bubble diameter, ρ the density, ∆ρ = ρ c – ρ d the density

difference between the two phases, g the acceleration of gravity, C D the drag
coefficient and u r = u c – u d the relative velocity between the two phases.
Subscripts c and d denote the continuous and dispersed phase, respectively.
The above equation can be re-arranged to give an expression for the relative
velocity between the phases, which in this case is also the bubble terminal rise
velocity:
4 ∆ρ gd
ur = -- ------ -------
3 ρc C D
In this tutorial we will use the following data for the two phases:
• Phase 1 is water with density of 1000 kg/m3 and viscosity of 0.001 kg/m/s
• Phase 2 is air bubbles of 2 mm diameter with density of 1 kg/m3 and viscosity
of 1 × 10–5 kg/m/s
Assuming C D = 0.44 and substituting the physical properties of the two phases into
the above equation, we obtain:
ur = 29.7d
For 2mm bubbles, the relative velocity is 0.24 m/s. Since the water phase is moving
up the channel at 1 m/s, the terminal rise velocity of the bubbles is 1.24 m/s.
We will now set up this case, carry out an Eulerian two-phase flow calculation
and check whether the computed bubble rise velocity agrees with the value given
by the equations above.
12-2 Version 4.06

Tutorial 12.1 TERMINAL VELOCITY OF BUBBLES Pre-Processing
Preliminaries
0.1 m
Outlet
gy
1.0 m
Slip wall on
y all side walls
x
Inlet
Figure T12.1-1 Schematic of vertical flow channel
Pre-Processing
(channel.cel, channel.vrt, channel.bnd and channel.inp,
respectively) are available in the STAR-CD installation directories. Therefore,
before starting the tutorial, make sure that these files are copied into your current
directory.
• Enter the case name (say, ter_vel) in the Case Name text box
• Click Continue

• In the Read Input Coded File dialog select the File name channel.inp
• Click OK
This will read default problem settings from file channel.inp plus the
files.
TERMINAL VELOCITY OF BUBBLES

Version 4.06 12-3

Material Properties and Thermofluid Models
Verify that the correct mesh has been imported by selecting all cells and plotting the
• Select View > Isometric > 1, 1, 1
• Click Cplot. A 2D mesh corresponding to Figure T12.1-1 should appear on
your screen
• Select View > Axis > +Z
Go to the pro-STAR Model Guide displayed on your screen, next to the main
pro-STAR window.
This enables you to set the basic features of your model and ensures that only those
panels that are essential for your analysis are activated. For this tutorial, the
following special settings are required:
• Select option Eulerian from the Multi-Phase Treatment menu
• Click Apply
Material We now assign physical properties to the two phases:
Properties
and
• Open the Gravity panel and change the Direction of Gravity Force to (0, -1, 0)
Thermofluid
• Click Apply
Models
• Ensure the Phase slider at the bottom of the panel is set to Phase 1
• Assign appropriate property values for phase 1. Thermal properties are not
relevant in this case so they may be left at their default values:
Material — Water
Density — 1000
Molecular Viscosity — 0.001
• Click Apply
• Move the slider to the Phase 2 position
• Assign appropriate property values for phase 2 as follows:
Material — Air
Density — 1
Molecular Viscosity — 1e-5
• Click Apply
Initialise phase 1 field values as follows:

• Ensure the Phase slider at the bottom of the panel is in the Phase 1 position
• Set the V velocity to 1 m/s
• Click Apply
• Move the slider to the Phase 2 position
12-4 Version 4.06

Boundary Conditions
• Set the V velocity to 1 m/s

• Set the Volume fraction to 0.001
• Click Apply
Select locations for the pressure reference and monitoring cells as follows:
• Click the mouse icon next to the Monitoring Cell Number box and then pick
the top middle cell in the main window (or enter 150 in the box)
• Click the mouse icon next to the Pressure Cell Number box and then pick the
top right hand corner cell in the main window (or enter 250 in the box)
• Click Apply
Turn on the buoyancy force as follows:

• Select the Buoyancy option
• Select option Centroid of pressure reference cell for the datum Location
• Select Use reference and initial values for the datum Density option,
together with the Reference pressure and temperature values
• Click Apply
We now define the interaction between the two phases:

• Select the Eulerian Multi-phase folder followed by the Interphase Momentum
Transfer sub-folder
• Open the Drag Forces panel
• Select Constant for the Drag Coefficient Model and accept the default
Coefficient Value of 0.44
• Click Apply
Set the bubble diameter to 2 mm:
• Open the Particle Size panel
• Enter 0.002 in the Mean Diameter box
• Click Apply
Boundary First we re-define all walls as ‘slip’ walls:
Conditions
Regions panel
• Select region 0 for Wall in the scroll list
• Ensure the Phase slider at the bottom of the panel is at the Phase 1 position
• Select Yes for the Slip option
• Click Apply
• Move the Phase slider to the Phase 2 position
• Select Yes for the Slip option
• Click Apply
We now define the inlet conditions:

• Move the Phase slider at the bottom of the panel to the Phase 1 position
• Enter 1 m/s for the V velocity and 1000 kg/m3 for the Density
Version 4.06 12-5
Tutorial 12.1 TERMINAL VELOCITY OF BUBBLES CFD Analysis
Analysis Controls
• Click Apply
• Enter 1 m/s for the V velocity, 1 kg/m3 for the Density and 0.001 for the
Volume Fraction
• Click Apply
No extra input is needed for the Outlet boundary.

Analysis We will now specify various solver parameters required for this case:
Controls
• Open the Equation Status tab of the Primary Variables panel
• Deselect item W-Momentum since we are solving a 2D flow in the x-y plane
only
• Check that item Pressure is selected
• Click Apply
• Deselect item W-Momentum
• Click Apply

• Change the Relaxation Factor to 0.3 for Momentum and 0.1 for Pressure
• Click Apply
• Change the Relaxation Factor to 0.3 for Momentum and 0.1 for Volume
Fraction
• Click Apply
Run Time Set the residual tolerance for this case:
Controls
• Change the Maximum Residual Tolerance to 1e-5
• Click Apply
Final If you wish to terminate the session at this stage, write the geometry and problem
Operations files and exit from pro-STAR, saving the model data as shown below:
CFD Analysis
You can now continue with the CFD analysis, using the pro-STAR Model Guide
facilities for running STAR interactively without quitting pro-STAR. Alternatively,
you may run the CFD analysis (in double precision) by typing
12-6 Version 4.06

Tutorial 12.1 TERMINAL VELOCITY OF BUBBLES Post-Processing
Final Operations
star -dp
in your session window.
Post-Processing
Examine the velocities of the two phases at the channel exit: the water velocity
(phase 1) should remain close to 1 m/s and the bubble velocity (phase 2) should be
around 1.24 m/s, as calculated by equation above. This can be done very effectively
by plotting the monitored value for the V velocity as follows:
• Open the History of Analysis panel
• Choose Monitor History from the Plot menu
• Select item V-Velocity and ensure that the Phase slider is at the phase 1
position
• Click Apply to display monitored values for the V-velocity component of
phase 1
By default, the graph frame fills only half the screen. To make it larger:
• Select the Graphs sub-folder in the Post-Processing folder
• Under the Display tab, set the frame Location to Default
• Click Apply
• Click Redraw to display Figure T12.1-2
Figure T12.1-2 V-velocity history plot for phase 1
Version 4.06 12-7

Tutorial 12.1 TERMINAL VELOCITY OF BUBBLES Suggestions for Further Exercises
Final Operations
• On the History of Analysis panel, move the Phase slider to the phase 2
position
• Click Apply to display monitored values for the V-velocity component of
phase 2, as shown in Figure T12.1-3
• In the main window, select File > Quit > Quit,Nosave
Figure T12.1-3 V-velocity history plot for phase 2
Suggestions for Further Exercises

Other bubble rise cases
You may wish to repeat this tutorial with different input parameters; for example,
change the density of the fluid or use a different bubble diameter. Recalculate the
terminal velocity using equation and compare the answer with the simulation
results.
Terminal velocity of solid particles
Another exercise you may want to perform is to simulate the terminal velocity of a
falling solid sphere. In this case, both phases are moving in the same direction as
gravity (downwards). To re-use the setup described above, you can simply change
the gravity vector direction to (0, 1, 0). Try this exercise with the following
parameters:
• Phase 1 is water, density = 1000, viscosity = 0.001
• Phase 2 is steel spheres, density = 8000, viscosity = 1.0e-5, diameter = 1.0e-4
Substituting these parameters into equation , we get:
12-8 Version 4.06

Tutorial 12.1 TERMINAL VELOCITY OF BUBBLES Suggestions for Further Exercises
Final Operations
ur = 208.1d
For steel spheres of 1.0e-4m diameter, the terminal velocity is 1.144 m/s with the
background fluid moving at 1 m/s. The terminal velocity relative to the background
fluid is 0.144 m/s.
Version 4.06 12-9

Tutorial 12.2 AERATION TANK Pre-Processing
Preliminaries
Tutorial 12.2 AERATION TANK

Aeration is used in many process industries. Air or gas bubbles are injected into a
liquid to promote mixing and mass transfer of chemical species between the phases.
An example of this is the transfer of oxygen from air bubbles to a liquid for
oxidation reactions.
In this tutorial, we consider an aeration tank commonly used in the treatment of
waste water.
2m
Degassing
outlet
gy
1m
Air inlet
Figure T12.2-1 Outline of an aeration tank
Pre-Processing
(tank.cel, tank.vrt, tank.bnd and tank.inp, respectively) are available
in the STAR-CD installation directories. Therefore, before starting the tutorial,
make sure that these files are copied into your current directory.
• Enter the case name (say, aer_tank) in the Case Name text box
• Click Continue

• In the Read Input Coded File dialog select the File name tank.inp
• Click OK
This will read default problem settings from file tank.inp plus the problem’s
cell, vertex and boundary location definitions from the remaining three files.
Version 4.06 12-11

AERATION TANK
your screen
pro-STAR window. This enables you to set the basic features of your model and
ensures that only those panels that are essential for your analysis are activated.
• Open the Analysis Features panel and check the current settings. It will be
seen that option Eulerian is already selected from the Multi-Phase Treatment
menu so no further adjustment is necessary.
• Click Apply
Material We now assign physical properties to the two phases.

Properties
and
Thermofluid
• Click Apply
Models
• Make sure the Phase slider at the bottom of the panel is in the Phase 1
position
• Assign appropriate property values for phase 1. Thermal properties are not
relevant in this case so they may be left at their default values:
Material — Water
Density – 1000
Molecular Viscosity – 0.001
• Click Apply
• Move the Phase slider to the phase 2 position
Material — Air
Density – 1
Molecular Viscosity – 1e-5
• Click Apply
Specify that the flow is turbulent and set up the turbulence drag force:
• Select On for the Turbulence option and then click Apply
• Go to the Multiphase Options tab
• Select option Bubble-Eddy Interaction from the Ct Model menu
12-12 Version 4.06

Boundary Conditions
• Select On for Turbulence Drag and then click Apply

• Move the Phase slider at the bottom of the panel to the phase 1 position
• Click Apply, since the default values are all acceptable.
Initialise phase 2 values as follows:

• Set the Volume fraction to 0.001
• Click Apply
• Go to the Monitoring and Reference Data (Fluids) panel
• Click the mouse icon next to the Monitoring Cell Number box and then pick a
cell above the air injector in the top row of cells (or enter 650 in the box).
top right hand corner cell in the main window (or enter 5000 in the box).
• Click Apply

• Select Use reference and initial values for the datum Density option,
together with the Reference pressure and temperature values
• Click Apply
We now define the interactions between the two phases:

• Select the Eulerian Multi-phase folder followed by the Interphase Momentum
Transfer sub-folder
• Select Bubbles for the Drag Coefficient Model
• Click Apply

• Enter 0.003 in the Mean Diameter box
• Click Apply
Boundary We now define boundary conditions at the inlet:
Conditions
Regions panel
• Ensure the Phase slider at the bottom of the panel is at the phase 1 position
• Change the Turbulence Switch option to TI/Length
• Enter 0.1 for Turb. Intensity
Version 4.06 12-13

Analysis Controls
• Enter 0.01 m for Length

• Enter 1000 kg/m3 for Density
• Click Apply
Define the injection of air bubbles (phase 2) at the inlet:

• Enter 0.25 m/s for the V velocity, 1 kg/m3 for Density and 0.5 for the Volume
Fraction
• Click Apply
No user input is needed for region 2 in the scroll list which is already defined as the
Degassing outlet.
Analysis We will now specify appropriate solver parameters for this case:
Controls
• Move the Phase slider at the bottom of the panel to the phase 1 position
• Deselect item W-Momentum since we are solving a 2D flow in the x-y plane
only.
• Check that item Pressure is selected
• Click Apply
• Click Apply

• Change the Relaxation Factor to 0.3 for Momentum and 0.1 for Pressure
• Click Apply
• Change the Relaxation Factor to 0.3 for Momentum and 0.1 for Volume
Fraction
• Click Apply
Run Time Set the maximum number of iterations to 6,000 for this case:
Controls
• Change the Maximum Number of Iterations to 6000 and the Maximum
Residual Tolerance to 1e-4
• Click Apply
12-14 Version 4.06

Tutorial 12.2 AERATION TANK CFD Analysis
Preliminaries
CFD Analysis
You may continue with the CFD analysis, using the pro-STAR Model Guide
star -dp
Post-Processing
Preliminaries Use pro-STAR to check the analysis results by first reading in the data stored in file
aer_tank.ccmp:
Post- First, examine the velocity of phase 1:

processing
• Ensure the Phase slider is in the Phase 1 position
• In the Vector Data list, select item Velocity Components UV to load the two
velocity components in the plane of analysis for phase 1
• Click Get Data
• In the 3-D Surface tab, select Vector from the Option menu and Edge from
the Edge/Mesh menu
Version 4.06 12-15

Tutorial 12.2 AERATION TANK Post-Processing
Post- processing
Figure T12.2-2 Velocity vector plot for phase 1
Next, plot velocity vectors of phase 2:

• In the Vector Data list, select item Velocity Components UV to load the two
velocity components in the plane of analysis for phase 2
• Click Get Data
• In the main window click Replot to display Figure T12.2-3
12-16 Version 4.06

Tutorial 12.2 AERATION TANK Post-Processing
Post- processing
Figure T12.2-3 Velocity vector plot for phase 2
Finally, display a contour plot of the phase 2 volume fraction:

Type menu
• In the Vector Data list, select None
• In the Scalar Data list, select item Volume Fraction and then click Get Data
Version 4.06 12-17

Tutorial 12.2 AERATION TANK Suggestions for Further Exercises
Post- processing
Figure T12.2-4 Phase 2 volume fraction contour plot
It will be seen that bubbles rise from the injection point to the top surface. The rising
bubbles also lift the water around them and create an up-flow of liquid above the
injector. Under the top surface, the flow turns horizontally to the right and then
downwards on the right-hand-side of the tank. The bubbles are carried by the flow
and spread across the top surface, some being carried downwards again by the
down-flow on the right-hand-side.

Bubble columns
Changing the geometry of this tutorial to a cylindrical tank results in a model for a
bubble column.
Gas-liquid mixing vessels
Adding a rotating impeller to the tank results in a model for a gas-liquid mixing
vessel (see Tutorial 11.2 describing the setup of a moving-mesh case involving a
rotating impeller).
12-18 Version 4.06

Tutorial 12.3 FLUIDISED BED RISER Pre-Processing
Preliminaries
Tutorial 12.3 FLUIDISED BED RISER

This tutorial is intended to familiarise users with the process of setting up an
Eulerian two-phase calculation for fluidised beds.
Fluidised beds are used in many process industries for drying, gasification and
burning of coal particles and in fluidised catalytic crackers (FCC’s). Usually the
lower portion of the equipment is loaded with solid particles. The particle
concentration is close to the maximum packing limit, around 63% in volume
fraction. A gas is blown through the bottom inlet boundary and through the
particles, lifting and moving them by virtue of drag forces. The particle motions are
random and constantly changing with time, hence it is necessary to model fluidised
beds in transient mode. Often, the gas moves through the particles in the form of
large gas pockets called ‘bubbles’.
In this tutorial, we consider a simple fluidised bed similar to the riser of a
fluidised catalytic cracker unit.
0.15m × 0.15m
Pressure
outlet
Free board
gy
1m
Fluidised bed
x
Air inlet
Figure T12.3-1 Outline of a FCC riser
Pre-Processing
is supplied in advance, i.e. cell, vertex, boundary and problem setup files
(riser.cel, riser.vrt, riser.bnd and riser.inp, respectively) are
available in the STAR-CD installation directories. Therefore, before starting the
tutorial, make sure that these files are copied into your current directory.
• Enter the case name (say, fcc_riser) in the Case Name text box
• Click Continue

Version 4.06 12-19

Material Properties
• In the Read Input Coded File dialog select the File name riser.inp
• Click OK
This will read default problem settings from file riser.inp plus the problem’s
cell, vertex and boundary location definitions from the remaining three files.
FLUIDISED BED RISER

your screen
The pro-STAR Model Guide window is displayed on your screen, next to the main
pro-STAR window.
• Click Apply
Material We now assign physical properties to the two phases:
Properties
• Click Apply
• Select the Liquid and Gases folder
Assign appropriate property values to phase 1. Thermal properties are not relevant
in this case so they may be left at their default values.
• Make sure the Phase slider at the bottom of the panel is in the Phase 1
position
• Enter the following values:
Material — Air
Density — 1.205
Molecular Viscosity — 1.81e-5
• Click Apply
12-20 Version 4.06

Initialisation
Assign appropriate property values to phase 2. In this case, the only relevant
property is the particle density. However, in the “Other Model Settings” section, the
Kinetic Theory model will be used to calculate solid-phase forces and this employs
an internally calculated solid-phase viscosity. Since the value supplied in the current
panel is added to the calculated one and in order not to affect the latter, the panel’s
phase viscosity should to be set to a very small value.
Material — Solid
Density — 2600
Viscosity — 1e-6
• Click Apply
Note that the Kinetic Theory approach solves a transport equation for the turbulence
kinetic energy in terms of the grannular temperature, which is then used to calculate
the effective viscosity. Therefore the only valid turbulence model option in this case
is the (default) laminar setting.
• Open the Turbulence Models panel and verify that the Turbulence option is
turned Off
Initialisation As can be seen in Figure T12.3-1, the particles are initally situated in the lower half
of the riser. Therefore, all cells in the model below 0.5m in the vertical (y-direction)
need to be assigned a value for the initial particle volume fraction, 0.58 in this case.
Above the 0.5m level, the volume fraction has to be set to a small value, say 0.001,
in order to ensure the stability of the numerical solution algorithm.
The above initialisation is performed using subroutine INITFI, as shown below:
• Signal to pro-STAR that this case requires a user subroutine by choosing
File > System Command... from the main window
• Move the Phase slider at the bottom of this panel to Phase 1 position
• Select User from the Options menu and then click User Define
• Accept the default values in the rest of the panel by clicking Apply
The complete contents of INITFI for this case are shown in the “User Subroutine”
section below.
Other Model Select locations for the pressure reference and monitoring cells as follows:
Settings
• Click the mouse icon next to the Monitoring Cell Number box and then pick a
cell in the lower half of the model geometry (or enter 1121 in the box).
top right hand corner cell (or enter 2000 in the box).
• Click Apply

Version 4.06 12-21

Boundary Conditions

• Check that option Centroid of pressure reference cell is selected for the
datum Location and option Specify is selected for the datum Density
• Accept the default settings by clicking Apply
We now define the interaction between the two phases:

• Select the Eulerian Multi-Phase folder followed by the Interphase Momentum
Transfer sub-folder
• Select option High Particle Loading for the Drag Coefficient Model, leaving
the default values unchanged
• Click Apply
• Open the Other Forces panel
• Select option Kinetic Theory Model from the Solid Particle Stress menu
• Accept the defaults shown for Maximum Volume Fraction and Restitution
Coefficient
• Click Apply
Finally, set the particle diameter to 0.3 mm:

• Enter 0.0003 in the Mean Diameter text box.
• Click Apply
Boundary Define boundary conditions at the inlet:
Conditions
• Select the Define Boundaries folder, then open the Define Boundary Regions
panel
• Ensure that the Phase slider at the bottom of the panel is at the Phase 1
position
• Enter 0.35 m/s for the V velocity
• Click Apply
Now define particle (phase 2) conditions at the inlet:

• Move the Phase slider l to the Phase 2 position
• Enter 2600 kg/m3 for Density and 0 for Volume Fraction
• Click Apply
Finally, define boundary conditions at the pressure outlet:

• Check that the Phase slider is at the Phase 2 position
• Select option Volume Frac from the VF Switch menu and enter 0 in the
Volume Fraction box
• Click Apply
Analysis Specify various solver parameters relevant to this case:
Controls
12-22 Version 4.06

Tutorial 12.3 FLUIDISED BED RISER User Subroutine
Output Controls
• Deselect the W-Momentum option since we are only solving a 2D flow in the
x-y plane
• Click Apply
• Deselect the W-Momentum option
• Click Apply
Output Set the frequency of outputting calculated transient data during the analysis:
Controls
• In the Post tab, enter 1000 for both the Output Frequency and Backup
Frequency
• Click Apply
• In the Transient tab, enter 0.025 (seconds) in the Output interval box. As can
be seen on the panel, for Phase 1, velocity and pressure data will be written by
default at the above frequency
• Move the Phase slider to the Phase 2 position and select item Volume
Fraction from the list of data items shown
• Enable the Post option, which selects this item (along with the phase velocity)
for output to the transient post file
• Click Apply
Run Time Set the run duration to 2 seconds and the time step to 1 x 10-4 seconds:
Controls
• Set the analysis to Run for a Time of 2 seconds
• Click Apply
• Enter 1e-4 in the Time step for period box
• Click Set at the bottom of the panel
Operations files and exit from pro-STAR, saving the model data as shown below.
User Subroutine
Introduce the user code needed to initialise particle volume fractions and gas
velocities via pro-STAR’s built-in editor. For this purpose, edit subroutine INITFI
(in file initfi.f, sub-directory ufile) as follows:
• In the Open dialog, enter sub-directory ufile and select file initfi.f
• Click OK
• Edit the contents of the subroutine by adding extra lines of code after the
explanatory section, as shown below
Version 4.06 12-23

Tutorial 12.3 FLUIDISED BED RISER User Subroutine
Final Operations

• In the Save dialog, re-specify ufile / initfi.f as the save location of the
modified subroutine and click Save
C*************************************************************************
SUBROUTINE INITFI(U,V,W,PR,TE,ED,T,SCALAR,XVF2)
C Initialise fields
C*************************************************************************
C--------------------------------------------------------------------------*
C--------------------------------------------------------------------------*
INCLUDE 'comdb.inc'
DIMENSION SCALAR(50)
INCLUDE 'usrdat.inc'
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(067), X )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(068), Y )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(069), Z )
C-------------------------------------------------------------------------
C
C This subroutine enables the user to initialise the following
C dependent variables: U,V,W,PR,TE,ED,T,SCALAR,XVF2 to arbitrary
C values.
C
C ** Parameters to be returned to STAR: U,V,W,PR,TE,ED,T,
C SCALAR,XVF2
C
C The returned velocity components (U, V and W) are in the
C coordinate system requested for initialisation.
C
C--------------------------------------------------------------------------
C
C.....HEIGHT OF FLUIDISED BED
HBED=0.5
C.....SOLID VOLUME FRACTION IN BED
VFSOL=0.58
C.....MINIMUM VOLUME FRACTION
VFMIN=0.001
C
U=0.0
V=0.0
W=0.0
IF (IPHA.EQ.2) THEN
IF (Y.LE.HBED) THEN
XVF2=VFSOL
ELSE
XVF2=VFMIN
END IF
ENDIF
12-24 Version 4.06

Tutorial 12.3 FLUIDISED BED RISER CFD Analysis
Final Operations
C
RETURN
END
CFD Analysis
star -dp
Post-Processing
Use pro-STAR to display the results stored in the .ccmt file and check the volume
fraction of the second phase:
• In the pro-STAR Model Guide tree, select folder Post-Processing
• Check that file fcc_riser.ccmt appears in the Post File box in the
Transient section and then click Add File
• Select file fcc_riser.ccmt from the Transient list and then click Open
Transient file; the time steps at which analysis results were stored during the
run should appear in the Time Step scroll list
• In the Time Step list, select the fourth step at which data are available (i.e., at
time 0.1 seconds)
• Go to the Data tab and select Cell & Wall/Bound (Smooth) in the Data Type
menu
Fraction from the Scalar Data list
• Click Get Data at the bottom of the panel
• In the 3-D Surface tab select Contour (filled) for Option and Edge for
Edge/Mesh
• Click Plot to Screen to display the particle volume fraction at the chosen time
step, as shown in Figure T12.3-2
Version 4.06 12-25

Tutorial 12.3 FLUIDISED BED RISER Post-Processing
Final Operations
Figure T12.3-2 Phase 2 volume fraction at time 0.1s
Now fix the colour scale to a range between 0 and 1:

• In the Color Scale section, select User from the Range menu and enter 0 in
the From box and 1 in the To box
• Click Apply
• In the main graphics window, click Replot
The above process may be repeated for each of the results calculated every 0.025
seconds in the analysis. However, the best way of displaying these is by instructing
pro-STAR to loop over the entire post file. To do this, type the following commands
in the I/O window:
*set itno 250 250

*define
stor iter itno
egev 2 none vf
cset news fluid
cplot
*end
*loop 1 79 1
Examine the volume fraction plots in the time sequence of your outputs. You should
see ‘gas bubbles’ rise through the particle bed. The flow is rather random and
chaotic, with particles pushed around by the gas flow. The maximum particle
volume fraction should be around the maximum packing value set in the model
12-26 Version 4.06

Tutorial 12.3 FLUIDISED BED RISER Post-Processing
Final Operations
(typically 0.63). From time to time a higher maximum volume fraction can occur in
one or two spots.
Version 4.06 12-27

Tutorial 12.4 BOILING SIMULATION Pre-Processing
Preliminaries
Tutorial 12.4 BOILING SIMULATION

This tutorial is intended to familiarise users with the process of setting up an
Eulerian two-phase model for boiling problems.
The solution domain is a vertical channel whose geometry is shown below. The
flow regime consists of superheated water entering the channel at the bottom, some
of the water evaporating into steam bubbles, and a water/steam mixture emerging
from the pressure boundary outlet at the top.
0.1m × 0.1m
Steam/water
outlet
Steam bubbles
gy
2m
x
Superheated water
Figure T12.4-1 Outline of flow channel with boiling
Pre-Processing
is supplied in advance, i.e. cell, vertex, boundary and problem setup files
(channel2.cel, channel2.vrt, channel2.bnd and channel2.inp,
respectively) are available in the STAR-CD installation directories. Therefore,
before starting the tutorial, make sure that these files are copied into your current
directory.
• Enter the case name (say, boil) in the Case Name text box
• Click Continue

• In the Read Input Coded File dialog select the File name channel2.inp
• Click OK
This will read default problem settings from file channel2.inp plus the
files.
Version 4.06 12-29


CHANNEL FLOW WITH BOILING

your screen
pro-STAR window.
• Click Apply
Material Assign physical properties to the two phases.
Properties
and
Thermofluid
• Click Apply
Models
• Select the Liquid and Gases folder
Material – Water
Density – 958
Molecular Viscosity – 0.000283
Specific Heat – 4218
Conductivity – 0.681
Molecular Weight – 18
• Click Apply
Material – Steam
Density – 0.6
Molecular Viscosity – 1.2e-5
Specific Heat – 2034
Conductivity – 0.0248
12-30 Version 4.06

Molecular Weight – 18
• Click Apply
Turn on the solution of the energy equation:

• For each of the two phases:
Select On for the Temperature Calculation option
Click Apply
Initialise field values as follows:

• Check that Options is set to Constant and then enter the following values:
V velocity – 0.5 m/s
Temperature – 375
• Accept the default values for the remaining parameters and then click Apply
V velocity – 0.5 m/s
Volume Fraction – 0.01
Temperature – 373
• Accept the default values for the remaining parameters and then click Apply
• Click the mouse icon button next to the Monitoring Cell Number box and then
pick a cell in the lower half of the geometry (or enter 44 in the box).
• Click the mouse button next to the Pressure Cell Number box and then pick
the top right hand corner cell in the main window (or enter 100 in the box).
• Check that 273 is entered for Temperature
• Click Apply

• Select option Use reference and initial values, together with Reference
pressure and temperature values for the datum Density value
• Click Apply
Define the interactions between the two phases:
• Select the Eulerian Multi-Phase folder followed by the Interphase Momentum
Transfer sub-folder
• Select Bubbles for the Drag Coefficient Model
• Click Apply
Interphase heat transfer will be defined later via a user subroutine, so the Nusselt
Version 4.06 12-31

Boundary Conditions
Number shown in the pro-STAR Model Guide may be set to zero:

• Open the Interphase Heat Transfer panel
• Check that Constant is selected for the Model and enter 0 in the Nusselt
Number box
• Click Apply

• Check that 0.001 m is entered for the Mean Diameter
• Click Apply
The boiling heat and mass transfers are to be defined as source terms via user
subroutines. First, you need to create a ufile sub-directory in your working
directory to store the subroutines:
• Signal to pro-STAR that this case requires user subroutines by choosing
File > System Command... from the main window
Prepare the user subroutines for mass and energy sources as follows:
• Select the Sources folder and then open the Source Terms panel
• For the Mass Source Term, set the State to On. Choose to Define Source by
User Coding and then click Apply
• For the Enthalpy Source Term, select On, User Coding and then click Apply
Boundary Define boundary conditions at the inlet:
Conditions
Regions panel
• Ensure that the Phase slider at the bottom of the panel is at the Phase 1
position
V velocity – 0.5
Density – 958
Temperature – 375
• Click Apply
V velocity – 0.5
Density – 0.6
Temperature – 373
Volume Fraction – 0.01
• Click Apply
Define boundary conditions at the pressure outlet:

• Select Zero Grad for the Temperature Switch
12-32 Version 4.06

Tutorial 12.4 BOILING SIMULATION User Subroutines
Analysis Controls
• Click Apply
• Select Zero Grad for the Temperature Switch
• Select Zero Grad for the VF Switch
• Click Apply
Analysis Specify various solver parameters required for this case:
Controls
• Open the Primary Variables panel and go to the Equation Status tab
• Deselect item W-Momentum since we are solving a 2D flow in the x-y plane.
• Click Apply
• Click Apply

• Change the Relaxation Factor to 0.3 for Momentum, 0.1 for Pressure, 0.3 for
Temperature
• Click Apply
• Change the Relaxation Factor to 0.3 for Momentum, 0.1 for Volume Fraction,
0.3 for Temperature
• Click Apply
Run Time Set the number of iterations to 1000 for this case:
Controls
• Change the Maximum Number of Iterations to 1000 and the Maximum
Residual Tolerance to 3e-5
• Click Apply
User Subroutines
The boiling model is implemented in user subroutines FLUINJ for interphase mass
transfer and SORENT for interphase heat transfer. These are located in files
fluinj.f and sorent.f, respectively, of sub-directory ufile. The mass
transfer rate due to evaporation is defined in subroutine UBOIL, called from
FLUINJ, so this subroutine should also be resident in file fluinj.f. For further
details of the boiling model, see the Eulerian Multiphase Flows Training Notes.
Version 4.06 12-33

Final Operations
• Replace the default contents of both files with the code shown below, using
pro-STAR’s built-in editor or any other editor. For file fluinj.f the
appropriate code is as follows:
C*******************************************************************
SUBROUTINE FLUINJ(FLUXI,UI,VI,WI,TEI,EDI,TI,SCINJ,IPMASS)
C Fluid injection
C*******************************************************************
C--------------------------------------------------------------------------*
C--------------------------------------------------------------------------*
INCLUDE 'comdb.inc'
DIMENSION SCINJ(50)
C
C.....USER'S ADDITIONAL DEFINITIONS
REAL DENL,VISL,CPL,TKL,SLIP,DIAP,TL,VFG,TG
REAL TSAT,H1SAT,H2SAT,QLATEN
REAL SMASS,UR,VR,WR
COMMON/UBOIL1/ DENL,VISL,CPL,TKL,SLIP,DIAP,TL,VFG,TG
COMMON/UBOIL2/ TSAT,H1SAT,H2SAT,QLATEN
C
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT03(019), VOLP )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(009), SCALAR(01) )
C-------------------------------------------------------------------------
C
C This subroutine enables the user to specify fluid injection
C (addition or removal) into live cells. In the case of mass
C removal (sink), only the mass flux (FLUXI) can be specified. In
C the case of mass addition (source), the fluid will bring all its
C user-specified properties (momentum, turbulence, temperature and
C concentrations). Zero will be assumed for omitted properties.
C
C ** Parameters to be returned to STAR:
C (Sink) FLUXI (<0)
C (Source) FLUXI (>0),UI,VI,WI,TEI,EDI,TI,
C SCINJ,IPMASS
C
12-34 Version 4.06

Final Operations
C IPMASS is an interphase mass transfer indicator used in

C Eulerian two-phase (E2P) simulations only.
C The default value, passed from STAR to FLUINJ, is always zero.
C IPMASS=0: no interphase heat transfer - the mass sources specified
C in FLUINJ are independent for each phase.
C IPMASS=1: the phases are exchanging mass - the mass source specified
C is directed from one phase into the other phase.
C For more information, please refer to the E2P sections of the
C manuals.
C
C-------------------------------------------------------------------------
C
C Sample coding: Fluid injection and removal
C
C IF(ICTID.EQ.3) THEN
CC Injection
C FLUXI=0.1
C WI=0.05
C TI=373.0
C SCINJ(1)=1.0
C ELSE IF(ICTID.EQ.4) THEN
CC Removal
C FLUXI=-0.05
C ENDIF
C-------------------------------------------------------------------------C
C
DENL=DEN
VISL=VISM
CPL=CP
TKL=CON
UR=U-UCEL2
VR=V-VCEL2
WR=W-WCEL2
SLIP=SQRT(UR*UR+VR*VR+WR*WR)
DIAP=DIAM
TL=T
TG=TCEL2
VFG=VFCEL2
C
CALL UBOIL(SMASS)
C
C.....SET INTERPHASE MASS FLUX
IF(IPHA.EQ.1) THEN
FLUXI=-SMASS
UI=UCEL2
VI=VCEL2
WI=WCEL2
TI=TSAT
ELSE IF(IPHA.EQ.2) THEN
FLUXI=SMASS
UI=U
VI=V
WI=W
TI=TSAT
ENDIF
IPMASS=0
C
Version 4.06 12-35

Final Operations
RETURN
END
SUBROUTINE UBOIL(SMASS)
C============================================================
C
C CALCULATE EVAPORATION/CONDENSATION RATE
C
C CREATED BY SIMON LO 27/04/04
C
C============================================================
C
C IMPLICIT DOUBLE PRECISION (A-H,O-Z)
C
REAL AI,HTCOEF,HTCGAS,QLIQ,QGAS
REAL REY,PRT,RNU,SMASS
C
COMMON/UBOIL3/ AI,HTCOEF,HTCGAS,QLIQ,QGAS
C
C******************************************************************
CHAPTER 1 MODEL DATA
C
C.....SET ADDITIONAL MODEL DATA HERE
C TSAT = SATURATION TEMPERATURE (K)
C H1SAT = SATURATION ENTHALPY OF PHASE 1 (J/KG)
C H2SAT = SATURATION ENTHALPY OF PHASE 2 (J/KG)
C
TSAT=100.0+273.0
H1SAT=419.2E3
H2SAT=2676.0E3
QLATEN=H2SAT-H1SAT
C
C******************************************************************
CHAPTER 2 MASS TRANSFER RATE
C
C.....SIMPLE BULK BOILING/CONDENSATION MODEL
C (ASSUME GAS PHASE AT SATURATION TEMPERATURE,
C IF T(LIQ) < TSAT, I.E. SUB-COOLED LIQUID, WE HAVE CONDENSATION
C IF T(LIQ) > TSAT, I.E. SUPER-HEATED LIQUID, WE HAVE EVAPORATION
C
C COMPUTE MASS TRANSFER RATE SMASS
C PHASE 1 IS LIQUID AND PHASE 2 IS VAPOUR
C IF SMASS < 0, CONDENSATION, MASS GOES FROM PHASE 2 TO PHASE 1
C IF SMASS > 0, EVAPORATION, MASS GOES FROM PHASE 1 TO PHASE 2
C
C
C.........REYNOLDS NUMBER
REY=DENL*SLIP*DIAP/VISL
C
C.........PRANDTL NUMBER
PRT=CPL*VISL/TKL
C
C.........NUSSELT NUMBER
C RNU=2.0+0.6*REY**0.5*PRT**0.3
12-36 Version 4.06

Final Operations
C.........USE CONSTANT RNU=2.0 FOR SIMPLICITY

RNU=2.0
C
C.........LIQUID-SIDE HEAT TRANSFER COEFFICIENT
HTCOEF=RNU*TKL/DIAP
C
C.........INTERFACIAL AREAM IN CELL
AI=6.0*VFG/DIAP
C
C.........HEAT TRANSFER ACROSS INTERPHASE
QLIQ=HTCOEF*AI*(TL-TSAT)
C
C.........GAS-SIDE HEAT TRANSFER COEFFICIENT
HTCGAS=10.0
C
C.........HEAT TRANSFER FROM GAS TO INTERPHASE
QGAS=HTCGAS*AI*(TG-TSAT)
C
C.........MASS TRANSFER RATE
SMASS=(QLIQ+QGAS)/QLATEN
C
RETURN
END
• For file sorent.f the appropriate code is as follows:

C*******************************************************************
SUBROUTINE SORENT(S1P,S2P)
C Source-term for enthalpy
C*******************************************************************
C--------------------------------------------------------------------------*
C--------------------------------------------------------------------------*
INCLUDE 'comdb.inc'
C.....USER'S ADDITIONAL DEFINITIONS

REAL AI,HTCOEF,HTCGAS,QLIQ,QGAS
REAL SMASS,UR,VR,WR
COMMON/UBOIL3/ AI,HTCOEF,HTCGAS,QLIQ,QGAS
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT03(019), VOLP )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(004), HP )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(006), P )
Version 4.06 12-37

Final Operations
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(009), SCALAR(01) )
C-----------------------------------------------------------------------
C
C This subroutine enables the user to specify a source term (per unit
C volume) for enthalpy in linearized form:
C
C Source = S1P-S2P*T, (W/m3)
C
C in an arbitrary manner.
C
C If temperature is to be fixed to a given value T, then the
C following may be used:
C
C S1P=GREAT*T
C S2P=GREAT,
C
C where T can be a constant or an arbitrary function of the
C parameters in the parameter list.
C
C ** Parameters to be returned to STAR: S1P,S2P
C
C-------------------------------------------------------------------------
C
C Sample coding: Fix temperature to the value of 300 K in solid
C No 3 (IMAT=-3)
C
C IF(IMAT.EQ.-3) THEN
C S1P=GREAT*300.
C S2P=GREAT
C ENDIF
C-------------------------------------------------------------------------
C
DENL=DEN
VISL=VISM
CPL=CP
TKL=CON
UR=U-UCEL2
VR=V-VCEL2
WR=W-WCEL2
SLIP=SQRT(UR*UR+VR*VR+WR*WR)
DIAP=DIAM
TL=T
TG=TCEL2
VFG=VFCEL2
C
CALL UBOIL(SMASS)
C
12-38 Version 4.06

Tutorial 12.4 BOILING SIMULATION CFD Analysis
Final Operations
C.....SET HEAT TRANSFER BETWEEN PHASE AND INTERFACE

IF(IPHA.EQ.1) THEN
S1P=HTCOEF*AI*TSAT
S2P=HTCOEF*AI
ELSE IF(IPHA.EQ.2) THEN
S1P=HTCGAS*AI*TSAT
S2P=HTCGAS*AI
ENDIF
C
RETURN
END
CFD Analysis
star -dp
Post-Processing
Use pro-STAR to check and examine the results.
• Open the Load Data panel to display the Files(s) tab
Plot the volume fraction for phase 2 as follows:

• Set the Smooth option to On
Fraction from the Scalar Data list
• Click Get Data
• In the 3-D Surface tab, select Contour (filled) from the Option menu and
Version 4.06 12-39

Tutorial 12.4 BOILING SIMULATION Post-Processing
Final Operations
Figure T12.4-2 Contours of phase 2 volume fraction
The steam volume fraction at the exit should be about 0.85. Now plot the
temperature as follows:
• Click Get Data
• In the main pro-STAR window click Cplot to display Figure T12.4-3
12-40 Version 4.06

Final Operations
Figure T12.4-3 Phase 2 temperature contour plot
Note that the steam temperature remains within its saturation value of 373 K
throughout the solution domain. Repeat the above steps to obtain a phase 1
temperature plot:
• Move the Phase slider to the Phase 1 position and select item Temperature
from the Scalar Data list
• Click Get Data
Version 4.06 12-41

Final Operations
Figure T12.4-4 Phase 1 temperature contour plot
Note that the water temperature drops to the saturation value (373 K) in the upper
part of the solution domain. Finally, obtain a V-velocity component plot for the
second phase:
• Move the Phase slider to the Phase 2 position and select item Velocity
Component V from the Scalar Data list
• Click Get Data
12-42 Version 4.06

Tutorial 12.4 BOILING SIMULATION Discussion of Results
Final Operations
Figure T12.4-5 Contour plot of velocity component V
Discussion of Results
In Figure T12.4-4 we can see that water enters at approximately 375 K. As energy
is lost due to steam generation, the water temperature drops gradually to the
saturation value of 373K. In Figure T12.4-2, the volume fraction of steam shows an
immediate increase from its inlet value of 0.01 to 0.425 and peaks at 0.852. When
the water temperature reaches saturation no further steam is generated. Figure
T12.4-3 shows that the steam temperature remains at the saturation value of 373 K.
Validation Check
According to the inlet boundary conditions, water enters the channel with a two
degrees superheat (i.e. two degrees above saturation). The volume fraction for water
is 0.99 and inlet velocity is 0.5 m/s. The amount of thermal energy above saturation
can be calculated as:
q̇ liq = ṁ liq c p, liq ( T liq – T sat )
The water flow rate is:
ṁ liq = α liq ρ liq A v liq
Substituting appropriate values into the above formulae, we obtain
Version 4.06 12-43

Tutorial 12.4 BOILING SIMULATION Suggestions for Further Exercises
Final Operations
q̇ liq = 40 kJ/s
Assuming that all this excess energy is used in generating steam, the latter’s
generation rate is:
q̇ liq
ṁ g = -------
-
h fg
where h fg is the latent heat, in this case 2256.7 kJ/kg. The steam generation rate is
therefore 0.0177 kg/s.
We can check this result against the exit conditions of steam shown in the plots
above. From these plots, the volume fraction equals 0.8522 and the V-velocity
equals 3.445 m/s. Using the specified density value of 0.6 kg/m3 and the channel
cross-sectional area of 0.01 m2, the mass flow rate of steam calculated from these
results is 0.0176 kg/s.

Condensation
The same model can be used to study condensation.
0.1m × 0.1m
Water
outlet
gy
2m
Steam bubbles
y
x
Sub-cooled water
+ steam
Figure T12.4-6 Outline of flow channel
Start by copying the entire working directory for boiling tutorial tut12-4 to
another directory, say tut12-4b, as follows:
cp -r tut12-4 tut12-4b
Enter the tut12-4b directory and start a pro-STAR session as normal, re-using
the model settings of tut12-4. Now make the following changes:
• Initial and inlet conditions:
12-44 Version 4.06

Tutorial 12.4 BOILING SIMULATION Suggestions for Further Exercises
Final Operations
Water temperature = 372 K (i.e. one degree subcool)

Steam volume fraction = 0.1
• Save the problem and model files

• Run STAR and post-process the results as described above.
Version 4.06 12-45

Introduction
Tutorial 13 AEROACOUSTIC ANALYSIS
Introduction
The tutorials in this group illustrate STAR-CD’s facilities for performing an
aeroacoustic analysis. The problem analysed is air flow around a cylinder which, for
simplicity, is modelled as a two-dimensional problem. The air density and laminar
viscosity are 1.205 kg/m3 and 1.81 x 10-5 Pa s, respectively. The circle representing
the cylinder has a diameter of 0.15 m and the inlet velocity is 5 m/s. These values
are chosen to produce a flow with a Reynolds number of 50,000, based on the
cylinder diameter. The mesh employed is refined in the vicinity of the cylinder and
also in the region where the wake is expected to appear.
inflow
Figure T13.0-1 Flow around a cylinder
The features demonstrated in these tutorials provide only basic data on the
aeroacoustic properties of a flow system. More detailed aeroacoustic analyses may
be performed using STAR-CD in conjunction with CD-adapco’s es-acoustics tool.
Version 4.06 13-1

Tutorial 13.1 STEADY FLOW AROUND A CYLINDER Pre-Processing
Preliminaries
Tutorial 13.1 STEADY FLOW AROUND A CYLINDER

• The application of an aeroacoustic model in a steady-state problem
• Methods for determining whether an analysis has converged to a steady-state
solution
The aeroacoustic properties of the flow will be analysed by calculating a Lilley

source term representing broadband shear noise (see “Aeroacoustic Analysis” on
page 17-7 of the Methodology volume). This scalar is useful in identifying those
areas of the problem geometry where shear noise dominates and hence can assist in
design modification to minimise noise. However, being a steady-state method, it
cannot be expected to capture the acoustic effects of large-scale transient features
such as vortex shedding. Thus, the method can only assist in a qualitative
examination of the acoustic features of the flow system.
Turbulence is modelled using the low-Reynolds number k-ε model (see
“Standard low Reynolds number two-equation k-ε models” on page 2-13 of the
Methodology volume).
Pre-Processing
Preliminaries Create a directory for the tutorial named tut13-1. The mesh to be used has
already been created and the relevant cell, vertex, boundary and problem setup files
are supplied with STAR-CD (files cyl.cel, cyl.vrt, cyl.bnd and
cyl.inp, respectively). Therefore, before starting the tutorial, make sure these
files are copied into your current directory.
Start up pro-STAR and enter the case name and title:
• Type aac in the Case Name text box
• Click Continue

• In the main pro-STAR window, select File > Read Input Code File...
• In the Read Input Coded File dialog, select the File name cyl.inp
• Click OK
This will read default problem settings from file cyl.inp as well as the problem
geometry and boundary location definitions from the remaining three files.
AEROACOUSTIC ANALYSIS OF FLOW AROUND A CYLINDER
• Select C > All

• Select B > All
• Select B > Unselect > Symplane
13-2 Version 4.06
Material Properties
• Enable the Display Boundaries option by clicking the button

• Click Cplot to display the mesh and the inlet and pressure boundaries, as
shown in Figure T13.1-1. The symmetry boundaries omitted from the plot are
placed on the two surfaces lying in the plane of view.
Turn on the aeroacoustic analysis option:

• Open the Analysis Features pro-STAR Model Guide panel
• Select On for the Aeroacoustic Analysis option
• Click Apply
Note that the Aeroacoustics folder now appears active in the pro-STAR Model
Guide tree.
• Go to this folder and open the Aeroacoustic Analysis panel. All default
settings and parameter values shown are appropriate for this case, so no
changes are needed here.
Material The aeroacoustic source term calculation depends upon a fluctuating velocity,
Properties obtained from calculated or derived values of k and ε using the “Synthetic
turbulence” method described in Chapter 17 of the Methodology volume. In this
case, the low-Reynolds number k-ε turbulence model, which calculates both these
quantities directly, will be used. If a model that does not calculate k and ε directly
is chosen, these quantities would be derived indirectly by STAR prior to performing
Version 4.06 13-3

Boundary Conditions
the aeroacoustic analysis.

• Go to the Thermophysical Models and Properties folder and select sub-folder
Liquids and Gases
• Select k-Epsilon/Low Reynolds Number from the Model menu
• Click Apply
• Under the Near-Wall Treatment tab, select the Hybrid Wall Function
• Click Apply
Initialise the flow field (the initial velocity is chosen to match that at the inlet
boundary, as set below) and specify the monitoring and pressure reference cells:
• Specify the U velocity as 5 m/s
• Click Apply
• Under the Turbulence tab, select option TI/Mixing Length for the Model
• Set the Intensity and Mixing Length values to 0.01 and 0.005, respectively
• Click Apply
• Enter 6275 as the Monitoring Cell Number
• Enter 7213 as the Pressure Cell Number
• Click Apply
Boundary Specify the velocity and turbulence parameters at the inlet. The former is set such
Conditions that, based on the diameter of the cylinder, the Reynolds number is 50,000:
• Select the Define Boundaries folder
• Select the inlet, region 1, from the list
• Enter 5 m/s as the U velocity
• Change the Turbulence Switch to TI/Length
• Enter a Turb. Intensity of 0.001
• Enter a Length of 0.05 m
• Click Apply
Analysis Since the flow is two-dimensional, solving the momentum equation in the
Controls z-direction is unnecessary. To turn this off and activate a second-order differencing
scheme for the other two momentum equations:
• Select the Analysis Controls folder in the pro-STAR Model Guide
• Under the Equation Status tab, deselect the W-Momentum option to make the
analysis two-dimensional
• Click Apply
• Under the Differencing Schemes tab, change the momentum Differencing
Scheme to MARS
• Click Apply
13-4 Version 4.06

Tutorial 13.1 STEADY FLOW AROUND A CYLINDER CFD Analysis
Run Time Controls
Set the frequency of data output to the solution file:

an Output Frequency of 100 iterations and File Name aac.ccmp
• Click Apply
Run Time The run time controls must also be adjusted as follows:
Controls
• Click Apply
Final Write the geometry and problem files:
Operations
CFD Analysis
• Leave all settings at their default values and click Start
The analysis will then start automatically. At the end of the run, note that the
normalised residual sums will not have satisfied the convergence criterion within
the specified maximum number of iterations. The reason for this will be discussed
in the post-processing section.
Post-Processing
Preliminaries Begin by reading in the results of the analysis:
Flow Field Given that the analysis has so far failed to satisfy the convergence criterion, the
results may not represent a true steady-state. To evaluate this possibility, examine
the flow field by displaying the velocity vectors:
• Under the Data tab of the Load Data panel, check that Data Type Cell is
selected
• Select Velocity Components UV from the Vector Data list
• Click Get Data
Version 4.06 13-5
Tutorial 13.1 STEADY FLOW AROUND A CYLINDER Post-Processing
Monitor History Plots
• Turn off the Display Boundaries option by clicking the button

• In order to be able to see the flow field details, zoom in using the middle
mouse button until the values at the bottom of the display window show the
plot Center to be approximately 0.1, 0, 0 and the viewing Distance
approximately 0.25. The resulting plot should resemble Figure T13.1-2
Figure T13.1-2 Plot of velocity vectors near to the cylinder
The flow field is clearly not symmetrical despite the geometry being so. This
suggests that a converged steady-state solution has not been reached.
Monitor Examining history plots of the monitored flow variables is a good way to reveal
History Plots whether a steady-state solution has been reached and, if not, why not. To create a
suitable history plot:
• Select Monitor History for the Plot option
• Enable the U-Velocity option box
• Click Apply
By default, the graph frame fills only half the screen. To make it larger:
• Select the Graphs sub-folder in the Post-Processing folder
• Under the Display tab, change the frame Location to Default
• Click Apply
13-6 Version 4.06

Turbulence Energy
Figure T13.1-3 History plot for the U velocity component
The oscillating graph shows that a steady-state solution was not reached and
suggests that the real solution to this problem is periodic. In order to obtain a full
solution, a transient analysis would need to be run. Such an analysis is the basis of
Tutorial 13.2. Despite the absence of a steady-state solution, the results obtained
from this run (which effectively show the instantaneous solution at a point within
the periodic cycle) can be used to discuss some aspects of an aeroacoustic analysis.
Turbulence A plot of the turbulence kinetic energy will show the shape and position of the wake
Energy downstream of the cylinder:
• Under the Data tab, select Data Type Cell and Smooth option On
• Click Get Data
• Under the 3-D Surface tab, select options Contour (filled) and None
• Click the Zoom Off button, , to display Figure T13.1-4
Version 4.06 13-7

Aeroacoustic Source Term
Figure T13.1-4 Contour plot of the turbulence kinetic energy
Aeroacoustic The aeroacoustic Lilley source term is loaded from the results file in the same way
Source Term as any other scalar. Therefore, a contour plot of it can be produced as follows:
• Under the Data tab, check that Data Type Cell and Smooth option On are
selected
• Select Aeroacoustics Source from the Scalar Data list
• Click Get Data
13-8 Version 4.06

Aeroacoustic Source Term
Figure T13.1-5 Contour plot of the aeroacoustic Lilley source term
Figure T13.1-5 shows that the shear noise produced by the flow is primarily in the
wake of the cylinder. The shape of the noise wake is similar to that of the turbulence
wake shown in Figure T13.1-4. This is due to the Lilley source dependence on the
turbulence parameters k and ε.
A separate analysis using the es-acoustics tool shows that the mesh provided for
this case is only capable of resolving noise resulting from turbulent eddies for
frequencies of up to about 500 Hz. Therefore, the next tutorial (Tutorial 13.2) will
analyse the same case as a transient problem and with a finer mesh, enabling
frequencies of up to about 1,000 Hz to be captured.
Quit pro-STAR by selecting:
Version 4.06 13-9

Tutorial 13.2 TRANSIENT FLOW AROUND A CYLINDER
Tutorial 13.2 TRANSIENT FLOW AROUND A CYLINDER

• The application of a Detached Eddy Simulation (DES) turbulence model
• How to monitor cell behaviour using an .ecd file
• The solution mapping (SMAP) process
• The specification of boundary conditions based on mapped solution data
• How to check a transient analysis for stability
• How to create animations using the animation utility and a neutral plot file
Such techniques are typically used in external aerodynamics problems where

analyses involving refined meshes around individual components (for example,
wing mirrors, spoilers, wiper blades, high-lift devices and landing gear) are
performed with boundary conditions mapped from a coarser global simulation.
As a demonstration of these techniques, this tutorial models the same
two-dimensional flow around a cylinder as Tutorial 13.1, but this time as a transient
simulation. Examination of the time-dependent pressure profile at specified
locations will allow for assessment of the acoustic and structural excitation via the
frequency and amplitude of the unsteady pressure fluctuations.
To reduce the computational cost, the solution domain extent is reduced to cover
only the important flow regions in the vicinity of the cylinder and wake, and the
mesh within is refined. The analysis restarts from the steady state solution of the
previous tutorial which is mapped onto the new mesh. The conditions on the inlet
and pressure boundaries are also mapped from the steady state result using user
subroutines.
Besides the above changes to domain, mesh and boundary conditions, the only
other change in the problem specification is the use of the Detached Eddy
Simulation (DES) option based on the low-Reynolds number k-ε model employed
in Tutorial 13.1. This means that the results can include large eddy structures that
would not appear if a RANS model was used. Due to the hybrid nature of DES,
using such a model rather than full LES also benefits from not having to resolve the
boundary layer fully.
Given a cylinder radius of 0.15 m, a bulk flow velocity of ~5 m/s and the
knowledge that, for flow around a cylinder, vortex shedding at Reynolds number
50,000 occurs at a Strouhal number
fd
St = -----
u
of ~0.2, it is possible to estimate the vortex shedding frequency as

f = 6.67Hz
To produce a well-resolved waveform for these oscillations, the time step should be
at least one tenth of the inverse of the frequency, i.e., 1.5 x 10-2 seconds. Stability
considerations based on the Courant number require the time step to be much
smaller than this, so a value of 5 x 10-5 seconds is chosen. This should enable
oscillations with frequencies of up to 2,000 Hz to be resolved faithfully.
Version 4.06 13-11

Tutorial 13.2 TRANSIENT FLOW AROUND A CYLINDER Pre-Processing
Preliminaries
Pre-Processing
Preliminaries Create a directory for the tutorial named tut13-2 and copy the model and results
files created in Tutorial 13.1 (aac.mdl, aac.ccmp and aac.ccmg) into it. The
mesh from Tutorial 13.1 has already been refined and is contained within the cell,
vertex, boundary and problem setup files supplied with STAR-CD (files
cyl_ref.cel, cyl_ref.vrt, cyl_ref.bnd and cyl_ref.inp,
respectively). Therefore, copy these into your current directory also.
Start up pro-STAR:
• Enter aac_tr as the Case Name
• Deselect the Resume From Existing .mdl File option
• Click Continue
To give the case a new title:

• In the Title box type
ANALYSIS OF AEROACOUSTIC EFFECTS IN TRANSIENT FLOW
Read in the refined mesh and the problem data:

• In the main pro-STAR window, select File > Read Input Code File...
• In the Read Input Coded File dialog, select the File name cyl_ref.inp
• Click OK
Analysis The next step is to change the analysis type to transient:
Features
• Change the Time Domain option to Transient
• Click Yes in the dialog that appears, warning that aeroacoustic modelling
cannot be performed in a transient analysis. This refers to the calculation of
the Lilley source term, which is a steady state feature.
• Click Apply
Material Switch on the DES variant of the current turbulence model:
Properties
• Select the Liquids and Gases sub-folder and open the Turbulence Models
panel
• Check the DES box
• Click Apply
The monitoring and pressure reference cells must be redefined, as those used in the
steady-state analysis no longer exist:
• Change the Monitoring Cell Number to 9419
• Change the Pressure Cell Number to 6232. This cell is at one end of the
13-12 Version 4.06
Boundary Conditions
pressure boundary.
• Click Apply
Boundary The mapping of the inlet and pressure boundary conditions is performed via user
Conditions subroutines. These must be activated as follows:
• In the main window, choose File > System Command...
• In the pro-STAR Model Guide, select the Define Boundaries folder
• Select region 1, the inlet, from the boundary regions list
• Select User from the User Option menu
• Click User Define to write the default version of subroutine BCDEFI in
sub-directory ufile, ready for editing later
• Click Apply
• Select region 2, the pressure boundary, from the boundary regions list
• Select User from the User Option menu
• Click User Define to write the default version of subroutine BCDEFP in
sub-directory ufile, ready for editing later
• Click Apply
Analysis Specify what transient data will be written to the .ccmt file and how often:
Controls
• Open the Primary Variables panel and select the Differencing Schemes tab
• Change the momentum Differencing Scheme to CD. This should provide
greater accuracy as, despite being second-order, the MARS gradient limiter
has been shown to be diffusive when used with LES sub-grid scale turbulence
models
• Click Apply
• Select Turb Kinetic Energy from the Data to Write scroll list. The data will
be used to create an animation in the “Post-Processing” part of this tutorial
• Check the Post box
• Click Apply
Pressure data will be monitored at a location about 1.5 cylinder radii downstream of
the cylinder and the monitor data stored in an .ecd file. Define the location by
creating a cell set containing a single cell:
CSET NEWSET CLIST 9419
Store the location in a .set file:

• In the main pro-STAR window, click Store/Recall > Store
• In the Store Information dialog, enter pmon as the Set Name
• Click Write and then Close
Specify which data are to be stored in the .ecd file:
Version 4.06 13-13

Run Time Controls
• In the Analysis Controls folder, open the Monitor Cell Behavior panel
• Check that the file aac_tr.set is displayed in the Set File box
• Select pmon from the Monitoring Information scroll list
• Select Pressure from the list of Monitoring Information variables
• Click Apply
Run Time Specify the time step size and the length of the run:
Controls
• Select the Analysis Preparation folder and open the Run Time Controls panel
• Change the Time step for period to 5e-5 seconds
• Click Set
• Change the run Time to 1.5 seconds. This is equivalent to 30,000 time steps
• Click Apply
Solution The solution mapping process involves the following stages:
Mapping
1. Save the new mesh geometry created above in its corresponding .ccmp file
2. Save the new model file
3. Resume the original model file and load the corresponding solution file
4. Perform the solution mapping (SMAP) operation
5. Resume the new model file
6. View and check the restart solution data
7. Set up the run to start from the mapped solution
Write the new geometry and model files and load the model and results files from
Tutorial 13.1:
• In the Save Geometry File dialog, click Apply then Close
• Select File > Resume Model From...
• In the Resume Model From dialog, select aac.mdl
• Click OK
• Select the Post-Processing folder in the pro-STAR Model Guide
• Change the Post File name to aac.ccmp
• Click Open Post file to load the results from Tutorial 13.1
To perform the solution mapping:

• In the main pro-STAR window, select Utility > Solution Mapping...
• In the Solution Mapping dialog, specify the options shown below:
13-14 Version 4.06

Solution Mapping
• Click Apply. The solution mapping operation may take a few minutes,
depending upon the speed of your computer. Once it is complete, click Close
The new model file can now be resumed and the mapped results displayed:
• In the Resume Model From dialog, enter aac_tr.mdl
• Click OK
• Select C > All
• In the pro-STAR Model Guide select the Load Data panel
• In the File(s) tab change the Post File name to aac_tr.ccms
• Change the State Name to smap
• Click Open Post file to load the mapped results
• Under the Data tab, select Velocity Magnitude from the Calculated Scalar
Data list
• Click Get Data
• Under the 3-D Surface tab, select options Contour (filled) and None
Version 4.06 13-15

Tutorial 13.2 TRANSIENT FLOW AROUND A CYLINDER User Subroutines
Final Operations
Figure T13.2-1 Velocity magnitude profile resulting from the solution mapping
You must now specify that the transient run should restart from the above mapped
solution:
• Select the Analysis Preparation folder in the pro-STAR Model Guide
• Select Initial Field as the Restart File Option
• Enter aac_tr.ccms as the Restart File
• In the Initial Field Restart section, select Smapped
• Check that the State Name is smap and then click Apply
This completes the solution mapping process.

Final The geometry file has already been written but it is also necessary to write the
Operations problem file:
User Subroutines
The boundary mapping process requires two user subroutines, one for the inlet
boundary and one for the pressure boundary. These are supplied in files bcdefi.f
and bcdefp.f which should be copied into the ufile directory, replacing the
default subroutines. Alternatively, you may edit the default subroutines so that they
match those shown below.
13-16 Version 4.06

Inlet Boundary
Inlet The user subroutine mapping the inlet boundary data is BCDEFI, given below:
Boundary
C*************************************************************************
SUBROUTINE BCDEFI(SCALAR,U,V,W,TE,ED,T,DEN,TURINT)
C Maps inlet boundary conditions from cell data
C*************************************************************************
C
C STAR VERSION 4.04
C
C*************************************************************************
INCLUDE ‘comdb.inc’
LOGICAL TURINT
INCLUDE ‘usrdat.inc’
DIMENSION SCALC(50)
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(002), DENC )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(003), EDC )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(005), PRC )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(007), TC )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(008), TEC )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(059), UC )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(060), VC )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(061), WC )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(064), UCL )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(065), VCL )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(066), WCL )
c-inclusion_1 start ----------------------------------------------------
PARAMETER(MAXPB=209528)
DIMENSION USTORE(MAXPB),VSTORE(MAXPB),WSTORE(MAXPB),
* TESTORE(MAXPB),EDSTORE(MAXPB)
SAVE USTORE,VSTORE,WSTORE,TESTORE,EDSTORE,ITFLAG,IFILEFLAG
LOGICAL FILEEXIST
c-inclusion_1 end ------------------------------------------------------
C-----------------------------------------------------------------------
c-inclusion_2 start ----------------------------------------------------
LOGICAL LOG1
INTEGER II
DO 1101 II=99,1,-1
INQUIRE(UNIT=II,OPENED=LOG1)
IF(.NOT.LOG1) THEN
IUNIT=II
GOTO 1103
ENDIF
1101 CONTINUE
1103 CONTINUE
Version 4.06 13-17

Inlet Boundary
c
IF (INTFLG(1).EQ.0) THEN
INTFLG(1) = 1
ITFLAG = ITER
END IF
IF(IREG.EQ.1) THEN
IF (ITER.EQ.ITFLAG) THEN
IF (IBP.GT.MAXPB)STOP’BCDEFI:MAXPB too small’
INTFLG(2) = 1
INQUIRE(FILE=’inlet.inp’, EXIST=FILEEXIST)
IF (FILEEXIST) THEN
IFILEFLAG = 1
ELSE
IFILEFLAG = 0
END IF
END IF
IF (IFILEFLAG.EQ.0) THEN
WRITE(*,*) ‘ *** WARNING: Setting inlet boundary ‘
* // ‘to near cell value and writing inlet.inp file’
INTFLG(3) = 1
END IF
USTORE(IBP)=UC
VSTORE(IBP)=VC
WSTORE(IBP)=WC
TESTORE(IBP)=TEC
EDSTORE(IBP)=EDC
call freeunit(iunit)
OPEN (iunit,FILE=’inlet.inp’,FORM=’formatted’,
* STATUS=’unknown’)
10 CONTINUE
READ(iunit,*,END=11) TMP
GO TO 10
11 CONTINUE
WRITE(iunit,*) IBP,UC,VC,WC,TEC,EDC
CLOSE (iunit)
ELSE
WRITE(*,*) ‘ *** WARNING: Reading inlet profile’
* // ‘ from inlet.inp’
INTFLG(4) = 1
END IF
OPEN (iunit,FILE=’inlet.inp’,FORM=’formatted’,
12 CONTINUE
READ(iunit,*,END=13) IBPR,UR,VR,WR,TER,EDR
IF (IBP.NE.IBPR) THEN
GO TO 12
ELSE
USTORE(IBP)=UR
VSTORE(IBP)=VR
WSTORE(IBP)=WR
TESTORE(IBP)=TER
EDSTORE(IBP)=EDR
END IF
CLOSE (iunit)
13-18 Version 4.06

Pressure boundary
END IF
C-SPOT CHECK IF(IBP.EQ.690) PRINT *,’STARTU,V,W,IBP=’,U,V,W,IBP
END IF
U=USTORE(IBP)
V=VSTORE(IBP)
W=WSTORE(IBP)
TE=TESTORE(IBP)
ED=EDSTORE(IBP)
T=293.0
DEN=1.205
C-SPOT CHECK IF(IBP.EQ.690) PRINT *,’U,V,W,IBP=’,U,V,W,IBP
END IF
c-inclusion_2 end ------------------------------------------------------
RETURN
13 CONTINUE
WRITE(*,*) ‘ ***ERROR: Could not find pro-STAR boundary ‘,
* IBP, ‘ in file inlet.inp’
WRITE(60,*) ‘ ***ERROR: Could not find pro-STAR boundary ‘,
* IBP, ‘ in file inlet.inp’
CALL STQUIT(1)
END
Pressure The user subroutine mapping the pressure boundary data is BCDEFP, given below:
boundary
C*************************************************************************
SUBROUTINE BCDEFP(UB,VB,WB,PR,TE,ED,T,SCALAR,TURINT)
C Maps pressure boundary conditions from cell data
C*************************************************************************
C
C STAR VERSION 4.04
C
C*************************************************************************
INCLUDE ‘comdb.inc’
LOGICAL TURINT
INCLUDE ‘usrdat.inc’
DIMENSION SCALC(50)
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(002), DENC )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(003), EDC )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(005), PRC )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(007), TC )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(008), TEC )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(059), UC )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(060), VC )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(061), WC )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(064), UCL )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(065), VCL )
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT04(066), WCL )
Version 4.06 13-19

Pressure boundary
SAVE PSTOR, ITFLG, IFILEFLAG

LOGICAL FILEEXIST
PARAMETER (MAXPB = 209528)
DIMENSION PSTOR(MAXPB), TESTOR(MAXPB), EDSTOR(MAXPB)
LOGICAL LOG1
INTEGER II
DO 1101 II=99,1,-1
INQUIRE(UNIT=II,OPENED=LOG1)
IF(.NOT.LOG1) THEN
IUNIT=II
GOTO 1103
ENDIF
1101 CONTINUE
1103 CONTINUE
c
INTFLG(41) = 1
C
C set the starting iteration
C
ITFLG = ITER
END IF
IF (IREG.EQ.2) THEN
C
C Check is array pstor has been sized correctly
C
IF (IBP.GT.MAXPB) STOP ‘BCDEFP: MAXPB TOO SMALL’
C
C If in the first iteration of run
C
IF (ITER.EQ.ITFLG) THEN
INTFLG(42) = 1
C
C check if file containing pressure data exists
C
INQUIRE(FILE=’pressure.inp’, EXIST=FILEEXIST)
IF (FILEEXIST) THEN
IFILEFLAG = 1
ELSE
IFILEFLAG = 0
END IF
END IF
C
C If file pressure.inp does not exist write warning message to screen.
C
IF (IFILEFLAG.EQ.0) THEN
INTFLG(43) = 1
WRITE(*,*) ‘ ***WARNING: Setting pressure boundary ‘
* // ‘to near cell value and writing pressure.inp file’
END IF
C
13-20 Version 4.06

Tutorial 13.2 TRANSIENT FLOW AROUND A CYLINDER CFD Analysis
Pressure boundary
C Get pressure from cell value and store

C
PSTOR(IBP) = PRC
TESTOR(IBP) = TEC
EDSTOR(IBP) = EDC
call freeunit(iunit)
OPEN(iunit,FILE=’pressure.inp’,FORM=’formatted’,
10 CONTINUE
READ(iunit,*,END=11) TMP
GO TO 10
11 CONTINUE
WRITE(iunit,*) IBP, PRC, TEC, EDC
CLOSE (iunit)
ELSE
INTFLG(44) = 1
WRITE (*,*) ‘ *** WARNING: Reading pressure boundary’
* // ‘ profile from file pressure.inp’
END IF
OPEN (iunit,FILE=’pressure.inp’,FORM=’formatted’,
12 CONTINUE
READ(iunit,*,END=13) IBPR,PRCR, TECR, EDCR
IF (IBPR.NE.IBP) THEN
GOTO 12
ELSE
PSTOR(IBP) = PRCR
TESTOR(IBP) = TECR
EDSTOR(IBP) = EDCR
END IF
CLOSE (iunit)
END IF
END IF
END IF
PR = PSTOR(IBP)
TE = TESTOR(IBP)
ED = EDSTOR(IBP)
T = 293.0
RETURN
13 CONTINUE
WRITE (*,*) ‘ ***ERROR: Cannot find pressure boundary in file’
CALL STQUIT()
END
CFD Analysis
The description in the next two sections assumes that STAR will be run from the
command line whilst leaving pro-STAR running in the background. If possible, you
should also run the analysis on multiple CPUs to minimise the elapsed run time.
To run the analysis in parallel, on two local CPUs and in double precision, type:
star -dp 2
To run the analysis sequentially, in double precision mode, type:
Version 4.06 13-21

Tutorial 13.2 TRANSIENT FLOW AROUND A CYLINDER Post-Processing
Preliminaries
star -dp
However you choose to run the analysis, it will take at least a few hours to complete.
In our experience, the run takes 9 hours on a dual-processor Pentium 4 Xeon 2.8Ghz
running under Linux. Long run times are typical for DES cases as they require very
fine meshes and a large number of time steps (in this case 30,000).
Post-Processing
Preliminaries Before post-processing the results, it is advisable to check the performance of the
run by examining the information in the .info file:
• In the pro-STAR Model Guide, select the Analysis Preparation folder
• Click Browse Additional Output File to display the .info file contents
• Examine the Maximum Courant number and the Mean Courant number at a
selection of time steps through the run. You should see that these two
quantities stay within the ranges 1.0 to 9.0 and 0.15 to 0.5, respectively.
Ideally, the Courant number should not exceed 1.0 but, in this case, it is
reasonable to assume that large Courant numbers are found only in a few very
small cells near the cylinder surface.
• Examine the NUMBER OF PISO CORRECTORS at a selection of time steps
through the run. This should be either 2, 3 or 4. A stable transient calculation
will not regularly exceed 4 PISO correctors.
Begin the post-processing session by opening the transient post data file:
Load Data panel
• Click Add File
• Select file aac_tr.ccmt from the Transient list
Animated An animation of turbulence kinetic energy contours will now be created to help
Plots visualize the unsteady character of the flow. The animation may be defined by
writing a sequence of plots to a neutral plot file, which are then played back via
pro-STAR commands as follows:
• Under the File(s) tab of the Load Data panel, select the first time step from
the Time Step list
• Click Get Data
• Under the Options tab of the Create Plots panel, change the Range option to
User and specify a range of 0 to 4
• Click Apply. This will fix the legend scale for all animation frames
• Ensure that Contour is selected from the Plot Option menu and click Replot
13-22 Version 4.06

Pressure Trace
to display a contour plot of turbulence kinetic energy at time = 0.015 seconds
A command sequence is now used to set up, write and play back the animation
sequence. Enter the following commands in the I/O window for the animation:
nfil,aac_tr.plot
term,,file,rast
REPL
*set cnt1 1 1
*defi
store next
getv te
REPL
*end
*loop 1 98
term,,x
play,aac_tr.plot,1,100,1,1
You should notice that the vortex shedding in the wake of the cylinder is quite
irregular. This is due to the random fluctuations introduced by the DES turbulence
model.
Pressure The vortex shedding irregularity can also be seen in a plot of pressure at the
Trace monitoring point:
• Increase the maximum number of available graph register locations by typing
MEMORY MXSTOR 1000000
at the command line

• Select the Post-Processing folder in the pro-STAR Model Guide
• Select the Graphs folder followed by the Extract Data folder
• Open the Engineering Data panel
• Change the File Type option to Cell
• Click Open File to display the contents of the .ecd file
• Select Set # 1 PMON from the set list
• Select PMAX in the Data to graph section. As there is only one cell in the
set, PMAX = PMIN = PVAV = PMAV
• Click Add to List
• Click Yes when asked if you wish to continue
• Select Draw Current Frame
The default graph setting does not show the profile clearly enough. To obtain a
better view of this profile, resize the graph and adjust the axes:
• Open the Customize Graphs panel in the Graphs folder
• Under the Axis tab, check Xmin is 0, change Xmax to 1.5, Xmajor to 0.15 and
Number of Ticks to 2
• Check that the Numbers option is Real
• Change the Title to Time (s)
• Click Apply
• Select Y-Axis for the Parameters option
Version 4.06 13-23
Pressure Trace
• Change Ymin to -80 and Ymax to 20

• Change the Title to Pressure - Pa
• Click Apply
Figure T13.2-2 Pressure profile at the monitoring point
Figure T13.2-2 shows that the frequency of pressure fluctuations due to vortex
shedding is regular even though the amplitude is not. By measuring the time
between pressure peaks on the graph, the frequency of these oscillations is found to
be around 6.2 Hz. This is fairly close to the value predicted in the introduction to
this tutorial. It is also possible to calculate the sound pressure level (volume) of
these fluctuations using the following equation:
∆p 2
SPL = 10 log ⎛ ---------⎞
⎝ p ref ⎠
Using ∆p = 45Pa (the approximate average amplitude of the pressure

–5
oscillations) and P ref = 2 × 10 Pa (the lower limit of human perception), this
gives a sound pressure level of 127 dB.
The tutorial is now complete. Further analysis of the results may be performed
using a specialised acoustics package. For example, es-acoustics may be used to
perform a Fourier Transform on the pressure profile to derive a frequency profile
for the aeroacoustic noise.
To exit from pro-STAR:
13-24 Version 4.06

Tutorial 14 LIQUID FILM SIMULATION
up liquid film simulations. The three cases presented are:
1. Evolution of a rectangular, two-dimensional, and initially stationary liquid
blob flowing under gravity down a vertical wall, and comparison with the
analytical solution
2. 3D film formation and transport due to spray impingement
3. Film stripping and re-entrainment at a sharp edge
Version 4.06 14-1

Tutorial 14.1 2D FILM FLOW DOWN A VERTICAL WALL Physical Problem Description
Tutorial 14.1 2D FILM FLOW DOWN A VERTICAL WALL

In this tutorial, we consider the evolution of a rectangular, two-dimensional and
initially stationary blob of liquid flowing down a vertical wall under the action of
gravity and forming a liquid film in the process, as shown in Figure T14.1-1. The
calculation is compared with an analytical solution for film thickness δ as a function
of position x and time t given in [1]:
1⁄2
µ 1⁄2 x
δ = ⎛ --------- ⎞ ---------
-
⎝ gρf ⎠ 1⁄2
t
where µ is the film viscosity, ρ f the film density and g the value of gravity. The
solution is independent of initial values, i.e., it is valid regardless of initial film
profile, film thickness and wall area covered at the start of the calculation.
Initial blob
x
Air
2m Wall
Gravity
Film
Figure T14.1-1 Schematic of vertical film flow and CFD mesh
In the problem we assume that the initial 2D blob has a film thickness of 1 mm and
covers a wall length of 250 mm. The case is run for a simulated time of 10 seconds,
which is long enough for the similarity condition given by the above equation to be
satisfied. Heat and mass transfer simulations are deactivated. The solution domain
is 2 m long in the vertical direction and 50 cm wide in the wall-normal direction. A
uniform mesh is used, as shown in Figure T14.1-1.
[1] D.A. Acheson, “Elementary Fluid Dynamics”. Oxford University Press, 1992
14-2 Version 4.06

Tutorial 14.1 2D FILM FLOW DOWN A VERTICAL WALL Pre-Processing
Preliminaries
Pre-Processing
Preliminaries Create a sub-directory for this tutorial called tut14-1 and copy file
liquid_film.ccmg supplied with the STAR-CD installation into it. In this
directory:
• Enter the case name, blob, in the Case Name text box
• Click Continue
Make sure that the pro-STAR Model Guide is displayed on your screen, next to the
main pro-STAR window:
• Select Transient from the Time Domain menu
• Select On from the Liquid Films menu
• Click Apply
TRANSIENT 2D FLOW DOWN A VERTICAL WALL

Mesh Import The mesh used in this case is two-dimensional, extending 2 m in the x-direction of
& Checking the global Cartesian coordinate system and 50 cm in the y-direction and has 120 and
20 cells in each direction, respectively. The thickness of the mesh is set to 5 cm but
will have no effect on the result, given the two-dimensional nature of the simulation.
To import and display the mesh:
• Select the CCM option from the Format list.
• Enter liquid_film.ccmg as the Geometry File name
• Click Apply
selected
• Click Cplot
• Click View > Isometric and select 1, 1, 1 to display the grid shown in Figure
T14.1-2
Version 4.06 14-3

Boundary Locations
Figure T14.1-2 2D hexahedral mesh
Boundary In addition to mesh data, file liquid_film.ccmg also contains information on

Locations boundary region locations. The latter can be displayed on the grid plot as follows:
• Select each entry in the boundary Regions scroll list in turn (except no. 0) and
click Plot Region to display its location
Note that the wall boundary is split into two regions, of which no. 1 is that part of
the wall where film is initially present, and no. 2 the part where film appears at a
later time once the analysis begins. This subdivision is necessary purely for the
purposes of specifying film initial conditions (see “Initial and Boundary
Conditions”)
Display the location of all the key boundaries in the problem:
• In the main window, select B > New > Wall and B > Add > Pressure and
click Replot to display the boundaries shown in Figure T14.1-3
14-4 Version 4.06

Material Properties and Physical Models
Figure T14.1-3 Wall and pressure boundaries
Material The following properties are used for the two phases:
Properties
1. The gas phase is ambient air with a density of 1.205 kg/m3 and viscosity of
and Physical
1.81 × 10-5 Pas
Models
2. The liquid phase is pure water with a density of 1000 kg/m3 and viscosity of
0.00089 Pas
Define the direction of gravity and assign physical properties to the two phases:
• Change the Acceleration due to gravity to 9.81 m/s2
• Change the Direction of Gravity Force to (1, 0, 0) in coordinate system 1
• Click Apply
• Open the Molecular Properties (Fluids) panel. The displayed default
properties of air are acceptable so no input is needed for this panel
• Open the Fluid Initialization panel. Again, the displayed defaults are
appropriate for this case so no input is needed
• Enter 501 in the Monitoring Cell Number box
• Enter 501 in the Pressure Cell Number box
• Click Apply
Version 4.06 14-5
Initial and Boundary Conditions
Define liquid film physical properties and model controls:

• Select the Liquid Films folder and then open the Film Controls panel
• Select On for the Gravity Force option
• Click Apply
• Ensure that both wall regions (nos. 1 and 2) are set up for liquid film support
by scrolling the Region # slider at the bottom of the panel
• Open the Film Physical Models and Properties panel
• On the Film Models tab, select On for the Liquid Film Activation option and
then click Database to select
• In the droplet properties database list, select H2O_l [WATER (L)] and click
Select
• WATER(L) is now displayed in the First Component Name box and thus
defines the film material to be used in this problem
• Check that Off is selected for the Evaporation and Condensation option and
then click Apply
• On the Film Properties tab enter 1000 for Density and 0.00089 for Viscosity.
The rest of the property values displayed are not used in this case
• Click Apply
Initial and Define the film’s initial conditions:
Boundary
• Open the Film Initialization panel
Conditions
• Ensure that the Region # slider is set to 1 (the region initially occupied by the
film) and enable the Initialize check box
• Enter 0.001 in the Thickness box (leaving all other initial conditions at their
defaults) and click Apply
• Set the Region # slider to 2 (the rest of the wall region) and enable the
Initialize check box
• Enter 0 in the Thickness box (leaving all other initial conditions at their
defaults) and click Apply. This signifies that initially there is no film on this
part of the wall
Define film boundary conditions for all wall regions. Before doing this, you may
want to review all boundaries again, as done in section “Boundary Locations”, to
remind yourself of the relevant region numbers and locations:
• Open the Film Boundaries panel and check that the Condition # slider at the
bottom of the panel is set to 1
• Enter 2 (the wall region where a film will form at a later stage) in the Film
Region # box and 6 (the pressure region next to it) in the Adjacent Region #
box and check that Region Type Outlet is selected for the film boundary
condition
• Click Apply
Analysis Specify various solver parameters and output controls required for this case:
Controls
• Select folder Analysis Controls and open the Primary Variables panel
• On the Equation Status tab, deselect option W-Momentum since we are
solving a 2D flow in the x-y plane only
• Click Apply
14-6 Version 4.06

Tutorial 14.1 2D FILM FLOW DOWN A VERTICAL WALL CFD Analysis
Run Time Controls

• Under the Post tab, check that option Write Solution File is selected with an
Output Frequency of 100 time steps
• Click Apply
• Select the Transient tab. Check that 0 is entered in the Starting at time box
and enter 0.1 in the Output interval box. In view of the time step size chosen
below, this will result in transient post data being saved every 10 time steps
• Enable the Wall option in the Data to Write section
• Locate Film Thickness in the variable scroll list and check that the Post option
is enabled for this item
• Repeat this process for Film Velocity
• Click Apply
Run Time Run the analysis for a total of 10 seconds using two time periods. The first period
Controls covers 1 s and uses a time step of 0.001 s in order to ensure computational stability.
The second period covers the remaining 9 s and uses a time step of 0.01 s.
• Check that Run for is selected for the Run time control option, enter 10 in the
Time box and click Apply
• In the Time Step Option section, check that 0 is entered for the Period start
time and 0.001 for the Time step for period entry
• Click Set
• Now enter 1 for the Period start time and 0.01 for the Time step for period
entry and click Set again
These settings will be listed in the scroll list.

Final You can run this simulation from the pro-STAR Model Guide. However, it is more
Operations common to run (lengthy) transient cases from the command line. Write the
geometry and problem files and save the model file:
• In the Save Geometry File dialog, check that 1 is entered as the Geometry
Scale Factor
CFD Analysis
Check that you are in the current working sub-directory (tut14-1) and run the
CFD analysis in double precision by typing
star -dp
at the command line.
Version 4.06 14-7

Tutorial 14.1 2D FILM FLOW DOWN A VERTICAL WALL Post-Processing
Preliminaries
Post-Processing
Preliminaries When the simulation is complete and whilst in the tut14-1 sub-directory:
• Check that the case name, blob, appears in the Case Name text box
• Select the Append to Previous .echo File? option
• Click Continue
Open the file containing the transient post data (blob.ccmt):

• Click Add File
• Select file blob.ccmt from the Transient list and then click
Open Transient file. All the stored transient time step data will now be
displayed in the Time Step window
Basic Plots Read in the last set of results and make a contour plot of film thickness:
• In the Time Step list, scroll to the end of the list, select step number 1900 and
click Store Time
• Go to the Data tab and select Wall for the Data Type
• In the Scalar Data list, select item Film Thickness
• Click Get Data
• Click Plot > Wplot
• Ensure the Display Boundaries option is off
• Turn mesh plotting Off by clicking the Display Mesh Lines button,
• Rotate the plot using the mouse controls so that it is displayed approximately
as shown in Figure T14.1-4 (View 0, -1, 0.5, Angle -90)
14-8 Version 4.06

Animations
Figure T14.1-4 Film thickness contour at t=10 seconds
Animations pro-STAR loops can be used to produce on-screen animations, as described in

Tutorial 8.2 and Tutorial 12.3. However, in this tutorial we will use pro-STAR’s
macro facility (see Chapter 17, “Macros” in the CCM User Guide) to produce an
animation of the film thickness development. Before proceeding further, ensure that
film thickness contours are displayed as shown above.
• Select Panels > Define Macro... from the menu bar on the main pro-STAR
window
• In the Define Macro panel, enter anim as the macro Name
• Type the following commands in the Command window:
store first
*define noex
store next
getw lfthk
bset news regi 1
bset add regi 2
vset news bset
cset news name wall
cset subs vset any
wplot
*end
*loop 1 99
Version 4.06 14-9

Graphs
• Click Save. The file anim.MAC will be saved to your local directory
• Select .anim in the Macro List and click Execute on the Define Macro panel
The resulting animation shows the movement of the film from rest over a 10 second
period.
Graphs The spatial distribution of film thickness at a particular time (e.g. at 10 seconds) can
be plotted using pro-STAR’s graph facilities. Again, it is more convenient to save
the relevant commands in a pro-STAR macro file:
• Select Panels > Define Macro...
• Enter graph as the macro Name
! *** select the wall film cells

bset news region 1
bset add region 2
vset news bset
cset news name wall
cset subs vset all
! *** reset the graph properties
greset
y
! *** load x value
gload,1,wall,cset,0,0,1
gvalue,2,1,wall,x,2
! *** load film thickness
gvalue,4,1,wall,pst4,0
! *** draw the graph
frame,1,locate,1.70,2.10,9.65,9.45
frame,1,legend,none
frame,1,xrange,0,2
frame,1,xtick,0,0,real,noindent,bottom
frame,1,xtitle,5.25,1.3
Distance (m)
frame,1,yrange,0,0
frame,1,ytick,2.5e-05,0,real,left
frame,1,ytitle,0.28,7.58
Film thickness (m)
frame,1,legend,none
frame,1,xreg,init, 2,
frame,1,yreg,init, 4,
gdraw,1
! *** save the data in a ASCII file named fthick.grf
sdata,fthick.grf,2,2,2,coded
close fthick.grf
• Click Save. The file graph.MAC will be saved to your local directory
• On the Define Macro panel select .graph in the Macro List and click Execute
to display the graph shown in Figure T14.1-5
14-10 Version 4.06

Tutorial 14.1 2D FILM FLOW DOWN A VERTICAL WALL Suggestions for Further Exercises
Graphs
Figure T14.1-5 Spatial distribution of film thickness
The data saved in file fthick.grf may then be used for comparison against
analytical solutions.

The agreement between model predictions and the analytical solution can be
improved further if a smaller time step is used. The user may also wish to test the
theory that the similarity solution for film thickness is independent of the initial film
profile by setting up a film covering the full length of the wall at the start of the
simulation.
Version 4.06 14-11

Tutorial 14.2 SPRAY IMPINGEMENT ON A WALL Problem Description
Preliminaries
Tutorial 14.2 SPRAY IMPINGEMENT ON A WALL
Problem Description
In this tutorial, a diesel fuel spray (n-Dodecane, C12H26) is injected into the closed
box shown in Figure T14.2-1 (dimensions 16 × 16 × 44 mm). The injection point is
a nozzle with its axis perpendicular to the bottom of the box and located 24 mm
above it. The nozzle diameter is 0.3 mm. The injection lasts for 0.8 ms, the total fuel
injected is approximately 5.6 mg and the fuel temperature is 293 K. The fluid in the
box is quiescent air at room temperature (293 K) and at an elevated pressure of 15
bar. The Huh atomisation and Reitz-Diwakar break-up models are used for the
spray simulation. Furthermore, inter-droplet collisions and spray-wall interactions
are taken into account. Liquid film is formed on the bottom wall due to spray
impingement.
The case will be set up as a transient liquid film simulation and run for 100 time
steps with a time step size of 2.0 × 10–5 s.
20 mm
24 mm
16 mm 16 mm
Figure T14.2-1 Problem geometry
Pre-Processing
Preliminaries Create a sub-directory for this tutorial, say tut14-2. The mesh data for the
problem, in the form of cell and vertex definitions, are supplied ready-to-use in files
impinge.cel and impinge.vrt. Therefore, before starting the tutorial, make
sure that the supplied files are copied into your current directory.
• Enter the case name, impinge, in the Case Name text box
Version 4.06 14-13

Tutorial 14.2 SPRAY IMPINGEMENT ON A WALL Pre-Processing
Mesh Creation
• Click Continue
• In the Title box type
SPRAY WALL IMPINGEMENT AND LIQUID FILM
• In the Subtitle Line 1 box type
Impingement distance: 24 mm
The pro-STAR Model Guide should be displayed on your screen, next to the main
pro-STAR window.
• Select On from the Liquid Films menu
• Click Apply
Mesh The computational mesh data are stored in files impinge.cel and
Creation impinge.vrt. These can be imported using pro-STAR’s GUI panels as follows:
• In the main window, select Tools > Cell... to open the Cell Tool
• Click Read Cells... to open the Cell Read panel
• Accept the default values and click Apply (pro-STAR will read in cell data
from file impinge.cel)
• Close the Cell Read panel
• In the main window, select Tools > Vertex... to open the Vertex Tool
• Click on Read Vertices... to open the Read Vertices panel
• Accept the default values and click Apply (pro-STAR will read in vertex data
from file impinge.vrt)
• Close the Read Vertices panel
• Close the Vertex Tool
• In the main window, collect all cells into a set by selecting C > All
• Collect all vertices into a set by selecting V > All
Define the z-axis as the vertical axis and then display the imported mesh:
• In the main window, select Plot > Up Axis > Z
selected
• Click Cplot
• Select View > Isometric > 1 1 1
Check the coordinate system used to create the mesh:

• In the main window, click the button to open the Coordinate Systems
dialog
• Select coordinate system no. 1 (Cartesian)
• Select Show Triad from the menu at the bottom of the dialog and click Apply
14-14 Version 4.06

Mesh Creation
• Change the plot type to Quick Hidden Line to display the mesh, as shown in
Figure T14.2-2
Figure T14.2-2 3D Cartesian mesh
It can be seen that the origin is already at the desired location (the injector nozzle
tip). What is now needed is to define a local cylindrical coordinate system with the
same origin and with its z-axis along the injection direction:
• In the Coordinate Systems dialog, ensure system no. 1 is selected, choose
Hide Triad from the menu and click Apply
• Select system no. 10
• Select Cylindrical from the drop-down menu on the bottom left and enter the
following values in the adjacent boxes:
xc = 0
yc = 0
zc = 0
Rxy = 0
Ryz = 0
Rzx = –180
• Select New (Local) from the menu at the bottom of the dialog and click
Apply
• Ensure system no. 10 is selected then choose Show Triad from the menu and
click Apply
• In the main window, click Replot to display the location of this system,
Version 4.06 14-15

Boundary Specification
shown in Figure T14.2-3, and confirm that it has been defined correctly
• Ensure system no. 10 is selected, then choose Hide Triad from the menu and
click Apply
• Select system no. 1, then choose Set Active from the menu and click Apply
• Close the Coordinate Systems dialog
Figure T14.2-3 3D Cartesian mesh with the injector location at 0, 0, 0, in local

coordinate system number 10
Boundary We next define the bottom and side walls as distinct boundary regions. The bottom
Specification wall is the only region that can support a liquid film. The side walls are defined as
separate regions only in order to facilitate the film boundary specification.
• Select Wall for Type and enter Film_Wall-Z in the Name box
• Click Define
• In the main window, select View > Axis > -Z
• In the Create Boundaries panel ensure region 1 is selected, choose Create by
Picking Surface based on Edges from the Action List and click Apply
• Click on any bottom-wall vertex displayed in the main window

• Select Wall for Type, enter Side_Wall+X in the Name box
• Click Define
14-16 Version 4.06
Material Properties and Physical Models
• In the Create Boundaries panel, ensure region 2 and Create by Picking

Surface based on Edges are selected and click Apply
• Click on any side-wall vertex displayed in the main window

• Select Wall for Type, enter Side_Wall-X in the Name box
• Click Define
• In the main window, select View > Axis > -X

• Select Wall for Type, enter Side_Wall+Y in the Name box
• Click Define
• In the main window, select View > Axis > +Y

• Select Wall for Type, enter Side_Wall-Y in the Name box
• Click Define
• In the main window, select View > Axis > -Y
• Select View > Isometric > 1,1,1

• In the main window, select B > All
• Click to enable the Display Boundaries option and check the boundaries
that have just been defined
• Click the Display Boundaries button again to turn off boundary plotting
The mesh set-up is now complete.

Material Although the problem in this case is essentially isothermal, the model set-up
Properties described below is for a non-isothermal case. This is done purely in order to prepare
and Physical the model in advance for a more general simulation in which heat and mass transfer
Models occur between the spray droplets, the liquid film, and their surrounding gas.
Assign physical properties to the two gaseous components (air and fuel vapour)
in the solution domain:
• Check that the Direction of Gravity Force is set to (0, 0, -1) in coordinate
system number 1 and then click Apply
• Open the Molecular Properties (Fluids) panel and check that the Material #
selected at the top of the panel is set to 1
• Select Ideal-f(T,P) as the Density option and then click Apply
Version 4.06 14-17

Droplet Properties
• Activate the turbulence calculations by opening the Turbulence Models panel

and selecting On for the Turbulence option
• Choose k-Epsilon/High Reynolds Number from the Model menu in the
Turbulence tab and then click Apply
• Open the Thermal Models panel and select On for the Temperature
Calculation option
• Check that option Thermal is selected in the Enthalpy menu
• Click Apply
• Open the Fluid Initialization panel and check the values in the Flow
Conditions tab. All defaults are acceptable
• Enter 1.5e+06 in the Pressure box and then click Apply
Define scalar no. 1 to be the product of droplet evaporation and import its physical
properties from pro-STAR’s built-in database:
• In the Thermophysical Models and Properties folder, select the Additional
Scalars sub-folder
• Open the Molecular Properties (Scalars) panel and check that the Scalar #
option at the top of the panel is set to 1
• Choose option Select scalar from database from the menu at the top of the
panel
• Select C12H26 DODECANE (V) from the scalar database scroll list and
then select option Define user scalar from the menu at the top of the panel
• The physical properties of dodecane vapour are read in from pro-STAR’s
property database to the appropriate panel boxes. Check that the displayed
values are reasonable and then click Apply
Droplet The maximum number of droplet parcels required for this case (10,000) is above the
Properties default maximum allowed by the code, so it is necessary at this point to resize
pro-STAR by issuing the following commands from the I/O window:
MEMORY MAXDRP 10000

MEMORY WRITE
Check the basic control settings for droplets:

• Select folder Lagrangian Multi-Phase and open the Droplet Controls panel
• Check that option Coupled is selected in the Two-Phase Lagrangian
Calculations menu and keep the default Courant number 0.35
• Check that option Use Gradient is selected in the Interpolation Method menu
• Accept the default value of 0.35 for the Under-Relaxation of Lagrangian
Sources term
• Type 10000 in the Maximum Number of Parcels box
• Check that Spray injection with atomization is selected for the
Droplet Mode option
• Click Apply
Activate the turbulent dispersion model and define transport mechanisms and
physical properties for the droplets:
14-18 Version 4.06

Boundary Conditions
• In the Global Physical Models tab, activate the Turbulent Dispersion and
Gravity Effects options
• Select option Standard for the Collision Model
• Click Apply
• Select the Droplet Physical Models tab
• In the Momentum Transfer section, select Standard for the Correlation
option and accept the default Mass Coefficient and Slip Factor values
• Select option Standard for the Mass Transfer Calculation
• Select option Standard for the Heat Transfer Calculation
• In the Droplet Break-Up section, select option Reitz for the Break-Up Model
and accept the default values of the model constants
• In the Droplet-Wall Interaction section, select option Bai for the
Droplet Behavior and accept the default values of the model constants
• Click Apply
Specify droplet physical properties for n-Dodecane, which in this case are to be
calculated by STAR using its internal fuel property functions:
• Choose option Select material from database from the menu at the top of
the panel to open the droplet properties database
• Select item # DODECANE(L) and check the Use Internal Property
Calculation box
• Click the Select button
• Define scalar no. 1 (i.e., the dodecane vapour) as representing the product of
evaporation by selecting 1 C12H26 for the Evaporates to Scalar option
• In the Droplet Properties panel, click Apply
The injector location was specified earlier using local coordinate system 10. Its
geometric and physical properties can now be specified:
• Check 3 Dimensional is selected for the Domain and select Huh for the
Atomization Model
• Accept the rest of the default settings in the Spray Options section and click
Apply Spray Options
• In the Define Injectors section, enter the following parameters:
Injection Temperature — 293
Hole Diameter — 0.0003
Coordinate System — 10
• Ensure that option Fixed is selected for the fuel Mass Flow Rate, and then
enter a value of 0.007 (kg/s) in the Flow Rate box
• Check that 0 is entered in the Start of Injection box
• Enter 0.0008 in the End of Injection box
• Enter 1e+06 in the Number of Parcels/Injector box
• Check that the value in the Droplet Type # box is 1 and the name
DODECANE(L) appears next to it
Boundary Specify thermal boundary conditions for the spray impingement plane at the bottom
Conditions of the box:
Version 4.06 14-19
Film Model Controls
Regions panel
• Select region 1 (named Film_Wall-Z) in the scroll list
• In the Wall Parameters section, select option Fixed from the Wall Heat menu
and enter 293 for the boundary Temperature and 0 for its thermal Resistance
• Click Apply
Film Model Now define the liquid film model controls.
Controls
• Select the Liquid Films folder followed by the Film Controls panel
• Select On for the Gravity Force option
• Click Apply
The liquid film now needs to be activated. Note that since the film is formed entirely
from wall-impinging droplets, its physical properties will be inherited from those
droplets and therefore do not need to be specified explicitly.
• Select the Film Physical Models and Properties panel
• Under the Film Models tab, select On from the Liquid Film Activation menu
• Click Apply
Define the film’s initial conditions:

• Check that the Region # slider is set to 1 and enable the Initialize check box
• Enter 0 in the Thickness box (leaving all other initial conditions at their
defaults) and click Apply. This signifies that initially there is no film on this
wall
Define film boundary conditions for all wall regions. Before doing this, you may
want to review all boundaries again, as done in the “Boundary Specification”
section, to remind yourself of the relevant region numbers and locations:
• Open the Film Boundaries panel and check that the Condition # slider at the
bottom of the panel is set to 1
• Enter 1 (the wall region where a film will form at a later stage) in the Film
Region # box and 2 (Side_Wall+X) in the Adjacent Region # box and select
Region Type Outlet for the boundary condition to be applied to the film
• Click Apply
• Set the Condition # slider to 2
• Enter 1 in the Film Region # box and 3 (Side_Wall-X) in the Adjacent Region
# box and select Region Type Outlet for the film boundary condition
• Click Apply
Repeat the above process for the adjacent regions 1 and 4 (Side_Wall+Y) for
Condition # 3, and 1 and 5 (Side_Wall-Y) for Condition # 4 to complete the liquid
film boundary condition set-up.
Analysis Specify various solver parameters and output controls required for this case:
Controls
• Select folder Analysis Controls and open the Solution Method panel
• Change the Under-Relaxation for Pressure Correction value to 0.5
• Click Apply
14-20 Version 4.06

Tutorial 14.2 SPRAY IMPINGEMENT ON A WALL CFD Analysis
Run Time Controls

• Go to the Differencing Schemes tab and select MARS for all Flow Variables,
accepting the default value of the compression level for all equations
• Click Apply
• Open the Additional Scalars (Controls) panel and ensure that C12H26 is
selected in the Scalar list.
• Change the Residual Tolerance to 0.01 and set the Differencing Scheme to
MARS, accepting the default value of the compression level
• Click Apply

• Select the Transient tab. Check that 0 is entered in the Starting at time box
and enter 4e-5 in the Output interval box. These settings will ensure that post
data will be saved every 2 time steps
• Select item C12H26 in the data scroll list and enable the Post option
• In the Data to Write section, deselect the Cell data option and then select Wall
data
• Select items Film Thickness and Film Velocity in the data scroll list and
check that the Post option is enabled for both
• Select items Film Temperature and Film Mass Fractions and enable the
Post options for both
• Click Apply
Run Time Set the run time control parameters:
Controls
• Check that Run for is selected for the Run time control option and then enter
0.002 in the Time box
• Click Apply
• In the Time Step Option section, check that 0 is entered in the Period start
time box and enter 2e-5 in the Time step for period box
• Click Set
• Check that 1 is entered in the Geometry Scale Factor box
• Click Save
CFD Analysis
For flows involving sprays, it is recommended that STAR is run in double precision
mode, by typing
star -dp
Version 4.06 14-21
Tutorial 14.2 SPRAY IMPINGEMENT ON A WALL Post-Processing
Final Operations
in your session window. The analysis will then start automatically. The simulation
should run for 100 time steps and save flow field data to file tut.ccmt every 2
time steps.
Post-Processing
Open the file containing the transient post data (impinge.ccmt):
• Click Add File
• Select file impinge.ccmt from the Transient list and click Open Transient
file. All stored transient time step data will now be displayed in the Time Step
window
Plot the film thickness formed at the 20th time step:

• In the Time Step list, select the 10th entry and click the Store Time button
• Go to the Data tab. Select Wall for the Data Type and On for the Smooth
option
• Click Get Data
• In the main window, select plot option Contour and plot type Hidden
Surface
• Select View > Isometric > 1,1,-1
• Deselect mesh plotting by clicking off the Display Mesh Lines button
• Select edge plotting by clicking on the Display Edges button
Add droplets to this plot:

• In the main window, select the droplet display option by choosing Plot > Cell
Display > Droplets
• Ensure that Current Post Data File is selected for the Load From option
• Click Load Data
• In the Droplet Plot Options section, select Off for the Edge Plot Options
• Select Diameter for the Droplet Size option and enter 0.5 and 0.001 in the
Maximum Droplet Diameter and Droplet Reference Value boxes, respectively
• Select None for the Vectors option
• Click Apply
• In the main window, select D > All to collect all droplets in the domain into a
set
• Click Plot > Wplot
14-22 Version 4.06

Tutorial 14.2 SPRAY IMPINGEMENT ON A WALL Post-Processing
Animations
Figure T14.2-4 Droplet and liquid film thickness contour plot
The above steps may be repeated for other times and variables of interest.
Animations As pointed out in Tutorial 14.1, transient results for spray and liquid film problems
are best viewed by means of an on-screen animation. Again, use pro-STAR’s macro
facility (see Chapter 17, “Macros” in the CCM User Guide) to produce an animation
of the film and droplet development.
• Select Panels > Define Macro... from the menu bar on the main window
store first
*define noex
store next
getd post
dset all
getw lfthk
cave all
bset news regi 1
vset news bset
cset news name wall
cset subs vset all
wplot
*end
*loop 1 49
Version 4.06 14-23

• Ensure .anim is selected in the Macro List and click Execute on the Define
Macro panel
• Click Close on the Define Macro panel
The above executes all commands within the loop 50 times to produce successive
snapshots of the spray and liquid film state at every saved time step.
Final • Click Close on the Define Macro panel
Operations • Select File > Quit > Quit,Nosave
Tutorial 14.3 LIQUID FILM STRIPPING AND RE-ENTRAINMENT Introduction
Tutorial 14.3 LIQUID FILM STRIPPING AND RE-ENTRAINMENT
Introduction
This tutorial demonstrates the following liquid film modelling features:
• Liquid film stripping and re-entrainment at a sharp edge
• ‘Freezing’ the gas flow field (velocity and pressure) obtained from a
steady-state analysis and using it to drive the droplet and film motion in a
transient calculation where only the droplet and film transport equations are
solved. This technique has the significant advantage of speeding up the
transient run but is valid only for cases where the film and droplet behaviour
does not significantly influence the gas flow.

The tutorial simulates liquid film flow in a channel together with stripping and
droplet re-entrainment at the edge of a slope. As shown in Figure T14.3-1, the
solution domain comprises three sections: a straight inlet section, a sloping section
and a straight outlet section. The gas flow field, which separates at the beginning of
the slope, is obtained from a steady-state analysis using the k-ε turbulence model.
This steady-state field is the agent that drives the liquid film and droplet motion in
a transient simulation where only the droplet and film transport equations are
solved.
At the start of the transient calculation, a liquid film of uniform thickness is
placed on the lower wall of the inlet section. As the film is transported downstream
due to the gas shear forces, it accumulates at the top end of the slope. Once the film
thickness reaches a critical value, stripping takes place and re-entrained droplets are
formed and transported out of the solution domain through the pressure boundary.
The edge stripping model is used to calculate the film stripping effect from the sharp
edge at the beginning of the sloping section and the characteristics of the droplets
formed subsequently.
The relevant boundary conditions for this case are as follows:
Inlet velocity: 30 m/s

Pressure at the pressure boundary: 1 bar
Initial film thickness: 0.5 mm
Initial film velocity: 0.5 m/s
Inlet
(#3) Wall (#6)
Pressure
Wall (#5) (#2)
Initial film wall
(#1)
Wall (#5)
Figure T14.3-1 Schematic of the problem geometry
Version 4.06 14-25

Tutorial 14.3 LIQUID FILM STRIPPING AND RE-ENTRAINMENT Pre-Processing
Preliminaries
Pre-Processing
Preliminaries Create a sub-directory for this tutorial called tut14-3. As the tutorial starts from
a pre-existing steady-state solution, copy the relevant files into your current
directory. These files are a pro-STAR model file (strip_ss.mdl) that defines
the model and a solution file (strip_ss.ccmp) containing the analysis results.
Also copy the macro file (combi.MAC) supplied with the STAR-CD installation.
With these files in place, you are then ready to set up a transient liquid film
simulation:
• Type strip_tr in the Case Name box
• Deselect the Resume From Existing .mdl File? option
• Click Continue
• In the Resume Model From dialog, select File name strip_ss.mdl and
click OK
• Select File > Model Title... and in the Subtitle 1 box, type
Transient
• Click Apply and Close to close the Model Title dialog
Analysis The transient film calculation option is selected in the Analysis Features folder of
Features the pro-STAR Model Guide. For film stripping and droplet re-entrainment, the
Lagrangian multi-phase calculation must also be activated:
• Select option On from the Liquid Films menu
• Click Apply
Droplet Although no droplets are present at the start of the calculation, suitable settings must
Properties be made to allow for their formation later on in the simulation due to film stripping.
Physical properties must also be set for the re-entrained droplets:
• At the pro-STAR command line, type
MEMORY MAXDRP 10000

MEMORY WRITE
• Select the Lagrangian Multi-Phase folder

• Open the Droplet Controls panel
• Select Uncoupled for the Two-Phase Lagrangian Calculations
• Type 10000 in the Maximum Number of Parcels box
• Choose User Subroutine from the Droplet Mode menu, so that neither Spray
injection with atomization nor Explicitly defined parcel injection will be
selected, even though the DROICO user subroutine will not be used
• Accept the defaults for all other parameters and click Apply
14-26 Version 4.06

Film Model Controls
• Open the Droplet Physical Models panel and select the Droplet Physical
Models tab
• For Momentum Transfer, select option Standard and accept the default Mass
Coefficient and Slip Factor values
• Select option Bai for the Droplet-Wall Interaction and accept the default
values of the model constants
• Click Apply
• Choose Select material from database from the pull-down menu at the top of
the panel
• Select H2O_l [WATER(L)] from the list and click Select
• Accept default values for the relevant properties and click Apply
Film Model Define the liquid film model controls and properties and activate the edge stripping
Controls model for film stripping from sharp edges:
• Select the Liquid Films folder
• Open the Film Controls panel
• Set the Stripping from Edge option to On
• Check that the default Droplet Type is 1 (water) and accept all other default
values
• Select region number 1 (Film_Wall-Y) using the Region # slider bar
• Click Apply
Activate the liquid film model for the specified film material (water):
• Select the Film Physical Models and Properties panel
• Under the Film Models tab, select On from the Liquid Film Activation menu
• Click Database to open the Droplet Properties Database and select H2O_l
[WATER(L)] from the list
• Click Select
• Click Apply on the Film Models tab
• Under the Film Properties tab, accept default values for the relevant
properties and click Apply
Specify liquid film initial conditions on the inlet section’s lower walls (boundary
regions 1 and 5):
• Check that the Region # slider is set to 1 and enable the Initialize check box
• Enter 0.0005 (i.e. a thickness of 0.5 mm) in the Thickness box and 0.5 m/s in
the U box. Leave all other initial conditions at their defaults and click Apply.
• Set the Region # slider to 5 and enable the Initialize check box
• Enter 0 in the Thickness box, leave all other initial conditions at their defaults
and click Apply. This signifies that initially there is no film on this wall.
As there are no walls adjacent to regions 1 (the initial film region) and 5 (the wall
region where a film may form at a later stage), no film boundaries need to be
defined.
Version 4.06 14-27

Analysis Controls
Analysis Deactivate the solution of all gas flow variables so as to freeze the gas flow field:
Controls
• Open the Analysis Controls folder
• Under the Equation Status tab, deselect all flow variables and properties (u, v,
w, p, k, ε and viscosity)
• Click Apply
• Select the Transient tab. Check that 0 seconds is shown in the Starting at time
box and enter 0.02 seconds in the Output interval box. The post data will be
saved every 4 time steps since we will set the time step size to be 0.005
seconds (see “Run Time Controls” below)
• Deselect option Cell and select option Wall in the Data to Write section
• In the variables scroll list, select items Film Thickness and Film Velocity and
check that the Post option is enabled for both
• Select Film Mass in the list and enable the Post option
• Click Apply
Run Time Here we set the time step size to 0.005 seconds and run for a total of 1 second. The
Controls steady state solution strip_ss.ccmp is used as an initial flow field for the restart
run:
• Select the Run for option from the Run time control menu and type 1 in the
Time box
• Click Apply
• Check that Constant is selected from the Time Step Method menu
• Check that 0 is shown in the Period start time box and enter 0.005 in the Time
step for period box
• Click Set
• Select Initial Field from the Restart File Option menu
• Click the browser icon to the right of the Restart File box, select
strip_ss.ccmp from the list and click Open
• Click Apply
Final Write all files needed to run the STAR solver and then quit pro-STAR:
Operations
• Select File > Save Geometry from the main pro-STAR menu bar
• In the Save Geometry File dialog, check that 1 is shown for the Geometry
Scale Factor
• Select File > Save Problem
14-28 Version 4.06

Tutorial 14.3 LIQUID FILM STRIPPING AND RE-ENTRAINMENT CFD Analysis
Load the Transient Data File
CFD Analysis
Run the case in double precision in your session window:
star -dp
The analysis will start automatically. The simulation runs for 200 time steps and
solution data will be saved in file strip_tr.ccmt every 4 time steps.
Post-Processing
Load the Open the file containing the transient post data (strip_tr.ccmt):
Transient
• Start pro-STAR and accept the default Case Name strip_tr
Data File
• In the pro-STAR Model Guide tree, select folder Post-Processing
• Under the File(s) tab, select the Transient Analysis option
• Click Add File
• Select file strip_tr.ccmt from the Transient list and then click
Open Transient file. All the saved transient time steps will now be displayed
in the Time Step window
Read in the last set of results and make a contour plot of film thickness:
• In the Time Step list, scroll to the end of the list, select time step number 200
and click Store Time
• Go to the Data tab and select Wall for the Data Type
• Click Get Data
• Click Wplot
• Turn mesh plotting Off by clicking the Display Mesh Lines button,
• Turn on the Display Edges option
• Go to the Options tab of the Create Plots panel and select User for the colour
scale Range
• Enter 1.4E-3 in the To box and then click Apply
• Select View > Isometric > -1, -1, 1 from the View/Zoom toolbar to display
Figure T14.3-2
Version 4.06 14-29

Tutorial 14.3 LIQUID FILM STRIPPING AND RE-ENTRAINMENT Post-Processing
Load the Transient Data File
Figure T14.3-2 Film thickness contour plot at t=1 second
Add the droplet display to this plot:

• In the main pro-STAR window menu bar, select the droplet display option by
choosing Plot > Cell Display > Droplets
• Check that Current Post Data File is selected for the Load From option
• Click Load Data
• In the Droplet Plot Options section, select Off for the Edge Plot Options
• Select Diameter for the Droplet Size option and enter 0.2 in the Maximum
Droplet Diameter box
• Select None for the Vectors option
• Click Apply
• In the main window, select D > All to collect all droplets in the domain into a
set
• Click Plot > Wplot to display Figure T14.3-3
14-30 Version 4.06

Animation
Figure T14.3-3 Droplet and liquid film thickness plot
Animation The above steps may be repeated for other times and variables of interest. As
pointed out in Tutorial 14.1, transient results for spray and liquid film problems are
best viewed by means of an on-screen animation. Again, use pro-STAR’s macro
facility (see Chapter 17, “Macros” in the CCM User Guide) to produce an animation
of the film and droplet development.
• Select Panels > Define Macro... from the menu bar on the main window
store,itst,4
*define noex
store next
getd post
dset all
getw lfthk
wplot
*end
*loop 2 50 1
• Select .anim in the Macro List and click Execute on the Define Macro panel
The above executes all commands within the loop 50 times to produce successive
Version 4.06 14-31

Advanced Post- Processing
snapshots of the droplets and liquid film state at every saved time step.
Advanced A pro-STAR macro (combi.MAC) is used to produce a plot that shows the gas flow
Post- field’s influence on the droplets formed due to film stripping at 200 time steps.
Processing Particle ribbons have been employed to illustrate the ‘frozen’ gas flow field driving
the film and re-entrained droplets.
Layers are used to show a geometry plot combined with several post data plots
(see Chapter 4, “Layering Images” in the Post-Processing User Guide). The
extended mode option for graphics plotting must be employed to work with layers:
• Click the Extended Mode On/Off button, , on the main window’s toolbar
• Select .combi from the Macro List on the Define Macro panel and click
Execute to produce Figure T14.3-4
Figure T14.3-4 Film distribution, droplets and gas flow field at 200 time steps
All the usual zoom, rotation and translation operations can be performed on the
layered plot.
It can be seen that some of the liquid film that has built up at the end of the
straight inlet section is stripped from the edge. The droplets that are formed are
carried along by the gas flow field without becoming trapped in the recirculation
region.
Final • Click Close on the Define Macro panel

Operations • Finally, exit from pro-STAR by selecting File > Quit > Quit, Nosave from
the main menu bar
14-32 Version 4.06

Final Operations
Post-processing Macro (combi.MAC)

resu,,
memo maxdrp 300
! *** general ***

clrm,reverse $repl
trload,strip_tr.ccmt,nomvgr,, , c
store,itst,200
load,,
term, , exte,rast
hrsd image
edge off
plme,off
view -0.690 0.350 0.633
center 0.762 0.176 0.257
angle 0
distance 1.5
repl
layer all dele
! *** ribbons ***

! we will create the ribbons and then export them as
shells and vertices
! which allows us to plot them as geometry elements,
which makes the use
! of the layer option easier.
! seed particles from the inlet
*set nofp 10
*get mxvl mxve
*set mxvl mxvl + 1
*set mxvh mxvl + nofp - 1
vpcreate,,coordinates,line,nofp,1,-1,0.0001,0.05,-1
,0.49,0.05
particle,group,1
particle,add,mxvl,mxvh,1,0,0,flow,1,0,0,0,2
! seed particles in the recirculation zone
*set nofr 4
*get mxvs mxve
*set mxvs mxvs + 1
*set mxvb mxvs + nofr - 1
vpcreate,,coordinates,line,nofr,1,0.45,-0.07129,0.0
5,0.54,-0.2167,0.05
particle,group,1
particle,add,mxvs,mxvb,1,0,0,flow,1,0,0,0,2
!create the particle tracks
ptrack,steady,strip_tr.trk,0.0,,,noadj,
getv all
!determines the min and max ctypes for the shells
Version 4.06 14-33

Final Operations
that will be reimported

*get mxcl mxct
*set mxcl mxcl + 1
*set mxch mxcl + nofp + nofr - 1
!plot the ribbons
ptoption,contour,no
ptplot,clear
ptplot,plot,,ribbons,0,1.0e30,,-1,,part,1,999999,0.
02,novr,1.0,1
!export the ribbons as shells and vertices
cset news type mxcl mxch
cwri,ribbons.cel,,cset
vset news cset
vwrit ribbons.vrt,,vset
clos ribbons.cel
clos ribbons.vrt
!clear the particle tracks and wall cells
ptplot clear
clrw
!read the ribbons shells back into the model
crea ribbons.cel
vread ribbons.vrt
cset news type mxcl mxch
popt geom
cplo
layer ribb store
layer ribb hide
! *** geometry ***

!get some wall data to create shells on the model
*get mxcl mxct
getw LFTHK
cset none
popt geom
cset, news, name, wall
cset add name symmetry
bset news symp
cdis,on,bregion $replot
view, -1, 0, 0 $replot
bset dele gran,,,,,-0.1,0.01
view -0.690 0.350 0.633
center 0.762 0.176 0.257
angle 0
distance 1.5
repl
bset add inlet
bset add pressure
bset add regi 1
vset, news, bset
14-34 Version 4.06
Final Operations
cset, dele, vset, face

cdis,off,bregion
cplo
clrt, gray
ctab,mxcl + 1,shell,34,0,1,0,0,0,0,off,0
ctab,mxcl + 2,shell,34,0,1,0,0,0,0,off,0
lswi smooth noedge
repl
layer geom store
layer geom hide
! *** droplet ***

cdis on droplet
dopt,edge,off
dopt,peri,1
dopt,radi,diameter,0.04 $dopt,radm,0
dopt,fill,color,0
dopt,vect,none,1
dopt,vecm,0
cset none
popt cont
csca auto
getd post
dset all
dplot
layer drop store
layer drop hide
! *** film ***

cset none
cscale 14 user 1.0e-4 4.5e-4
getw,LFTHK
popt cont
bset news region 1
vset news bset
cset news name wall
cset subs vset all
caver cset
wplo
layer film stor
layer film hide
clrt default
! *** figure 14.3-4 ***

layer geom show
layer ribb show
layer drop show
layer film show
repl
Version 4.06 14-35
Tutorial 15 COAL COMBUSTION

The following tutorials describe in detail how to set up, run and post-process a
simple CFD problem involving coal combustion.
The problem geometry represents a furnace with three concentric air inlets, a
primary (inner), a secondary (middle) and a tertiary (outer) one, located at one end.
The primary inlet also acts as a pulverised coal carrier. Air enters the solution
domain through the tertiary inlet and has a swirling velocity component. Flow exits
the domain through an outlet situated at the opposite end of the furnace.
A hexahedral mesh is used to model the problem, as shown in Figure T15.0-1.
The mesh was previously generated and stored as a .ccmp format file, and this is
provided with the STAR-CD installation.
Primary Inlet
Outlet
Furnace Wall
Secondary Inlet
Tertiary Inlet
Figure T15.0-1 Coal combustion furnace mesh geometry
Modelling Strategy
The following modelling strategy was adopted:
• Perform an initial run in non-reacting and isothermal mode (Tutorial 15.1)
• Run the model using the Constant Rate Devolatilisation and Eddy Break-Up
gaseous combustion models (Tutorial 15.2)
• Run the model using the Two-Competing-Steps Devolatilisation and Eddy
Break-Up gaseous combustion models (Tutorial 15.3)
Using this type of modelling strategy to achieve a solution in three stages is the
Version 4.06 15-1

Modelling Strategy
recommended method for all coal combustion cases. However, for some problems,
it may be possible to reach a good solution by missing out the first or second stages,
or even, for very simple problems, both.
15-2 Version 4.06

Tutorial 15.1 ISOTHERMAL, NON-REACTING FLOW Pre-Processing
Preliminaries
Tutorial 15.1 ISOTHERMAL, NON-REACTING FLOW

For most coal combustion simulations it is advisable to run the case initially as an
isothermal problem. This will allows a stable flow field to be obtained before the
coal combustion models are introduced. This tutorial gives a detailed account of
how to set up the isothermal, non-reacting coal case for the furnace shown in Figure
T15.0-1.
Pre-Processing
Preliminaries Create a working directory for the tutorial named tut15-1. For this problem, the
mesh geometry data are supplied in file furnace.ccmg. Therefore, before
starting the tutorial, make sure that this file is copied into your working directory.
Start up pro-STAR in this directory and begin the modelling task by specifying the
case name and problem title:
• Type coal_iso in the Case Name text box
• Click Continue
COAL COMBUSTION - ISOTHERMAL ANALYSIS
Importing the Go to the pro-STAR Model Guide displayed on your screen, next to the main
Mesh pro-STAR window.
• Select folder Grids and then open the Import Grids panel
• Select CCM as the file Format
• Change the Geometry File name to furnace.ccmg
• Click Apply
The following information should appear in the I/O window:
Verify that the mesh has been imported correctly by selecting all cells and
boundaries and plotting the mesh in ‘Hidden Surface’ mode:
• In the main window, select C > All to select all cells
• Select B > All to select all boundaries
• Click to enable the Display Boundaries option
• Click Cplot
Version 4.06 15-3

Model Specification
• Change the viewpoint to approximately (-1.0, 0.5, -1.0) using the orientation
cube’s slider controls
• Remove the wall boundaries from the display by selecting B > Unselect >
Wall and clicking Replot
• Zoom in on the red inlet boundaries to create a plot resembling Figure
T15.1-1
Note the positions of the three concentric inlet boundaries.
Figure T15.1-1 Furnace inlet boundaries
Model Set up the basic models used in the isothermal case:

Specification
• Under Time Domain, check that Steady State is selected. This is essential
because coal combustion simulations are not feasible in transient mode
• Click Apply
Material All fluid cells should already be assigned to material number 1 by default. Check
Assignment this via the Cell Editor:
and Thermal
• In the main pro-STAR window, click to display the Cell Editor
Options
• Select cell type no. 1 and verify that the Material # value is 1
• Click Close to exit the Cell Editor
• Go to the pro-STAR Model Guide and select the Thermophysical Models and
Properties folder followed by sub folder Liquids and Gases
15-4 Version 4.06

Boundary Conditions
• The default material is air, which is suitable for this case. The flow is
compressible and without pressure dependency so select Ideal-f(T) for the
Density option
• Select Polynomial for the Specific Heat option and click on Define
Polynomial
• In the Polynomial Function Definition dialog, select N2 from the CHEMKIN
Database scroll list
• Click Apply Database Substance
• Close the dialog and then click Apply at the bottom of the Molecular
Properties (Fluids) panel
• Open the Turbulence Models panel and select On for the Turbulence option
• Choose the k-Epsilon/High Reynolds Number Model
• Leave all settings as their default values and click Apply
• Open the Thermal Models panel and select On from the Temperature
Calculation menu
• Click Apply
• The default monitoring location (cell number 1) is suitable. Change the
reference Pressure Cell Number to 8279 and the Pressure to 101325 Pa
• Click Apply
Boundary The model consists of inlet, outlet and wall boundary regions. The velocity, thermal
Conditions and turbulence boundary conditions need to be specified for these:
• Select the Define Boundaries folder, then open the Define Boundary Regions
panel
• In this panel, select region 1 - Inlet. This is the primary air inlet
• Enter an axial velocity value of 10 m/s in the W box
• Select TI/Length for the Turbulence Switch option
• Enter a Turb. Intensity of 0.1 and a Length of 0.06 m
• Enter a value of 1 kg/m3 in the Density box
• Enter a value of 353 K in the Temperature box
• Click Apply
• Select region 2 - Inlet. This is the secondary air inlet

• Enter an axial velocity value of 10 m/s in the W box
• Enter a value of 1 kg/m3 in the Density box
• Click Apply
• Select region 3 - Inlet. This is the tertiary air inlet

• To specify a swirling flow at this inlet, the velocity components need to be
entered in the global cylindrical coordinate system. Enter 2 in the Coordinate
System box
• Enter an axial velocity component of 20 m/s in the W box and a tangential
velocity component of 10 m/s in the V box
Version 4.06 15-5

Analysis Controls

• Enter a value of 0.616 kg/m3 in the Density box
• Click Apply
• Select region 4 - Outlet and enter a value of 1 in the Flow Split box
• Click Apply
The default conditions for wall boundaries are adiabatic, no-slip and stationary,
which is suitable for this case so no changes are necessary for boundary regions 5
and 6.
Analysis The solution and output controls need to specified next:
Controls
• Open the Analysis Controls > Primary Variables panel
• In the Solver Parameters tab, check that the Relaxation Factor is 0.3 for
Pressure and 0.7 for Momentum and Turbulence
• Click Apply
• Open the Monitor Numeric Behavior panel
• Enable the Iteration Residuals and Conservation Check option in the Print
section
• Leave all other options at their default values and click Apply
Run Time The aim of this tutorial is to establish a stable, non-reacting flow field which will
Controls help to achieve a stable flame and flow field once coal combustion is turned on.
Therefore, the solver must perform a sufficiently large number of iterations to reach
a converged isothermal flow field. This can be achieved by setting the maximum
iteration number to 1000 and the residual error tolerance to 0.001:
• Type 1000 in the Maximum Number of Iterations box
• Check that the Maximum Residual Tolerance is 0.001
• Click Apply
• The setting of the Restart File Option menu should be None as this run starts
from the default initial conditions
• Click Apply
pro-STAR, as shown below. Alternatively, you may continue with the CFD analysis
using the pro-STAR Model Guide facilities for running STAR interactively.
15-6 Version 4.06

Tutorial 15.1 ISOTHERMAL, NON-REACTING FLOW CFD Analysis
Preliminaries
CFD Analysis
• In the Analysis Preparation folder open the Run Analysis Interactively panel
(option button Meters)
• Select Double Precision. Leave all other settings at their default values.
• Click Start
Post-Processing
Preliminaries Read in the results of the analysis from file coal_iso.ccmp:
Post- Begin by displaying a temperature contour plot to show the mixing of the two inlet
Processing streams:
• Go to the Data tab of the Load Data panel
• Check that Cell is selected from the Data Type menu
• Select On and All for the Smooth option
• Click Get Data
• In the main pro-STAR window, select plot option Contour
• Select View > Axis > -Z
• Click Sect. Slice and draw a horizontal cross-section trace through the centre
of the furnace
• Select plot type Section (Surface) to display Figure T15.1-2
Version 4.06 15-7

Tutorial 15.1 ISOTHERMAL, NON-REACTING FLOW Post-Processing
Post- Processing
Figure T15.1-2 Temperature contours through the centre of the furnace
Next, plot velocity vectors on the surface of the furnace to show the swirling nature
of the flow:
• Return to the Data tab of the Load Data panel and check that Cell is selected
from the Data Type menu
• Turn Off the Smooth option
• Select item Velocity Components UVW from the Vector Data list
• Click Get Data
• In the 3-D Surface tab select Option Vector
• Select Edge from the Edge/Mesh menu
• Type
VIEW -1.0 0.5 -1.0
at the pro-STAR command line in the I/O window

15-8 Version 4.06

Tutorial 15.1 ISOTHERMAL, NON-REACTING FLOW Post-Processing
Final Operations
Figure T15.1-3 Velocity vectors shown on the furnace surface
Final • Exit from pro-STAR by choosing File > Quit > Quit, Nosave from the main
Operations window menu.
Version 4.06 15-9

Tutorial 15.2 CONSTANT RATE DEVOLATILISATION Pre-Processing
Preliminaries
Tutorial 15.2 CONSTANT RATE DEVOLATILISATION

This tutorial gives a detailed account of how to set up and run a coal combustion
model. The problem geometry and flow conditions are as described at the beginning
of Tutorial 15 and the analysis is run from the non-reacting solution produced in
Tutorial 15.1.
When running a large-scale simulation, it is generally necessary to employ the
constant rate devolatilisation model to establish the combustion conditions and a
stable flame and flow field. Therefore, the strategy in this case is to use the
following sub-models:
• Constant rate devolatilisation
• First-order char oxidisation
• Eddy break-up two-step gas combustion
The model can then be changed to the Single-Step or 2-Competing-Steps

devolatilisation model (as described in Tutorial 15.3) and the analysis continued
from the Constant Rate solution.
Pre-Processing
Preliminaries Before running pro-STAR, create a directory for the tutorial named tut15-2 and
copy the model and solution files obtained in Tutorial 15.1 (coal_iso.mdl,
coal_iso.ccmp and coal_iso.ccmg) into it. Rename the model file
coal_const.mdl.
Start up pro-STAR and begin the modelling task by specifying the problem title:
• Check that coal_const is shown in the Case Name box
• Click Continue
COAL COMBUSTION WITH CONSTANT RATE DEVOLATILISATION
As part of setting up a coal combustion case, it is necessary to activate the

Lagrangian Two-Phase and Coal Combustion models. To do this:
• Select Lagrangian for the Multi-Phase Treatment option
• Select Coal Combustion for the Reacting Flow option
• Click Apply and then click Yes to proceed. The folders named Lagrangian
Multi-Phase and Thermophysical Models and Properties > Reacting Flow
will be activated in the pro-STAR Model Guide tree.
• Select C > All and then click Cplot
• Click the Zoom Off button to display the mesh,
Version 4.06 15-11

Thermal Options
Thermal An important element in an accurate coal combustion simulation is radiation

Options modelling. The radiation model in this tutorial includes the effects of the
intervening gas, using default gaseous radiation properties, of particle radiation, and
of surface-to-surface radiation. In STAR-CD, radiation beams are only tracked
through those cells that are explicitly defined as participating in radiative heat
transfer.
To specify that radiation should be tracked through all cells in the furnace
interior:
• Click in the main pro-STAR window to open the Cell Editor
• Select row 1 in the scroll list
• Click Apply
Turn radiation on, choosing the Discrete Transfer solution method in conjunction
with the internal view factor and participating media calculation options:
• Select the Thermophysical Models and Properties folder and open the
• In the Radiation section of the panel, select option Discrete Transfer -
Internal VF Calc
• Enable the Participating option to include gaseous radiation effects in the
calculation
• Change the Under-relaxation for wall temperature to 1
• Accept the remaining default settings and click Apply
Radiation To use the Discrete Transfer model, it is necessary to subdivide all boundary regions
Patches into radiation patches. These are used both during view factor calculations and for
evaluating the radiative heat transfer.
Assign a unique patch to every boundary in every relevant region. This can be
done most conveniently by means of a pro-STAR command loop, shown below,
typed into pro-STAR’s I/O window:
BSET NONE
*SET NREG 1 1
*DEFINE
BPATCH NREG,,BYFA
BSET ADD REGI NREG
*END
*LOOP 1 5
The above loop will create 1,984 patches. Display the patches to confirm that the
operation has been carried out properly:
• In the main pro-STAR window, select Plot > Cell Display > Boundary
Patches. The radiation patches should appear as shown in Figure T15.2-1.
15-12 Version 4.06

Other Settings
Figure T15.2-1 Radiation patches on mesh surface
The entire surface of the mesh is coloured, indicating that radiation patches are
present everywhere. There is also one radiation patch on each boundary face.
• Select Plot > Cell Display > Boundary Patches again to deselect the patch
cell plot display option
Other It is good practice to define one of the cells near the expected centre of the flame as
Settings the monitoring point. This eases the task of checking for the onset of combustion as
temperature and product concentrations build up rapidly at that point once
combustion begins. Start by inspecting the cell numbers in the region of interest:
• In the main window, select Plot > Number > Cell
• Zoom in on the mesh shown on-screen to have a closer look at the displayed
numbers. We will define cell number 5918 as the monitoring cell
• Open the Thermophysical Models and Properties > Liquids and Gases >
Monitoring and Reference Data (Fluids) panel
• Click Apply
• Select Plot > Number > Cell again to deselect the plot cell number option
Coal The next stage is to define the coal composition:

Combustion
• Open the Thermophysical Models and Properties > Reacting Flow > Coal
Model Set-up
Combustion > Coal Composition panel
Version 4.06 15-13
Coal Combustion Model Set-up
• Under the Proximate tab, enter data for the coal’s proximate analysis. Enter
34.5% Volatile Matter, 1.4% Moisture, 52.8% Fixed Carbon and 11.3% Ash
• Click Apply
• Select the Ultimate tab to enter data for the coal’s ultimate analysis
• Enter 84.6% C, 5.06% H, 7.6% O and 1.67% N
• Click Apply
• Select the Miscellaneous tab
• Check that a value of 1.5 is displayed in the Q-factor box (see equation (8-3)
in Chapter 8 of the CCM User Guide for the Q-factor definition)
• Enter a Net Calorific Value of 3.444 E+7 J/kg
• Check that the Fraction of Total N in Volatiles value is set to 1
• Click Apply
The combustion models are specified next:

• Open the Sub Models panel
• Check that the Constant Rate Scheme is selected under the Volatiles tab
• Enter a Devolatilisation Time of 0.01 seconds and a Devolatilisation
Temperature of 353 K. A low temperature is specified to ensure that
combustion is initiated successfully. For most cases, the temperature should
be increased to a more realistic value once a stable flow field is reached. This
is not done in this run but is done for the Two-Competing-Steps case
presented in Tutorial 15.3
• Click Apply
• Under the Char tab, check that the 1st Order Effect Scheme is selected
• Leave all options at their default settings and click Apply
• Under the Gas Combustion tab, select the Eddy Break-Up Scheme and the
2-step Combustion Mechanism
• Click Apply. A warning message will appear telling you that pro-STAR will
delete any existing scalars and reaction mechanisms and will create new ones.
Click Yes
The NOx and particle radiation model options and coal particle solution controls are
specified next:
• Open the NOx/Radiation panel
• Ensure that Off is selected for the NOx Model option. If required, the NOx
solver can be turned on once the analysis is near convergence and the analysis
restarted. This is not done in this run but is done for the
Two-Competing-Steps case presented in Tutorial 15.3
• Select On for the Particle Radiation option in the Radiation section and enter
a Particle Emissivity of 0.8
• Click Apply
• Open the Control/Printout panel
• Enter a value of 0.1 in the Under-Relaxation Factor for Particle box
• Enter a very large value, e.g. 10000, in the Iteration Number to Begin
Averaging box. This ensures that particle averaging does not occur in the
calculation. Particle averaging is no longer recommended for use with
Lagrangian multi-phase calculations in STAR-CD
• Click Apply
15-14 Version 4.06

Particle Properties and Injection Location
When a coal combustion model is selected, all scalars associated with that model
are automatically set up by pro-STAR, the number of scalars depending on the
reaction scheme chosen. For the Eddy Break-Up gas combustion scheme with the
2-Step combustion mechanism selected in this tutorial, 11 scalars are created.
• Open the Thermophysical Models and Properties > Additional Scalars >
Molecular Properties (Scalars) panel
• Use the Scalar # spin box to check that 11 scalars have been defined. There is
no need to change any of the molecular properties for these scalars
Specify that the initial flow field consists entirely of air:

• Open the Additional Scalars > Scalar Initialization panel
• Select scalar number 5 - O2 from the list and enter 0.233 in the Initial Mass
Fraction box
• Click Apply
• Select scalar number 8 - N2 from the list and enter 0.767 in the Initial Mass
Fraction box
• Click Apply
Particle The following steps define the particle properties and the injection rate and location:
Properties
• Select folder Lagrangian Multi-Phase
and Injection
• Open panel Droplet Controls
Location
• Check that Use Gradient is selected for the Interpolation Method and that
Explicitly defined parcel injection is selected for Droplet Mode at the
bottom of the panel
• To increase the maximum allowable number of droplets, type the following
commands in the I/O window:
MEMO,MAXDRP,2400
MEMO,WRITE
• Return to the Droplet Controls panel and enter a value of 2400 in the
Maximum Number of Parcels box
• Click Apply
• Turn On Turbulent Dispersion under the Global Physical Models tab
• Click Apply
The component properties shown in the Droplet Properties panel are set internally
in STAR and should not normally be altered. However, the Heat of Vaporization
(Hfg) for each of the seven components should be zero. If any of them do not have
this value:
• Go back to the Coal Combustion folder and select the NOx/Radiation panel
• Select On for the NOx Model option and click Apply
• Go back to the Lagrangian Multi-Phase > Droplet Properties panel
• In the Component Properties section, change the value for Hfg to 0 for all 7
components
• Change the Density to 1200 kg/m3 under the Bulk Properties section
Version 4.06 15-15

Particle Properties and Injection Location
• Click Apply
• Go back to the NOx/Radiation panel, select Off for the NOx Model option and
click Apply
Next, specify the coal particle injector locations and injection rate:
• Select the Injection Definition panel in the Lagrangian Multi-Phase folder
• Check that the Group Number option at the bottom of the panel is set to 1
• Enter a value of 1e-4 m in the Diameter box and a value of 10 m/s in the
Velocity Magnitude box
• Check that the Mass Flowrate applies to the Injection Group
• Enter a value of 0.1 kg/s in the Rate box
• Enter a value of 300 in the Number of Parcels/Injection Point box
• Click Apply
• Open the Injection Points panel

• Select Set Type Circle
• Select Specify for the Circle option
• Check that the Cylindrical Coordinate System value is 2 and the Injection
Direction Coordinate System is 1
• Define a circle of Radius 0.02 at Z = -0.19
• For the number of points, type 1 for R (number of rows) and 8 for Theta. This
will produce a circle of 8 injection points with a radius of 0.02 near to the
primary inlet
• Check that Constant is selected for the Entrance Direction Vector and type 1
in the DZ box (DX=0, DY=0, DZ=1)
• Check that Add New Set is selected from the Action menu at the top of the
panel and click Apply
To display the particle injection locations:

• Select the Post-Processing > Particle Tracks > Plot Droplets panel
• Select Droplet Initial Conditions for the Load From option
• Click Load Data
• Change the Maximum Droplet Diameter to 0.1 in the Droplet Plot Options
section
• Click Apply
• In the main window, choose D > All on the Display Sets toolbar
• In the Plot Droplets panel, click Droplet Plot
• Zoom in on the injection points to display Figure T15.2-2
15-16 Version 4.06

Boundary Conditions
Figure T15.2-2 Particle injection positions
Boundary Many of the boundary conditions for inlet, outlet and wall boundaries have already
Conditions been set in Tutorial 15.1. However, thermal and radiation boundary conditions still
need to be specified:
• In the pro-STAR Model Guide, select folder Define Boundaries and open the
Define Boundary Regions panel
• Select region 1 - Inlet from the list
• Enter 353 K in the T Radiation box
• Enter a value of 1 in the Emissivity box
• Click Apply

• Click Apply

• Click Apply
• Select region 4 - Outlet

• Click Apply
Version 4.06 15-17

Scalar Boundaries
• Select region 5 - Wall

• Change the Wall Heat option to Fixed and enter a value of 400 K in the
Temperature box
• Enter a value of 0.3663 m2K/W for Resistance
• Set the Emissivity to 0.72 and the Reflectivity to 0.28
• Click Apply
• Select region 6 - Wall

• Change the Wall Heat option to Fixed and enter a value of 400 K in the
Temperature box
• Enter a value of 0.02 m2K/W for Resistance
• Set the Emissivity to 0.72 and the Reflectivity to 0.28
• Click Apply
Scalar Specify that only air enters through the inlet boundaries:
Boundaries
• Select region 1 - Inlet from the Boundary Region list
• Select scalar 5 - O2 from the Scalars list
• Enter 0.233 in the boundary Value box
• Click Apply
• Select scalar 8 - N2 from the Scalar list and enter 0.767 in the boundary Value
box
• Click Apply
• Specify exactly the same scalar boundary conditions for region 2 - Inlet and
region 3 - Inlet
Control Default values for analysis controls such as under-relaxation factors and
Parameters differencing schemes are set when the models are selected. Although these defaults
are suitable for this tutorial, the under-relaxation factors for other cases may need to
be changed or a second-order differencing scheme may be required.
To run a case involving coal combustion, it is also necessary to set some
pro-STAR Constants that help control the analysis:
• Open the panel Analysis Controls > Switches and Real Constants
• Select the Real Constants tab
• Check that a large value, e.g. 10000 appears in the C24 box. This high value
prevents particle averaging taking place, as discussed in the “Coal
Combustion Model Set-up” section
• Enter 2 in the C64 box. This constrains the scalar concentrations to values
between 0 and 1
• Check that a value of 0.8 is shown in the C82 box. This is the particle
emissivity value
• Enter 3000 in the C88 box. This is the maximum allowable particle
temperature
• Enter 283 in the C89 box. This is the minimum allowable gas temperature
• Enter 3000 in the C90 box. This is the maximum allowable gas temperature
• Click Apply at the bottom of the panel
15-18 Version 4.06

Tutorial 15.2 CONSTANT RATE DEVOLATILISATION CFD Analysis
Run Time Controls
Run Time Check the status of the run time control parameters and specify that the analysis
Controls should restart from the solution obtained in Tutorial 15.1:
• Change the Maximum Number of Iterations to 500 and check that the
Maximum Residual Tolerance is set to 0.001
• Click Apply
• Select Initial Field for the Restart File Option
• Enter coal_iso.ccmp as the Restart File
• Click Apply
Operations stage, write the geometry and problem files and exit, saving all model data in file
coal_const.mdl, as shown below. Alternatively, you may run STAR
• In the main window, choose File > Save Geometry...
• File > Save Problem...
• In the Save Problem File dialog, click Save. Ignore the warning shown in the
I/O window. No ignition model is required
• File > Quit > Save & Quit
CFD Analysis
To perform the analysis interactively proceed as follows:
• Select the Analysis Preparation folder and open the Run Analysis
Interactively panel
• Select option Double in the Precision section
• Click Start
As well as the usual residual and monitoring data, the screen output will show
information about the coal combustion reaction at every iteration.
Note that the analysis will take some time to run (over 1 hour on a 2.8 GHz Linux
machine with 2 GB of RAM) and that the run time cannot be decreased by running
in parallel since cases involving the discrete transfer radiation method with
participating media cannot be run in this mode.
The run should converge within the specified maximum number of iterations.
Post-Processing
Preliminaries Enter pro-STAR and start the post-processing task by re-plotting the mesh:.
• Click Cplot
Version 4.06 15-19
Tutorial 15.2 CONSTANT RATE DEVOLATILISATION Post-Processing
Preliminaries
First, check the solution obtained by inspecting the velocity plot:

• In the Scalar Data list, ensure that the setting is None
• Click Get Data
• On the 3-D Surface tab check that Vector is selected from the Option menu
and choose Edge from the Edge/Mesh menu
• Type:
VIEW -1.0 0.5 -1.0
in the pro-STAR I/O window

• Click the Zoom Off button, , to display Figure T15.2-3
Figure T15.2-3 Velocity vectors inside the furnace
Next, plot the absolute temperatures on a section through the centre of the furnace
and normal to the Y axis:
• Go to the Data tab of the Load Data panel and check that Data Type Cell is
selected
• Choose On and All for the Smooth option
• In the Scalar Data list, select item Temperature
15-20 Version 4.06

Preliminaries
• Click Get Data

• Go to the Create Plots panel and choose Contour (filled) from the Option
menu in the 3-D Surface tab
• Select View > Axis > -Z in the main pro-STAR window
• Select Sect. Slice, then use the cursor to draw a section trace through the
centre of the furnace and parallel to the X axis
• Select plot type Section (Surface)
Figure T15.2-4 Temperature contours on a section bisecting the grid
Next, plot the CO2 mass fraction contours on the same section through the centre
of the furnace:
• Go to the Data tab of the Load Data panel and select item CO2 from the
Scalar Data list
• Click Get Data
Version 4.06 15-21

Preliminaries
Figure T15.2-5 CO2 contours on a section bisecting the grid
Plot the steady-state coal particle distribution, specifying that the displayed particle
colour and radius is to depend on temperature and calculated diameter, respectively.
Also choose not to display particle velocity vectors:
• Type
VIEW -1.0 0.5 -1.0

• In the pro-STAR Model Guide, select the Particle Tracks sub-folder of the
Post-Processing folder
• Select option Track File from the Load From menu
• Check that file coal_const.trk is shown in the File Name box
• Accept the default option (Particles) for the Plot Option menu and then click
Load Data
• Select Diameter in the Droplet Size menu and enter 0.2 in the Maximum
Droplet Diameter box
• Click Apply
• In the main pro-STAR window, select D > All on the Display Sets toolbar
• Click Droplet Plot at the bottom of the Plot Droplets panel to display Figure
T15.2-6
15-22 Version 4.06
Preliminaries
Figure T15.2-6 Coal particles coloured by temperature
Now make the droplet colour dependent on droplet mass and replot:
• In the Droplet Plot Options section, select Mass from the Fill Color menu
• Click Apply
Version 4.06 15-23

Final Operations
Figure T15.2-7 Coal particles coloured by mass
Figure T15.2-6 and Figure T15.2-7 show that the coal particles have essentially
burnt out well before reaching the furnace outlet. This burn-out accounts for all the
char and volatiles in the fuel. By default, STAR stops coal particle tracking once
more than 99.9% of char has been burnt out. By setting Constant 116 to 1 you can
continue tracking the remaining (ash) particles through the rest of the solution
domain but at the expense of additional computation time.
Remember that all results presented in this tutorial were generated with the
devolatilisation temperature set at the unrealistically low value of 353 K. In Tutorial
15.3, the devolatilisation temperature is raised to 550 K and the
Two-Competing-Steps devolatilisation model is used instead of the Constant Rate
model. NOx modelling is also turned on and the analysis is restarted from the
solution obtained in this tutorial.
Final • Exit from pro-STAR by choosing File > Quit > Quit, Nosave from the main
Operations window menu
15-24 Version 4.06

Tutorial 15.3 TWO-COMPETING-STEPS DEVOLATILISATION Pre-Processing
Preliminaries
Tutorial 15.3 TWO-COMPETING-STEPS DEVOLATILISATION

This tutorial gives a detailed account on how to set up and run a coal combustion
model using the Two-Competing-Steps devolatilisation model. It should also be
instructive to users wishing to employ the Single-Step devolatilisation model as the
required set-up is very similar.
The Two-Competing-Steps model is based on a pair of competing first-order
reactions occurring uniformly throughout the particle. The rates of these reactions
are calculated as described in Chapter 10, “Two-competing-steps model” of the
Methodology volume. The modelling strategy in this tutorial is to use the following
sub-models:
• Two-competing-steps devolatilisation
• First-order char oxidisation
• Eddy break-up two-step gas combustion
NOx modelling is also activated.

The analysis restarts from the Constant Rate devolatilisation case set up in
Tutorial 15.2, the problem geometry for which is shown in Tutorial 15. As a result,
this tutorial only requires a brief specification of the options for the
Two-Competing-Steps devolatilisation and NOx generation models.
Pre-Processing
Preliminaries Before running pro-STAR, create a directory for the tutorial named tut15-3 and
copy the model and solution file obtained in Tutorial 15.2 (coal_const.mdl
and coal_const.ccmp) into it. Rename the model file coal_2step.mdl.
Start up pro-STAR and begin the modelling task by specifying the problem title:
• Check that coal_2step is shown in the Case Name box
• Click Continue
COAL COMBUSTION WITH THE TWO-COMPETING-STEPS

DEVOLATILISATION MODEL
Coal The next stage is to change the devolatilisation model to the Two-Competing-Steps
Combustion model:
Model Setup
• Open the Thermophysical Models and Properties > Reacting Flow > Coal
Combustion > Sub Models panel
• In the Volatiles tab, select the 2 Competing Scheme
In the 1-Step section:

• Enter a value of 2e+05 in the Pre-exponential Factor box
• Enter a value of 1.047e+08 in the Activation Energy box
Version 4.06 15-25

Tutorial 15.3 TWO-COMPETING-STEPS DEVOLATILISATION Pre-Processing
Analysis Controls
• Set the Mass Stoichiometric Coefficient to 0.3
In the 2-Step section:

• Enter a value of 1.3e+07 in the Pre-exponential Factor box
• Enter a value of 1.67e+08 in the Activation Energy box
• Set the Mass Stoichiometric Coefficient to 0.7
To complete the model specification:

• Enter a value of 550 K in the Devolatilisation Temperature box
• Click Apply
Now activate NOx modelling:

• Open the Thermophysical Models and Properties > Reacting Flow >
Chemical Reactions > Emission panel
• Turn On the NOx Model. Note that this has the same effect as turning on NOx
modelling in the Coal Combustion > NOx/Radiation panel
• Turn On the Prompt NOx and Fuel NOx options
• Ensure that the Thermal NOx Model is On and change the Tuchin setting to
10. This is the number of integration steps used to generate the beta function
PDF and so increasing it will lead to a more accurate solution
• Click Apply
Analysis To aid convergence, the under-relaxation factor for the energy equation will be
Controls reduced:
• Open the Analysis Controls > Primary Variables panel
• Select the Solver Parameters tab
• Change the Relaxation Factor for Temperature to 0.5
• Click Apply
The under-relaxation factors for all active scalars should have changed
automatically when the temperature factor was changed, ensuring that the scalar and
energy equation solutions remain in synchronisation. To check that this has
happened:
• Select scalars 1 - 8 from the list and check that their Under-Relaxation Factor
settings are all 0.5
• Click Apply
Run-time Check the status of the run-time control parameters and specify that the analysis
Controls should restart from the solution obtained in Tutorial 15.2:
• Select folder Analysis Preparation and open the Restart panel
• Change the Restart File Option to Standard Restart. This can be used
because this analysis solves the same variables as the one for Tutorial 15.2.
• Enter coal_const.ccmp as the Restart File
• Click Apply
15-26 Version 4.06

Tutorial 15.3 TWO-COMPETING-STEPS DEVOLATILISATION CFD Analysis
Final Operations
Operations stage, write the geometry and problem files and exit, saving all model data in file
coal_2step.mdl, as shown below. Alternatively, you may run STAR
• In the main window, choose File > Save Geometry...
• File > Save Problem...
• In the Save Problem File dialog, click Save. Ignore the warning shown in the
I/O window. No ignition model is required.
• File > Quit > Save & Quit
CFD Analysis
To perform the analysis interactively proceed as follows:
• Select the Analysis Preparation folder and open the Run Analysis
Interactively panel
• Select option Double in the Precision section
• Click Start
As well as the usual residual and monitoring data, the screen output will show
information about the coal combustion reaction at every iteration.
Note that the analysis will take some time to run (over 1 hour on a 2.8 GHz Linux
machine with 2 GB of RAM) and that the run time cannot be decreased by running
in parallel since cases involving the discrete transfer radiation method with
participating media cannot be run in this mode.
The run will not converge within the specified maximum number of iterations.
However, the only residual that fails to fall below the convergence criterion is that
for HCN (scalar number 10). The very low values of the HCN scalar (less than 0.01
throughout the domain) mean that lack of convergence is not a concern for this
tutorial.
Post-Processing
Preliminaries Enter pro-STAR and start the post-processing task by re-plotting the mesh:
• Click Cplot
• On the File(s) tab click Open Post file
First, plot the absolute temperatures on a section through the centre of the furnace
and normal to the Y axis:
• Go to the Data tab of the Load Data panel and check that Data Type Cell is
selected
• Choose On and All for the Smooth option
Version 4.06 15-27

Tutorial 15.3 TWO-COMPETING-STEPS DEVOLATILISATION Post-Processing
Preliminaries
• In the Scalar Data list, select item Temperature

• Click Get Data
• Go to the Create Plots panel and choose Contour (filled) from the Option
menu in the 3-D Surface tab
• Select View > Axis > -Z in the main pro-STAR window
• Click the Zoom Off button to display the whole mesh,
• Select Sect. Slice, then use the cursor to draw a section trace through the
centre of the furnace and parallel to the X axis
• Select plot type Section (Surface)
Figure T15.3-1 Temperature contours on a section bisecting the grid
Next, plot the O2 mass fraction contours on the same section through the centre of
the furnace:
• Go to the Data tab of the Load Data panel and select item O2 from the Scalar
Data list
• Click Get Data
15-28 Version 4.06

Preliminaries
Figure T15.3-2 O2 contours on a section bisecting the grid
Next, plot the NO mass fraction contours on the same section through the centre of
the furnace:
• Go back to the Data tab and select item NO from the Scalar Data list
• Click Get Data
Version 4.06 15-29

Preliminaries
Figure T15.3-3 NO contours on a section bisecting the grid
Plot the steady-state coal particle distribution, specifying that the displayed particle
colour and radius is to depend on temperature and calculated diameter, respectively.
Also choose not to display particle velocity vectors:
• Type
MEMO,MAXDRP,2400
MEMO,WRITE
VIEW -1.0 0.5 -1.0

• In the pro-STAR Model Guide, select folder Post-Processing followed by
sub-folder Particle Tracks
• Select option Track File from the Load From menu
• Check that file coal_2step.trk is shown in the File Name box
• Accept the default option (Particles) for the Plot Option menu and then click
Load Data
• Select Diameter in the Droplet Size menu and enter 0.2 in the
Maximum Droplet Diameter box
• Click Apply
• In the main pro-STAR window, select D > All from the Display Sets toolbar
15-30 Version 4.06
Preliminaries
• Click Droplet Plot at the bottom of the Plot Droplets panel to display Figure
T15.3-4
Figure T15.3-4 Coal particles coloured by temperature
Note that there are significant differences between the results shown above and
those in Tutorial 15.2. These changes are partly due to the change in devolatilisation
model and the introduction of NOx modelling. However, the greatest change is due
to increasing the devolatilisation temperature to a more realistic value.
The last plot created in this tutorial combines a contour plot of CO2 concentration
with a plot showing the coal particles using the OVERLAY utility.
• Return to the Data tab of the Load Data panel and select item CO2 from the
Scalar Data list
• Click Get Data
• Under the Section/Clipped tab, select the Contour (filled) and Edge options
• Change the Normal vector to (1, 0, 0)
• Click Apply
• Click Cplot to display the CO2 contours
• Type
VIEW -1.0 0.3 -0.7

• Turn on edge plotting by selecting the Display Edges button,
• Use the mouse to zoom out slightly so that the edges of the problem geometry
fit in the display window
Version 4.06 15-31

Final Operations
• Return to the Plot Droplets panel

• Turn Off the Edge Plot Options
• In the Droplet Plot Options section, change the Maximum Droplet Diameter
to 0.05
• Change the Fill Color option to Color and choose Color 1
• Click Apply
• In the main pro-STAR window, select Plot > Display > Overlay
• Click Droplet Plot in the Plot Droplets panel to display Figure T15.3-5
Figure T15.3-5 Coal particles displayed over CO2 contours
Final • Finally, exit from pro-STAR by choosing File > Quit > Quit, Nosave from
Operations the main window.
15-32 Version 4.06

Tutorial 16 LARGE EDDY SIMULATION OF FULLY-DEVELOPED

CHANNEL FLOW

This tutorial presents an example of applying the Large Eddy Simulation turbulence
model to a fully-developed, isothermal, incompressible channel flow. A 2-D cross
section through the problem geometry is shown in Figure T16.0-1, illustrating the
primary direction of flow. The dimensions for the channel are taken from the work
of Moser et al. [1] and correspond to a length, width and height of 2π m, π m and 2
m, respectively.
Channel Walls 2
y
2π
x
Figure T16.0-1 2-D cross section through the channel
The problem geometry represents a section of the channel and therefore cyclic
boundary conditions are applied in both the streamwise (x-) and spanwise (z-)
directions. Calculations are carried out at standard pressure and temperature (1 bar,
293K) for a Reynolds number (Reτ) of 395. The latter is based on the friction
velocity, uτ , and half-channel height and is given by
ρu
Re τ = ---------τ
µ
where
τw
uτ = -----
ρ
and τ w is the wall shear stress. The fluid is assumed to have constant physical
properties, as shown below:
Density 1.0 kgm-3

Molecular viscosity 1.0/Reτ Pa-s
These numbers have been chosen so as to give a value of uτ = 1.0 ms-1.

The flow in the channel is driven by an imposed pressure gradient whose value
Version 4.06 16-1

Modelling Strategy
is determined by balancing the pressure force in the streamwise direction with the
shear force at the top and bottom walls of the channel, yielding
∆ pH = 2τ w L
The wall shear stress is obtained from the friction velocity definition and has
a value of 1.0 Nm-1. This is then combined with the channel height and length to
give a pressure drop along the channel of 2π Pa.
Modelling Strategy
The major elements of the modelling strategy are:
• Computational grid — non-uniform hexahedral mesh comprising 90,000 cells
(see Figure T16.0-2). Cells in the y-direction are refined so as to yield a
higher resolution near the channel walls. This is achieved using an expansion
ratio of 1.1096
• Wall and cyclic boundary conditions
• Isothermal, incompressible, steady and transient flow options
The tutorial is divided into two parts. The first, a steady-state Reynolds Averaged
Navier-Stokes (RANS) simulation, is used to verify the mesh suitability for
capturing the large-eddy turbulence structures as measured by the integral length
scale, l = f(k/ε). The second part illustrates the recommended numerical settings for
LES, including pre- and post-processing, and includes comparison of results with
those obtained from a direct numerical simulation (DNS) [2].
Figure T16.0-2 The computational mesh.
16-2 Version 4.06

Tutorial 16.1 STEADY-STATE ANALYSIS Pre-processing
Preliminaries
Tutorial 16.1 STEADY-STATE ANALYSIS

To obtain accurate results using LES it is essential that:
• The computational mesh is sufficiently refined in key areas to resolve the
mean flow and large-eddy turbulence structures present
• The time step for the analysis is small enough to capture the cascade of
energy over a wide spectrum, down towards the dissipative scales
These assessments can be made by examining the integral length and time scales for
the problem. This tutorial shows how to obtain these quantities from a steady-state
analysis using a Low Reynolds number k-ε turbulence model. The mesh provided
in this case is much coarser in the streamwise direction than the full 90,000 cell
mesh used in Tutorial 16.2, having only 9,000 cells. This is a reasonable
simplification as the steady-state result should have no streamwise velocity
gradient. The LES case will, of course, exhibit such a gradient and hence mesh
refinement in the streamwise direction is also necessary.
Pre-processing
Preliminaries For convenience, the problem set-up for this tutorial is performed by executing a
command macro, given in full in a separate section (“Macro”). The macro is
supplied in a file called RANS.MAC which contains instructions for mesh set-up,
boundary conditions, fluid properties and solution control settings.
Create a directory for this tutorial named tut16-1 and ensure that the above
macro file has been copied into it. Start pro-STAR, enter the tutorial name and make
the appropriate choices for an initial run:
• Type channel_ss in the Case Name text box
• Check that the Resume from Existing .mdl File? option is deselected
• Check that the Append to Previous .echo File? option is deselected
• Click Continue
Problem Execute the command macro and save the model file:
set-up
• Open the macro panel by selecting Panels > Define Macro... in the main
pro-STAR window
• Highlight RANS in the Macro List in the Define Macro panel and click
Execute
• Click Close in the Define Macro panel
• Save the model and exit from pro-STAR by selecting File > Quit > Save &
Quit from the pro-STAR menu
CFD Analysis
If your machine has more than one processor, performing this analysis in parallel
can be very beneficial. Running on two CPUs instead of one, for example, should
roughly halve the run time.
Version 4.06 16-3

Tutorial 16.1 STEADY-STATE ANALYSIS Post-Processing
Problem set-up
star -dp 2
For a description of how to run problems in parallel across a network, see “Running
a STAR-CD Analysis” on page 2-2 of the CCM User Guide.
If your machine has only one processor, you will need to run sequentially. To
perform this type of run in double-precision mode, type:
star -dp
The convergence criteria for this case are very strict and so the run will not converge
within the specified 3,000 iterations. The reason for running the analysis for this
number of iterations will be explained in the “Post-Processing” section.
Post-Processing
The nature of this problem makes the normalised residual sums a poor method for
judging convergence. Instead, the justification for stopping the run after 3,000
iterations can be provided by examining the monitor history data:
• Start up pro-STAR and resume from the channel_ss.mdl model file
• Select the Analysis Preparation folder in the pro-STAR Model Guide
• Select Monitor History for the Plot option
• Check the U-Velocity box and click Apply to display Figure T16.1-1
Figure T16.1-1 Monitor history plot of the U-component of velocity
16-4 Version 4.06

Problem set-up
Figure T16.1-1 shows that the U-velocity at the monitoring point has converged to
a steady value.
The results will now be analysed to yield information about the integral length
(l) and time (t) scales, defined as:
0.75 1.5
Cµ k k
l = -----------------------, t = --
ε ε
• Read in the analysis results file by typing the following command in the
pro-STAR I/O window:
LOAD channel_ss.ccmp
• The next step is to load the relevant data into the post registers and perform
the appropriate calculations. For the integral length scale l , this is achieved by
typing the following commands:
oper getc te 5
oper getc ed 6
oper v**s 1.5 5 5
oper smul 0.1643 5 5
oper divi 5 6 4
Since we are trying to establish whether or not the mesh resolution in the
wall-normal direction (y-axis) is adequate for LES, it is useful to display the ratio
l/∆y (∆y being the cell height) for which a value greater than 1 should be observed.
Since all cells in the grid have the same ∆x and ∆z, we can calculate ∆y from the
cell volume by
V
∆y = ------------------
∆x ⋅ ∆z
which, for this mesh, means
∆y = 7.6V
• Therefore, the ratio l/∆y is found by entering the following commands:
oper getc volu 5

oper smul 7.6 5 5
oper divi 4 5 4
Now display the data as a contour plot:

Create Plots panel
• Under the 3-D Surface tab, select Contour (filled) from the Option drop-
down menu and Edge from the Edge/Mesh drop-down menu
• Select View > Axis > +Z in the main pro-STAR window to display Figure
T16.1-2
Version 4.06 16-5

Problem set-up
The resulting plot shows that, except in the cells immediately adjacent to the wall,
the ratio l/∆y is greater than 1.0. This confirms that the resolution of the mesh is
sufficient for use in LES, although there may be some inaccuracy close to the wall.
Figure T16.1-2 Contour plot showing the ratio l/∆y
It is also useful to check whether the cells adjacent to the wall are fine enough to
satisfy the criterion that y+ should be ~1.
• To find out the ∆y for the near-wall cells, enter the following command:
summ cset
The information given in the output window includes the minimum value in post
register 5, which contains the ∆y values. The minimum value is 5.0639x10-3 m,
which corresponds to a y+ of ~2 according to the following equation:
ρu τ ∆ y
y + = ---------------
-
µ
• The integral time scale is calculated and displayed by entering the following
commands:
oper getc te 5
oper getc ed 6
oper divi 5 6 4
repl
16-6 Version 4.06

Problem set-up
The resulting plot is shown in Figure T16.1-3.
Figure T16.1-3 Contour plot of the integral time scale t
Figure T16.1-3 shows that the integral time scale, t, decreases from 1.21 s in the
centre of the channel to 1.28x10-3 s near the wall. It is also possible to determine
time scales associated with the turbulent eddies. Based on the cell sizes in the y- and
z-directions, and fluctuating velocities determined from the turbulent kinetic energy
predicted by the RANS analysis, time scales of 6.36x10-3 s (y-direction) and 0.0438
s (z-direction) are obtained.
The chosen time step for an LES run should thus be sufficiently small to capture
the turbulence structures in the vicinity of the wall i.e., < 1.28x10-3 s, whilst
satisfying the numerical scheme’s stability criterion. To obtain a time step that
satisfies the latter, the Courant number (Co) definition is rearranged to yield:
Co ∆x
∆t = -------------
U
The quantities U and ∆x denote characteristic velocity and length scale,

respectively. For LES it is recommended that the value of Co should not exceed 0.3.
Using the channel dimensions and streamwise velocity shown in Table 1, a time
step value of 3.2x10-3 s is obtained.
Version 4.06 16-7

Tutorial 16.1 STEADY-STATE ANALYSIS Macro
Problem set-up
Table 1: Parameters used to obtain time step for numerical stability

Parameter Value
Channel length (m) 2π
Number of cells in streamwise direction 30a
∆x (m) 0.20944
-1
U (ms ) 19.61
a.This number relates to the refined mesh used for the LES case
A time step of 1x10-3 s is used in the LES tutorial (Tutorial 16.2), satisfying both
criteria mentioned above. Having completed the calculations for mesh suitability
and choice of time step, exit pro-STAR as follows:
Macro
!===============================================
! Macro 16.1-1: Setting up the RANS analysis
!===============================================
! User-defined parameters:
! H - half-height of channel
! RETAU - Friction Reynolds number (Utau*H/nu)
! YPLS - Target y+ in near-wall cell
! COUR - Target Courant number
! NCX - Number of cells in streamwise direction
! NCY - Number of cells in normal direction
! NCZ - Number of cells in spanwise direction
!===============================================
*set H 1.0
*set RETAU 395.0
*set YPLS 1.0
*set COUR 1.0
*set NCX 3.0
*set NCY 60.0
*set NCZ 50.0
!===============================================
! Generate Mesh
*set PI 3.141592654
*set LX 2.0 * H * PI
*set LY 2.0 * H
*set LZ H * PI
! Generate a uniform mesh

vc3d 0.0 LX NCX -0.5 * LY 0.5 * LY NCY -0.5 * LZ 0.5 * LZ NCZ
! Define the number of vertices in each of the coordinate

! directions
*set NVX NCX + 1
*set NVY NCY + 1
*set NVZ NCZ + 1
! Iterate for the expansion factor. Based on a geometric

! progression with the initial cell height estimated from a balance
16-8 Version 4.06

Problem set-up
! between the definition of y+ and the Reynolds number based on the

! wall shear velocity. Perform an iterative calculation to
! determine the expansion factor.
*set Q RETAU / 2.0 / YPLS
*set G 2.0 / NCY
*set R 1.01
*def noex
*set F R - 1.0 * Q + 1
*set R F ** G
*end
*loo 1 100
!============================================================
! Locate boundaries.
cset news flui
plty ehid
cplo
view -1 0 0
bzon 1 all
rdef 1 cycl$ $ $ $ $
view 1 0 0
bzon 2 all
view 0 0 -1
bzon 3 all
view 0 0 1
bzon 4 all
cyma 1 2 LX 0.0 0.0
cyma 3 4 0.0 0.0 LZ
! Make mesh non-uniform to achieve desired y+.

vfil 1 NVY NVY - 2 2 1 NVX * NVZ NVY -1.0 * R
!============================================================
! Define common control parameters
time steady nodefa
iter 3000,1e-10
moni 8911
algo simple nodefa,,,
solu scalar CG
!============================================================
! Define properties and models
pmat 1 flui
dens cons 1.0
lvis cons 1.0 / RETAU
turb ke 1 stan
lowre on
coke,0.09,1.44,1.92,1.44,-0.33,0.419,1,1.219,0.9
nwall hybrid
twol off
init stan 21 0.0 0.0 1 0.0 0.0,keps,0.4,0.01
!============================================================
Version 4.06 16-9

Problem set-up
! Define boundaries at either end in the streamwise direction as

! cyclic with a prescribed pressure drop across them.
! Define boundaries at either end in the spanwise direction as
! regular cyclic.
rdef 0 wall stan
nosl stan 9.0
0.0 0.0 0.0 1 0.0
rdef 1 cycl stan
1 part regu inte
pdro LX / H / H / H
rdef 2 cycl stan
1 part regu inte
pdro -1.0 * LX / H / H / H
rdef 3 cycl stan
1 all regu inte
rdef 4 cycl stan
1 all regu inte
!============================================================
! Additional control parameters
solve,y,y,y,y,y,y,n,y,n,n,n,n,
relax,0.7,0.3,0.7, ,1, , , , , , , , ,
sweep,100,100,100,1000,100,100, , , , , , , , , , , ,
resid,0.1,0.1,0.1,0.05,0.1,0.1, , , , , , , , , , , ,
dsch,ud,uvw,,stan
prch ,,, conv
! Write geometry file, problem file and save

geom,,
prob,,
save,,
16-10 Version 4.06

Tutorial 16.2 LARGE EDDY SIMULATION Pre-Processing
Preliminaries
Tutorial 16.2 LARGE EDDY SIMULATION

This tutorial illustrates the steps required to set up and perform a Large Eddy
Simulation for channel flow. The focus will be on the specifics related to LES and
thus the model set-up of Tutorial 16.1 will be used as the starting point.
Pre-Processing
Preliminaries The following files are required for this tutorial:
• REFINE.MAC
• DATA_AVERAGING.MAC
• MEAN_U.MAC
• REY_STRESS.MAC
• chan395.means
• chan395.reystress
• channel_demo.ccmp
Create a directory called tut16-2 and ensure that the above files are copied into
it. In addition, copy the model file channel_ss.mdl from Tutorial 16.1 to the
new directory and rename it channel_les.mdl. Once all the files are in place,
you may start a pro-STAR session:
• Check that channel_les appears in the Case Name text box
• Check that the Resume from Existing .mdl File? option is selected
• Click Continue
Mesh To refine the mesh in the streamwise direction to make it suitable for the LES
refinement calculation:
• Select Panels > Define Macro... from the main menu in pro-STAR
• Highlight REFINE in the Define Macro panel
• Click Execute
• Select View > Isometric > 1,1,1 to display the mesh shown in Figure T16.0-2
LES settings The calculation is no longer steady-state and so it is necessary to change the analysis
type:
• Open the Analysis Features panel and select Transient from the Time Domain
menu
• Click Apply
Next, change the turbulence model and set the appropriate parameters, including the
point at which statistical averaging will begin. The current simulation will be run
for a total of 50 s, equivalent to approximately 160 passes through the domain. The
flow is allowed to develop in the initial 25 s (25,000 time steps), after which the
statistical averaging of flow variables will begin.
• Select folder Thermophysical Models and Properties
Version 4.06 16-11

Flow initialisation

• Open panel Turbulence Models
• Select the LES/Smagorinsky Model from the menu on the Turbulence tab
• Check that option Provide Statistically Averaged Values is enabled and then
type 25000 in the Time Step box
• Set the model constants to match those shown below
• Click Apply
Flow In order to reduce the run time, the simulation can start from a flow field that will
initialisation encourage the development of turbulence. The appropriate initial conditions may be
specified through user subroutine INITFI as follows:
• Enter the following commands in the pro-STAR I/O window:
SYSTEM
UFILES
• Select User from the Options menu in the Fluid Initialization panel
• Click User Define
• Click Apply
• Use pro-STAR’s built-in text editor or an external editor to change the
contents of the default initfi.f file (written by pro-STAR into the ufile
sub-directory) to match the subroutine listing given in section “User
Subroutine”
The effect of the user-defined initial flow field is to introduce vorticity into the
domain. This is achieved by defining a region in the centre of the channel in which
all three velocity components are set explicitly. In particular, the wall-normal
component is set to a value greater than the streamwise component to encourage the
development of turbulence.
Solution To obtain the best results from an LES model, the use of second-order schemes is
controls recommended for both the temporal and spatial discretization. When using the
SIMPLE solution algorithm, the residual tolerance for the outer iterations and the
maximum number of outer iterations for each time step need to be set so that
convergence is achieved at every time step. This can be judged by examining the
residual and monitor information output during the run.
• Change the Solution Algorithm to SIMPLE
16-12 Version 4.06

Final operations
• Change the Maximum Number of Outer Iterations to 3. This may not be large
enough for the algorithm to achieve convergence at every time step but should
be sufficient for obtaining a good-quality overall solution.
• Select the Three Time Level Implicit scheme from the Temporal
Discretization menu
• Click Apply
Next, change the solver parameters and change the spatial discretization scheme for
the momentum equations to CD, ensuring that the blending factor is set to 1.0:
• Select the Solver Parameters tab
• Change the Relaxation Factor for the U-Momentum, V-Momentum,
W-Momentum equations to 0.9 and the Number of Sweeps to 200
• Change the Residual Tolerance to 0.001 for the three momentum equations
• For Pressure, change the Relaxation Factor to 0.5 and the Residual Tolerance
to 0.0001
• Click Apply
• Select the Differencing Schemes tab
• Select the CD scheme from the drop-down menu for the Differencing Scheme
of the momentum equations and check that the blending factor is set to 1
• Click Apply
Velocity data for a cell near the wall will be monitored throughout the run. The data
will then be used to check whether the statistical averaging specified in the “LES
settings” section starts after allowing a reasonable time for the flow to develop.
• Select the desired cell by typing the following command in pro-STAR’s I/O
window:
CSET NEWSET CLIST 89105
• In the main pro-STAR window, click Store/Recall > Store

• In the Store Information dialog, enter monitor for the Set Name
• Click Write and then Close
• Go to the pro-STAR Model Guide and open the Monitor Cell Behavior panel
• Ensure the Set File name is channel_les.set
• Select monitor from the Monitoring Information scroll list
• Enable the Velocity Data option
• Click Apply
Final At this point, the basic problem definition is complete. The next step is to set the
operations transient controls for the run. Set the calculation run time to 50 seconds with a time
step of 0.001 seconds, as determined in Tutorial 16.1 on the basis of the integral
time scale and Courant number.
• Check that Run for is selected for the Run time control option and enter 50 in
the Time box
Version 4.06 16-13
Tutorial 16.2 LARGE EDDY SIMULATION User Subroutine
Final operations
• Click Apply
• In the Time Step Option section, check that the Time Step Method is set to
Constant and that 0.001 is entered in the Time step for period box
• Click Set
Write and save the geometry and problem files:

Finally, before exiting from pro-STAR, make sure that the model file
(channel_les.mdl) is saved for possible future modification.
• Select File > Quit > Save & Quit.
User Subroutine
User subroutine INITFI is used for setting the initial flow field, as shown below:
C****************************************************************
SUBROUTINE INITFI(U,V,W,PR,TE,ED,T,SCALAR,XVF2)
C Initialise fields
C****************************************************************
C----------------------------------------*
C STAR VERSION 4.04.000 *
C----------------------------------------*
EQUIVALENCE( UDAT03(020), F2 )
C-------------------------------------------------------------------------
real*8 Ubulk,Uprime,Vprime,Wprime
real*8 Myone,Mypfive,Mypone,Myppfive,myzero,mythree,myfour
Ubulk=20.0
Myone=-1.0
Mypone=1.0
Mypfive=-0.5
Myppfive=0.5
Myzero=0.0
16-14 Version 4.06

Tutorial 16.2 LARGE EDDY SIMULATION CFD Analysis
Convergence and averaging
Uprime=32.45
Vprime=-52.36
Wprime=5.532
mythree=3.0
myfour=4.0
c.... Initialise channel flow

u=Ubulk
v=0.0
w=0.0
if (x.ge.Mythree.and.x.le.Myfour.and.
* y.ge.Myzero.and.y.le.Myppfive.and.
* z.ge.Mypfive.and.z.le.Myppfive) then
u=Uprime
v=Vprime
w=Wprime
endif
RETURN
END
CFD Analysis
star -dp 2
To run the analysis sequentially in double precision, type:
star -dp
No matter how you choose to run the analysis, it will take at least a few days to
complete. Such long run times are typical for LES cases as they require refined
meshes and a large number of time steps (in this case 50,000). If you choose not to
run the analysis, the results are supplied in file channel_demo.ccmp which was
copied into your working directory at the start of this tutorial. Rename this file
channel_les.ccmp before post-processing.
Post-Processing
Convergence The transient nature of LES makes it necessary to average the data over some period
and of time. The choice of this period will affect the quality of the results and should
averaging therefore be sufficiently large to be statistically meaningful. Moreover, averaging
should begin only when the flow is fully developed.
The point at which averaging should begin can be judged by examining the
velocity components at a suitable monitoring location. In the present example, this
point is located near the wall where turbulence generation is greatest and was set up
as described in the “Solution controls” section. Figure T16.2-1 shows a plot of the
cross-stream velocity components at the prescribed monitoring point. It can be
clearly seen that after 25s, or 25,000 time steps, component values are oscillating
about a mean value (in this case zero) and thus it is appropriate to begin averaging
Version 4.06 16-15

Tutorial 16.2 LARGE EDDY SIMULATION Post-Processing
Preliminaries
data. In fact, with the benefit hindsight, it would have been reasonable for such
averaging to begin after only 10,000 time steps, which is roughly equivalent to 33
passes. This is much greater than the recommended number of passes before
averaging, given in the “LES models” section of the On-line Help. This is because
the use of periodic boundary conditions delays the establishment of a fully
developed flow.
Figure T16.2-1 Monitoring-point velocity components throughout the simulation
Preliminaries The first post-processing task is to load file channel_les.ccmp, containing the
analysis results:
• Start up pro-STAR and resume from the channel_les.mdl model file
• In the pro-STAR Model Guide, select the Post-Processing folder
Inst. results Before analysing the averaged data, an example is shown of the instantaneous
results representing a snapshot of the flow in time. Begin by displaying contours of
the streamwise velocity component:
• Open the Data tab
• Select On and All from the pull-down menus next to the Smooth option
• Select Velocity Component U from the Scalar Data list
• Click Get Data
• Select Contour(filled) from the Option menu and Edge from the Edge/Mesh
menu
16-16 Version 4.06

Inst. results
• Select C > All in the main window

• Click Plot to Screen in the Create Plots panel
• In the main window, select View > Isometric > 1,1,1 to display Figure
T16.2-2
Figure T16.2-2 Contour plot of the instantaneous streamwise velocity
The snapshot shows the flow field non-uniformity generated by the presence of
eddies, with a predicted peak velocity of 24 m/s. The eddy structure can be viewed
in more detail by creating a plot of the secondary flow field. To do this, create a
vector plot of the V and W velocity components:
• Select Off from the Smooth option menu
• Select Velocity Components VW from the Vector Data list
• Click Get Data
• Select Vector from the Option menu and Edge from the Edge/Mesh menu
• In the main window, select View > Axis > +X to display Figure T16.2-3
Version 4.06 16-17

Averaged results
Figure T16.2-3 Vector plot of the instantaneous secondary flow field
Averaged Having looked at the structure of the instantaneous flow field, attention is turned to
results the time averaged data. Figure T16.2-4 shows a contour plot of the mean streamwise
velocity component. The plot is similar to that obtained from a simulation using a
RANS turbulence model, indicating that the averaging window is sufficiently large
for the data to be statistically meaningful.
16-18 Version 4.06

Averaged results
Figure T16.2-4 Contour plot of the average streamwise velocity
Profiles of the mean and fluctuating components are now generated and compared
to the DNS data of Moser et al. [2]. The plots are produced using the ready-made
macros supplied with the tutorial files of your STAR-CD installation and listed in
the “Macros” section. It should be noted here that LES post-processing is case-
dependent and that the macros provided are specifically for channel flow.
Prior to generating any graphs, the time-averaged LES data must also be
spatially-averaged. To do this:
• Select Panels > Define Macro... from the main menu in pro-STAR
• Highlight DATA_AVERAGING in the Define Macro panel
• Click Execute
Next, create a plot of the normalised time-averaged mean velocity:

• Highlight MEAN_U and click Execute. Figure T16.2-5 shows the resulting
plot of U+ against ln(y+).
Due to the problem symmetry about y = H, only half of the profile is shown. It can
be observed that whilst the qualitative behaviour is reproduced by the LES model,
the velocity at the centre of the channel is over-predicted by about 10% when
compared to the DNS data.
Version 4.06 16-19

Averaged results
Figure T16.2-5 Graph of mean streamwise velocity component
• Reynolds stress profiles are produced by selecting REY_STRESS in the

macro panel and clicking Execute
To view these plots:

• Select Graph > Gdraw and then the appropriate frame number from the main
pro-STAR window. For instance, selecting Graph > Gdraw > Frame1 will
produce a plot of u’u’, non-dimensionalised with the friction velocity, against
ln(y+), as shown in Figure T16.2-6.
Figures T16.2-6, T16.2-7 and T16.2-8 show profiles of u’u’, v’v’ and w’w’,
respectively, non-dimensionalised by the friction velocity uτ = 1. These profiles
represent the turbulence intensity and show good qualitative agreement with the
DNS data. In addition, they highlight the anisotropic nature of the flow.
It can be observed that the LES model over-predicts the streamwise fluctuations
(Figure T16.2-6) whilst under-predicting the cross-stream fluctuations (Figures
T16.2-7 and T16.2-8). Under-prediction of v’v’ and w’w’ is common in LES
calculations where a large part of the turbulence spectrum lies in the subgrid scales.
Closer agreement with the DNS results can only be obtained through further mesh
refinement.
16-20 Version 4.06

Averaged results
Figure T16.2-6 Graph of streamwise fluctuating component u’u’
Figure T16.2-7 Graph of cross-stream fluctuating component v’v’
Version 4.06 16-21

Averaged results
Figure T16.2-8 Graph of cross-stream fluctuating component w’w’
The u’v’ Reynolds stress profile is shown in Figure T16.2-9. It can be observed that
the u’v’ component is well predicted by the LES model, both qualitatively and
quantitatively.
Figure T16.2-9 Graph of Reynolds stress u’v’

16-22 Version 4.06
Tutorial 16.2 LARGE EDDY SIMULATION Bibliography
Final operations
Components u’w’ and v’w’ are up to two or three orders of magnitude smaller and
are therefore less important. These are not shown here but may be viewed by
displaying the contents of graph frames 5 and 6.
Final As there were no changes to the model geometry or solution parameters, there is no
operations need to save file channel_les.mdl
Bibliography
[1] Kim, Moin and Moser, 1987. ‘Turbulence Statistics in Fully Developed Channel
Flow at Low Reynolds Number’. J Fluid Mechanics, 177, 133-166.
[2] Moser, Kim and Mansour, 1999. ‘DNS of Turbulent Channel Flow up to
Ret=590’. Physics of Fluids, 11, 943-945.
Macros
Mesh ! ==============================================
refinement in ! Macro 16.2-1 Refining mesh in X direction
! ==============================================
the X-
curs file
direction CREF,10,1,1,ALL
*set NCX NCX * 10
BSET ALL
BDEL BSET
cyde all
cset all
view,-1,1,1
cplot
surf,on $vset,news,edge $bfin,1,vx,
!SCRN, 0 1.8543 3.6749
!BFIN,1,6620,
bset,add,bran,1,mxb
!SCRN, 0 8.0000 5.2650
!BFIN,3,335356,
bset,add,bran,3001,mxb
view reve
replot
!SCRN, 0 2.4724 8.0035
!BFIN,2,3632,
!SCRN, 0 6.2870 6.9788
!BFIN,4,15772,
rdef,1,cyclic
1,partial,regular,integral
pdrop,6.28319,293
rdef,2,cyclic
1,partial,regular,integral
Version 4.06 16-23

Tutorial 16.2 LARGE EDDY SIMULATION Macros
Spatial averaging of LES data
pdrop,-6.28319,293
cymatch,1,2,6.28319,0,0,0.0001
rdef,3,cyclic
1,all,regular,integral
rdef,4,cyclic
1,all,regular,integral
cymatch,3,4,0,0,-3.14159,0.0001
bset none
moni,9001
pres,1.e+05,9001
Spatial ! ======================================
averaging of ! Macro 16.2-2 - Spatially averaging LES data
! ======================================
LES data
! The script produces 12 files:
! U.dat - Mean U against y/H
! V.dat - Mean V against y/H
! W.dat - Mean W against y/H
! VMAG.dat - Mean VMAG against y/H
! P.dat - Mean P against y/H
! VIST.dat - Mean VIST against y/H
! uu.dat - Mean u’u’ against y/H
! vv.dat - Mean v’v’ against y/H
! ww.dat - Mean w’w’ against y/H
! uv.dat - Mean u’v’ against y/H
! uw.dat - Mean u’w’ against y/H
! vw.dat - Mean v’w’ against y/H
! =======================================
! Clear old .dat files
syst
rm -f U.dat
syst
rm -f V.dat
syst
rm -f W.dat
syst
rm -f VMAG.dat
syst
rm -f P.dat
syst
rm -f VIST.dat
!=========================================================
load,channel_les.ccmp
oper,getc,SUMN,1
oper,getc,SVMN,2
oper,getc,SWMN,3
oper,vmag,4
oper,getc,PMN,5
oper,getc,VIMN,6
*set IC 0 10
*def noex
cset none
*set CC1 IC - 10
16-24 Version 4.06

:lab
! Setting the current cell set to a layer in the geometry
cset add cran CC1 + 9001 CC1 + 9010 1
*if CC1 ge 88800 + IC
*goto done
*endif
*set CC1 CC1 + 600
*goto lab
:done
! Total each variable in the cell set and store in registers 1-6
*get R1 rtot 1
*get R2 rtot 2
*get R3 rtot 3
*get R4 rtot 4
*get R5 rtot 5
*get R6 rtot 6
! Divide the total by the number of cells in the layer

*set R1 R1 / NCX / NCZ
! Replace register 1 with the new values for register 1 etc.

chan cset ,,, 0.0 R1 1 1
chan cset ,,, 0.0 R2 2 2
chan cset ,,, 0.0 R3 3 3
chan cset ,,, 0.0 R4 4 4
chan cset ,,, 0.0 R5 5 5
chan cset ,,, 0.0 R6 6 6
*end
*loo 1 NCY
! Make current cell set equal to 1 Y-column of cells

cset none
*set CC2 9001 10
*defi noex
cset add clis CC2
*end
*loo 0 NCY - 1
! loads current cell set numbers into graph register 1

gloa 1 cell cset
! Loads the y values of cells corresponding to graph register 1

! into graph register 2
gval 2 1 cell y 1
! Operate on register 2 to make the data y/H

rope add 2 2 ,, 1.0 / H
! Operate on y and add 1.0 to the value (shift to match DNS

! position)
Version 4.06 16-25

roper,add,2,2,0,1,1,,
! Load values from post register 1 (mean U) into graph register 3

gval 3 1 cell pst1
! Operate on u velocity to make it positive

!roper,add,3,3,3,1,0,absolute,
gval 4 1 cell pst2

gval 5 1 cell pst3
gval 6 1 cell pst4
gval 7 1 cell pst5
gval 8 1 cell pst6
sdat U.dat 2 2 1
sdat V.dat 2 2 2
sdat W.dat 2 2 3
sdat VMAG.dat 2 2 4
sdat P.dat 2 2 5
sdat VIST.dat 2 2 6
clos U.dat
clos V.dat
clos W.dat
clos VMAG.dat
clos P.dat
clos VIST.dat
!=======================================================
syst
rm -f uu.dat
syst
rm -f vv.dat
syst
rm -f ww.dat
syst
rm -f uv.dat
syst
rm -f uw.dat
syst
rm -f vw.dat
oper getc SUP 1

oper getc SVP 2
oper getc SWP 3
oper getc UPVP 4
oper getc UPWP 5
oper getc VPWP 6
*set IC 0 10
*def noex
cset none
*set CC1 IC - 10
:lab
cset add cran CC1 + 9001 CC1 + 9010 1
*if CC1 ge 88800 + IC
16-26 Version 4.06

*goto done
*endif
*set CC1 CC1 + 600
*goto lab
:done
*get R1 rtot 1
*get R2 rtot 2
*get R3 rtot 3
*get R4 rtot 4
*get R5 rtot 5
*get R6 rtot 6
chan cset ,,, 0.0 R1 * R1 1 1
chan cset ,,, 0.0 R2 * R2 2 2
chan cset ,,, 0.0 R3 * R3 3 3
chan cset ,,, 0.0 R4 4 4
chan cset ,,, 0.0 R5 5 5
chan cset ,,, 0.0 R6 6 6
*end
*loo 1 NCY
cset none
*set CC2 1 9010
*defi noex
cset add clis CC2
*end
*loo 0 NCY - 1
gval 3 1 cell pst1

gval 4 1 cell pst2
gval 5 1 cell pst3
gval 6 1 cell pst4
gval 7 1 cell pst5
gval 8 1 cell pst6
sdat uu.dat 2 2 1
sdat vv.dat 2 2 2
sdat ww.dat 2 2 3
sdat uv.dat 2 2 4
sdat uw.dat 2 2 5
sdat vw.dat 2 2 6
clos uu.dat
clos vv.dat
clos ww.dat
clos uv.dat
clos uw.dat
clos vw.dat
Version 4.06 16-27

Mean streamwise velocity profile
Mean ! ==============================================
streamwise ! Macro 16.2-3 Producing a mean streamwise velocity profile
! ==============================================
velocity
greset
profile y
! Load mean u velocity
gdata,U.dat,2,1,1,coded,1
roper multi,1,1,,395,,,
! Transform y axis to log scale
roper,add,1,1,0,1,0,loge,
!Load DNS data

gdata,chan395.means,8,3,1,coded,1
! Transform y axis to log scale
roper,add,4,4,0,1,0,loge,
!Plot the mean velocity in frame 1

frame,1,xreg,init, 1,4
frame,1,yreg,init, 2,5
frame,1,legend,10.2,5.0 12.5 6.5
Mean U
frame,1,xrange,0,6
grlabel,1,1,on,,,5.0,1.5
ln(y+)
grlabel,1,2,on,,,0.5,6.0
U+
symt,2,2,8,1$lint,2,2,2,1$rtab,2,y,y$bart,2,2,90,1
symt,5,4,8,1$lint,5,4,2,1$rtab,5,y,n
rlabel,2,on $LES
rlabel,5,on $DNS
! Reverse background colour
clrm,reve
gdraw,1
Reynolds ! ==============================================
stress ! Macro 16.2-4 Producing profiles of the Reynolds stresses
! ==============================================
profiles
! Reset graph parameters and set the number of registers at 40
greset
y
numr 40
! Load fluctuating components for Cs = 0.01

gdata,uu.dat,2,1,1,coded,1
gdata,vv.dat,2,3,1,coded,1
gdata,ww.dat,2,5,1,coded,1
gdata,uv.dat,2,7,1,coded,1
gdata,uw.dat,2,9,1,coded,1
gdata,vw.dat,2,11,1,coded,1
!Load DNS RMS data

gdata,chan395.reystress,8,15,1,coded,add
! GRAPH DATA
frame 1 xreg init 1,15
frame 1 yreg init 2,17
16-28 Version 4.06

Reynolds stress profiles
gdraw 1
frame,1,legend,10.2,5.0 12.5 6.5
u’u’
frame,1,xrange,0,400
grlabel,1,1,on,,,5.0,1.5
y+
grlabel,1,2,on,,,0.5,6.0
u’u’
grlabel,1,3,on,,,0.5,5.9
___
grlabel,1,4,on,,,0.5,5.5
ut^2
frame,1,xrange,0,1
symt,17,4,8,1$lint,17,4,2,1$rtab,5,y,n
rlabel,2,on $LES
rlabel,17,on $DNS

clrm,reve
! GRAPH DATA
gdraw 2
frame,2,legend,10.2,5.0 12.5 6.5
v’v’
grlabel,2,1,on,,,5.0,1.5
y+
grlabel,2,2,on,,,0.5,6.0
v’v’
grlabel,2,3,on,,,0.5,5.9
___
grlabel,2,4,on,,,0.5,5.5
ut^2
frame,2,xrange,0,1
symt,18,4,8,1$lint,18,4,2,1$rtab,18,y,n
rlabel,4,on $LES
rlabel,18,on $DNS
clrm,reve
! GRAPH DATA
gdraw 3
frame,3,legend,10.2,5.0 12.5 6.5
w’w’
grlabel,3,1,on,,,5.0,1.5
y+
grlabel,3,2,on,,,0.5,6.0
w’w’
grlabel,3,3,on,,,0.5,5.9
___
Version 4.06 16-29

grlabel,3,4,on,,,0.5,5.5
ut^2
frame,3,xrange,0,1
symt,19,4,8,1$lint,19,4,2,1$rtab,19,y,n
rlabel,6,on $LES
rlabel,19,on $DNS
clrm,reve
! GRAPH DATA
gdraw 4
frame,4,legend,10.2,5.0 12.5 6.5
u’v’
grlabel,4,1,on,,,5.0,1.5
y+
grlabel,4,2,on,,,0.5,6.0
u’v’
grlabel,4,3,on,,,0.5,5.9
___
grlabel,4,4,on,,,0.5,5.5
ut^2
frame,4,xrange,0,1
symt,20,4,8,1$lint,20,4,2,1$rtab,20,y,n
rlabel,8,on $LES
rlabel,20,on $DNS

clrm,reve
! GRAPH DATA
gdraw 5
frame,5,legend,10.2,5.0 12.5 6.5
u’w’
grlabel,5,1,on,,,5.0,1.5
y+
grlabel,5,2,on,,,0.5,6.0
u’w’
grlabel,5,3,on,,,0.5,5.9
___
grlabel,5,4,on,,,0.5,5.5
ut^2
frame,5,xrange,0,1
symt,21,4,8,1$lint,21,4,2,1$rtab,21,y,n
rlabel,10,on $LES
rlabel,21,on $DNS

clrm,reve
16-30 Version 4.06

! GRAPH DATA
gdraw 6
frame,6,legend,10.2,5.0 12.5 6.5
v’w’
grlabel,6,1,on,,,5.0,1.5
y+
grlabel,6,2,on,,,0.5,6.0
v’w’
grlabel,6,3,on,,,0.5,5.9
___
grlabel,6,4,on,,,0.5,5.5
ut^2
frame,6,xrange,0,1
symt,22,4,8,1$lint,22,4,2,1$rtab,22,y,n
rlabel,12,on $LES
rlabel,22,on $DNS

clrm,reve
Version 4.06 16-31

16-32 Version 4.06

Star Tut

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Star Tut

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

CCM TUTORIALS

STAR-CD VERSION 4.06

CONFIDENTIAL — FOR AUTHORISED USERS ONLY

Tutorial Structure ..........................................................................................................1

Tutorial 1 - FLOW IN A MIXING PIPE

Tutorial 2 - EVALUATION OF MESH EFFECTS

Tutorial 3 - POROUS MEDIA FLOW

Tutorial 4 - FREE-SURFACE AND CAVITATION

Tutorial 5 - TURBULENT FLUID STREAM MIXING

Tutorial 6 - SUPERSONIC AND TRANSONIC FLOWS

Tutorial 7 - MULTIPLE ROTATING REFERENCE FRAMES

Tutorial 8 - LAGRANGIAN TWO-PHASE FLOW

Version 4.06 iii

Tutorial 10 - BUOYANCY AND RADIATION EFFECTS

Tutorial 11 - MOVING GRIDS

Tutorial 13 - AEROACOUSTIC ANALYSIS

Tutorial 14 - LIQUID FILM SIMULATION

Tutorial 15 - COAL COMBUSTION

Tutorial 16 - LARGE EDDY SIMULATION OF FULLY-DEVELOPED CHANNEL FLOW

Version 4.06 vii

Show pro-STAR Model Guide

Tools > Cell... > Set Active Type

Working with commands

Using tutorial command files

5. The procedure for a post-processing session is identical to the above, except

Tutorial 1 FLOW IN A MIXING PIPE

Figure T1.0-1 Mixing pipe geometry

Physical Problem Description

Version 4.06 1-1

Figure T1.0-2 Mixing pipe mesh

1-2 Version 4.06

Tutorial 1.1 PRE-PROCESSING AND CFD SOLUTION

If you have chosen to restart from the model file mixing_pipe.mdl:

Version 4.06 1-3

FLOW IN A MIXING PIPE

• Click Apply and Close

1-4 Version 4.06

• Select View > Isometric > -1,-1,1

Version 4.06 1-5

• Click the Zoom Off button,

Figure T1.1-1 Clipped hidden view of mixing pipe mesh interior

1-6 Version 4.06

Version 4.06 1-7

Version 4.06 1-9

1-10 Version 4.06

Select a boundary here

Figure T1.1-3 Selecting a boundary on the first inlet

• Select View > Isometric > 1,-1,1 to change the view

Version 4.06 1-11

Select a boundary here

Figure T1.1-4 Selecting a boundary on the second inlet

• Select B > Unselect > Region Cursor Select

1-12 Version 4.06

Select a boundary here

Figure T1.1-5 Selecting a boundary on the outlet

To verify that the above operations have been performed correctly:

To delete these boundaries:

Display the remaining boundaries:

Boundary Specify boundary conditions at the inlets and outlet as follows:

1-14 Version 4.06

Version 4.06 1-15

• Enter boundary conditions as shown below:

1-16 Version 4.06